JP7529441B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko machines that allow players to play games.

Some gaming machines use a launching device to launch gaming balls, which are the gaming medium, into a gaming area, and when the gaming balls enter a winning area, such as a winning slot, provided in the gaming area, a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the player. In addition, some gaming machines are provided with a variable display device that can variably display (also called "variable") identification information, and are configured to change the gaming state (the state of the gaming machine; specifically, the state in which the gaming machine is controlled) and provide a predetermined gaming value to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information on the variable display device becomes a specific display result (so-called pachinko machines).

The gaming value refers to the state of the variable winning ball device installed in the gaming area of the gaming machine becoming advantageous to the player in terms of making it easier for the ball to win, generating rights that lead to advantageous conditions for the player, or making it easier for the conditions for the payout of winning balls to be met.

In a pachinko game machine, a "jackpot" occurs when a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of a special pattern (identification information) that is started on the variable display device based on the entry of a game ball into the start winning hole. The derived display means that a pattern (final stop pattern) is finally stopped and displayed. When a jackpot occurs, for example, the big prize winning hole opens a predetermined number of times, and the game moves to a big prize game state in which the ball is more likely to win. During each opening period, if a predetermined number (e.g., 10) of big prize winning holes are won, the big prize winning hole closes. The number of times the big prize winning hole opens is fixed to a predetermined number (e.g., 15 rounds). An opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the big prize winning hole closes when the opening time has elapsed even if the number of winning holes does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each big prize winning hole may be called a round. Also, the game during a round may be called a round game.

In addition, in a state where a pattern other than the pattern that will be the final stop pattern (for example, the center pattern among the left, center, and right patterns) on a variable display device continues for a predetermined time and stops, oscillates, expands and contracts, or changes shape while matching a specific display result, or where multiple patterns fluctuate synchronously with the same pattern, or the positions of the displayed patterns are swapped, and the possibility of a jackpot occurring continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states), a reach effect is called a reach effect. Also, a reach state and its appearance are referred to as a reach mode. Furthermore, a variable display that includes a reach effect is referred to as a reach variable display. If the display result of the pattern variably displayed on the variable display device is not a specific display result, it is a "miss" and the variable display state ends. The player plays while enjoying how to generate a jackpot.

Among such gaming machines, there is known a gaming machine that executes a group performance that displays an image of a group of characters progressing. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine that can execute a group performance in which images of a plurality of characters or objects appear .

JP 2019-050851 A

According to the gaming machine described above, the group presentation can be implemented to add excitement to the game, but there is still room for improvement in this type of group presentation .

The present invention has been devised in view of the above circumstances, and its object is to provide a gaming machine that can more appropriately execute group performances .

The gaming machine according to the present invention comprises:
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a specific display result that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display,
A game control means;
A performance execution means,
the effect execution means is capable of executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group;
There are a first background performance and a second background performance , each of which has a different performance background,
The performance execution means includes:
When the group performance is executed in the first background performance , the group performance can be executed so that the group performance starts from a predetermined number of frames from the start of the variable display ,
When the group performance is executed in the second background performance , the group performance can be executed so that the group performance starts from a specific number of frames from the start of the variable display, unlike a predetermined number of frames;
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the first background performance is different from the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the second background performance ,
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the first background performance and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the second background performance are higher than the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when a title in a special performance notifying whether or not to control to the advantageous state becomes a specific mode,
The game control means includes:
The first state and the second state can be controlled to have different degrees of advantage.
The numerical information is updated based on the execution of the variable display, and when a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times, the first state can be controlled to the second state ;
In a first case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the first state is a variable display in which the specific display result is not derived and displayed, a notification performance is executed to notify that the state is controlled to the second state;
In a second case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the first state is a variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed, a performance that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed after a performance common to the notification performance is executed.
It is characterized by the following.
The other gaming machine is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous when a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) that can control the special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 8-17, a portion executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the update means updates the numerical information when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-13, a portion executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100),
moreover,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
In the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed is changed to a second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed in the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed (for example, the examples shown in FIG. 59 and FIG. 96).
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, rescue of the player can be realized in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any of the identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so that the player can be rescued more easily and the motivation of the player to play can be increased. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, the group presentation can be executed more appropriately.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of (A) below. Conventionally, gaming machines that execute group effects that display images of multiple characters progressing in a group, as shown in JP 2019-050851 A, have been known. Gaming machines capable of executing group effects in which images of multiple characters or objects appear have been disclosed. According to the gaming machine described above, it is possible to make the game more interesting by executing group effects, but there is still room for improvement in such group effects.

The present invention was conceived in light of this situation, and its purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can more effectively execute group performances.

The gaming machine described in the means (A) is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 48, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 95 to FIG. 101) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 95 (a23) to FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 98 (a31) to FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a37) to FIG. 101 (a42)),
In the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed is changed to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed below the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, examples shown in Figures 58 and 95).
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention, or it may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of this invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. A front view of a pachinko game machine at characteristic portion 120IW. An explanatory diagram showing an example configuration of a special variable winning ball device in characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a diagram showing the configuration of various control boards and the like in characteristic portion 120IW. FIG. An explanatory diagram showing examples of a big hit determination table, a small hit determination table, and a time-saving miss determination table. This is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a time-saving type determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a pattern determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature portion 120IW. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a performance control command. A flowchart showing an example of a game control main processing in the characteristic section 120IW. 13 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a special pattern process in the feature portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols. 13 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process. This is a flowchart showing the processing before the small win is released. This is a flowchart showing the processing during small win release. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing. FIG. 11 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in characteristic portion 120IW. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a specific example of a command analysis process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion effect determination table. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram of the table for determining the setting suggestion performance when a jackpot occurs. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of presentation patterns when transitioning to rescue time reduction. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in the modified example 1. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 2. A flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed in variant example 3. A flowchart showing the jackpot end processing in variant example 4. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 5. 13 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stopping process in modified example 5. 23 is a flowchart showing normal processing of special symbols in modified example 6. A timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant example 7. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of control of various time-saving states in variant example 8. An explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table and a small hit type determination table. This is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small hit game. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 090IW. This is a flowchart showing the processing after a small hit is closed. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. A flowchart showing the special chart winning waiting process. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. This is an explanatory diagram to explain a specific example of the presentation mode when a small hit occurs. An explanatory diagram for explaining modified examples of the opening pattern of small hit games. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table in feature section 113IW. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 11 is a flowchart showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in a test terminal process; 13 is a flowchart showing a customer waiting demo performance control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a caption display execution lottery table and a caption display mode determination lottery table. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading notice setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display performance process. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. An explanatory diagram to explain specific examples of the presentation pattern leading up to the transition to rescue time reduction. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing types of time-saving options. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. An explanatory diagram showing the changing patterns of special patterns and decorative patterns. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the first special symbol. 13 is a flowchart showing a first variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the first special pattern change processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing normal processing of the second special pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing a second variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second special pattern stopping process. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions. 10 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of a gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation form of a time-saving entry presentation. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation form of the time-saving entry presentation in variant example 1-3. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining how the game state transitions in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of the first special pattern in variant example 2. 13 is a timing chart showing the timing of executing each effect in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode of a provocative reach in variant example 2. An explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the presentation mode for notifying the completion of rescue time reduction in variant example 2. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an example of control of a gaming state in Modification Example 2. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 1 is a rear perspective view of a pachinko game machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining a frame lamp. A diagram to explain the special pattern LED board and the fourth pattern unit. 13 is a view looking between the game board and the image display device. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining a display mode of a screen in an image display device. A diagram to explain the various boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine. A diagram to explain the types of wins. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining each random number. A diagram to explain the jackpot determination table and the jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a performance control command. A diagram to explain an example of a front fluctuation pattern on the main side. A figure to explain an example of a subsequent fluctuation pattern on the main side. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table when a miss occurs. This is a diagram to explain the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. 13 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. FIG. A diagram to explain an example of a total fluctuation pattern on the main side. A diagram to explain an example of a total variation pattern on the sub side. A diagram to explain the lottery table for each preview performance. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. 13 is a flowchart showing the start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special pattern change process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of processing before a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of processing during opening of a jackpot. A flowchart showing an example of processing after a jackpot is released. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group preview setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group announcement execution process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining an example of the video production process. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the six-person group preview. A diagram to explain the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. A diagram to explain the shape of the contours when characters overlap in a group preview performance. This is a view looking into the space between the game board and the image display device while the group preview performance is being performed. This is a diagram showing the overall picture of the Bakuchu group preview. A diagram to explain the volume changes and brightness data table during the group preview performance. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. This is a diagram to explain the timing of the Bakuchu swarm announcement in stage B. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a group preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group preview brightness data table. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a frame lamp grandchild table in the reach line luminance data table; FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an on-board lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for an attacca lamp in a reach line brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a parent table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a child table in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a background preview brightness data table. FIG. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for reel lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a background preview brightness data table. A figure to explain an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the background preview brightness data table. FIG. 11 is a diagram for explaining an example of a full-light-on luminance data table. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a brightness data table during a PUSH performance. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in a group preview luminance data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp in a group preview brightness data table relating to a modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group of six is announced on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a six-person group announcement is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a background preview is executed on stage A. A diagram to explain the presentation mode when a lamp announcement is executed on stage A. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode on stage A. FIG. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation pattern in the latter half of the SP reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram to explain the presentation mode in the final reach. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. A diagram for explaining the presentation mode on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is 3 to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Bakuchu Group announcement is executed on stage B. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when the Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the details of the Boingo Group announcement. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. This is a diagram to explain the presentation style of a comparative example when a Boingo Group announcement is executed on stage A. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a Boingo Group announcement related to a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. A figure to explain the presentation mode when a dog pack announcement in a modified example is executed. This is a diagram to explain the comparison between the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line. This is a diagram to explain the presentation mode when a group preview performance is executed during a reach line.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the play area), a first special pattern display device 4A and a second special pattern display device 4B are provided that perform a variable display (also called a special pattern game) of special patterns (also called special patterns) as multiple types of special identification information. Each of these is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special patterns are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The special patterns may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled vertically or updated) in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a plurality of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs, and the second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by the solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions are provided at the lower left and right of the game area), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 2), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into a starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (to the left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the left of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A normal symbol pending display 25C is provided above the normal symbol display 20. The normal symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal symbol pending memory count, which is the number of normal symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and gaming effect lamps 9 for gaming effects are provided around the periphery of the gaming area. The gaming effect lamps 9 are composed of LEDs.

A movable body 32 that moves according to the performance is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (not shown in Figure 1).

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or gaming balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. Below the upper tray, a ball supply tray (lower tray) is provided from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In special game, if a specific special symbol (a big win symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of big win, as described below) is displayed as the confirmed special symbol, it is a "big win", and if a specific special symbol different from the big win symbol (a small win symbol, for example, "2") is displayed as a "small win". Also, if a special symbol different from the big win or small win symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a "losing" symbol, it is a "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a jackpot type set. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc., as described below), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that allow many prize balls to be obtained, and jackpot types that allow few or no prize balls to be obtained.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small wins".

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

(Progression of the performance, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are executed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be executed by sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and/or by turning on/off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, etc.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived on the screen of the image display device 5 as a display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a look-ahead preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a look-ahead preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a big win game state, a big win performance is executed to notify the player of the big win game state. As a big win performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or a promotion performance to indicate that the value of the big win game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small win game state, a small win performance to notify the player of the small win game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small win game state and a big win game state for some big win types (a big win type of a big win game state in the same manner as a small win game state, for example, a big win type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot know whether he is currently in a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small win game state and after the end of the big win game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
2, a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. are mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, a power supply board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1.

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23), and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 3 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on or not (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch in the on state, the output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the working area.

The CPU 103 also transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct initialization (step S9). When the presentation control CPU 120 receives the presentation control command, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes a power supply stop processing immediately before the machine becomes unable to operate due to the power supply being stopped. In this power supply stop processing, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, etc. are executed. The data protection process includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and a process of backing up various data. The backed up data includes various data for progressing the game (including various flags, the status of various timers, etc.), as well as the status of the backup flag and the error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, a parity bit or a checksum is used to determine whether the data in RAM 102 matches the data at the time the power supply was stopped. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be restored to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, so an initialization process (step S8) is performed.

If it is determined that the data in RAM 102 is normal (Step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (Step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a working area based on the memory contents of RAM 102 (contents of the backed-up data). This restores the game state to the state it was in when the power supply was stopped, and if the special symbols were changing, the change of the special symbols will be resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt process described below.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a presentation control command to the presentation control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S7). In conjunction with this, a presentation control command specifying the backed-up game state before the power outage, or, if a special symbol game was being played, a presentation control command specifying the display result of the special symbol game being played may be transmitted. These commands can be the same as the commands transmitted and set in the special symbol process processing described below. When the presentation control CPU 120 receives a presentation control command specifying the time of recovery from the power outage, it displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify the user that recovery from the power outage has been achieved or that recovery from the power outage is in progress. The presentation control CPU 120 may display an appropriate screen based on the presentation control command.

After completing the recovery or initialization process and sending a performance control command to the performance control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 4. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it diagnoses an abnormality in the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (described in detail later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 4. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A or the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "big win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, if the big win flag is off and the display result is a "small win", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "8". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "small win" or "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability change state is controlled and the end of the number of times is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The small win pre-opening process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "8". This small win pre-opening process includes a process for setting the large prize opening to an open state in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "9", and the small win pre-opening process ends.

The small win open processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "9". This small win open processing includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the large prize opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the large prize opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time. When the large prize opening is returned to a closed state and it is time to end the small win game state, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "10" and the small win open processing ends.

The small win end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "10". This small win end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which the presentation operation that notifies the end of the small win game state is executed has elapsed. Here, when the small win game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before the small win game state is entered is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small win game state has elapsed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the small win end process ends.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6. When the performance control main process shown in FIG. 6 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

Figure 7 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 6 as the performance control process. In the performance control process shown in Figure 7, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing a look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command sent from the main board 11 at the time of the start winning. In addition, processing is executed to display a hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a performance control command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a big win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "6". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, when a command specifying the start of a big win game state or a small win game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was "miss", and the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0". Once the value of the performance process flag is updated, the special drawing hit waiting process ends.

The small win presentation process of step S174 is executed when the presentation control process flag value is "4". In this small win presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets, for example, a presentation control pattern corresponding to the presentation content in the small win game state, and executes various presentation controls in the small win game state based on the set content. In addition, in the small win presentation process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the small win game state is to be ended, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the small win end presentation, and the small win presentation process is ended.

The small win end presentation process in step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation control process flag is "5". In this small win end presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a small win game state, and executes various presentation controls at the end of the small win game state based on the settings. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small win end presentation process ends.

The jackpot performance process of step S176 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S177 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, they also include one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 120IW)
Next, the characteristic part 120IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 120IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of "normal chart winning" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart winning probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart winning probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to the time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the game is controlled to the time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

In addition, in this example, even if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the specified number of times (900 times in this example) of changing displays have ended after the gaming machine is powered on, after a jackpot occurs, or after the time-saving miss occurs, the machine may be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of operations, N = number of time-saving operations)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving periods N is 120 to 1140.

In this example, the second special symbol is more likely to change display during the time-saving state, but as described below, the probability of a small win is increased when the second special symbol is changed display, so the time-saving state is more likely to be controlled to a small win game state.

(Board configuration)
8-1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine in the characteristic part 120IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in the game area, a first path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down is mainly provided in an area to the left of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front, and a second path among the flow paths through which the game balls flow down, which is different from the first path, is mainly provided in an area to the right of the image display device 5 when viewed from the front.

Hitting a game ball into the left area (left game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the first path is called a left hit. Hitting a game ball into the right area (right game area) of the image display device 5 to make the game ball flow down the second path is called a right hit. The first path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the left side of the game area, so it may be called the left hit path. Also, the second path is a path that allows the game ball to flow down by hitting the game ball into the right side of the game area, so it may be called the right hit path.

The first path and the second path may be separate paths, or may be paths that are partially shared. The left and right play areas may be separated, for example, by the end face of the image display device 5 or the arrangement of the play nails within the play area.

When a game ball is launched from the ball launching device in response to the operation of the ball operating handle 30 and hit into the game area, if it is guided to the left game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the right game area. Also, when a game ball is guided to the right game area, it will be guided, for example, along the arrangement of the game nails, making it impossible or difficult to guide it to the left game area.

A winning ball device 6A that constitutes the first starting winning hole is provided as a structure through which game balls that are hit into the left game area of the game area can enter.

The structures through which game balls that are hit into the right game area can enter include a passing gate 41, a variable winning ball device 6B that constitutes the second start winning port, a special variable winning ball device 120IW17 that constitutes the special winning port, and a special variable winning ball device 7 that constitutes the large winning port.

In the left play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the winning ball device 6A of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 6A, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the left. Also, in the right play area, game nails are planted so that the game ball is guided to the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7 of the winning hole structure. Therefore, when aiming to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 6B, the passing gate 41, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and the special variable winning ball device 7, the player only needs to hit the game ball to the right.

It is also possible for a game ball hit into the right game area to have the potential to enter the winning ball device 6A, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the left game area entering them. Conversely, it is also possible for a game ball hit into the left game area to have the potential to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B, but from the standpoint of playability, it is desirable to make this possibility extremely low compared to the possibility of a game ball hit into the right game area entering them.

The special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is a device for determining whether a game ball has entered the V-shaped area, which is a condition for generating a big win, when a small win occurs.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic part 120IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, a right-hit LED 120IW10 is provided below the normal reserve display 25C as shown in FIG. 8-1. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-1, a right-hit notification LED 120IW20 is provided to the right of the image display device 5.

(Special variable winning ball device)
FIG. 8-2 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 in the present characteristic part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is provided with a plate-shaped bottom member 120IW17a formed as the bottom of the flow path through which the game ball flows down, and in a small win game state, the bottom member 120IW17a is moved forward from a closed state in which it is moved forward to a rearward state, thereby opening the special winning port that becomes the winning area. The game ball that has entered the special winning port is detected by the special winning port switch 120IW24.

In this example, when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 7 (large winning hole) and is detected by the count switch 23, 15 prize balls are awarded, whereas when a game ball enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) and is detected by the special winning hole switch 120IW24, 3 prize balls are awarded.

The bottom member 120IW17a is also controlled to change from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW83.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, in this characteristic part 120IW, a game ball that enters the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) is further guided to the guide path 120IW01 provided to the right of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. The guide path 120IW01 further branches into two paths 120IW02, 03, and a game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 is guided to the left path 120IW02 or the right path 120IW03. The left path 120IW02 is a V winning port, and a game ball that enters the V winning port is detected by the V winning port switch 120IW20a.

As shown in FIG. 8-2, a V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is provided near the entrance of the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening), and when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is open, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the left side path 120IW02 (V prize opening) and becomes the V prize opening. Also, when the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20 is closed, the game ball guided to the guide path 120IW01 enters the right side path 120IW03 and is discharged to the back side of the game area.

The V winning opening opening plate 120IW20 is controlled from a closed state to an open state by the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) driving the solenoid 120IW84.

In addition, when this feature unit 120IW is controlled to a small win game state, it is controlled to a big win game state after the small win game ends, provided that a game ball enters the V winning hole 120IW02 during the small win game state and is detected by the V winning hole switch 120IW20A.

In addition, in this example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is formed with a number of regulating pieces that slow down the speed at which the game ball flows down the bottom member 120IW17a. In this example, the provision of the regulating pieces in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 changes the flow direction of the game ball as it flows down from the upper right to the lower left, causing it to snake with a forward-backward component of motion, and the time it takes for the game ball to flow down is delayed compared to when there are no regulating pieces.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 8-2, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) has a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the upstream side, and the device branches into a V winning port and a discharge port on the downstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port) may be configured so that the device branches into a V winning port side and a general winning port side on the upstream side, with a V winning port switch 120IW20A provided on the V winning port side, and a special winning port switch 120IW24 provided on the general winning port side.

(Board configuration)
Fig. 8-3 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards in the characteristic part 120IW. As shown in Fig. 8-3, in this characteristic part 120IW, the switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as detection signals indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from the gate switch 21, the start port switch (the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B), the count switch 23, the special winning port switch 120IW24, and the V winning port switch 120IW20a, and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81, solenoid 82, solenoid 120IW83, and solenoid 120IW84) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device, the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (special variable prize ball device 7), the solenoid 120IW83 for the special variable prize ball device 120IW17, and the solenoid 120IW84 for the V prize opening opening plate 120IW20.

(Probability of winning big, probability of winning small, probability of losing)
FIG. 8-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the probability of a big win and a small win for each setting value. Among these, FIG. 8-4(A) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Also, FIG. 8-4(B) shows the probability of a big win and a small win when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed.

In this example, the setting can be set to one of a number of different setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a setting confirmation process or setting change process is executed, making it possible to check the current setting value or change the setting value. Also, as shown in FIG. 8-4, this example shows a case where the setting can be changed to six levels, from "1" to "6." Note that the setting is not limited to being changeable to six levels, and it may be changed to, for example, two to five levels, or seven or more levels.

As shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400), regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 8-4 (A), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "64,839/65,536", the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "6", at "6".

As shown in FIG. 8-4(B), when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536", which is the most unfavorable setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the setting value "6" has the highest jackpot probability of "328/65536", which is the most favorable setting for the player.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of a small win is constant at "9362/65536" (approximately 1/7) regardless of the setting value "1" to "6."

In addition, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is constant at 164/65536 (approximately 1/400) regardless of the setting value of 1 to 6, in the case of a miss with time reduction.

On the other hand, in terms of misses without time-saving, as shown in Figure 8-4 (B), when time-saving is included and the first special symbol variable display is executed, the setting value "1" has the highest probability of a jackpot at "55,805/65,536", while the miss probability decreases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and the miss probability is the lowest at "55,682/65,536" for setting value "6".

As shown in Figure 8-4, in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is approximately 1/400, whereas when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the probability of a small win is higher at approximately 1/7.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
8-5(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 8-5(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-5(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot as either "6R time-saving jackpot A" or "6R time-saving jackpot B" based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-limited jackpot" based on the random number for type determination when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

A "6R time-saving jackpot A" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. A "6R time-saving jackpot B" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 6-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Note that "6R time-saving jackpot A" and "6R time-saving jackpot B" have different stopping patterns for the jackpot pattern of the first special pattern that is derived and displayed. A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 70% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot A," and a 30% probability that it will be a "6R time-saving jackpot B." Also, as shown in FIG. 8-5(B), in this example, when the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, there is a 100% probability that it will be a "10R time-saving jackpot."

Figures 8-5(C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. Of these, Figure 8-5(C) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, Figure 8-5(D) shows a specific example of a small win type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (C), the small win type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (D), the small win type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of small win as "small win A" or "small win B" based on the random number for type determination when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win symbol.

A "small hit A" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the sixth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. A "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V is won during a small hit game (first round), controls the game to a big hit game state from the second round to the tenth round, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends.

As shown in Figure 8-5 (C), in this example, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in Figure 8-5 (D), in this example, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed and a small win occurs, it is determined to be a "small win A" with a 30% probability, and a "small win B" with a 70% probability.

(Time-saving type determination table)
8-6(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing time-saving type determination tables stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 8-6(A) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-6(B) shows a specific example of a time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(A), the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 8-5(B), the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced when a determination is made that the variable display result is a time-saving miss symbol to determine the type of time-saving miss as either "Time-saving miss A," "Time-saving miss B," or "Time-saving miss C" based on a random number for type determination.

As shown in FIG. 8-6(A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C." Also, as shown in FIG. 8-6(B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and the time-saving miss occurs, there is an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss A," an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss B," and an approximately 33% probability that it is determined to be "Time-saving miss C."

(Pattern Determination Table)
8-7 and 8-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the symbol determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 8-7(A) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win A. Also, FIG. 8-7(B) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 6R time-saving big win B. Also, FIG. 8-7(C) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the 10R time-saving big win. Also, FIG. 8-7(D) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win A. Also, FIG. 8-7(E) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the small win B. Also, FIG. 8-8(F) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss A. Also, FIG. 8-8(G) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss B. Also, FIG. 8-8(H) shows a specific example of the symbol determination table for the time-saving miss C. Also, FIG. 8-8(I) shows a specific example of a pattern determination table for a miss (no time reduction).

As shown in Figure 8-8, the pattern determination table is a table that is referenced to determine the special pattern to be stopped based on the random numbers used for pattern determination, depending on the type of big win, small win, time-saving type, etc.

As shown in Figure 8-7(A), if a "6R time-saving jackpot A" occurs, the pattern "3" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(B), if a "6R time-saving jackpot B" occurs, the pattern "5" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(C), if a "10R time-saving jackpot" occurs, the pattern "7" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(D), if a "small jackpot A" occurs, the pattern "1" is determined with a 100% probability. As shown in Figure 8-7(E), if a "small jackpot B" occurs, the pattern "9" is determined with a 100% probability.

As shown in Figure 8-8 (F), if "Time-saving Miss A" occurs, there is a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "6", and a 50% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "8". As shown in Figure 8-8 (G), if "Time-saving Miss B" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "4". As shown in Figure 8-8 (H), if "Time-saving Miss C" occurs, there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "9". As shown in Figure 8-8 (I), if it is a miss (no time-saving), there is a 100% chance that the pattern will be determined to be "-".

Specific examples of the stopping patterns of the special patterns are not limited to those shown in this example. For example, in this example, the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B are each configured with one 7-segment LED, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns are represented by one-digit numbers, but they may be configured with two 7-segment LEDs, and the stopping patterns of the special patterns may be represented by two-digit numbers. In this case, for example, even if the result is "6R time-saving big win A", "6R time-saving big win B", "10R time-saving big win", "small win A", "small win B", "time-saving miss B", "time-saving miss C", or "miss (no time-saving)", the stopping patterns of multiple types of special patterns may be determined.

In this example, as shown in Figures 8-7 and 8-8, the case where the stopping symbols of the special symbols are determined using the symbol determination random number is shown, but this is not limited to the above, and for example, the type determination random number may also be used to determine the stopping symbols of the special symbols. When the type determination random number is used in combination, for example, when the jackpot type is determined to be "6R time-saving jackpot A", the value of the type determination random number is 0 to 125 (see Figure 8-5 (A)), so the symbol determination value in Figure 8-7 (A) is assigned 0 to 125 to configure a symbol determination table for 6R time-saving jackpot A. Also, for example, if the time-saving type is determined to be "Time-saving Miss A," the value of the type determination random number is between 0 and 59 (see FIG. 8-6), so in FIG. 8-8 (F), the pattern determination value is assigned from 0 to 29 to the pattern "6" and from 30 to 59 to the pattern "8," thereby constructing a pattern determination table for time-saving Miss A.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 8-9 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 8-9, after the small win game is started at timing S1, when 8 seconds have passed (timing S2), the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to be in an open state, and thereafter, the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is kept in an open state until 8 seconds have passed (see Figure 8-9 (C)).

When a small win (small win A, small win B) occurs, 8 seconds is set as the time before the special winning hole is opened (fanfare time) from the start of the small win game until the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state, and the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state at the same time that the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state. Also, as shown in Figure 8-9 (A), during the period when the V winning hole opening and closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds. Therefore, in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B), the special winning hole is opened four times for 0.016 seconds during the period when a V win is possible.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the case of a small win (small win A, small win B) is extremely short at 0.016 seconds, but as already explained, multiple regulating pieces are formed in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17, and about 2 to 3 game balls flow down in a serpentine manner on the bottom member 120IW17a of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17. Therefore, even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member 120IW17a is controlled to the open state, the game balls on the bottom member 120IW17a can fall into the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 and win a prize.

If a game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the sixth or tenth round, as shown in Figure 8-9 (B).

In this example, when the final opening of the special winning port in a small winning game is completed, the small winning game ends based on the lapse of the closing time (interval time) and the small winning end time (ending time), but this is not limited to the above. For example, detection switches capable of detecting game balls are provided in two locations, upstream and downstream, in the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 (special winning port), and after the final closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the device waits until the detection numbers of the upstream detection switch and the downstream detection switch match (all game balls that have entered the special winning port are discharged), and then transitions to the small winning end time (ending time), and ends the small winning game when the small winning end time (ending time) has elapsed.

In addition, in this example, a configuration is shown in which a V win is possible during small win play in both small win A and small win B, but it may also be configured to provide a type of small win in which a V win is difficult or impossible during small win play.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 8-10 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 120IW. Among these, FIG. 8-10(A) and (B) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-10(C) and (D) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for the second special symbol. Also, FIG. 8-10(E) and (F) show a specific example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving miss (for a non-time-saving state). Also, FIG. 8-10(G) shows a specific example of a variation pattern table for a time-saving rescue.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (A) and (B). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (A), in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-1 (normal variation), PT1-2 (shortened variation), PT1-3 (normal reach), and PT1-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-5 (normal reach) and PT1-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT1-7 (normal reach) and PT1-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in this example, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-1 (high-speed miss fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-2 (high-speed jackpot fluctuation). Also, when the first special symbol is displayed, if there is a small jackpot during the time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT2-3 (high-speed small jackpot fluctuation).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (C) and (D). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (C), in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-1 (normal variation), PT4-2 (shortened variation), PT4-3 (normal reach), and PT4-4 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a big win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-5 (normal reach) and PT4-6 (super reach). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a small win during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the variation patterns PT4-7 (normal reach) and PT4-8 (super reach).

As shown in FIG. 8-10 (D), in this example, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-1 (shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-2 (ultra-shortened variable), variable pattern PT5-3 (normal reach), or variable pattern PT5-4 (super reach). Also, when the second special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PT5-5 (normal reach) or variable pattern PT5-6 (super reach). In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if a small win occurs during the time-saving state (including both the first and second time-saving states), the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PT5-7 (normal reach) or variation pattern PT5-8 (super reach).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the time-saving failure (for non-time-saving state) will be explained using Fig. 8-10 (E) and (F). As shown in Fig. 8-10 (E), in this example, when the time-saving failure occurs in the non-time-saving state as A to C (patterns "2", "4", "6"), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either fluctuation pattern PT6-1 (normal fluctuation) or fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (time-saving teaser effect).

As shown in Figure 8-10 (F), in this example, when the time-saving feature A (symbol "8") occurs in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PT7-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (time-saving teaser effect), or fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (time-saving revival effect).

In this example, if the time-saving state is in a state where the time-saving effect is lost (A to C), the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the same as when the time-saving effect is lost (no time-saving effect).

Next, the fluctuation pattern of the rescue time reduction will be explained using FIG. 8-10 (G). As shown in FIG. 8-10 (G), in this example, when the rescue time reduction occurs, if there is a small win or a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (rescue time reduction entry effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

(Performance control command)
8-11 and 8-12 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the performance control command sent to the performance control CPU 120. In the example shown in FIG. 8-11 and FIG. 8-12, the command 80XX (H) is a performance control command (variation pattern command) that specifies the variation pattern of the decorative pattern that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. The performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, when the performance control CPU 120 receives any of the commands 80XX (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start the variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 9001 (H) is a performance control command (display result 1 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a non-time-saving miss. Command 9002 (H) is a performance control command (display result 2 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "8"). Command 9003 (H) is a performance control command (display result 3 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss A (pattern "6"). Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 4 designation command) (miss designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a time-saving miss B (pattern "4"). Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 specification command) (miss specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be a time-saving miss C (pattern "2").

Command 9006 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 6 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot A. Command 9007 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 7 designation command (6R time-saving jackpot B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 6R time-saving jackpot B. Command 9008 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 8 designation command (10R time-saving jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variation pattern command is a 10R time-saving jackpot.

Command 9009 (H) is a presentation control command (display result 9 designation command (small win A designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win A. Command 900A (H) is a presentation control command (display result 10 designation command (small win B designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is to be small win B.

Command A000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a presentation control command (first pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the first special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command A100 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination A designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination B designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a presentation control command (second pattern determination C designation command) that can specify that the variable display of the second special pattern has stopped and that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds.

Command B000 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a presentation control command (jackpot end designation command: ending designation command) that specifies the end of a jackpot game.

Command B1XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying while the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display during a round during a jackpot game. The number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX." Command B2XX (H) is a presentation control command (command for displaying after the large prize opening is open) that specifies the display after a round during a jackpot game (displaying the interval between rounds).

Command B300 (H) is a presentation control command (small win start designation command) that specifies the start of small win play. Command B301 (H) is a presentation control command (small win end designation command) that specifies the end of small win play.

Command B400 (H) is a presentation control command (large prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the large prize opening. Command B401 (H) is a presentation control command (special prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the special prize opening. Command B402 (H) is a presentation control command (V prize opening entry designation command) that specifies that the game ball has entered the V prize opening inside the special prize opening.

Command C000 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C001 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number addition command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is a presentation control command (first pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the first pending memory number has decreased by 1. Command C101 (H) is a presentation control command (second pending memory number subtraction command) that specifies that the second pending memory number has decreased by 1.

Command E000 (H) is a presentation control command (normal state designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state A designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when a jackpot game ends. Command E002 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state B designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state when the time-saving state is lost. Command E003 (H) is a presentation control command (time-saving state C designation command) that specifies that the game state is controlled to the time-saving state during a rescue time-saving state.

Command E100 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification start command) that specifies the start of the right hit notification. Command E101 (H) is a presentation control command (right hit notification end command) that specifies the end of the right hit notification.

Command E2XX(H) is a performance control command (setting value command) that specifies the currently set setting value. The setting value set to "XX" is set. For example, if the setting value is set to "1", command E201(H) is sent, and if the setting value is set to "6", command E206(H) is sent.

When the presentation control CPU 120 (specifically, the presentation control CPU 120) mounted on the presentation control board 12 receives the above-mentioned presentation control command from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, it changes the display state of the image display device 5 according to the contents shown in Figures 8-11 and 8-12, changes the display state of the lamp, and outputs sound number data to the sound control board 13. Note that presentation control commands other than those shown in Figures 8-11 and 8-12 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12. For example, more detailed presentation control commands related to jackpot games and presentation control commands indicating the game status (for example, a presentation control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the presentation control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
8-13 is a flowchart showing a game control main process in the characteristic unit 120IW. In this example, the processes in steps S1 to S2, S3 to S9, and S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, once the initial settings are made in step S2, the CPU 103 performs a setting change/confirmation process (step 120IWS11). The setting change/confirmation process makes it possible to confirm the current setting value and change the setting value. Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command corresponding to the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS12).

Also, when a presentation control command instructing initialization is sent in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "900" (step 120IWS13). Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900". That is, in this example, after the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is turned on, if neither a jackpot nor a time reduction miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles, the rescue time reduction is entered and the machine is controlled to the time reduction state. Note that, in this example, the initial value to be set in the rescue time reduction counter can be specified based on the presentation control command instructing initialization sent in step S9.

In this example, the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, but this is not the only option, and the rescue time reduction counter may not be initially set when the RAM clear process is executed. If configured in this way, gameplay can be started from the continuation of the value of the rescue time reduction counter from the previous day, reducing the amount of investment required to reach the rescue time reduction, and the game can be configured in a way that does not disadvantage the player.

In addition, when configured as described above, the system may be configured so that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the clear switch is detected as being on (Y in step S3) and the RAM clear process is performed, and the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is performed when a RAM abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clear process is performed.

(Special pattern processing)
FIG. 8-14 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process in the feature unit 120IW. In this example, the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) is generally similar to the start winning judgment process (step S101) shown in FIG. 5. In addition, the special symbol normal process (step 120IWS110) to the special symbol stop process (step 120IWS113) are generally similar to the special symbol normal process (step S110) to the special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5. However, in this example, when a small winning symbol is derived and displayed, the process proceeds to a small winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS114). In addition, when a big winning symbol is derived and displayed (when a so-called direct hit occurs), the process proceeds to a big winning opening pre-process (step 120IWS117).

Small win pre-opening processing (step 120IWS114): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. The game control microcomputer 100 executes processing to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to an open state, and updates the internal state (specifically, the value of the special symbol process flag) to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to the small win opening processing (step 120IWS115).

Small winning opening process (step 120IWS115): Executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is 5. If the opening time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is open, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the closed state, and if the closing time has elapsed while the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is closed and there are still opening times remaining, the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 is controlled to the open state. Also, when it is time to open the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the open state, and when it is time to close the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20, the V winning opening opening/closing plate 120IW20 is controlled to the closed state. Also, it is confirmed whether the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, and if the V winning opening switch 120IW20a is on, the V winning flag is set. When all openings of the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 have been completed and the closing time (interval time) has elapsed, the internal state (special pattern process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116).

Processing after closing of small win (step 120IWS116): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. If the V winning flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to the processing before opening of the big win (step 120IWS117). If the V winning flag is not set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to the normal processing of special symbols (step 120IWS110).

The process before the jackpot opening (step 120IWS117) to the process after the jackpot ending (step 120IWS120) is generally similar to the process before the jackpot opening (step S114) to the process after the jackpot ending (step S117) shown in FIG. 5.

In this example, the game immediately transitions to the big win game after a big win is determined and the big win/small win symbols are derived and displayed, or after a V win occurs during a small win game and the small win game ends, but this is not limited to the above. For example, instead of immediately transitioning to the big win game, the game may be configured to transition to the big win game on the condition that the game ball passes through an operating gate (which may also serve as the passing gate 41) provided in the game area.

(Special pattern normal processing)
8-15 and 8-16 are flow charts showing the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) in the special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total reserved memory number (step 120IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total reserved memory number counter for counting the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is checked. If the total reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second reserved memory number is 0 (step 120IWS52). Specifically, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the second reserved memory number counter for counting the second reserved memory number is 0. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) (step 120IWS53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (i.e., if only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (step 120IWS54).

In this characteristic section 120IW, the processing of steps 120IWS52 to S54 is executed, so that the display of the second special symbol changes is executed with priority over the display of the first special symbol changes. In other words, the second start condition for starting the display of the second special symbol changes is controlled to be satisfied with priority over the first start condition for starting the display of the first special symbol changes.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the RAM 102 corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 120IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 120IWS56). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory number buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory number buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the combined pending memory count by 1. That is, the count value of the combined pending memory count counter is decremented by 1 (step 120IWS57). The CPU 103 stores the value of the combined pending memory count counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a specified area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to send a setting value command capable of identifying the currently set setting value to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS58). Note that in this example, a setting value command is sent at the start of each change in the display, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the setting value command may be sent at the end of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 120IWS61) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 120IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process to compare a predetermined jackpot determination value with the random number for hit determination, and decides to determine a jackpot if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 decides to determine a jackpot for the special pattern. If it is decided to determine a jackpot (Y in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS64. On the other hand, if it is decided not to be a jackpot (N in step 120IWS63), the process proceeds to step 120IWS66. Note that deciding whether or not to be a jackpot means deciding whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also deciding whether or not to set the stopped pattern on the special pattern display as a jackpot pattern.

In step 120IWS64, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot. The CPU 103 also selects the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS65). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (B) is selected. Then, using the selected jackpot type determination table, the CPU 103 determines the type (6R time-saving jackpot A, 6R time-saving jackpot B, 10R time-saving jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area as the jackpot type (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of jackpot. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of jackpot in the jackpot type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

Meanwhile, in step 120IWS66, the CPU 103 selects the small win judgment table indicated by the special symbol pointer. In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win judgment table for the second special symbol is selected. Then, the CPU 103 uses the selected small win judgment table to perform a lottery process based on the random number for winning judgment, and determines whether or not a small win has occurred (step 120IWS67). In this example, as shown in Figures 8-4 (A) and (B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/400, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the probability of determining a small win is approximately 1/7.

If it is decided that a small win will occur (Y in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating that it is a small win (step 120IWS69). Then, the CPU 103 selects the small win type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS70). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the small win type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (C) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the small win type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-5 (D) is selected. After the small win type determination table is selected, the process proceeds to step 120IWS71.

If it has not been decided that a small win will occur (N in step 120IWS68), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS71.

In step 120IWS71, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter, which counts the number of times controlled to a small hit during the time-saving state, is 0 (step 120IWS71). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS72). If the small hit flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the small hit counter by 1 (step 120IWS73).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

If the value of the small hit counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS75). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS76.

In step 120IWS76, the CPU 103 checks whether any time-saving flags are set (step 120IWS76). If none of the time-saving flags are set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS83. If any of the time-saving flags are set, the CPU 103 decrements the total time-saving counter by 1 (step 120IWS77).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS74), and if so, proceeds to step 120IWS82. If the count value of the combined time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol (step 120IWS79). Note that whether it is time to start the variable display of the second special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer. If it is not time to start the variable display of the second special symbol, proceeds to step 120IWS83.

When starting the variable display of the second special symbol, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second time-saving counter (step 120IWS80) and checks whether the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS81). If the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS83, whereas if the count value of the second time-saving counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS82.

In step 120IWS82, the CPU 103 sets a time-saving end flag indicating that the time-saving state will end when the fluctuation ends (step 120IWS82).

In this example, steps 120IWS76 to S82 are executed to perform the subtraction process of the time-saving counter before the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83, but the processing is not limited to this. For example, the subtraction process of the time-saving counter may be executed after the count process of the number of fluctuations until the time-saving relief after step 120IWS83. In this case, for example, in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time-saving counter to "900" (see step 120IWS149), the value of the time-saving counter will be subtracted by one extra, so the value of the time-saving counter may be added by one again after the subtraction process in the case of a fluctuation display that results in a time-saving relief. Also, the time-saving counter may be set to "901", which is one more than the time-saving counter, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 120IWS83). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84). Note that in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the game state is the normal state or the time reduction state. Also, in this example, the process of step 120IWS83 is executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special symbol variable display is executed or the second special symbol variable display is executed.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS85). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a rescue time reduction determination flag indicating that the rescue time reduction has occurred and that the time reduction state will be controlled at the end of the fluctuation (step 120IWS86). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

In this example, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is executed not only in the case of a miss variation but also in the case of a small win variation, so the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0 and the variation display that causes a rescue time reduction may be a small win variation. On the other hand, in this example, in the case of a jackpot variation, the processing of steps 120IWS83 to S86 is not executed, so if the variation display that would cause a rescue time reduction is a jackpot variation, rescue time reduction control is not performed and normal jackpot control is performed.

In step 120IWS87, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit flag is set (step 120IWS87). If the small hit flag is set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS91. In this case, the CPU 103 uses the small hit type determination table selected in step 120IWS70 to determine the type of small hit (small hit A or small hit B) that corresponds to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step 120IWS101) and stored in advance in the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of small hit. The CPU 103 also sets data indicating the determined type of small hit in the small hit type buffer in RAM 102. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS92.

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment using a time-saving loss judgment table for determining whether or not to make the time-saving loss, and determines whether or not to make the time-saving loss (step 120IWS88). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving loss judgment table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/200 (see FIG. 8-4(A)). Also, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving loss judgment table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving loss has a probability of about 1/400 (see FIG. 8-4(B)). If it is not determined that the time-saving loss is to be made (if it is determined that the time-saving loss is not to be made), the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving miss is to be determined (Y in step 120IWS89), the CPU 103 selects the time-saving type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS90). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the time-saving type determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (A) is selected, and if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time-saving type determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8-6 (B) is selected. Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of time-saving miss to be the type (time-saving miss A, time-saving miss B, or time-saving miss C) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS91). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start winning determination process (step S101) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. Then proceed to step 120IWS92.

When the processing of step 120IWS91 is completed, the CPU 103 selects a symbol determination table (see Figures 8-7 (A) to 8-8 (H)) according to the result of the type determination performed in step 120IWS91 (step 120IWS92). In the case of a miss without time reduction, the symbol determination table shown in Figure 8-7 (I) is selected and the process proceeds to step 120IWS93.

In step 120IWS93, the CPU 103 determines the pattern corresponding to the value that matches the value of the random number for pattern determination stored in the random number buffer area (step 120IWS93).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step 120IWS94).

(Variation pattern setting process)
8-17 is a flow chart showing the variable pattern setting process (step 120IWS111) in the special symbol process. In the variable pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) checks whether the story has been set (step 120IWS1701). The story refers to the variable pattern and variable time according to the number of times the symbol changes, and whether the story has been set is checked by whether the flag or data set according to the story when a big win occurs is set.

If the story has already been set, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1702). If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a rescue time reduction variation pattern table (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

If the story has not been set or the rescue time-saving determination flag has not been set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the time-saving effect has failed (step 120IWS1704). If the time-saving effect has not failed, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see Figures 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the variation display is a rescue time-saving effect, if the story has not been set, the variation pattern is uniformly determined to be the normal variation pattern, not the rescue time-saving variation pattern.

If the time-saving effect is not achieved, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving effect flag (see steps 120IWS150, 120IWS160, and 120IWS537) is set (step 120IWS1705). If the time-saving effect flag is set, the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table (see Figures 8-10 (A) to (D)) according to the special symbol, game status, and display result (step 120IWS1709), and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving effect is not achieved, if the time-saving effect is not achieved, a variation pattern similar to that of a miss (no time-saving effect) is determined.

If the time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the pattern has been determined to be "8" in the pattern determination (see step 120IWS93) (step 120IWS1706). If the pattern is not "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern other than "8") (see FIG. 8-10 (E)) (step 120IWS1707) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710. If the pattern is "8", the CPU 103 selects a variation pattern table for when the time-saving function is not activated (pattern "8") (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) (step 120IWS1708) and proceeds to step 120IWS1710.

In step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 8-10 to use based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 120IWS1703, S1707, S1708, and S1709 and the random number for determining the variation pattern stored in the reserved memory buffer indicated by the special symbol pointer (step 120IWS1710). In this example, the variation pattern is determined to determine the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Note that after the variation time is determined, the variation pattern to which the determined variation time is set may be selected from among multiple variation patterns.

Once the variation pattern is determined, the CPU 103 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1711).

When the change time (change pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 120IWS1710, the CPU 103 sets the change time data indicating the determined change time in the change time timer and starts measuring the change time (step 120IWS1712), and starts the change display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or the change display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 120IWS1713). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (step 120IWS1714).

(Special pattern variation processing)
8-18 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process (step 120IWS112) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first controls to transmit, if not yet transmitted, any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 10 designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not to make it a big win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a small win, the decision result of whether or not to make it a time-saving miss, the decision result of the big win type, the decision result of the small win type, and the decision result of the time-saving miss type (step 120IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 120IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 120IWS1123), it checks whether the relief time reduction determination flag (see step 120IWS86) is set (step 120IWS1124). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If the rescue time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right hit LED 120IW10 (step 120IWS1125). The CPU 103 also performs control to send a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1126).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1126 is executed and a rescue time reduction occurs, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the first special pattern and the second special pattern (step 120IWS1127). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1128). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS1129). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be over, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS1130). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1131).

In this example, when the processing of step 120IWS1131 is executed and a time-saving missing pattern is derived and displayed, the right-hit LED 120IW10 starts to light up at the start of the pattern determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS1132). If none of the time-saving flag A, the time-saving flag B, or the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., in the normal state), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1133). The CPU 103 also controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command or a second pattern determination A designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1134). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to transmit a second pattern determination A designation command. Then proceed to step 120IWS1139.

If the time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, or time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if the time-saving state is in effect), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "10 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1135). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command or a second pattern determination B designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls to send a first pattern determination B designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls to send a second pattern determination B designation command. Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

If it is not determined that the time reduction is to be missed (N in step 120IWS1129), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "0.5 seconds" to a pattern determination period timer for measuring the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern (step 120IWS1137). The CPU 103 also controls to send a first pattern determination C designation command or a second pattern determination C designation command that can specify that the pattern determination period is 0.5 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS1138). In this case, if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "first", it controls to send a first pattern determination A designation command, and if the value of the special pattern pointer is a value indicating "second", it controls to send a second pattern determination A designation command. Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern stop processing (step S113) (step 120IWS1139).

(Special symbol stop processing)
8-19 to 8-21 are flow charts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 120IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS132).

If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is not 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has not yet ended), the special pattern stop process ends. If the value of the pattern determination period timer after subtraction is 0 (i.e., the determined display period of the stopped pattern of the first special pattern or the second special pattern has ended), the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 120IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag (time-saving flag A, time-saving flag B, time-saving flag C) and the time-saving count counter for counting the number of times the variable display is executed during the time-saving state (step 120IWS134).

The time-saving counters include a special 2 time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times the second special symbol changes, and a combined time-saving counter that corresponds to the number of times both the first special symbol and the second special symbol change. When simply referred to as a "time-saving counter," it refers to both the special 2 time-saving counter and the combined time-saving counter.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS135). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a jackpot, and if neither a next jackpot nor a time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the jackpot game ends, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 120IWS135, when a jackpot is hit, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot to initialize it, but this is not the only possible mode. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of jackpot play, or may be configured to be initially set to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of the jackpot play.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS136). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a jackpot start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the large prize opening to measure the time before the large prize opening is opened (fanfare time) until the special variable prize ball device 7 is controlled to the open state (step 120IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S144) (step 120IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 120IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving end flag is set (step 120IWS141). If the time-saving end flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148. If the time-saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving end flag (step 120IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the time-saving flags that are set (any of time-saving flags A to C) and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS143).

Next, if the values are set, the CPU 103 resets the small win counter, the combined time-saving counter, and the special 2 time-saving counter (step 120IWS144), and controls the right-hit LED 120IW10 to stop lighting (step 120IWS145). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right-hit notification end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS146). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS147). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS148.

In this example, the process of steps 120IWS141 to S147 is executed to transition to the normal state at the end of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation and to end the right-hit notification, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the system may be configured to transition to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the pattern determination period during the final time-saving fluctuation.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (step 120IWS148). If the rescue time-saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS149). The CPU 103 also sets the time-saving flag C and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS150). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS151). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

In this example, even if there is a small win fluctuation, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing when the pattern determination period ends, step 120IWS150 is executed, and the small win game state thereafter is controlled to time-saving state C.

If the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur (step 120IWS152). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving will not occur can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 120IWS93.

If it is decided that the time-saving effect has been lost, the CPU 103 checks whether any of the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) are set (step 120IWS153). If none of the time-saving flags are set (i.e., if the normal state exists), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "100" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" if the time-saving effect has been lost (Y in step 120IWS154). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not A, but B (Y in step 120IWS156), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "50" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS157). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

If the time-saving miss is not B (N in step 120IWS156), that is, if the time-saving miss is C, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "30" and the total time-saving count counter to "900" (step 120IWS158). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS160.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag B and controls the time-saving state (step 120IWS160).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS161). Therefore, in this example, the rescue time-saving counter is set to "900" in response to a time-saving miss, and if neither the next jackpot nor the time-saving miss occurs even after 900 variable display cycles have been performed after the time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will be entered and the game will be controlled to the time-saving state.

The CPU 103 also subtracts 1 from the small win counter (step 120IWS162) and transmits a time-saving state B designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS163). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS164.

Also, if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 120IWS153), the process proceeds to step 120IWS164. Therefore, in this example, even if the time-saving has been removed, if the time-saving state is in effect, no new time-saving state is set based on the time-saving removal, and the current time-saving state continues (therefore, the values of the special 2 time-saving count counter and the combined time-saving count counter remain at their current values).

In step 120IWS164, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win flag is set (step 120IWS164). If the small win flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the right hit LED 120IW10 to start lighting up (step 120IWS165). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a right hit notification start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a small win start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS167). Next, the CPU 103 sets the special winning port opening time timer (step 120IWS168). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S118) (step 120IWS169).

If the small win flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag if it is set (step 120IWS170).

In step 120IWS171, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step S110) (step 120IWS171).

(Pre-opening processing for small hits)
8-22 is a flow chart showing the small win opening pre-processing (step 120IWS114) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning opening pre-opening timer has timed out (step 120IWS401). If the special winning opening pre-opening timer has not timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has not elapsed), the process ends.

If the timer for the time before the special winning opening has timed out (i.e., if the fanfare time has elapsed), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS402). The CPU 10103 also sets the opening time timer to a value equivalent to the first opening time of the special winning opening (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS403).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) (step 120IWS404).

(Small hit open processing)
8-23 is a flow chart showing the small win opening process (step 120IWS115) in the special symbol process. In the small win opening process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (step 120IWS421). If the special winning hole switch 120IW24 is turned on (i.e., if the winning of a game ball into the special winning hole is detected), the CPU 103 controls to send a special winning hole winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS422).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (step 120IWS423). If the V winning port switch 120IW20a is in the ON state (i.e., if the entry of a game ball into the V winning port is detected), the CPU 103 performs control to send a V winning port winning designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS424). The CPU 103 also sets a V winning flag indicating that a V winning has occurred (step 120IWS425).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS426). Whether it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the small win game starts and checking whether the time since the start of the small win game has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to open the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to the open state (step 120IWS427).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 (step 120IWS428). Whether it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20 can be determined, for example, by setting a timer when the V winning opening plate 120IW20 starts to open, and checking whether the time since the V winning opening plate 120IW20 started to open has reached a predetermined time (8 seconds in this example). If it is time to close the V winning opening plate 120IW20, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW84 and controls the V winning opening plate 120IW20 to a closed state (step 120IWS429).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the open time timer for measuring the opening time of the special winning opening is 0 (step 120IWS430). If the value of the open time timer is not 0 (i.e., if the special winning opening is open), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the open time timer (step 120IWS431) and checks whether the value of the open time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS432). If the value of the open time timer is 0, the CPU 103 stops driving the solenoid 120IW83 and controls the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to a closed state (step 120IWS433). The CPU 103 also sets a value equivalent to a predetermined closing time (interval time) to the closing time timer for measuring the closing time after the special winning opening is opened (step 120IWS434). Then, the process ends.

If the open time timer is 0 in step 120IWS430 (i.e., if the special prize opening is closed), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the close time timer (step 120IWS435) and checks whether the value of the close time timer after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS436). If the value of the close time timer is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether all of the special prize openings have already been opened (step 120IWS437). In this example, if the special prize openings have already been opened four times, the answer is Y in step 120IWS437 and the process proceeds to step 120IWS440.

If all of the special winning ports have not been opened (i.e., if the second to fourth openings remain), the CPU 103 starts driving the solenoid 120IW83 to control the special variable winning ball device 120IW17 to the open state (step 120IWS438). The CPU 103 also sets the closing time timer to a value equivalent to the opening time (0.016 seconds in this example) (step 120IWS439). Then, the process ends.

If all special winning ports have been opened (Y in step 120IWS437), the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the small win post-closing processing (step 120IWS116) (step 120IWS440).

(Processing after closing small hit)
8-24 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 120IWS116) in the special symbol process processing. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 120IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 120IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 120IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 120IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 120IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 120IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 120IWS117) (step 120IWS460).

If it is confirmed in the processing of step 120IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 120IWS461). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462). If the flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time reduction determination flag (step 120IWS463) and updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS464).

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 8-25 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end process (step 120IWS121) in the special symbol process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 120IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step 120IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag or the small jackpot flag (step 120IWS532) and performs control to transmit the jackpot end designation command (step 120IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 120IWS534), and ends the process.

In step 120IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 120IWS536). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 120IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag A (step 120IWS537) and checks whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 120IWS538). If the rescue time-saving flag is set, the rescue time-saving display is a small jackpot change, and a V win occurs during the small jackpot play, ending the jackpot play to which the rescue time-saving display has been switched. In this case, the CPU 103 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 120IWS539), sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

On the other hand, if the rescue time-saving flag is not set, it is checked whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state (step S120IWS541). Whether the jackpot occurred in the time-saving state can be determined, for example, by checking whether the time-saving flag is set at the start of the jackpot game before the processing of steps S120IWS134 and S120IWS456 is executed and the time-saving flag is reset, and if the time-saving flag is set, a jackpot time-saving flag is set, indicating that the time-saving state was in effect when the jackpot occurred, and in step S120IWS541, it is checked whether the jackpot time-saving flag is set.

If the jackpot occurred during the time-saving state, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the jackpot did not occur in the time-saving state (if the jackpot occurred in the normal state), it is checked whether the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol (step 120IWS543). Whether the jackpot was based on the variation of the first special symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer. If the jackpot game state that ended was based on the variation of the first special symbol, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "1", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS544). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

If the completed jackpot game state is not based on the variation of the first special symbol (if it is based on the variation of the second special symbol), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "99", the total time-saving count counter to "99", and the small win count counter to "1" (step 120IWS545). Next, the CPU 103 performs a story setting process (step 120IWS546).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special pattern processing (step 120IWS110) (step 120IWS547).

In this example, when the above process is performed and the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to one time (see step 120IWS544), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to seven times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state than if a jackpot occurs during the normal state.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times (see step 120IWS545), and if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the time-saving state is controlled to 7 times (see step 120IWS542). Therefore, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the time-saving state (in this example, the number of time-saving times is greater) is controlled to be more favorable if a jackpot occurs during the normal state than if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in this example, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, if the change display where the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to one with a lower advantage (in this example, the time reduction state is one time, which is small).

For example, if the change display that caused the rescue time-saving function to occur was a small win change, and a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to a big win game is terminated, if the V win occurs due to a small win change based on the change display of the second special pattern, the function may be configured to control the game to a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times (hence, a time-saving state with a high degree of advantage).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in the feature part 120IW will be described. FIG. 8-26 is a state transition diagram for explaining the state transition in the feature part 120IW. As shown in FIG. 8-26, in the normal state, when a jackpot is hit, the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see step 120IWS537). In addition, even in the normal state, when a miss occurs, when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) is controlled (see step 120IWS160). Furthermore, even in the case of a miss, when a rescue time-saving state occurs (after RAM clear processing, or after a jackpot or a time-saving miss, when the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times without the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurring), the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) is controlled (see step 120IWS150).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the case of a jackpot in time-saving state A, the state is controlled again to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) (see step 120IWS537). Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the case of a small jackpot in time-saving state A, the state is controlled to a small jackpot (see step 120IWS69), and in the case of a V-winning in the small jackpot state, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) via a jackpot (see step 120IWS537). Also, in the case of a miss in time-saving state A, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to time-saving state B (time-saving state via time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In addition, in the time-saving state A, even if no small win occurs, if the variable display of the second special pattern ends 1, 7, or 99 times without a big win occurring, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In addition, in the time-saving state A, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the time-saving state B, if a big win occurs, the state is controlled to the time-saving state A (the time-saving state via the big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs, the state is controlled to the small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the time-saving state B, even if a small win does not occur, if the variable display of the second special pattern ends 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a big win, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS82, S143). In the time-saving state B, even if a miss occurs, if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the time-saving state B (the time-saving state via the time-saving miss) (see step 120IWS160). In the time-saving state B, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

Also, as shown in FIG. 8-26, in the case of a big win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to time-saving state A (time-saving state via big win) (see step 120IWS537). In the case of a small win in time-saving state C, the state is controlled to a small win state (see step 120IWS69). In the case of time-saving state C, if the fluctuation display ends 900 times without a big win, the state is controlled again to time-saving state C (see step 120IWS150). In the case of time-saving state C, if the number of fluctuations reaches 900 times, the state is controlled again to time-saving state C (see steps 120IWS149, 150). In the case of time-saving state C, if a small win occurs once, the state is controlled to the normal state (see steps 120IWS73-75).

In addition, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state A but does not result in a V win, time-saving state A will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state B but does not result in a V win, time-saving state B will continue as is after the small hit play ends. Also, if a small hit occurs during time-saving state C but does not result in a V win, time-saving state C will continue as is after the small hit play ends.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the operation of the performance control means will be described. Figures 8-27 to 8-28 are flow charts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S75). The performance control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, and in the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command received buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 120IWS611). Whether a command is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception counter with the read pointer. If the two match, no received command is stored. If a received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads out the received command from the command reception buffer (step 120IWS612). After reading out, the read pointer value is incremented by +2 (step 120IWS613). The increment of +2 is because 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received performance control command is a variation pattern command (step 120IWS614), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in a variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 120IWS615). Then, it sets a variation pattern command reception flag (step 120IWS616).

If the received performance control command is a display result designation command (step 120IWS617), the performance control CPU 120 stores the received display result designation command in a display result designation command storage area formed in RAM 122 (step 120IWS618).

If the received performance control command is any of the pattern determination designation commands (first pattern determination A designation command, first pattern determination B designation command, first pattern determination C designation command, second pattern determination A designation command, second pattern determination B designation command, second pattern determination C designation command) (step 120IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets the determination command reception flag according to the received pattern determination designation command (step 120IWS620). For example, when the first pattern determination A designation command is received, the first determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination B designation command is received, the first determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the first pattern determination C designation command is received, the first determination C command reception flag is set. Also, for example, when the second pattern determination A designation command is received, the second determination A command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination B designation command is received, a second determination B command reception flag is set. Also, for example, if a second symbol determination C designation command is received, a second determination C command reception flag is set.

If the received presentation control command is a jackpot start command (step 120IWS621), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot start command reception flag (step 120IWS622). If the received presentation control command is a jackpot end command (step 120IWS623), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot end command reception flag (step 120IWS624).

If the received performance control command is a large prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS625), the performance control CPU 120 sets the large prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS626). If the received performance control command is a special prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS627), the performance control CPU 120 sets the special prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS628). If the received performance control command is a V prize slot winning designation command (step 120IWS629), the performance control CPU 120 sets the V prize slot winning designation command reception flag (step 120IWS630).

If the received performance control command is a normal state designation command (step 120IWS631), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) (step 120IWS632).

If the received presentation control command is a command to specify time-saving state A (step 120IWS633), the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state A (time-saving state via a jackpot) (for example, a yellow background image corresponding to sunset mode) (step 120IWS634).

If the received performance control command is a command to specify time-saving state B (step 120IWS635), the performance control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to switch to a background image corresponding to time-saving state B (a time-saving state after the time-saving state has ended) (for example, a green background image corresponding to forest mode) (step 120IWS636).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state C designation command (step 120IWS637), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not a special performance mode flag is set, indicating that the performance mode is set to the special performance mode (step 120IWS638). If the special performance mode flag is not set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state C (time-saving state via rescue time-saving) (for example, an orange background image corresponding to the tangerine orchard mode) (step 120IWS638). On the other hand, if the special performance mode flag is set, the image display device 5 is controlled to switch to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) (step 120IWS640).

If the received performance control command is a setting value command (step 120IWS641), the performance control CPU 120 performs control to store the setting value in the setting value storage area (step 120IWS642).

If the received performance control command is a right-hit notification start command (step 120IWS643), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to start lighting up (step 120IWS644). Note that in this example, the right-hit notification start command is sent at the start of the pattern determination period when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed or when a time-saving rescue is activated (see steps 120IWS1126, S1131), so the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 starts lighting up at the start of the pattern determination period.

If the received performance control command is a command to end the right-hit notification (step 120IWS645), the performance control CPU 120 controls the right-hit notification LED 120IW20 to stop lighting (step 120IWS646) and starts the execution of the left-hit notification performance (step 120IWS647).

If the received performance control command is any other command, the performance control CPU 120 executes processing to store the received performance control command and set a flag corresponding to the received performance control command (step 120IWS648). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS611.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 8-29 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 120IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 120IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 120IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 120IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 120IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 120IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "big win" or if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns (big win pattern, small win pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as the stopping symbols. Note that, although this example shows a case in which a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are aligned as the same pattern for both the big win pattern and the small win pattern is determined, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, if the received display result designation command indicates "small win", the performance control CPU 120 may be configured to determine a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbol as the small win pattern.

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of patterns in which the left, center, and right are all the same) are called jackpot patterns. Stopping patterns that evoke a loss are called loss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)) that specifies a rescue time short entry performance (step 120IWS803). If it is fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the setting value is one of the settings "4" to "6" based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)) (step 120IWS804). If the setting value is not one of the settings "4" to "6", it proceeds to step 120IWS808.

If the setting value is any of settings "4" to "6", the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a rescue setting performance and the type of performance depending on whether the setting value is "4" to "6" (step 120IWS805). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether or not it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance (step 120IWS806). If it has been decided not to perform a rescue setting performance, the process proceeds to step 120IWS808. If it has been decided to perform a rescue setting performance, the performance control CPU 120 sets the special performance mode flag (step 120IWS807) and proceeds to step 120IWS808.

In step 120IWS808, if the CPU 120 for effect control has decided to execute a rescue time short period entry effect or a rescue time setting suggestion effect, it selects a process table that includes the rescue time setting suggestion effect (step 120IWS808). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is not fluctuation pattern PT8-1, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 (see FIG. 8-10(E)) that specifies a time-saving promotion performance or fluctuation pattern PT7-2 (see FIG. 8-10(F)) that specifies a time-saving promotion performance (step 120IWS809). If it is fluctuation pattern PT6-2 or fluctuation pattern PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving promotion performance (step 120IWS810). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation pattern is not PT6-2 or PT7-2, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command read out in step 120IWS801 is fluctuation pattern PT7-3 (see FIG. 8-10 (F)) that specifies a time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS811). If it is fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the time-saving revival performance (step 120IWS812). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814. If it is not fluctuation pattern PT7-3, the performance control CPU 120 selects a normal process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 120IWS813). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS814.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the process table selected in step 120IWS808, step 120IWS810, step 120IWS812, or step 120IWS813 (step 120IWS814).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS815). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 120IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 120IWS816).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 120IWS817).

(Rescue setting suggestion performance determination table)
FIG. 8-30 is an explanatory diagram of a rescue setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS805 of FIG. 8-29 when the fluctuation pattern is fluctuation pattern PT8-1 (see FIG. 8-10 (G)).

As shown in Figure 8-30, in the rescue setting suggestion effect determination table, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 50%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 40%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 5%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 30%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 50%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 10%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment value is allocated so that the selection rate for no rescue setting suggestion effect is 10%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect A is 15%, the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect B is 15%, and the selection rate for rescue setting suggestion effect C is 60%.

Therefore, in this example, if rescue setting suggestion effect A is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "4", if rescue setting suggestion effect B is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "5", and if rescue setting suggestion effect C is executed, it suggests that the setting value is likely to be set to "6".

The rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when the rescue time reduction entry effect is executed.

In this example, the rescue setting suggestion effect is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6," so the rescue setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting is set to a relatively high value.

(Variable display performance processing)
8-31 and 8-32 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 120IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 120IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 120IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 120IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 120IWS845).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received (step 120IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 120IWS847). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS850). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 120IWS851). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the continuation performance (performance that notifies the user that the time-saving state will continue) (step 120IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS853). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS854). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS855). Then, it proceeds to step 120IWS867.

If neither the first pattern confirmation B designation command nor the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received (step 120IWS861). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation C command reception flag or the second confirmation C command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation C designation command or the second pattern confirmation C designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 120IWS863.

If neither the first pattern determination C designation command nor the second pattern determination C designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 120IWS862). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination C designation command or the second pattern determination C designation command is received (Y in step 120IWS861), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 120IWS862), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 120IWS863). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 120IWS864). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS865). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 120IWS866). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS867.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 120IWS862), the process proceeds to step 120IWS862 and onwards, and the pattern determination period begins. However, normally, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 120IWS862 will be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 120IWS862 and onwards.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 120IWS867).

(Waiting for special drawing)
8-33 and 8-34 are flow charts showing the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the special chart hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the fixed performance period timer (step 120IWS871), and checks whether the fixed performance period timer value after subtraction has timed out (step 120IWS872). If the fixed performance period timer value after subtraction has not timed out, the process timer value is subtracted by 1 (step 120IWS873), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data n) (step 120IWS874).

When the process timer times out (step 120IWS875), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 120IWS876). The performance control CPU 120 also sets the process timer to the next process timer setting value in the process table, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed (step 120IWS878). If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is currently being displayed, the process ends. If the decorative symbol stopping pattern is not currently being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the determined stopping pattern (non-time-saving losing pattern, time-saving losing pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) to stop (step 120IWS879).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS880), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot pattern has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS881). Then, the processing ends.

When the small win symbol is stopped and displayed in the processing of step 120IWS879 (Y in step 120IWS882), the presentation control CPU 120 sets a small win stop flag indicating that the small win symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 120IWS883A). Then, the presentation control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start the execution of a V winning promotion presentation that encourages the game ball to win the V winning hole (step 120IWS883B), and ends the processing.

If the value of the fixed performance period timer after subtraction has timed out (i.e., the pattern fixed period has elapsed), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 120IWS884). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 120IWS885A). Note that whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 120IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the presentation control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 120IWS885B). Then, based on the setting value specified by the setting value command (the setting value stored in the setting value storage area (see step 120IWS642)), the presentation control CPU 120 determines whether or not to display a setting suggestion presentation at the time of the jackpot and the type of presentation (step 120IWS886).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table for the performance during the jackpot according to the presence or absence of a setting suggestion performance at the time of the jackpot and its type (step 120IWS887). The performance control CPU 120 then starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS889).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 120IWS890).

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 120IWS891). If the small win stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a small win start command has been received (step 120IWS892). Whether a small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that a small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If a small win start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a small win start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small win stop flag (step 120IWS893). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the small win performance (step 120IWS894). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 120IWS895), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 120IWS896).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 120IWS897).

If the small win stop flag is also not set (i.e., if a non-time-saving losing pattern or a time-saving losing pattern is stopped and displayed), the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 120IWS898).

(Table for deciding the setting suggestion effect when the jackpot occurs)
FIG. 8-35 is an explanatory diagram of the jackpot setting suggestion performance determination table used in step 120IWS886.

As shown in Figure 8-35, in the setting suggestion effect determination table when the setting value is set to "1", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "2", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "3", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 65%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 10%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "4", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 15%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "5", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 15%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 5%.

In addition, when the setting value is set to "6", the judgment values are allocated so that the selection rate for no setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs is 60%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect A when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect B when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect C when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect D when a jackpot occurs is 5%, the selection rate for setting suggestion effect E when a jackpot occurs is 5%, and the selection rate for setting suggestion effect F when a jackpot occurs is 15%.

Therefore, in this example, if jackpot setting suggestion performance A is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "1", if jackpot setting suggestion performance B is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "2", if jackpot setting suggestion performance C is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "3", if jackpot setting suggestion performance D is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "4", if jackpot setting suggestion performance E is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "5", and if jackpot setting suggestion performance F is executed, it is suggested that there is a relatively high possibility that the setting value is set to "6".

The setting suggestion effect at the time of a jackpot is a setting value suggestion effect that is executed on the image display device 5 when a jackpot symbol is displayed.

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the presentation of the rescue time-saving entry presentation and the rescue setting suggestion presentation when transitioning to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. Figures 8-36 to 8-37 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the presentation up to the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 8-36 to 8-37, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A) (B) (C) ... (G).

As shown in Figure 8-36 (A), the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 begins to change one change before the transition to the rescue time reduction.

As shown in FIG. 8-36 (B), when the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 starts to change, the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. In the rescue time-saving entry effect, first, while the display of the decorative pattern 120IW100 changes, the entry suggestion display 120IW105, which suggests entry into the rescue time-saving mode and reads "Super hot!", is displayed, and the rescue time-saving entry effect starts. Note that from then on, in the rescue time-saving entry effect, the decorative pattern 120IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 120IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 8-36(C), an operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 8-1). For example, the operation suggestion image 120IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the user to press the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 8-36(D), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 120IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 120IW106, the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, and the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, a right-hit instruction display 120IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed next to the small symbol 120IW101. Furthermore, if it has been decided that a rescue setting suggestion effect should be executed, the rescue setting suggestion effect is executed, and a setting value suggestion display 120IW200 suggesting a setting value is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen. This suggests that the setting value is one of settings "4" to "6."

For example, when rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in blue, when rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in green, and when rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed in red, and the display color of the setting value suggestion display can be configured to differ depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a rescue setting suggestion performance A is executed, a triangular setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, when a rescue setting suggestion performance B is executed, a diamond-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and when a rescue setting suggestion performance C is executed, a star-shaped setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed, and the display shape of the setting value suggestion display may be changed depending on the type of rescue setting suggestion performance.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 8-36 (D) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 0.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 8-10(B)). Therefore, the fluctuation display is consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36(D) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 8-36(D) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a presentation similar to that of FIG. 8-36 may be executed to produce a presentation that appears to be the rescue time reduction, and then a presentation that notifies of a jackpot may be executed.

The example shows a case where the right hit instruction display 120IW108 starts to be displayed from the timing of the display of the text display 120IW107 "V STOCK x 1", but the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 120IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 may start to be displayed from the timing of the confirmation display of the previous stopping pattern, and various modes are possible.

In addition, this example shows a case where a setting suggestion effect is executed when a rescue time reduction occurs and a pseudo consecutive hold effect is executed, but this is not limited to this. It may also be configured to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, or it may be configured not to execute a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed. Also, when executing a setting suggestion effect when a jackpot occurs and a consecutive hold effect is executed, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect may be different from when a rescue time reduction occurs, or the execution mode of the setting suggestion effect may be different.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(E), a mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode during rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. If a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 120IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 120IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 120IW101. Also, the rescue setting suggestion presentation continues to be executed, and the setting value suggestion display 120IW200 is displayed on this screen as well.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(F), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 120IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction has begun" are displayed. At this time, the small symbols 120IW101 stop.

Then, as shown in FIG. 8-37(G), when the next change starts, the game transitions to time-saving state C, and the rescue time-saving mode starts. At this time, the background image changes to the background image (red) for the special performance mode.

In this example, the rescue time-saving entry effect is executed one change before entering the rescue time-saving mode, but it is also possible to display the number of spins remaining until the rescue time-saving mode, explain the effects during the rescue time-saving mode, and display a countdown before that change.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time-saving counter is initially set to "900" when the RAM clear process is executed, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time-saving function is not activated, but for example, when a story-based effect (such as a story reach effect or a story about whether to perform high-speed fluctuation) is to be executed, the selection buffer and story counter for that story may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure the game so that a story can be set when the rescue time-saving function is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

(Variation 1)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the time-saving state continues until a small hit occurs uniformly in the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving. Below, a modified example 1 in which the time-saving state continues until a different number of small hits occur depending on whether it is the time-saving state A via a big win, the time-saving state B via a time-saving miss, or the time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving is described.

Figure 8-38 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in modified example 1. In modified example 1, the processing of steps 120IWS131 to S148 of the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 8-19 and 8-20. In modified example 1, if the rescue time-saving determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "900", the combined time-saving count counter to "900", the rescue time-saving count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "2" (step 120IWS149X). In addition, the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 8-20.

By executing the above process, in variant 1, in the case of time-saving state A via a big win and time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until one small win occurs, whereas in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, the time-saving state continues until two small wins occur.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and for example, the time-saving state may be configured to continue until a different number of small wins occur between the case of time-saving state A via a big win and the case of time-saving state B via a missed time-saving state. Also, in this example, the time-saving state is configured to continue until two small wins occur in the case of time-saving state C via a rescue time-saving state, but the time-saving state may be configured to continue until another number of small wins occur, such as three.

(Variation 2)
In the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, the case where the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the start of the small hit fluctuation (see steps 120IWS71 to S75) is shown, but it is not limited to such a processing mode. For example, it may be configured to execute the subtraction process of the small hit counter at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation. Below, we will explain the modified example 2 in which the subtraction process of the small hit counter is executed at the end of the small hit game after the small hit fluctuation.

Figure 8-39 is a flow chart showing the processing after the small hit is closed in variant 2. In variant 2, the processing of steps 120IWS451 to S463 is the same as those shown in Figure 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter is 0 (step 120IWS463A). If the value of the small hit counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small hit counter (step 120IWS463B).

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the small hit counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS463C). If the value of the small hit counter is not 0, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

If the value of the small win counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flags (time-saving flags A to C) that have been set and ends the time-saving state (step 120IWS463D). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 8-24.

(Variation 3)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the rescue time reduction is to be performed, the time reduction state is uniformly controlled at the end of the pattern determination period, but it is not limited to such a form, and when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable, it may be configured to be controlled to the time reduction state at the end of the small win game. Below, we will explain a modified example 3 in which the time reduction state is controlled at the end of the small win game when the variable display that is the rescue time reduction is a small win variable.

Figure 8-40 is a flowchart showing the process after the small win is closed in variant 3. Note that in variant 3, even if the rescue time reduction determination flag is set in step 120IWS148 during the special symbol stop process, if the small win flag is set, the process in steps 120IWS149 to S151 is not executed.

In the third modification, the processing of steps S120IWS451 to S462 is the same as those shown in FIG. 8-24. Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set (step S120IWS462A). If the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the set rescue time-shortening determination flag (step S120IWS462B). The CPU 103 also sets the special 2 time-shortening count counter to "900", the combined time-shortening count counter to "900", the rescue time-shortening count counter to "900", and the small win count counter to "1" (step S120IWS462C). The CPU 103 also sets the time-shortening flag C and controls it to the time-shortening state (step S120IWS462D). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a time-saving state C designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 120IWS462E). Then, the process proceeds to step 120IWS464.

The processing of step 120IWS464 is the same as that shown in Figure 8-24.

(Variation 4)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the case of controlling to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (time reduction state with one time reduction) has been shown, but it is not limited to such a form. For example, it may be configured to control to the time reduction state with a lower advantage (for example, a time reduction state with seven time reductions). Below, a description will be given of a modified example 4 in which, when the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, when a V winning occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state with a higher advantage (time reduction state with seven time reductions) is controlled.

Figure 8-41 is a flow chart showing the jackpot end processing in variant 4. In variant 4, the processing of steps 120IWS531 to S539 in the jackpot end processing is the same as those shown in Figure 8-25. Next, the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time-saving count counter to "7", sets the combined time-saving count counter to "99", and sets the small jackpot count counter to "1" (step 120IWS540X). Note that the processing of steps 120IWS541 to S541 is the same as those shown in Figure 8-25.

In the fourth modified example, by executing the above process, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction (see step 120IWS540). Therefore, when considering the case where the change display of the first special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a higher advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is more than 1 time). On the other hand, when considering the case where the change display of the second special pattern is executed, if the change display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred is a small win change, and if a V win occurs during the small win game and the transition to the big win game is terminated, the time reduction state is controlled to a time reduction state with a lower advantage (in this example, a time reduction state with 7 times of time reduction, which is less than 99 times).

(Variation 5)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic portion 120IW, after the rescue time reduction is activated, if the 900 variable display times are completed without a big win or small win occurring during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction is activated again (the rescue time reduction loops), but this is not limited to such a case, and the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction may be configured to end temporarily. Below, a description is given of a modified example 5 in which the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction is configured to end temporarily.

Figure 8-42 is a flow chart showing the normal processing of special symbols in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S85 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 8-15 and 8-16. In the modified example 5, if the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0 (Y in step 120IWS85), the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS85A). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., if 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or a small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS85B). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as those shown in Figure 8-16.

Figure 8-43 is a flow chart showing the special symbol stop processing in the modified example 5. In the modified example 5, the processing of steps 120IWS to S148 in the special symbol stop processing is the same as those shown in Figures 8-19 and 8-20. In the modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction determination flag is set (Y in step 120IWS148), the CPU 103 sets the special 2 time reduction counter to "900", the combined time reduction counter to "900", and the small win counter to "1" (step 120IWS149Z). That is, in the modified example 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred. Note that the processing from step 120IWS150 onwards is the same as those shown in Figures 8-20 and 8-21.

By executing the above process, in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and then, if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time-saving state C via the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction counter is set. Therefore, in variant 5, even if 900 variable displays have ended without a big or small win during time-saving state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time-saving state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 6)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5, when the rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, so during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction, in the normal special pattern processing, Y is determined in step 120IWS83, and the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS84 is not executed. Note that the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter may be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Below, a description is given of modified example 6, which allows the subtraction processing of the rescue time reduction counter to be executed during the time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction.

Figure 8-44 is a flowchart showing the normal processing of special symbols in variant 6. In variant 6, the processing of steps 120IWS51 to S82 in the normal processing of special symbols is the same as those shown in Figures 8-15 and 8-16. In variant 6, there is no process of determining the value of the rescue time reduction counter in step 120IWS83, and the CPU 103 simply subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 120IWS84).

Next, the CPU 130 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0 (i.e., a negative value) (step 120IWS84A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after the subtraction is less than 0, the CPU 103 sets the rescue time reduction counter to "0" (step 120IWS84B). Then, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not less than 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 120IWS84C). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the CPU 103 proceeds to step 120IWS87.

If the value of the rescue time-saving counter after subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C is set (step 120IWS84D). If the time-saving flag C is set (i.e., 900 variable displays have been completed without a big win or small win during the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving), the CPU 103 sets the rescue time-saving counter to "900" (step 120IWS84E). Note that the processing from step 120IWS86 onwards is the same as that shown in Figure 8-16.

By executing the above process, in variant 6, as in variant 5, the rescue time reduction counter is not set at the end of the variable display in which the rescue time reduction has occurred, and the rescue time reduction counter is set when 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction. Therefore, in variant 6, even if 900 variable displays are completed without a big hit or small hit during time reduction state C via the rescue time reduction after the rescue time reduction has occurred, time reduction state C ends once and the rescue time reduction does not loop.

(Variation 7)
In the above-mentioned modified example 5 and modified example 6, it may be further configured to be able to execute the pre-reading advance notice performance. And, it may be configured to limit the pre-reading advance notice performance in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended. Below, a description will be given of modified example 7 in which the pre-reading advance notice performance is limited in a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C via the rescue time-saving is ended.

In the seventh variant, in the start winning judgment process (step 120IWS101) of the special symbol process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment of whether or not a big win or a small win will occur, whether or not the time-saving feature will be missed, the big win type, the small win type, the time-saving feature type, the variation pattern type, and the like. Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a look-ahead judgment result designation command capable of identifying the look-ahead judgment result to the performance control CPU 120. In the look-ahead notice setting process (step S161) of the performance control process, the performance control CPU 120 determines the presence or absence and type of a look-ahead notice performance based on the look-ahead judgment result designation command received, and performs control to execute the look-ahead notice performance for one or more variation displays before the variation display to be predicted is executed.

Figure 8-45 is a timing chart showing the timing of the pre-reading preview performance restriction period in variant 7. As shown in Figure 8-45, when 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss since the rescue time-saving count counter was set, rescue time-saving occurs and control is exercised in time-saving state C. Next, when another 900 variable display cycles have been completed without a big win or small win during time-saving state C via rescue time-saving (i.e., when the 1800th variable display cycle has been completed since the rescue time-saving count counter was set), time-saving state C ends.

The performance control CPU 120 also restricts the execution of the look-ahead preview performance during a predetermined period and a specific period before and after the time-saving state C ends. In this example, since the upper limit of the combined reserved memory number is 8, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends until the rescue time-saving state starts, and during a specific period from the rescue time-saving state starts until the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 8-45, when counting after the rescue time-saving count counter is set, it is determined that the look-ahead preview performance will be executed from the 1792nd change display to the 1808th change display.

The "restriction on look-ahead preview performance" may be controlled so that look-ahead preview performance is not executed at all, or the probability of execution of the look-ahead preview performance may be reduced, or only some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be executed.

(Variation 8)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each modification, the control of a plurality of time-saving states may be configured to be executed simultaneously in parallel. Fig. 8-46 is a timing chart showing the timing of the control of various time-saving states in modification 8. In the example shown in Fig. 8-46, when the big win game state is ended (timing T1), a transition to time-saving state A with the time-saving number of times being 99 is shown.

Next, at timing T2 while the time-saving state A continues, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving failure) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, 30 times of time-saving) based on the new time-saving failure is started. Then, when the 30 times of the fluctuation display are completed (timing T3), the control of the time-saving state B is terminated. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, the control of the time-saving state A continues because the 99 times of the fluctuation display have not yet been completed at the stage of timing T3. Note that, during the period from timing T2 to T3, the control of the time-saving state A and the control of the time-saving state B are executed in parallel internally, but it appears that the time-saving state continues as it is.

Next, at timing T4 while the time-saving state A is continuing, a new time-saving occurrence condition (in this example, the occurrence of a time-saving miss) is established. In this case, in the modified example 8, as shown in FIG. 8-46, in parallel with the control of the time-saving state A, the control of the time-saving state B (in this example, the number of time-saving times is 30) based on the new time-saving miss is started. Then, at timing T5 before the end of the 30-time variable display, the 99th variable display after the control to the time-saving state A is ended, and the control to the time-saving state A is ended. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 8-46, the control of the time-saving state B continues because the 30-time variable display has not yet been ended at the stage of timing T5. Then, when the 30-time variable display is ended (timing T6), the control to the time-saving state B is ended. Therefore, in terms of internal processing, the time-saving state A is ended at timing T5 after the end of the jackpot game, but the control of the time-saving state B is also executed in parallel, so it appears that the time-saving state was controlled to more than 99 times after the end of the jackpot game.

(Variation 9)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, by judging Y in step 120IWS1702 and executing steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, a common fluctuation pattern can be determined when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved. However, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even when the time reduction is not achieved but the time reduction is achieved, a different fluctuation pattern can be determined.

(Variation 10)
In addition, in the above-mentioned characteristic unit 120IW, by switching to a background image corresponding to the special performance mode, the setting suggestion performance can be executed even after the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, based on the result of the look-ahead judgment, in the variable display before the variable display in which the rescue time reduction is established, a provocative performance such as "special performance mode??" can be executed to execute the setting suggestion performance.

As explained above, the characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples have the inventive configurations shown below in (Means A1) to (Means A10), (Means B1) to (Means B6), (Means C1) to (Means C5), and (Means D1) to (Means D5).

(Means A1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (e.g., a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established) by the counter value being set to "0" (for example, "0"); an updating means that updates numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special pattern is executed or a variable display of the second special pattern is executed); and a special state control means (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS114 to S116 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control the game to a special state (for example, a small win game state) different from an advantageous state when a special display result (for example, a small win pattern) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed; and a counting means that counts the number of times the special state has occurred in the special state. and special state terminating means for terminating the special state (for example, a portion for executing step 120IWS73 in the game control microcomputer 100). The special state terminating means is capable of terminating the special state based on the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means has occurred reaching a specific number of times (for example, once) (for example, when Y is determined in step 120IWS74, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75, and determines Y in step 120IWS141 and executes step 120IWS143). The special state control means is capable of controlling the special state during the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed when a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established. (for example, even in the case of a small win variation, if the rescue time-shortening determination flag is set in 120IWS148 at the timing of the end of the pattern determination period, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, and in the subsequent small win game state, it is controlled to time-shortening state C), and the special counting means does not count a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display in which the special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS73 at the start of the variation to subtract 1 from the small win number counter, and executes step 120IWS149 at the end of the variation in the case of rescue time-shortening to set the small win number counter, so in the small win variation in which rescue time-shortening is established, after the small win number counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win number counter is not immediately subtracted in the variable display). Such a configuration allows for optimal control in situations where both special and special states occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation where a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, preventing disadvantages to the player.

In this example, regarding "controllable to a special state during a special state," when the change display that is the time-saving relief is a small win change, the time-saving state C is changed at the end of the pattern determination period, and then the time-saving state C is controlled during the small win game, but the timing of the change to the time-saving state C is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the time-saving state C may be changed from the start of the small win change that is the time-saving relief, or the time-saving state C may be changed halfway through the small win game. In this way, it is sufficient if there is a period during the small win game that is controlled to the time-saving state C in some form. In addition, when the time-saving state C is changed from the start of the small win change, the small win count counter may also be decremented at the start of the small win change.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the "specific number of times" is one time, this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the time-saving state may be configured to end based on the occurrence of multiple small wins, such as two or three, during the time-saving state, and multiple times may be set as the specific number of times.

(Means A2) In means A1, the special state ending means may be configured to end the special state when the number of times the special state counted by the special counting means reaches a specific number (e.g., 1 time) and when a variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 1 time, 7 times, 99 times, 900 times) in the special state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS75 when Y in step 120IWS74, sets the time-saving end flag in step 120IWS82 when Y in step 120IWS78 and when Y in step 120IWS81, and executes step 120IWS143 by determining Y in step 120IWS141). Such a configuration allows for suitable control in situations where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which a special condition is met and control is exercised to a special state, but a special display result is displayed and the special state ends immediately, thereby preventing disadvantages to the player.

(Means A3) In means A1 or A2, the special state control means can control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes the same (for example, 1 time) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "1" in step 120IWS149). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

(Means A4) In any of the means A1 to A3, the special state control means may be configured to control the special state based on the advantageous state after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS537), and the special state termination means may be configured to terminate the special state when the number of times the special state is counted by the special counting means becomes different (for example, 2 times) when the special state is controlled based on the establishment of a special condition and when the special state is controlled based on being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, in variant 1, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the small win counter to "2" in step 120IWS149X). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition from becoming too advantageous. For example, it is possible to prevent a game from being played so as to be controlled to an advantageous special state.

In addition, it may be difficult for a player to immediately notice the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving function, but in variant 1, while in the normal time-saving state the time-saving state ends with one small win, the time-saving state ends with two small wins only when the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving function, so that even if the first small win misses a win in the second start winning hole (misses the charge of the second reserved memory), another chance to win a win in the second start winning hole can be given.

In addition, in variant 1, in the normal time-saving state, the number of time-saving times is often as small as 1 or 7, and there are relatively few cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs, whereas in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is as high as 900, and there are many cases in which the time-saving state ends when a small hit occurs. Therefore, by reliably ending the time-saving state when a small hit occurs, it is possible to prevent players from playing in a strategic manner.

(Means A5) In any of the means A1 to A4, the special state control means may be configured to count the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is met (for example, in the modified example 2, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS463B at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation where the rescue time reduction is met, after the small win count counter is set in step 120IWS149, the small win count counter is immediately decremented in the variable display). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation where both the special state and the special state occur. For example, if a strategy element remains by controlling to the special state in a special state where a special condition is met, it becomes a strategy element for the player, and the risk of it becoming a disadvantage to the game center can be reduced.

(Means A6) In any of means A1 to A5, the special state control means may be configured such that, when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display in which a special condition is established, the special state can be controlled to a special state after a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result (for example, in variant example 3, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS462D at the end of a small win game, so that in a small win variation in which rescue time reduction is established, the time reduction state C is controlled at the end of the small win game). With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control in a situation in which both a special state and a special state occur. For example, when a special condition is established and control is established to a special state, it is possible to wait until the control of the special state starts, making it easier to perform various controls.

(Means A7) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a first special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A8) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with one time of time-saving) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S544), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with seven times of time-saving) that is more advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A9) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S54 2), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the advantageous state is controlled based on the game medium passing through a specific area, and the advantageous state can be controlled to the first special state after the advantageous state (for example, when the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S542, if a V win occurs due to a small win fluctuation based on the variable display of the second special pattern, the time-saving state is controlled to 99 times). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of the special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means A10) In any of means A1 to A6, the special state control means can be controlled to a first special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 99 time-saving times) after being controlled to an advantageous state in the normal state (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S545), and can be controlled to a second special state (e.g., a time-saving state with 7 time-saving times) that is less advantageous than the first special state after being controlled to an advantageous state in the special state (e.g., the game control microcomputer The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute steps 120IWS537, S542), a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is established, and when the special display result is derived and displayed in a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to control to a second special state after the advantageous state when the game medium passes through a specific area (for example, in variant 4, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS537, S540X). With such a configuration, it is possible to realize control of a special state that is not too advantageous for the player (i.e., not too disadvantageous for the game facility).

(Means B1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, update means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and presentation execution means (e.g., a presentation control CP) that can execute a presentation corresponding to the variable display. and a part for executing steps S170 to S173 in U120), the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time-saving is established) by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), the update means updates the numerical information when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, regardless of whether a variable display of the first special pattern is executed or a variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the value of the rescue time-saving number counter is updated uniformly), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result (for example, a pattern that does not cause a time-saving) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed. (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), controls to a special state when a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is satisfied, and there are a plurality of types of special display results including a first special display result (e.g., the pattern "6" in the time-saving miss A) and a second special display result (e.g., the pattern "8" in the time-saving miss A), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to the same special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160 regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed), and the performance execution means controls to a special state when the first special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is not satisfied in a normal state, The present invention is characterized in that different presentations are executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when step 120IWS1706 is N, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1707 and S1710, and when step 120IWS1706 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1708 and S1710, and can determine different variation patterns), and when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied in the normal state is executed, a common presentation is executed in the cases where the first special display result is displayed and the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time-saving misses but a rescue time-saving occurs, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and can determine a common variation pattern). With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to a derived display of a special display result occur. For example, it is possible to provide an appropriate presentation when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, the "same special state" is controlled to the time-saving state B of 100 times the same number of times when the time-saving miss A occurs (see step 120IWS155, S160) regardless of whether the pattern "6" is derived and displayed or the pattern "8" is derived and displayed, but is not limited to such a case. For example, the "same special state" may be configured to execute one or more of the following: (1) controlling to the same number of times the time-saving, (2) determining the variation pattern of the special pattern using the same variation pattern table, (3) determining the variation pattern of the normal pattern using the same variation pattern table, and (4) controlling the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to the open state using the same opening pattern, or may be configured to execute all of (1) to (4).

In this example, a case where a different variation pattern is determined as "executing a different presentation" is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a different added time may be added to the variation time indicated by the variation pattern when the pattern "6" is derived and displayed and when the pattern "8" is derived and displayed. Also, for example, a configuration may be made to execute either (1) a process to determine a different variation pattern or (2) a process to add a different added time, or a configuration may be made to execute both.

In addition to differentiating the change time, the pattern determination period at the end of the change may also be different.

(Means B2) In means B1, the effect execution means may be configured to be capable of executing a common effect when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed in a special state (for example, if step 120IWS1704 is Y and step 120IWS1705 is Y, the game control microcomputer 100 can execute steps 120IWS1709 and S1710 to determine a common variation pattern). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide suitable control even in a situation where both a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition and a special state is controlled due to the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be provided when a special state is controlled due to the establishment of a special condition.

In this example, when the first special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/200 that the time-saving feature has failed, and when the second special pattern change display is executed, there is a probability of about 1/400 that the time-saving feature has failed. However, this is not the only possible embodiment, and for example, the probability of the time-saving feature failing when the second special pattern change display is executed may be further lowered (for example, to 1/800) to make it less likely that the time-saving feature will fail during the time-saving mode.

Also, for example, the probability of the time-saving feature missing when the second special symbol change display is executed may be increased so that if there is a second reserved memory when the time-saving feature ends, the revival effect is more likely to be executed by the second special symbol change display after the time-saving feature ends.

(Means B3) Means B1 or B2 may be provided with a display result determination means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS93 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the display result, and the display result determination means may be configured to execute a common process for determining the type of display result that will be controlled to an advantageous state when controlled to an advantageous state, and for determining the type of special display result when a special display result is obtained (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS93 in common when determining a jackpot pattern and when determining a time-saving miss pattern). With such a configuration, the common processing can be used to suppress an increase in program capacity.

(Means B4) In any of means B1 to B3, a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that executes control of the variable display, and the variable display control means determines a variable display period during which the variable display is executed according to the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variation pattern), and when a variable display is executed in which a special condition is met in the normal state, determines a different variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed and for when the second special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 determines a variable display period for when the first special display result is derived and displayed, in step 12 When 0IWS1706 is N, steps 120IWS1707 and S1710 are executed, and when 120IWS1706 is Y, steps 120IWS1708 and S1710 are executed, and different variation patterns can be determined), when variable display is executed in a special state, a common variable display period is determined for the case where the first special display result is derived and the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, when the time reduction is missed but the time reduction is rescued, the game control microcomputer 100 judges Y in step 120IWS1702 and executes steps 120IWS1703 and S1710, and a common variation pattern can be determined). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted according to the situation.

(Means B5) In any of means B1 to B4, the effect execution means may be configured to execute different effects when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed when a variable display is executed for which a special condition is met in the normal state (for example, in variant example 9, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to determine different variation patterns even when the time-saving misses and a rescue time-saving occurs). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be optimized according to the situation.

(Means B6) Any of means B1 to B5 may be provided with a variable display control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) that controls the variable display, and the variable display control means may be configured to determine a fixed display period for the display result, and the fixed display period may be changed depending on the type of display result (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS1127, S1133, S1135, S1137). With such a configuration, the display result and the variable display period can be suitably adjusted depending on the situation.

In this example, the pattern determination period is varied depending on whether a rescue time reduction has occurred and the display result, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the pattern determination period may be constant (e.g., 0.5 seconds) regardless of whether a rescue time reduction has occurred or the display result.

(Means C1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a numerical information (e.g., a rescue and a setting means (for example, a portion that executes step 120IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can set the numerical information updated by the update means to a specific value (for example, "0") corresponding to the special number of times (for example, 900 times) so that a special condition is established (for example, a rescue time reduction is established). The game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern is executed or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed), and a notification effect execution means (for example, an execution means) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a rescue time reduction entry effect) that notifies that the special state is controlled by the special state control means based on the establishment of a special condition. The display control CPU 120 further includes a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the output control CPU 120) and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part for executing steps 120IWS808, S845 in the effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect) that suggests the setting value set by the setting means, and the suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestion effect when a notification effect is executed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS808, S845, and is capable of executing a rescue time setting suggestion effect when a rescue time short entry effect is executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control even in a situation where both a case where a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition and a case where a special state is controlled by the derived display of a special display result occur. For example, a suitable effect can be produced when a special state is controlled by the establishment of a special condition. In addition, the probability that the special condition will be met changes depending on the set value, so by executing suggestive effects depending on the probability that the special condition will be met, it is possible to increase the player's interest when the special state is reached.

In this example, the probability of a jackpot differs depending on the setting value, and as a result, the likelihood of a rescue time reduction occurring also differs, with rescue time reduction occurring more easily when the setting value is set low. Therefore, when a rescue time reduction occurs, there is a possibility that the setting value may be set low. Therefore, in this example, a rescue time setting suggestion effect is executed during the rescue time reduction, which gives the player some sense that the setting value is high, making it difficult for the player's interest to decrease. Therefore, in this example, the rescue time setting suggestion effect is configured to be executed when the setting value is set to a relatively high value of "4" to "6," and the execution rate is different from the setting suggestion effect executed at other times, such as the jackpot setting suggestion effect.

(Means C2) In means C1, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect when the variable display where a special condition is met is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 does not process rescue time reduction in the event of a jackpot fluctuation). With such a configuration, the suggestion effect can be executed without interfering with other effects.

In this example, we show a case where rescue time reduction processing is not performed for large hit fluctuations, while rescue time reduction processing is performed for small hit fluctuations, but this is not limited to such a case, and the configuration may be such that rescue time reduction processing is not performed for small hit fluctuations either.

(Means C3) In means C1 or C2, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute the suggestion effect even after a special condition is met (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes step 120IWS640 when step 120IWS638 is Y). Such a configuration allows for long-term setting value suggestions, which can increase interest.

(Means C4) In any of means C1 to C3, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute a suggestion effect before a special condition is met (for example, in variant 10, the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting suggestion effect in a variable display prior to a variable display in which the rescue time reduction is met, based on the results of a look-ahead determination). Such a configuration allows for suggestions of setting values over a long period of time, thereby increasing interest.

(Means C5) In any of the means C1 to C4, the setting suggestion effect execution means may be configured to execute other suggestion effects (e.g., a setting suggestion effect at the time of a big win) that can be executed at a timing different from the suggestion effect when a special condition is established (e.g., the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 120IWS887, S889 and step S176), and suggestion effects that suggest favorable setting values are more likely to be executed when a special condition is established than other suggestion effects (e.g., as shown in FIG. 8-30, the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is configured to be executable when the setting value is set to "4" to "6", so that the setting suggestion effect at the time of rescue is a setting suggestion effect that suggests a relatively high setting). With such a configuration, the more favorable the setting value, the lower the probability of the special condition being established, so by executing the suggestion effect, the player's interest when the special condition is established can be increased.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect at the time of the jackpot is executed during the fanfare period of the jackpot game, but this is not limited to this, and it may be configured to be executed during the round period or the ending period of the jackpot game.

(Means D1) A gaming machine that performs variable display of identification information including a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern), and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and a controller that controls the game machine to perform the variable display. and updating means (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can subtract and update numerical information (for example, a rescue time shortening counter) from a set initial value (for example, "900") based on the fact that the numerical information is updated by subtracting it from a set initial value (for example, "900"), and the special state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information that the update means subtracts and updates becomes a specific value (for example, "0") (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS150), and the update means controls the special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated by subtracting it when a variable display is executed (for example, the value of the rescue time shortening counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether a variable display of the first special symbol or a variable display of the second special symbol is executed), the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it is set to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, in the fifth and sixth modified examples, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S120IWS85B and S84E), and the special state control means changes the state from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information that is updated by subtracting it by the update means has become a specific value. After the control, during the period until the predetermined condition is satisfied and the initial value is set, the update means does not control again from the normal state to the special state based on the fact that the numerical information updated by subtraction has become a specific value (for example, in the modified example 5, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84 to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS83. In the modified example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the processing of steps 120IWS84D to S86 when Y is determined in step S120IWS84A or when N is determined in step 120IWS84C). With such a configuration, when controlling the transition to the special state according to the number of variable displays, the subtraction update processing can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, so that an increase in the capacity of the program can be prevented and suitable control can be achieved. For example, if the transition to the special state is not performed when the numerical information becomes a specific value, a reduction in capacity due to the preparation of a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached can be prevented.

The specified conditions include the case where the rescue time reduction counter is set when the time reduction state via rescue time reduction ends by executing steps 120IWS85B and S84E, as well as the case where step 120IWS13 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, and the case where step 120IWS135 is executed to set the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs.

When the rescue time reduction counter is set when a jackpot occurs, it may be set at the start of the jackpot game, during a round of the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, when setting the rescue time reduction counter when the initialization process is executed when the power is turned on, the process may be different depending on whether the setting is changed or not. For example, the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the current value of the rescue time reduction counter may be maintained when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting. Conversely, the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be maintained when the setting is changed and the initialization process is executed, but the rescue time reduction counter may be set when the initialization process is executed without changing the setting.

(Means D2) In means D1, the update means may be configured to be capable of subtractively updating the numerical information in cases where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value and where variable display is executed when the subtractively updated numerical information is a specific value (for example, in variant example 6, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is greater than a specific value, the numerical information is updated to the numerical information after subtraction (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 120IWS84C to S86 when step 120IWS84A is N), and when the subtractively updated numerical information is less than the specific value, the numerical information is updated to the specific value (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS84B when step 120IWS84A is Y). With this configuration, when controlling the transition to a special state according to the number of times the variable display is made, the subtraction update process can be performed in common before and after the numerical information becomes a specific value, which prevents the program capacity from increasing and enables suitable control. For example, if the transition to a special state is not made when the numerical information becomes a specific value, it is possible to prevent a reduction in capacity due to the need to prepare a dedicated program for the period after the specific value is reached.

(Means D3) Means D1 or D2 may be configured to include an operating means (e.g., a clear switch) for performing an operation, and an initial value setting means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100) for setting the numerical information updated by the update means to an initial value in response to the operation of the operating means. With such a configuration, it is possible to select whether or not to set the numerical information to an initial value by operating the operating means, thereby improving convenience in terms of operation.

In addition, a dedicated operating means (button or switch) other than the clear switch may be provided as an operating means for changing settings or setting the rescue time reduction counter.

(Means D4) In any of the means D1 to D3, the special state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving missing pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 120IWS160), and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even when the numerical information updated by the update means is a specific value, and to be able to control to a special state when a special display result is displayed even after the numerical information updated by the update means has become a specific value (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 can execute step 120IWS88 regardless of whether or not the game is in time-saving state C via rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to control to a special state after the numerical information updated by subtraction becomes a specific value again, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means D5) In any of means D1 to D4, a decision means for deciding whether or not to control to an advantageous state (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS62 in the game control microcomputer 100), a judgment means for judging whether or not to control to an advantageous state before the decision of the decision means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS101 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a pre-reading preview performance execution means capable of executing a pre-reading preview performance based on the judgment result of the judgment means (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS102 in the performance control CPU 120). The system may be configured to include a portion for executing step S161, and a pre-reading notice performance limiting means for limiting the execution of the pre-reading notice performance during a predetermined period before the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value and during a specific period after the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, in modified example 7, as shown in FIG. 8-45, the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is limited during a predetermined period from the change display 8 changes before the time-saving state C ends to the time-saving relief state, and during a specific period from the time-saving relief state C ends to the change display 8 changes after the time-saving state C ends). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game because there is a possibility that the numerical information updated by the subtraction will be controlled to a special state after it becomes a specific value again.

In the above characteristic part 120IW and each modified example, the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is uniformly 900 times, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on the number of times the variable display is executed depending on the set value. For example, when the set value is "1" to "5", the rescue time reduction occurs based on 900 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, while when the set value is "6", the rescue time reduction may be configured to occur based on 600 times of variable display being executed without a big hit, a small hit, or a time reduction miss, and the number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached may be different only for specific set values.

Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different for each setting value for all of the setting values "1" to "6". In this case, for example, the ratio of the denominator of the jackpot probability to the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be configured to be approximately 3 times. Also, for example, the number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered may be different within the range of 2.5P≦n≦3.0P (P=denominator of the jackpot probability, n=number of times the time is changed before the rescue time reduction is triggered).

In addition, even if the time-saving state is reached via rescue time-saving, the time-saving state may not necessarily continue until the next big win occurs. In this case, the time-saving state may be configured to end when a small win occurs as shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, or the time-saving state may be configured to end when the variable display has ended a specified number of times (900 times in this example) as shown in variant 5 and variant 6.

Also, as shown in variants 5 and 6, after the variable display ends a specified number of times (900 times in this example) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and transitions to the normal state, if the variable display ends a specified number of times (for example, 900 times) without a big win, small win, or time-saving miss, the rescue time-saving state will resume and transition to the time-saving state, or the rescue time-saving state will not resume. In this case, if the rescue time-saving state is not resumed, for example, if the rescue time-saving counter value becomes 0, the rescue time-saving counter may not be decremented from the next processing step, or the rescue time-saving counter may be decremented from the next processing step and reset to 0 if it becomes a negative value.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1A) to (Means 10A) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in the normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS84 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. ), and the state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means may be configured to update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player can be rescued in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing the player's motivation to play.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special condition may be configured to be established based on a predetermined display result (e.g., a losing pattern) different from the specific display result being derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as the display result of the variable display (e.g., the part that executes steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the part that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, the player is rescued when a display result unfavorable to the player is derived and displayed consecutively, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 3A) In means 1A or means 2A, the update means may be configured to update the numerical information (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) when a variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (for example, a time-saving state, or a guaranteed bonus state). Such a configuration can effectively realize rescue of the player. Specifically, the numerical information is updated fairly, and since the state can be controlled to the special state again even after it has been controlled to the special state, it is possible to control the state to the special state until it is effectively controlled to an advantageous state, which can reduce the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

(Means 4A) In any of means 1A to 3A, the update means may be configured to set the numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is met (for example, the part that executes steps 120IWS13, S135, S149, and S161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(Means 5A) Means 4A may be configured so that the predetermined condition is to be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the advantageous state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent the player from becoming more gambling than necessary.

(Means 6A) In means 4A, the state control means may be configured to be able to control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from a specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS161 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so that it is possible to prevent excessive gambling.

(Means 7A) In means 4A, the predetermined condition may be configured so that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is essentially possible to control the special state until the next advantageous state, thereby increasing the degree of salvation for the player.

(Means 8A) Means 4A may be provided with a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding the numerical information updated by the update means even when the power supply is stopped, and the update means may be configured to set the numerical information held by the backup storage means to an initial value when a specific condition is met (e.g., execution of an initialization process) (e.g., a portion that executes step 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the predetermined condition is that the specific condition is met (e.g., a portion that executes steps S8 and 120IWS13 in the game control microcomputer 100). With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the game center to operate, since if numerical information up to the special number of times is held when initialization is performed in the game center, it may be too disadvantageous for the game center.

(Means 9A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (e.g., a portion executing steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, it is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by taking measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display to add changes to the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

(Means 10A) Any of means 1A to 8A may be provided with a presentation control means corresponding to variable display (for example, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120), and the state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period of more than a special number of times based on the execution of a special number of variable displays (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and may be capable of controlling to a special state for a specific period again based on the execution of a special number of variable displays in a special state (for example, a part that executes steps 120IWS83 to S86, S150 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation in the first specific period and the second specific period. With this configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by deliberately executing the same presentation, the player is not made more aware than necessary that the player is not controlled to an advantageous state for a long period of time, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1B-1), (Means 1B-2) to (Means 5B) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1B-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and is controllable to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and has a gaming area in which gaming media can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting right), a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and a numerical value based on the execution of the variable display. The present invention is provided with an update means capable of updating information (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a process execution means (e.g., a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processes including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes a process corresponding to the data value, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion for executing step S120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; and a portion for executing step S120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100.), the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion for executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes a first process relating to the variable display when the data value is a first numerical value (for example, a portion for executing steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100), and executes a second process relating to the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value. The game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a third process for controlling the state to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition when the data value is a third value different from the first and second values (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a launch promotion notification means that issues a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be launched to the second path during the execution of the third process, in which the game medium is launched to the first path in the normal state and a game medium is launched to the second path in the special state. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, it is possible to execute a performance related to the launch promotion notification early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 1B-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and that includes a state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 120IWS150, S160, S537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. and a processing execution means (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100) that updates a data value indicating a game progress state required to execute a plurality of types of processing including control of variable display and control of advantageous state, and executes processing corresponding to the data value. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special count (for example, a portion executing step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100). a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S120IWS85 and S86; and a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS150; an updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step S120IWS84), a processing execution means executes a first processing relating to the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S110 to S113), When the data value is a second value different from the first value, a second process related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S114 to S117 in the game control microcomputer 100), and when the data value is a third value different from the first value and the second value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured to execute a next change postponement process), and may be configured to include a presentation execution means that executes a notification presentation that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled during the execution of the third process. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by issuing a launch promotion notification to the second path before the special state is controlled, a presentation related to the launch promotion notification can be executed early when the special state is controlled.

(Means 2B) In means 1B-1 and 1B-2, the process execution means may be configured to execute a second process after the first process when a specific display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is met. With such a configuration, priority is given to control of an advantageous state, so that a disadvantageous result is not reached for the player, and a decline in the enjoyment of the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3B) In means 1B-1, 1B-2 or 2B, the update means updates the numerical information when variable display is started (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the process execution means may be configured to change the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value, and to change the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls to a special state, and to execute different processes when the special information is the first information and when it is the second information. With such a configuration, the process of transitioning to a special state can be executed preferably by managing the special information.

(Means 4B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a different variable display pattern when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

(Means 5B) Means 3B may include a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) that determines the variable display pattern of the variable display, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine a variable display pattern in which the confirmation time of the display result differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. With such a configuration, it is possible to perform an appropriate presentation when the special number of variable displays is executed.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 6C) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in a gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in a presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. The game control system includes a state control means (e.g., a portion executing steps S120IWS150, S160, S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of controlling numerical information based on execution of a variable display (e.g., a portion executing step S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and a state information control means for controlling state information that can specify the state controlled by the state control means, and the state control means is capable of controlling a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display (e.g., The update means can control the game to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, thereby establishing a special condition (for example, the portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a first numerical value in a normal state, set the state information to a second numerical value when the state is controlled to a special state after the state is controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and set the state information to a third numerical value different from the first and second numerical values when the state is controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, and the game control means may be configured to transmit specific information to the presentation control means and to transmit specific information corresponding to the case where the state information is the second numerical value or the third numerical value when the state is in a special state. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, control becomes easier because different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be performed when the presentation control means performs a different presentation.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the state information control means may be configured to set the state information to a fourth numerical value different from the first, second and third numerical values when a special condition is satisfied again after the state information has been controlled to a special state based on the satisfaction of a special condition. Such a configuration allows for suitable control even when new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, control becomes easier as different game states can be suitably identified, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, a suitable presentation can be executed when the presentation control means executes a different presentation.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, the presentation control means may be configured to be able to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 4C) In any of means 1C to 3C, the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of a specific display result, and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. Such a configuration makes it possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since new presentations are not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (e.g., a time-saving miss) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed (e.g., a part that executes step 120IWS160 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means can be configured to execute different presentations when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived and displayed special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, the variable display in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition can be efficiently consumed, making it possible to execute presentations according to the situation, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(Means 6C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the state control means may be configured to control to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the presentation control means may be configured to execute a common presentation (for example, display a common background image) when the state control means controls to a special state based on the derived display of the special display result and when the state control means controls to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the presentation in the special state controlled by the establishment of a special condition the same every time, which prevents an increase in development costs since a new presentation is not required, and increases the interest of the game since it does not confuse the player.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 4D) below may be applied to the above-mentioned characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., steps S170 to S17 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display. The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can control to a special state (for example, a time-saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a control means (for example, a portion that executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display when the power supply is stopped. and a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed, and the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (e.g., a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100; a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., a portion executing step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100). The game control means is capable of transmitting predetermined information to the presentation control means when power supply is started, and the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestive presentation relating to the number of times the variable display is executed during a predetermined period after power supply is started based on receiving the predetermined information. With such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be achieved. For example, this will motivate players to start playing from the opening of the amusement arcade, which can increase the utilization rate of gaming machines.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, the game control means may be configured to be able to transmit specific information capable of identifying the numerical information stored in the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started. Such a configuration makes it possible to provide suitable control even if new functions are added and the specifications become more complex. For example, this can motivate players to play from the opening of the gaming facility, increasing the operating rate of gaming machines while suppressing an increase in the processing load.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information, and the specific information may be configured to include first specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is equal to or less than a predetermined value, and second specific information (e.g., a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command) that can specify that the difference between the number of times the variable display is executed and the special number is greater than the predetermined value. Such a configuration can enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced and processing related to the specific information can be suitably realized.

(Means 4D) In any of means 1D to 3D, the presentation control means may be configured to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation that suggests that the game will be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the special number of times, and to be capable of executing a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays that is less than the first predetermined number of times is executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become more complex. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, the risk of unknowingly causing losses can be reduced.

In addition, the configurations shown in (Means 1E-1) and (Means 1E-2) below may be applied to the above characteristic part 120IW and each of the modified examples.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, and S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display has been executed when power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means including information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control the state to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times and a special condition is established (for example, a portion that executes steps 120IWS85 and 120IWS86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion that executes step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the special state is controlled by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. With such a configuration, it is possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing setting values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a gaming control means (e.g., a part that executes step S25 in the gaming control microcomputer 100) that can control the game, and a presentation control means (e.g., a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the presentation control CPU 120) that controls the presentation corresponding to the variable display, and the gaming control means controls a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state. a state control means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS150, S160, S537) capable of controlling the game to a state where a predetermined display result is derived and displayed in succession (e.g., a time-shortened state); an update means (e.g., a portion in the game control microcomputer 100 which executes steps S120IWS84) capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of a variable display; a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information relating to the number of times the variable display is executed when the power supply is stopped; and a backup storage means (e.g., a RAM 102) which holds numerical information relating to the number of times a predetermined display result has been derived and displayed in succession when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, a portion executing steps 120IWS85, S86 in the game control microcomputer 100, a portion executing step 120IWS150 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated when the display is executed (for example, the part that executes step 120IWS84 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the presentation control means may be configured to execute different presentations after being controlled to the special state when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition before the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized, and when the state control means controls the state to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition after the specific display result is derived and displayed after the memory contents of the backup storage means are initialized. Such a configuration makes it possible to enable suitable control even if new functions are installed and the specifications become complicated. For example, since it is possible to know that the memory contents of the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of elements such as guessing set values increases, which can improve the interest of the game.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 090IW)
Next, the characteristic part 090IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 090IW, the game state is controlled to either the normal state (non-time-saving state) or the time-saving state. As will be described in detail later, it is possible to control from the normal state to the time-saving state via the small win game state based on the derivation and display of the small win pattern. In addition, the display result of the small win includes the display result of the small win A or the small win B that can be controlled in the time-saving state, and the display result of the small win C that cannot be controlled in the time-saving state. And, the ratio of the display result of the small win A or the small win B being derived and displayed is different between the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the first special pattern and the case where the display result of the small win is derived and displayed by performing the variable display of the second special pattern.

(Big hit type determination table, small hit type determination table)
9-1(A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among them, FIG. 9-1(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-1(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on a random number for determining the type of jackpot when a decision is made to make the variable display result a jackpot symbol.

As shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is a table that is referenced to determine the type of jackpot to be a "10R time-saving jackpot" based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a jackpot symbol.

A "10R time-saving jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the game to a 10-round jackpot game state, and transitions to a time-saving state after the jackpot game state ends. Once the game transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs.

As shown in FIG. 9-1(A), in this example, if the first special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability. Also, as shown in FIG. 9-1(B), in this example, if the second special symbol is displayed and a jackpot is reached, it is determined to be a 10R time-saving jackpot with a 100% probability.

The type of jackpot is not limited to the one shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of time-saving times (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) or multiple types of time-saving jackpots with different number of rounds (e.g., 2 rounds or 4 rounds) may be provided. In addition, this example shows a case where only time-saving jackpots that transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends are provided, but it is also possible to configure it so that a non-time-saving jackpot (normal jackpot) that does not transition to a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends is provided. In addition, this example shows a case where a 100R time-saving jackpot is determined with a 100% probability when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but it is also possible to configure it so that multiple types of jackpot types are determined even when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

Figure 9-1 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the small win type determination table stored in ROM 101. As shown in Figure 9-1 (C), the small win type determination table is a table that is referenced when a determination is made to make the variable display result a small win pattern, in order to determine the type of small win as either "small win A", "small win B", or "small win C" based on a random number for determining the type of win.

A "small win A" is a small win that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small win game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small win game (first round) did not win a V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the 10 variable displays are completed. Note that a "small win A" is a small win that controls the game to a big win game state for the second to fourth rounds, on the condition that a V win has occurred, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big win game state ends. However, when a "small win A" occurs, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is controlled so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit B" is a small hit that transitions to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, on the condition that the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) did not make a V win (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Once it transitions to the time-saving state, the time-saving state is maintained until the end of the five variable displays. Note that a "small hit B" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to the time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. However, when a "small hit B" occurs, the opening pattern is first controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win does not occur.

A "small hit C" is a small hit that does not transition to a time-saving state after the end of a small hit game, even if the game ball that entered the special winning port during the small hit game (first round) does not enter the V (it is detected by the non-V winning port switch and it is detected that it did not pass through the V winning port). Also, a "small hit C" is a small hit that, on the condition that a V win has occurred, controls the game to a big hit game state for the second to fourth rounds, and transitions to a time-saving state after the big hit game state ends. And when a "small hit C" occurs, the opening pattern is controlled to open the special variable winning ball device so that a V win occurs in most cases.

As shown in Figure 9-1 (C), in this example, when the first special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 25% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 50% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

As shown in Figure 9-1 (D), in this example, when the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner and a small win occurs, 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win A," 5% of the time it is determined to be a "small win B," and 90% of the time it is determined to be a "small win C."

The types of small wins are not limited to the ones shown in this example. For example, multiple types of time-saving big wins with different times of time saving (e.g., 3 times or 5 times) may be provided. Also, it may be configured to provide a small win without V winning, in which a V win is practically impossible during small win play and there is no transition to a big win play after a small win play.

In addition, since the probability of a small win is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed than when the variable display of the first special pattern is executed, the rate of small win A or small win B (i.e., a small win with time reduction) is higher when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, but when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the rate of a small win with time reduction may be 100%.

(Small win game opening pattern)
Next, the opening pattern of the small win game will be explained. Figure 9-2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of the small win game. As shown in Figure 9-2, after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in the open state at timing S2.

As shown in Figure 9-2 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V winning port opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning port) is opened for 0.05 seconds, then after a closing time of 1 second, the special winning port is opened and closed again for 0.05 seconds, and after a closing time of 12 seconds, the special winning port is opened and closed twice in the same manner.

Also, as shown in Figure 9-2 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state, the special variable winning ball device (special winning hole) is controlled to the open state, so that the special winning hole is opened for 0.05 seconds, closed for 1 second, and then opened again for 0.05 seconds, repeating this operation, so that the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

The operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction), and in either case it is open for 8 seconds.

In this example, the opening time of each special winning port in the event of a small win is extremely short at 0.05 seconds, but as already explained, the special variable winning ball device is formed with multiple regulating pieces, and about 2 to 3 game balls snake down the bottom member of the special variable winning ball device, so even if the opening time is short, if the bottom member is controlled to be in the open state, the game balls on the bottom member can fall and enter the special variable winning ball device.

And, in the case of small win C (no time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is open, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is possible for the game ball to enter the V prize opening. Also, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), when the V prize opening plate is closed, the special variable prize ball device is in the open state, so it is impossible or difficult to enter the game ball into the V prize opening.

In the case of a small win C (no time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is not controlled to the time reduction state, but in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), if the game ball that entered the special winning port does not pass through the V winning port, it is controlled to the time reduction state. As a result, in the case of a small win C (no time reduction), it is highly likely that the game ball will pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it will not be controlled to the time reduction state, and in the case of a small win A or B (with time reduction), it is highly unlikely that the game ball will not pass through the V winning port and be controlled to the big win state, but it is highly likely that it will be controlled to the time reduction state.

If the game ball enters the special winning hole and a V win occurs, after the final opening of the special winning hole, a predetermined period of closing time (interval time) and the end time of the small win (ending time) have elapsed, and then the game moves to a big win game state, and the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state from the second round to the fourth round.

In addition, in both cases of small hit A or B (with time reduction) and small hit C (without time reduction), the ending period starts from timing S3 to S4, but the ending period t3 in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period t4 in the case of small hit C (without time reduction). For example, the ending period t3 is 10 seconds longer than the ending period t4. This makes it possible to ensure time to display the start screen for the time-saving state (see Figure 9-9 (N)) in the case of small hit A or B (with time reduction).

In addition, in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), the ending period may be changed depending on whether or not the game ball has entered the V winning hole (i.e., whether or not the game transitions to the time reduction state). Specifically, when the game ball has not entered the V winning hole, the game is controlled to the time reduction state, so in this case the ending period is lengthened.

In this way, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using different patterns (in this example, the number of openings) when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control the device to a time-saving state.

Specifically, in this example, a V winning hole opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that blocks the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is in a state that does not block the passage of the game ball to the V winning hole. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIG. 9-3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the variation pattern table in the feature part 090IW. Among these, FIG. 9-3 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the first special symbol. Also, FIG. 9-4 shows a specific example of the variation pattern table for the second special symbol.

First, the variation pattern of the first special symbol will be explained using Figure 9-3. As shown in Figure 9-3, in this example, when the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be one of the following: variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA1-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance), variation pattern PA1-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-4 (super reach β). Also, when executing the change display of the first special symbol, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the following: change pattern PA1-5 (shortened change), change pattern PA1-6 (shortened change with no reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), change pattern PA2-2 (normal reach → developing effect), change pattern PA2-3 (super reach α), or change pattern PA2-4 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the variable patterns PB1-1 (normal reach), PB1-2 (super reach α), and PB1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β). Also, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if a small hit C occurs during the time reduction state, the variable pattern is determined to be one of the following: variable pattern PC1-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC1-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC1-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 9-3, in this example, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the normal state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-4 (non-reach with normal change → development effect), PC1-5 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect). Also, when the first special symbol change display is executed, if a small hit A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be one of the change patterns PC1-6 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect), and PC1-7 (normal reach → development effect).

Next, the variation pattern of the second special symbol will be explained using FIG. 9-4. As shown in FIG. 9-4, in this example, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-1 or variation pattern PA3-2 (non-reach in normal variation → development performance). Also, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, if there is a miss during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PA3-3 (shortened variation), variation pattern PA3-4 (non-reach in shortened variation → development performance), variation pattern PB3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB3-2 (normal reach → development performance), variation pattern PB3-3 (super reach α), variation pattern PB3-4 (super reach β).

As shown in FIG. 9-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the normal state, the variable pattern is determined to be variable pattern PA3-5 (normal reach). When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state, the variable pattern is determined to be either variable pattern PC3-1 (normal reach), variable pattern PC3-2 (super reach α), or variable pattern PC3-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 9-4, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if small wins A to C occur during the normal state, the variation pattern is determined to be variation pattern PA3-6 (normal reach). Also, if small win C occurs during the time-saving state, the variation pattern is determined to be either variation pattern PD3-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PD3-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PD3-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in Figure 9-4, in this example, when the change display of the second special symbol is executed, if small win A or B (with time reduction) occurs during the time reduction state, the change pattern is determined to be either change pattern PD3-4 (non-reach with shortened change → development effect) or change pattern PD3-5 (normal reach → development effect).

In this example, in the normal symbol process processing (step S26), the CPU 103 determines whether the result of the normal symbol variable display is a hit (normal symbol hit), and controls the execution of the normal symbol variable display based on the result of the determination. In this example, in the normal state, it is determined that there is a 10% probability of a normal symbol hit, and in the time-saving state, it is determined that there is a 90% probability of a normal symbol hit. In addition, the CPU 103 controls the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port) to an open state based on the determination that there is a normal symbol hit in the normal symbol process processing (step S26).

In this way, in this example, the rate at which the development performance is executed as a specific performance during the variable display differs between when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, in the case of small hit A or small hit B, the paste performance is executed, but in the case of small hit C, the development performance is not executed. This avoids inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after the big hit game state or the time-saving state, allowing the look-ahead preview performance to be executed optimally.

In addition, when a small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, a common fluctuation pattern may be set for a small hit C (without time reduction), a miss, or a big hit.

(Processing after closing small hit)
FIG. 9-5 is a flow chart showing the small win closing post-processing (step 090IWS116) in the special pattern process processing in the feature section 090IW. In the small win closing post-processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the small win end display timer is set (step 090IWS451), and if the small win end display timer is set, proceeds to step 090IWS453. If the small win end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 sets the small win end display timer to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time during which the small win end display is being performed on the image display device 5 (small win end display time) (step 090IWS452), and ends the process.

In step 090IWS453, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the small win end display timer. The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the small win end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the small win end display time has elapsed (step 090IWS454). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the small win end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 checks whether the V winning flag is set (step 090IWS455). If the V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time-saving flag and the time-saving count counter (step 090IWS456). The CPU 103 also resets the V winning flag (step 090IWS457). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a big win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS458). The CPU 103 also sets the time timer before the big win opening (step 090IWS459).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-hit processing (step 090IWS117) (step 090IWS460).

When it is confirmed in the processing of step 090IWS456 that the V winning flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether or not it is a small win A (step 090IWS461). If it is a small win A, it checks whether or not the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS461a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS462). The time-saving counter is set to "10" (step 090IWS463). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation A command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS464). Then, the process proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 confirms that the winning is not a small win A (step 090IWS461: N), it checks whether the winning is a small win B (step 090IWS467). If the winning is a small win B, it checks whether the non-V winning flag is set (step 090IWS467a). If the non-V winning flag is not set, it proceeds to step 090IWS465. If the non-V winning flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the time-saving flag (step 090IWS468). It sets the time-saving counter to "5" (step 090IWS469). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end designation B command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS470). It then proceeds to step 090IWS465.

If the CPU 103 determines that the winning combination is not a small win B (step 090IWS467: N), it sends a small win end command C to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS471). Then, it proceeds to step 090IWS465.

In step 090IWS465, the CPU 103 resets the small win flag (step 090IWS465). The CPU 103 also controls the transmission of a small win end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 090IWS462). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal special symbol processing (step 090IWS110) (step 090IWS463).

The timer that measures the ending period after the small hit closes has a value set depending on whether it is a small hit A or B (with time reduction) or a small hit C (without time reduction), but the value is set so that the ending period in the case of a small hit A or B (with time reduction) is longer than the ending period in the case of a small hit C (without time reduction).

(Waiting for special drawing)
9-6 and 9-7 are flow charts showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7 in the characteristic part 090IW. In the special symbol hit waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the big win stop flag is set (step 090IWS871). The big win stop flag is a flag indicating that the big win symbol has already been derived and displayed but the big win start designation command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS875 described later. If the big win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS876.

If the big win stop flag is not set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win stop flag is set (step 090IWS872). The small win stop flag is a flag that indicates that the small win pattern has already been derived and displayed but that the small win start command has not yet been received, and is set in step 090IWS883, which will be described later. If the small win stop flag is set, the process proceeds to step 090IWS885.

If the small win stop flag is also not set, the performance control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop pattern (miss pattern, big win pattern, small win pattern) (step 090IWS873).

If the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed in step 090IWS873 (Y in step 090IWS874), the presentation control CPU 120 sets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS875). Next, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start command has been received (step 090IWS876). Whether a jackpot start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a jackpot start command reception flag (see step 090IWS622) has been set. If a jackpot start command has not been received, the process ends.

If a jackpot start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 090IWS877). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the performance during the jackpot (step 090IWS878). Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS879), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS880).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the jackpot (step 090IWS881).

If the big win symbol is not displayed in the process of step 090IWS873 (N in step 090IWS874), the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (step 090IWS882). If the small win symbol is displayed in the process of step 090IWS882 (Y in step 090IWS882), the performance control CPU 120 sets the small win stop flag (step 090IWS883). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the small win start command has been received (step 090IWS885). Whether the small win start command has been received can be determined, for example, by checking whether a flag indicating that the small win start command has been received is set in the command analysis process. If the small win start command has not been received, the process ends as is.

If a small hit start command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the small hit stop flag (step 090IWS886). Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time reduction) (step 090IWS887a). If it is a small hit A or a small hit B, a process table for a small hit notification performance that notifies the player that it is a small hit and a right hit instruction A that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Also, if it is not a small hit A or a small hit B, that is, if it is a small hit C (without time reduction), a process data for a V winning promotion performance that encourages the game ball to enter the V winning hole and a right hit instruction B that instructs a right hit is selected (step 090IWS887b). Note that the right hit instruction A and the right hit instruction B have different aspects. Also, the right hit instruction is also different from the right hit instruction C in the time reduction state. For example, the differences in appearance include the size, position, and content of the image for the right-hit instruction.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 090IWS888), and executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as a performance component, and speaker 27 as a performance component) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 090IWS889). The performance control CPU 120 also sets a small win performance period measurement timer to measure the performance period during small win play (step 090IWS890).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during the small win (step 090IWS891).

In this example, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to be in an open state during small win play, so in the small win performance processing, a performance corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning ball device is executed as a small win performance.

If it is determined that there will be neither a big win nor a small win (N in step 090IWS882), i.e., if it is determined that there will be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display start waiting process (step S170) (step 090IWS895).

(Example of performance)
Next, specific examples of the presentation when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs, and when small hit C (without time reduction) will be explained.

Figures 9-8 to 9-10 show the screen transitions when small hit A or small hit B (with time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-8(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning hole, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning hole and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 begins. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, begin to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (B) and (C), let's say that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 stop and the big win symbol creates a normal reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (D), let us assume that the middle decorative pattern 090IW101 stops and the missing pattern stops. At this time, the decorative pattern 090IW101 is not completely stopped, but is in a temporary stopped state that involves shaking. Note that the small pattern 090IW100 continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (E), the temporarily stopped decorative symbol 090IW101 is temporarily erased and the development performance is executed. In this example, the word "Time reduction?" 090IW102, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state, is displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small symbol 090IW100. Note that the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed in a variable manner.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (F), after the development effect shown in Figure 9-8 (E) is executed, the decorative symbol 090IW101 that was temporarily stopped is displayed again. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains displayed.

As shown in Figure 9-8 (G) (H), let us assume that the left and right decorative symbols 090IW101 have stopped and a small win A or small win B is in reach. At this time, the small symbol 090IW100 remains in a fluctuating display.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (I), the remaining decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, and the small win pattern "135" for small win A or small win B stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at "135".

As shown in Figure 9-9 (J), when the small win pattern "135" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-9 (K), when a small win game starts, the background A during a small win is displayed, and the text "small win in progress" 090IW105 is displayed to inform the player that a small win game is in progress. In addition, in the case of a small win A or a small win B, it is difficult to make the game ball enter the V winning hole, making it difficult to generate a big win. For this reason, it is more disappointing for the player than a small win C, which is easier to generate a big win, but in the case of a small win A or a small win B, the V is not won, and the game is controlled to a time-saving state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the special variable winning ball device, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display (right hit instruction A) 090IW106 is displayed in a small and inconspicuous manner at the bottom right of the screen so as not to unnecessarily stir up the player's disappointment. The right hit instruction display 090IW106 is composed of the words "right hit" and an arrow pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW106 less noticeable, the small win background A is a flashy background that attracts the player's interest, such as by featuring a character.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (L), when the small win game state ends without a win in the V winning slot, an ending screen is displayed during the ending period of the small win. For example, a background or character corresponding to the ending screen is displayed.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (M), after the end screen of the small win game is displayed, the start screen of the time-saving mode is displayed. For example, an image indicating that the time-saving mode is starting and the number of times the time-saving mode will change are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 9-9(N), when the display of the start screen of the time-saving state ends, the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right start to change, and control of the time-saving state starts. When control of the time-saving state starts, the background during the time-saving state is displayed, and the number of remaining changes in the time-saving state 090IW107 is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Furthermore, during the time-saving state, a right-hit instruction display (right-hit instruction C) 090IW108 is displayed at the top of the screen to allow the game ball to enter the passing gate 41 and the variable winning ball device 6B. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving state is composed of the characters "right hit" and two arrows pointing to the right. The right-hit instruction display 090IW108 is displayed larger than the right-hit instruction display 090IW106, and the display position is also different.

As shown in Figure 9-9 (O), Figure 9-10 (P) (Q), assume that the decorative pattern 090IW101 stops, the small pattern 090IW100 stops, and the loss pattern stops.

As shown in FIG. 9-10 (R), the next change is then started, and when the display of the decorative pattern 090IW101 and the small pattern 090IW100 changes starts, the remaining number of changes 090IW107 is subtracted. After that, the same control is performed until the time-saving state ends.

Figures 9-11 and 9-12 show the screen transitions when a small hit C (no time reduction) occurs in normal conditions (low probability/low base state).

As shown in FIG. 9-11(A), when controlled in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the image display device 5 displays small symbols 090IW100 on the left, center, and right, which correspond to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, in the upper left. In this example, since in the normal state, a start winning occurs almost always in the first start winning slot, an example is shown in which a game ball wins in the first start winning slot and the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100 begins. Then, linked to the variable display of the small symbol 090IW100, decorative symbols 090IW101 on the left, center, and right, which are larger than the small symbol 090IW100, begin to vary in the center of the screen.

As shown in Figures 9-11 (B), (C), and (D), let us say that the decorative patterns 090IW101 on the left, center, and right stop, and the small win pattern "357" for small win C stops. At this time, the small pattern 090IW100 also stops at the same time as "357".

As shown in Figure 9-11 (E), when the small win pattern "357" stops on the small pattern 090IW100 and the decorative pattern 090IW101, during the pre-opening time before the special variable winning ball device is opened, the words "Small win!" 090IW103, indicating that a small win is about to begin, are displayed in the center of the screen larger than the small pattern 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-11(F), when a small win game is started, the background B during the small win is displayed, and the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to inform the player that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device. In addition, in the case of a small win C, the game ball is more likely to enter the V winning hole, making it easier to generate a big win. This makes the player happy because they can get a large number of balls. Therefore, in order to cause the game ball to enter the special variable winning ball device and generate a big win, a right hit instruction display (right hit instruction B) 090IW110 is displayed, and the right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed in a large and noticeable manner in the center of the screen. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is composed of the characters "right hit" and three arrows pointing to the right. In order to make the right hit instruction display 090IW107 stand out, the background B during the small win is a simple screen without any characters, making it a plain background that does not attract the player's interest. The right hit instruction display 090IW110 is displayed larger than the right hit instruction display 090IW106 during a small win A or B and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during the time-saving mode, and the display position is also different.

In this way, the right hit instruction display 090IW106 for small hit A or small hit B, the right hit instruction display 090IW110 for small hit C, and the right hit instruction display 090IW108 during time-saving are all different in size, display position, and display format (number of arrows).

As shown in Figure 9-11 (G), when a prize is won in the V prize slot and the small win game state ends, the letter "V" 090IW104 is displayed in the center of the screen during the ending period of the small win, indicating that a prize will be won in the V prize slot and a big win will occur.

As shown in FIG. 9-12(H), the word "ROUND2" 090IW111, indicating that the big win game (second round) is about to begin, is then displayed in the center of the screen, larger than the small symbol 090IW100.

As shown in FIG. 9-12 (I), when a jackpot game (second round) starts, a jackpot background is displayed and the game is played in the jackpot game state. The same applies to the third and fourth rounds. Note that in this example, an example of a small jackpot C occurring during normal play is described, but if a small jackpot C occurs during the time-saving state, the same presentation as above is performed during small jackpot play, and a larger right-hit instruction display is displayed than for small jackpot A or small jackpot B. Also, different presentations may be performed for a small jackpot C occurring during normal play and for a small jackpot C occurring during the time-saving state, and the size of the right-hit instruction display may be different.

In this way, in this example, when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, the presentation executed when the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state is different from when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Specifically, when small win A or small win B is generated, the characters "small win in progress" 090IW105 are displayed during small win play to notify that a small win is in progress (Figure 9-9 (K)), while the characters "Aim for V!" 090IW109 are displayed to notify that the game ball will be launched aiming at the V winning hole of the special variable winning ball device (Figure 9-11 (F)). Therefore, the presentation can be executed appropriately when the display result of a small win is derived and displayed.

In this example, the variable winning ball device 6B is provided so that game balls can enter through a right-hit path that allows game balls to flow down by hitting the game ball on the right side of the game area. A launch promotion display is displayed to promote the launch of game balls into the right-hit path, and the launch promotion display is displayed in a different manner when a display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and when a display result of small hit C is derived and displayed. Specifically, since a small hit C is easier to generate a big hit than a small hit A or B, a right-hit instruction display 090IW106 (see FIG. 9-9 (K)) is displayed when a small hit A or B is reached, and a right-hit instruction display 090IW110 (see FIG. 9-11 (F)) is displayed when a small hit C is reached. This allows the game to proceed smoothly.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 9-8(E), it is possible to execute a presentation suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state as a preview presentation of a small win. That is, an advanced presentation is executed, and the word "Time-saving?" 090IW102 is displayed, suggesting that the reel will be controlled to a time-saving state. This increases the variety of pre-reading preview presentations, thereby improving the excitement of the game.

(Modification)
Next, a modified example of the performance executed in this feature unit 090IW will be described. In the modified example, in FIG. 9-2, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device is made different from that when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. In the modified example, when the display result of small hit A or small hit B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small hit C is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device is opened by the same pattern, but by making the time before opening the special variable winning ball device different, the ease of winning the game ball into the V winning port is made different, and whether or not to control to the time-saving state is controlled. Note that the description of the parts common to FIG. 9-2 is omitted.

Figure 9-13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the opening pattern of small win games. Note that the operation of the V prize opening and closing plate is the same for small win A or small win B (with time reduction) and small win C (without time reduction).

As shown in Figure 9-13 (A), in the case of small win A or B (with time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t1 (fanfare time) has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t1 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the closed state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds, the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As shown in Figure 9-12 (B), in the case of small win C (no time reduction), after the small win game starts at timing S1, when the pre-opening period t2 (fanfare time) shorter than the pre-opening period t1 has elapsed, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state at timing S2. By setting the pre-opening period t2 in this way, the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state when the V winning hole opening and closing plate is controlled to the open state. Then, by repeating the operation of opening the special winning hole for 0.05 seconds, closing it for 1 second, and then opening it again for 0.05 seconds in the same pattern as Figure 9-13 (A), the special winning hole is opened 10 times with one small win.

As described above, in this example, the special variable winning ball device can be controlled to an open state using the same pattern when the display result for small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result for small win C is derived and displayed. This allows for optimal control over whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and prevents the user from knowing in advance which small win result will be derived and displayed.

In addition, in this example, a V-winning opening and closing plate is provided that performs the same operation when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed, and the period until the special variable winning ball device is controlled to the open state differs when the display result of small win A or small win B is derived and displayed, and when the display result of small win C is derived and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to the time-saving state.

(Other variations)
In addition, in this characteristic part 090IW, it is possible to provide multiple types of small wins that do not allow the game ball to enter the V winning port. As multiple types of small wins, a small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and a small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port are provided. It is possible to configure the small win that transitions to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, and the small win that does not transition to a time-saving state when the game ball enters the special winning port but does not enter the V winning port, to execute different effects. The effects may be different during either the fluctuation or the small win game state, or both.

In addition, in each of the above-mentioned features and variations, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through the big win state or small win state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without operating the special variable winning ball device 7.

The time-saving symbols mentioned above may be part of the losing symbol or part of the small winning symbol.

In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving patterns, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving patterns, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries such as a lottery random number for a losing pattern, a lottery random number for a big win pattern, a lottery random number for a small win pattern, a random number for determining a big win lottery, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

In addition, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols that are displayed as losing symbols.

In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value; in other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern can be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

In addition, when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is held, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. In addition, a lottery using a structure may be held, for example, a time-saving area may be set inside the special variable winning ball device 7, and the time-saving pattern may be won when the game ball passes through the time-saving area.

In addition, when drawing a lottery for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when using these random number values as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since the settings can affect performance other than the probability of winning.

The timing of the lottery results for the time-saving symbol may be determined after the jackpot has been determined. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but only in the low probability/low base state. However, if the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already in, the number of time-saving times may be reset or the lottery may not be performed, as long as this is determined for each gaming machine.

In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed can be set to a number of predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

In addition, when the number of time-saving patterns differs depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving patterns can be changed between Special Pattern 1 and Special Pattern 2.

In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving periods awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

In addition, a lottery for deriving the time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of times the time-saving function is played may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving function until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of times the time-saving function is played may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

The number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving state may be different between the time-saving state controlled by the time-saving symbol and the time-saving state controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

In addition, in the case of a lottery using a structure, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a specified number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated will be updated.

The time it takes for the time-saving symbol to be confirmed may also be different from the time it takes for the other symbols to be confirmed.

In this example, it is possible to configure the device so that the game is controlled to the time-saving state (so-called ceiling) when the number of times the pattern changes in the normal state reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, a counter is provided to count the number of times the game changes before the game is controlled to the time-saving state, and the counter starts counting when the RAM is initialized (when the clear switch is operated, when the settings are changed, etc.) or when a jackpot is completed. The game is controlled to the time-saving state when the counted number of times the game changes reaches a predetermined number. The counting method may be to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by subtracting the value set in the counter each time the game changes and determining whether the count value has become 0, or to determine whether the number of times the game changes has reached a predetermined number by adding to the counter value each time the game changes. The predetermined number of times until the game is controlled to the time-saving state may be determined by lottery. This makes it impossible to know when the game will be controlled to the time-saving state, which increases the interest of the game.

The predetermined number of times n, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 2.5P≦n≦3.0P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). The predetermined number of times N, which is the number of times the pattern changes before the time-saving state is controlled, can be set to 0.4P≦N≦3.8P, for example, when the denominator of the jackpot probability is P (for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/319, P=319). Note that these are just examples, and P is not limited to these ranges.

In addition, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a jackpot occurs may be the same as the number of times before initialization. In this case, it is expected that the number of times of fluctuation will reach the predetermined number of times P soon after starting the game and will be controlled to the time-saving state, so that the operating rate of the pachinko game machine can be increased.
On the other hand, the setting of the predetermined number of times P when initializing the RAM (when operating the clear switch, changing the settings, etc.) or when a big win occurs may be set so as not to carry over the number of times before the initialization. In this case, all players can play under fair conditions.

In addition, when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number and is controlled to a time-saving state, the time-saving state may be ended when the number of fluctuations reaches an upper limit, or the time-saving state may be continued until the next jackpot.

When the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, counting of the number of fluctuations may be started again. In such a configuration, for example, if an upper limit number of times for the time-saving state is set and the upper limit number is set to a number greater than the predetermined number of times until the time-saving state is entered, the count value will reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state and the upper limit number will be set again, so that the time-saving state can be continued until the next jackpot while the upper limit number is set.

It is also possible to not count the number of changes during the time-saving state. In this case, if a maximum number of times the time-saving state can be entered is set, the time-saving state will end when the number of changes reaches the maximum number.

Also, when the number of fluctuations in the normal state reaches a first number, a lottery may be held to determine whether or not to control to the time-saving state, and if the lottery is not won, the time-saving state may be controlled when the number of fluctuations reaches a second number (the so-called pattern of reaching the ceiling via a false ceiling).

In addition, if a ceiling is set in the feature part IW090 and it is configured to control to the time-saving state when the number of fluctuations reaches a predetermined number, the counter value continues counting without being reset regardless of whether it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving). In the case of a small hit C (without time-saving), if no big hit occurs, the counter value continues counting without being reset. As a result, if it is a small hit A or a small hit B (with time-saving), the count value may reach the predetermined number during the time-saving state after the small hit play ends, and the time-saving state may be extended. Therefore, it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends. Also, even if it becomes a small hit C (without time-saving) and no big hit occurs, there is a possibility that it will be controlled to the time-saving state immediately after the small hit play ends, so it is possible to create a sense of expectation for the development after the small hit play ends.

As explained above, this feature section 090IW discloses the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1) to (Means 8).

(Means 1)
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed,
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
A variable means (e.g., a special variable winning ball device) that has a special area (e.g., a V winning hole) and can be controlled to a first state (e.g., an open state) in which the game medium can easily enter and a second state (e.g., a closed state) in which the game medium cannot or has difficulty entering;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance (for example, a portion that executes step S76 in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 7 ),
When a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed, the variable means can be controlled to the first state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1, a part that executes step S118 in the game control microcomputer 100),
The special display result includes a first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win A or a small win B) and a second special display result different from the first special display result (e.g., a display result of a small win C),
The state control means includes:
In the normal state, when the first special display result (for example, a display result of small win A or small win B) is derived and displayed, if the game medium does not pass through the special area, control is performed to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes the processing of step 090IWS462 when Y is determined in step 090IWS461a, and step 090IWS468 when Y is determined in step 090IWS467a),
In the normal state, if the game medium does not pass through the special area when the second special display result (for example, a display result resulting in a small win C) is derived and displayed, the game is not controlled to the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 9-5, when step 090IWS467 in the game control microcomputer 100 is N, the process of step 090IWS461a and step 090IWS462, or step 090IWS467a and step 090IWS468 is not executed).
The ease of passing through the special area of the gaming medium is different when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in FIG. 9-2 ).
The performance execution means is capable of executing different performances when the variable means enters the first state in the cases where the first special display result is derived and displayed and in the case where the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 9-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 9-9 (K) and Figure 9-11 (F)).
With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably execute a presentation when the special display result is derived and displayed.

In this example, the game is switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the special winning port wins but the V win does not occur, but this is not limited to the above. For example, if a small win occurs, the game may be switched to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the game ball does not win the special winning port.

(Means 2) In Means 1,
The rate at which a specific effect is executed in the effect during variable display differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figures 9-3 and 9-4, an advanced effect is executed when there is a small hit A or a small hit B, but is not executed when there is a small hit C).
With such a configuration, inconsistencies between the look-ahead preview performance and the performance after an advantageous state or a special state can be avoided, so that the look-ahead preview performance can be executed preferably.

(Means 3) In means 1 or means 2,
The variable winning device is provided so that a game medium passing through a predetermined path (for example, a right-hitting path) can enter the variable winning device,
A launch promotion display means for displaying a launch promotion display (e.g., a right-hit instruction display) for promoting the launch of the game medium to the predetermined path (for example, a part for executing steps 090IWS887b and 887c in the performance control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 9-7),
The launch promotion display means performs the launch promotion display in different manners when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in Figure 9-7, the part that executes steps 090IWS887b, 887c in the performance control CPU 120, the part shown in Figure 9-9 (K) and Figure 9-11 (F)).
Such a configuration allows the game to progress smoothly.

In this example, when small win A or small win B occurs, which transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, the special variable winning ball device is set to an open state so that the V is not won, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a small win may be provided that transitions to the time-saving state after the end of the small win game on the condition that the V has not been won, and that opens the special variable winning ball device to make it easier to win a V.

(Means 4) In any one of means 1 to 3,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state using different patterns when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4,
The variable winning means can be controlled to the first state in the same pattern when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately control whether or not to control to a special state, and it is also possible to prevent the special display result that will be derived and displayed from being guessed in advance.

(Means 6) In any one of means 1 to means 5,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
When the first special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that obstructs the passage of the game medium to the special area,
When the second special display result is derived and displayed, the variable winning means is controlled to the first state when the movable member is in a state that does not obstruct the passage of the gaming medium into the special area (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-2).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 7) In any one of means 1 to 6,
the variable winning means includes a movable member (e.g., a V winning opening opening plate) that performs a common operation when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed;
The period until the variable winning means is controlled to the first state differs between when the first special display result is derived and displayed and when the second special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the part shown in Figure 9-13).
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Means 8) In any one of means 1 to means 7,
a plurality of types of special display results in which the game medium does not pass through the special area;
the plurality of types of special display results include a special display result that is controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area, and a special display result that is not controlled to the special state when the game medium does not pass through the special area,
Different presentations are executed when the special display result controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area and when the special display result not controlled to the special state is derived and displayed when the game medium does not pass through the special area.
With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably control whether or not to control to a special state.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 113IW)
Next, the characteristic part 113IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 113IW, the game state is controlled to be either a normal state, a time-saving state, or a probability-changing state (also controlled in the time-saving state). In this example, in the time-saving state, the average special-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal-diagram fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the probability of a "normal-diagram hit" in the normal-diagram game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal-diagram hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal-diagram hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port). It is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in the time-saving state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is easier to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port).

In addition, in this example, the probability of a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the special state compared to the normal state and the time-saving state. In this example, when the special state is entered, the time-saving state is also entered.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the game is controlled to a guaranteed bonus state or a time-saving state after the jackpot game ends, even if the variable display result is a miss, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state based on the derived display of a time-saving miss pattern.

Furthermore, in this example, the machine may be controlled to a time-saving state (rescue time-saving) after the power is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, if the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (800 times in this example) have ended. This time-saving time-saving state is provided to rescue players who have played for a long period of time but have not yet won a jackpot (for example, to reduce the amount of money invested in the game), and is a game state called "play time".

In the following, the time-saving state controlled based on the occurrence of a jackpot will be referred to as "time-saving state A" or "time-saving state via jackpot", the time-saving state controlled based on the stopping of the time-saving failure symbol will be referred to as "time-saving state B" or "time-saving state via time-saving failure", and in this example, the time-saving state controlled when the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power to the gaming machine is turned on (when the RAM clear process is executed) or after the occurrence of a jackpot, "time-saving state C" or "time-saving state via rescue time-saving".

In the time-saving state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the time for which the normal symbol changes, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port), and (4) control to shorten the time for which the special symbol changes can be performed. All of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

For example, the probability of a normal hit in the non-time-saving state (normal state) may be set to 100% (no misses on normal), or the probability of a normal miss may be made extremely low so that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 100%, and in the time-saving state, control (1) may not be performed (i.e., the probability of a normal hit may not be changed from the non-time-saving state) and some or all of the controls (2) to (4) may be performed.

The number of fluctuations n before control is exercised in rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in rescue time reduction are preferably specified as follows:

2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the probability of a jackpot is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. In this example, the probability of a jackpot for each set value s is Since the number of fluctuations for each setting value is different, ns (setting value s: 1 to 6) is as follows. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "1" is about 1/319, the number of fluctuations n1 is The range is 797.5 to 957. When the setting value is "2", the probability of a big win is about 1/310, so the number of fluctuations n2 is 775 to 930. When the setting value is "3", the probability of a big win is Since the probability of a big win is about 1/300, the number of fluctuations n3 is 750 to 900. Since the probability of a big win when the setting value is "4" is about 1/290, the number of fluctuations n4 is 725 to 870. When the setting value is "5", the probability of a jackpot is about 1/280, so the number of fluctuations n5 is 700 to 840. When the setting value is "6", the probability of a jackpot is about 1/270, so The number of fluctuations n6 is 675 to 810. The following description will be given on the assumption that the number of fluctuations n is set to "800", which can be applicable to any of the set values. The time-saving count N is set to "800", which may be the case even when the setting value is set to "1".

Note that although we have set a value for the number of fluctuations n that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1" with the lowest probability of winning is set (as described above, the number of fluctuations n1 is 797.5 to 957). In other words, a value such as "900" may be set as the number of fluctuations n.

Similarly, the number of time-saving times N is set to a value that can be applied regardless of which setting value is set, but it is sufficient to set a value that can be applied when the setting value "1", which has the lowest probability of winning, is set.

In this example, the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are the same value of 800, but the number of fluctuations n may be greater than the number of time-saving times N, or conversely, the number of fluctuations n may be less than the number of time-saving times N.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
10-1 and 10-2 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern table in the feature part 113IW. Among them, FIG. 10-1(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for the big win excluding the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation. Also, FIG. 10-1(B) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table B for the miss in the normal state. Also, FIG. 10-1(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the big win. Also, FIG. 10-1(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the miss in the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss.

Also, FIG. 10-1 (E) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table E for a miss during a time-saving state controlled via a rescue time-saving. Also, FIG. 10-2 (F) and (G) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables F and G for a miss within 10 fluctuations immediately before a rescue time-saving. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (F) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less. Also, the fluctuation pattern table F shown in FIG. 10-2 (G) is a fluctuation pattern table for immediately before a rescue time-saving that is selected when the number of reserved memories (e.g., the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more.

If a miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables F and G shown in Figures 10-2 (F) and (G). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 10-1 (B) even if the miss occurs within the 10 fluctuations immediately prior to the rescue time reduction.

Figure 10-2 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for when a player misses during a high probability state. However, in this example, even if the player is in a high probability state or a time-saving state, if the number of reserved memories is not 1 or more (if there are no reserved memories), the fluctuation pattern is determined using fluctuation pattern table B.

Furthermore, Figures 10-2 (I) and (J) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables I and J for misses during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, fluctuation pattern table I shown in Figure 10-2 (I) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, fluctuation pattern table J shown in Figure 10-2 (J) is a fluctuation pattern table that is selected when in a time-saving state.

In the event of a miss in the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables I and J shown in Figures 10-2 (I) and (J). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table B shown in Figure 10-1 (B) even if the rescue time reduction entry fluctuation results in a miss.

Furthermore, Figures 10-2 (K) and (L) show specific examples of fluctuation pattern tables K and L for jackpots during rescue time-saving entry fluctuations. Of these, the fluctuation pattern table K shown in Figure 10-2 (K) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a non-time-saving state (normal state). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern table L shown in Figure 10-2 (L) is the fluctuation pattern table selected when in a time-saving state.

When a jackpot occurs during a rescue time reduction entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern tables K and L shown in Figures 10-2 (K) and (L). However, during the period from when the RAM is cleared to when a jackpot occurs, the fluctuation pattern is selected using the fluctuation pattern table A shown in Figure 10-1 (A) even if a jackpot occurs during a rescue time reduction entry fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 10-1(A), in this example, when a jackpot is hit, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PB2-1 (normal reach), PB2-2 (super reach α), and PB2-3 (super reach β). The fluctuation pattern for a jackpot has a special chart fluctuation time that is 10,000 ms longer than the fluctuation pattern for a miss that performs the same reach effect. This is because after a reach effect of the same length as the miss fluctuation is performed, a congratulatory effect is performed to celebrate the jackpot, or a re-draw effect is performed to make it look like a new draw is being performed (for example, a re-draw effect is performed in which the jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot A is temporarily stopped and changed to a jackpot symbol showing a 10R jackpot B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this example, if a miss occurs during normal conditions, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1(C), in this example, if a miss occurs during the time-saving state controlled via a jackpot, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (D), in this example, when a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss occurs, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Fig. 10-1(C), Fig. 10-1(D), and Fig. 10-1(E), in this example, during the time-saving state, the probability that the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), and the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-super-shortened fluctuation) are determined is high, and the average fluctuation time is shorter than during the normal state. Furthermore, even during the same time-saving state, during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is 80%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is shorter. Furthermore, during the time-saving state controlled via the rescue time-saving state, the selection probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (ultra-super-shortened fluctuation) is 99%, which is higher than during the time-saving state controlled via the time-saving miss or the jackpot, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(F), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 3 or less, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%. Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2(G), in this example, if the number of reserved memories (for example, the combined number of reserved memories) is 4 or more, if the number of reserved memories is within 10 fluctuations before the rescue time reduction, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation), PA2-1 (normal reach), PA2-2 (super reach α), and PA2-3 (super reach β), and the probability of the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) being determined is high at 90%.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), in this example, if a miss occurs during a special probability state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of the following: fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern having a shorter variation time is higher for the time-saving state that has gone through the rescue time-saving state than for the time-saving state that has gone through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and (E), when determining the variation pattern of the miss variation, the selection rate of the variation pattern with reach effects is lower in the time-saving state that has passed through the rescue time-saving state than in the time-saving state that has passed through the jackpot game state. This makes it possible to suppress the decline in interest when the rescue time-saving state is reached after playing for a long period of time.

As shown in Figure 10-2 (H), in this example, during the special probability state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened fluctuation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average fluctuation time is even shorter than during the time-shortened state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (I), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation results in a miss in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (miss to enter time-saving). If fluctuation pattern PA3-1 is determined, a time-saving entry presentation is performed to notify the user of a transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), in this example, if the rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in the time-saving state results in a miss, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (miss for time-saving promotion). If fluctuation pattern PA3-2 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the user of a transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. Hereinafter, the transition from a time-saving state via a time-saving miss to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving may be referred to as "promotion."

The time-saving entry effect and the time-saving promotion effect are both effects that are performed when the time-saving state C is controlled, but the contents of the effects are different. Specifically, the time-saving entry effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled (see FIG. 10-12 (G)), while the time-saving promotion effect displays a character string on the image display device 5 indicating that the time-saving state C will be controlled and promoted (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). In addition, the time-saving entry effect displays a right-hit notification image to promote right-hitting (see FIG. 10-12 (H)), while the time-saving promotion effect does not display the right-hit notification image (see FIG. 10-15 (D)). In this way, the notification mode of control to the time-saving state C is different between the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C and the case where the time-saving state B is controlled (promoted) to the time-saving state C. This gives players a special feeling when the time-saving state is upgraded, which can increase interest.

The notification manner of control to time-saving state C may be the same when controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C and when controlling (promoting) from time-saving state B to time-saving state C. For example, in either case, variation pattern PA3-1 may be selected and a time-saving entry performance may be performed. This makes it possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and performance data, and to save on memory capacity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (K), in this example, if a jackpot occurs due to a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation in a non-time-saving state, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (time-saving entry pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-3 is determined, a time-saving entry effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (entry) to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving entry effect may be an effect that can be executed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not executed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (L), in this example, if a jackpot occurs in a non-time-saving state due to a time-saving rescue entry fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be PA3-4 (time-saving promotion pseudo jackpot). When fluctuation pattern PA3-4 is determined, a time-saving promotion effect is performed to notify the player of the transition (promotion) to a time-saving state via a time-saving rescue, and then a jackpot is notified and a congratulatory effect or a re-draw effect is performed. Note that the effect performed after the time-saving promotion effect may be an effect that can be performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, but it may also be an effect that is not performed when other fluctuation patterns are selected, which can give the player a sense of surprise and specialness.

Note that the length of the fluctuation time is different between when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a miss and when the rescue time shortening fluctuation results in a jackpot, but it is also possible to select a fluctuation pattern with the same length of fluctuation time, or a common fluctuation pattern. This can reduce memory capacity.

Note that the method for setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in Figures 10-1 and 10-2 is just one example, and various configurations are possible.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (E), during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the selection rate of the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, which is an extremely short fluctuation of 1.5 seconds, is high, and the speed at which the fluctuation display is consumed is fast, so there are few types of preview effects and pre-reading preview effects that can be executed. For example, during the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, effects such as displaying an effect image at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, lighting up lamps or LEDs, outputting a specified sound effect or a sound that stops the fluctuation that is different from normal are executed.

In addition, this example shows a case where a fluctuation pattern table E is provided specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, but it is also possible to configure it so that, for example, without providing a fluctuation pattern table E specifically for the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the fluctuation pattern is determined using a fluctuation pattern table C (see FIG. 10-1 (C)) for the time-saving state via a jackpot.

In addition, in this example, when the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the variation pattern table F or G (see FIG. 10-2 (F) or (G)) is switched to, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the reach rate gradually decreases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases, or the variation pattern table may be configured to switch so that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested only when the number of remaining fluctuations is a dividing number such as 100 or 200.

(Test terminal treatment)
10-3 and 10-4 are flow charts showing an example of a process related to output of each test signal in the test terminal process. The test terminal process is executed in the game control timer interrupt process.

In the test terminal process, the CPU 103 first clears the bits of each signal in the test signal output buffer of the output port buffer (step 113IWS31). Then, if it is during the jackpot pattern determination period (Y in step 113IWS32), during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and the ending period (Y in step 113IWS33), or if any of the time-saving flags are set (Y in step 113IWS34), it sets the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 in the test signal output buffer (step 113IWS35). The time-saving flags include a time-saving flag A indicating time-saving state A, a first time-saving flag B indicating time-saving state B, and a time-saving flag C indicating time-saving state C.

If it is not during the jackpot pattern determination period, not during the jackpot period including the fanfare period and ending period, and none of the time-saving flags are set (N in step 113IWS34), the bit of the launch position designation signal 1 in the test signal output buffer is set (step 113IWS36).

When a jackpot symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period begins (Y in step 113IWS32), whereas when a time-saving loss symbol is displayed in a stopped state in the normal state, the time-saving flag B is set when the symbol stop period of the time-saving loss symbol ends, and the launch position designation signal 3 is output when the symbol stop period ends (Y in step 113IWS34). In other words, the timing of switching the launch position designation signal is configured to differ depending on the trigger for controlling the transition to the time-saving state.

In addition, in this embodiment, by switching the output of the launch position designation signals 1 and 3, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device), but by setting/resetting a single launch position designation signal, information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device). For example, if N is found in step 113IWS34, the process proceeds to step 113IWS37 without processing step 113IWS36, or the process of step 113IWS31 is not performed, and instead of processing step 113IWS36, the process clears the bit of the launch position designation signal 3, so that information indicating which playing style the player is expected to use can be notified to an external device (test device) depending on whether the bit of the launch position designation signal 3 is set.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in the winning symbol confirmation period (Y in step 113IWS37A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 signal (step 113IWS37B) and sets the bit of symbol 1 data bit2 (step 113IWS37C).

Also, when the first special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS37D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 1 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS37E) and sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit1 (step 113IWS37F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS37E and S37F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol has been displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the first special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS37G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 1 data bit 0 (step 113IWS37H).

In addition, if the jackpot pattern determination period for the second special pattern is in progress (Y in step 113IWS38A), the CPU 103 sets the bit for the special pattern 2 hit signal (step 113IWS38B) and sets the bit for pattern 2 data bit2 (step 113IWS38C).

Also, if the second special symbol is in the period in which the time-saving failure symbol is confirmed (Y in step 113IWS38D), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the special symbol 2 time-saving failure signal (step 113IWS38E) and sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit1 (step 113IWS38F). Note that the processing of steps 113IWS38E and S38F can be output even if the rescue time-saving count counter has reached 0. As described below, when the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped during a rescue time-saving entry fluctuation, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state is given priority over the time-saving state via the time-saving failure, but even in this case, a signal indicating that the time-saving failure symbol is displayed as stopped is appropriately output to the outside.

In addition, if the second special symbol is in a pattern confirmation period without time reduction (Y in step 113IWS38G), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the symbol 2 data bit 0 (step 113IWS38H).

In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39A), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 1 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39B). In addition, when the number of rescue time reductions is reached based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS39C), the CPU 103 sets a bit of a special symbol 2 rescue time reach signal (step 113IWS39D). Specifically, when the time reduction flag C is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation is the basis for which rescue time reduction. In this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the first special pattern, but the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the first special pattern. Similarly, in this example, the special pattern 1 rescue count reaching signal is output instantaneously when the rescue time reduction count is reached based on the variation of the second special pattern, but the special pattern 2 rescue count reaching signal may be output continuously during the period in which the time reduction state via rescue time reduction is controlled based on the variation of the second special pattern.

If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40B). If the high probability state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS40C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 high probability state signal (step 113IWS40D). Specifically, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer when the high probability state flag is set, and it is possible to specify based on the flag which special symbol variation has been used to control the high probability state.

If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the first special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41A), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 1 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41B). If the time-saving state is being controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol (Y in step 113IWS41C), the CPU 103 sets a bit for the special symbol 2 variation time-saving state signal (step 113IWS41D). Specifically, when the time-saving flag is set, a flag is set depending on whether the data "first" or "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, and based on the flag, it is possible to specify which special symbol variation has been used to control the probability variable state.

Furthermore, if the time-saving flag A is set (Y in step 113IWS42A), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 (step 113IWS42B). If the time-saving flag B is set (Y in step 113IWS42C), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 2 (step 113IWS42D). If the time-saving flag C is set (Y in step 113IWS42E), the CPU 103 sets the bit of the easy-to-win state designation signal 3 (step 113IWS42F). As described below, when a jackpot occurs in the time-saving state, the time-saving flags are reset when the jackpot fluctuation stops, and the time-saving flag A can be set when the jackpot ends. Therefore, when a 10R jackpot A occurs in the time-saving state A, the easy-to-win state designation signal 1 is temporarily turned off during the period from when the jackpot fluctuation stops to when the jackpot ends.

Then, the CPU 103 outputs the contents of the test signal output buffer to the output port (step 113IWS43), thereby transmitting each signal as a test signal to the test signal terminal. By outputting the test signals in this manner, the internal state of the gaming machine can be identified on the testing device side.

(Customer waiting demo performance control process)
FIG. 10-5 is a flow chart showing the customer waiting demo performance control process. The customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed after step S161 in the performance control process and before steps S170 to S177. In other words, the customer waiting demo performance control process is a process that is performed every time the performance control process is performed. In the customer waiting demo performance control process, when 10 seconds have passed since the performance control CPU 120 received the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 performs a telop display execution lottery process to determine whether or not to execute a telop display performance (step 113 IWS 250 Y, S251). Specifically, the CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a telop display performance by using a telop display execution lottery table according to the set value.

Figures 10-6 (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display execution lottery table. In the caption display execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a caption display effect will be executed is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 10-6 (A) and (B), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 10-6 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 10-6 (B) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display execution lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display execution lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6 (A) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 30% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 70% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 40% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 60% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 50% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 50% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 55% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 45% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

When the caption display execution lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (B) is used, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, it is determined 60% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 40% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, it is determined 70% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 30% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, it is determined 80% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 20% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, it is determined 85% of the time that the caption display effect will be executed, and 15% of the time that the caption display effect will not be executed.

In this way, the system is configured so that the rate at which the caption display effect is executed is higher when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed, and also prevents the player from suffering a disadvantage due to ending play just before the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed is reached.

In this way, the system is configured to execute the telop display effect at a higher rate when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the frequency with which the telop display effect is executed.

The system is also configured so that the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the rate at which the caption display effect is executed. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the frequency at which the caption display effect is executed.

The number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction can be specified by the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. In other words, before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 200 times until the rescue time reduction but before the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, and after the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is received indicating that there are 100 times until the rescue time reduction, the lottery is held assuming that the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 100 or less.

When it is decided to execute a subtitle display effect, the effect control CPU 120 performs a subtitle display mode determination lottery process to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect (step 113IWS253). Specifically, the subtitle display mode determination lottery table according to the set value is used to determine the mode of the subtitle display effect.

Figures 10-6 (C) and (D) are explanatory diagrams showing the caption display mode determination lottery table. In the caption display mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the performance mode of the caption display performance (the color of the frame of the caption display area; blue, red) is assigned for each remaining number of times until the rescue time reduction, but in the example shown in Figures 10-6 (C) and (D), the ratio of the assigned judgment value is shown to simplify the explanation. The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the caption display mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

Figure 10-6 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "1" is set. Figure 10-6 (D) is an explanatory diagram showing the caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting value "6" is set. The caption display mode determination lottery table used when the setting values "2" to "5" are set is not shown.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "1") shown in FIG. 10-6(C) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 40%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 60%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 85%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 15%.

When the telop display mode determination lottery table (set value "6") shown in FIG. 10-6 (D) is used, if the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 201 or more, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 70%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 30%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 101 to 200, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 80%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 20%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 11 to 100, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 90%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 10%. If the number of remaining times until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be red at a rate of 95%, and the color of the frame of the telop display area is determined to be blue at a rate of 5%.

In this way, the frame of the caption display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less than when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more. This increases interest by making the player look forward to reaching the number of times the rescue time reduction can be changed.

In this way, the frame of the telop display area is configured to be displayed in red more frequently when the setting value is set to "6" than when the setting value is set to "1." This allows the player to predict the setting value based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

In addition, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, the higher the percentage of the frame of the telop display area that is displayed in red. This allows the player to predict the number of remaining changes until the rescue time-saving feature is activated based on the presentation mode of the telop display presentation.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts a caption display performance that displays the caption display area in the determined manner (step 113IWS254).

In addition, if three minutes have passed since receiving the customer waiting demo designation command, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying the demo movie (Y in step 113IWS255, S256).

The captions and demo movie displayed here will end when the game ball passes through the starting hole, the next variation begins, or a player operation is detected.

Figure 10-7 is a flowchart showing an example of the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in Figure 10-7, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a new start winning command has been received (step 113 IWS 1011), and if not, ends the advance notice setting process.

The start winning command is a command that indicates the winning judgment result obtained when the game control microcomputer 100 extracts a random number value to determine the display result (including the type of jackpot) and the fluctuation pattern when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B, and predicts and judges the display result and the fluctuation pattern based on the extracted random number value. The start winning command is transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 when a start winning occurs in the winning ball device 6A or the variable winning ball device 6B. Examples of start winning commands include a pattern designation command, a fluctuation category command, a start winning designation command, and a combined reserved memory number designation command.

The pattern designation command is a presentation control command that indicates whether or not a winning combination will result in a jackpot and the type of winning combination. The variable category command is a presentation control command that indicates the range of judgment values that the value of the random number for determining the type of variable pattern falls within (the result of determining the type of variable pattern). The start winning combination command is a presentation control command that indicates which of the first and second start winning combinations has been selected as the start winning combination. The combined reserved memory number designation command is a presentation control command that specifies the total number (combined reserved memory number) that is the sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

In this embodiment, it is possible to determine, based on the fluctuation category command, whether the fluctuation is accompanied by a super reach, a normal reach, a pseudo-consecutive, or if it is a pseudo-consecutive, how many times the fluctuation is repeated, or whether it is undetermined. "Undetermined" refers to a case where the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determination random number obtained at the time of the start winning differs depending on the number of reserved memories at the start of the fluctuation corresponding to the start winning.

The start-win command received from the game control microcomputer 100 is temporarily stored in a start-win command storage area formed in RAM. Specifically, in the command analysis process (step S75), the performance control CPU 120 stores the commands in the first free storage area of the start-win command storage area in the order in which they were received. Then, each time the display of the decorative pattern begins to change (each time a combined reserved memory count subtraction command is received), each command stored in the start-win command storage area is deleted from the one stored in the first storage area 1, and the contents of the start-win command storage area are shifted.

If a new start winning command is received in step 113IWS1011, the performance control CPU 120 starts displaying a new pending display (step 113IWS1012). Then, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead flag indicating that a look-ahead preview performance is being executed is set (step 113IWS1013), and if it is set, the look-ahead preview setting process ends. If it is not set, it is determined whether or not it is controlled to a time-saving state (step 113IWS1014), and if it is controlled to a time-saving state, it proceeds to step 113IWS1016.

If the time-saving state is not being controlled, the number of reserved memories is compared with the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state (step 113IWS1015), and if the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of reserved memories is equal to or less than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state, it is determined whether or not the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less (step 113IWS1016). If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is 10 or less, the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. If the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving state is not 10 or less, a pre-reading performance execution lottery is held to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance. Specifically, a pre-reading notice performance execution lottery table is used to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading notice performance.

In the lottery table for the execution of the pre-reading preview performance, a judgment value is assigned for each winning judgment result (jackpot, miss with time-saving feature, miss without time-saving feature) as to whether or not the pre-reading preview performance will be executed, and if so, the performance mode (first mode, second mode) of the pre-reading preview performance.

The first aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in red as a countdown, and the second aspect of the look-ahead preview performance is a performance in which the number of changes until the predicted target of the look-ahead preview performance starts to change is displayed in blue as a countdown.

For example, if the winning judgment result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 30% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 40% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 60% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed. If the winning judgment result is a miss with no time reduction, there is a 4% chance that the first mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, a 6% chance that the second mode of pre-reading preview performance will be performed, and a 90% chance that the pre-reading preview performance will not be performed.

In this way, the first mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a jackpot and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a jackpot. Also, the second mode of the look-ahead preview performance can be performed in both cases of a miss with no time-saving feature and a miss with no time-saving feature, so it is a look-ahead preview performance that suggests control will be made to a miss with no time-saving feature.

If it is decided to execute a look-ahead preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 displays the look-ahead display area and countdown display on the image display unit 5 (step 113IWS1019) and sets the look-ahead flag (step 113IWS1020).

In this way, by processing step 113IWS1015, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, that is, when the number of reserved memories is greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited) for a reserved memory that is stored before the rescue time reduction change is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after control is given to a time reduction state via the rescue time reduction. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the rescue time reduction, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance.

In addition, by performing the processing of step 113IWS1016, if the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is restricted (prohibited). This prevents the countdown performance corresponding to the control of the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview performance from being executed at the same time.

For example, in a gaming machine capable of displaying a countdown when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and a countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect, if the countdown display when the number of times the rescue time reduction has been reached and the countdown display as a look-ahead preview effect are allowed to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is expected that the presentation will become complicated. In particular, if the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect both involve countdown displays, it will be difficult to know which countdown display to pay attention to, which is likely to reduce the presentation effect. Therefore, by configuring the presentation showing the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction and the look-ahead preview effect not to be executed in an overlapping manner, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the presentation effect.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 10-8 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 113IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 113IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 113IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 113IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 113IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 113IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 113IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot A", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same even number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot A symbol). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates "10R jackpot B", the performance control CPU 120 determines a decorative pattern combination in which three symbols are the same odd number symbols as the stopping symbols (10R jackpot B symbol).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach performance is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. Note that the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the losing symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond symbol) depending on the type of time-saving.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of patterns in which the left, center, and right are all the same) are called jackpot patterns. Stopping patterns that evoke a loss are called loss patterns.

The performance control CPU 120 also performs a preview performance setting process to set a preview performance that indicates the reliability of controlling to a jackpot game state (step 113IWS802A). Specifically, in the preview performance setting process, a preview performance execution lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance, and if it is decided to execute a preview performance, a preview performance mode determination lottery table according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is used to determine the performance mode of the preview performance to be executed, and sets the execution of the preview performance of the determined performance mode. Then, although not shown in the figure, the process table including the preview performance set here is selected in steps 113IWS804, S806, and S807 described later.

In the preview performance execution lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to whether or not a preview performance will be executed is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance execution lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction > 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 10% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 90% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

When the preview performance execution lottery table (number of remaining changes until rescue time reduction ≦ 10) is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, there is a 70% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 30% chance that the preview performance will not be executed. If the variable display result is a miss, there is a 1% chance that the preview performance will be executed, and a 99% chance that the preview performance will not be executed.

In this way, the configuration makes it easier to execute a preview performance when the fluctuation indicates a big win than when the fluctuation indicates a miss.

In addition, in this way, the configuration is such that the probability of executing a preview performance when the variable display result is a miss is lower when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

In the preview performance mode determination lottery table, a judgment value corresponding to the preview performance mode (color of the character to be displayed; blue, red) is assigned for each variable display result (jackpot, miss). The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for the preview performance mode determination lottery and determines the decision item to which a judgment value matching the extracted random number is assigned.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 10% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 90% of the time.

When the preview performance mode determination lottery table is used, if the variable display result is a jackpot, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 70% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 30% of the time. If the variable display result is a miss, red is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 1% of the time, and blue is determined as the color of the characters displayed in the preview performance 99% of the time.

In this way, red is more likely to be selected as the color of the character displayed in the preview performance in the case of a jackpot fluctuation than in the case of a miss fluctuation.

In addition, in this way, red is more likely to be selected as the character color when the variable display result is a miss when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is more than 10. This makes it possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the period when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less.

Next, if the look-ahead flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 updates the countdown display in the look-ahead preview performance (steps 113IWS802B, S802C). Then, it checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 (step 113IWS803). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700 can be determined, for example, by checking whether a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 100), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "100 times" is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is "07 (H)" (if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached is 700), a process table including a promotional performance corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations "800 times" is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less (step 113IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is 10 or less can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less.

If the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and an effect performance according to the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached (step 113IWS806). For example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "0A (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "10" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Also, for example, if the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is "01 (H)" (if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 1), a process table including a countdown performance according to the count number "1" until the rescue time reduction is reached is selected. Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

In this example, the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and a teasing effect or a countdown effect is executed, but this is not limited to the above. For example, when a background designation command that designates a background image is transmitted, the EXT data of the background designation command may be set to a value corresponding to the remaining number of changes until the rescue time reduction occurs and transmitted. The performance control CPU 120 may then determine the remaining number of changes based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute a teasing effect or a countdown effect.

In addition, in this example, even if the number of fluctuations for the rescue time reduction is reached, if a jackpot fluctuation occurs, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual is used, but this is not limited to this, and the fluctuation display may be configured to be executed using a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach performance with a short fluctuation time.

In addition, in this example, if the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less, an effect presentation is performed in which an effect image is displayed on the image display device 5. For example, the fewer the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached, the wider the display range of the effect image on the image display device 5 becomes.

In addition, the processing of steps 113IWS803 to S806 can be performed regardless of the game state. This makes it possible to execute hype effects, countdown effects, and effect effects according to the remaining number of plays, just as when controlled to the normal state, even when controlled to the time-saving state B, and provides a sense of relief time-saving even in the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

If the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction occurs is not 10 or less (N in step 113IWS805), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern (step 113IWS807). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS808.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS808).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 80. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS809). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 113IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 113IWS810).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 113IWS811).

(Variable display performance processing)
10-9 and 10-10 are flow charts showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 113IWS841) and subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 113IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 113IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer is set to the next process timer setting value in the process table (step 113IWS844). In addition, the control state for the performance device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data that are set next (step 113IWS845).

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether or not it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command (step 113IWS846). Specifically, it checks whether or not the first confirmation A command reception flag or the second confirmation A command reception flag is set in the command analysis process. If it has received the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the mode transition designation (a designation that notifies the player of a transition to a time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-hit notification (step 113IWS847). Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance starts the process timer in process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS848). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS849). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS850). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, when the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time-saving function has missed during normal operation and cases where the time-saving function has rescued. In step 113 IWS847, if the time-saving function has missed during normal operation, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for time-saving function misses and the right-hit notification is selected, and if the time-saving function has rescued, a process table corresponding to the mode transition effect for rescue time-saving function and the right-hit notification is selected. Whether the time-saving function has rescued and the first pattern confirmation A designation command or the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the EXT data of the received rescue time-saving count 1 designation command is "00 (H)".

If neither the first pattern confirmation A designation command nor the second pattern confirmation A designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received (step 113IWS856). Specifically, it checks whether the first confirmation B command reception flag or the second confirmation B command reception flag has been set in the command analysis process. If the first pattern confirmation B designation command or the second pattern confirmation B designation command has been received, it proceeds to step 113IWS858.

If neither the first pattern determination B designation command nor the second pattern determination B designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 113IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first pattern determination B designation command or the second pattern determination B designation command is received (Y in step 113IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y in step 113IWS857), the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table corresponding to the normal pattern determination display (step 113IWS858). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 113IWS859). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 113IWS860). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a determined performance period timer for measuring the pattern determination period on the performance control means side (step 113IWS861). Then, the process proceeds to step 113IWS861A.

In this example, in addition to when a pattern determination command is received, if the variable time timer times out (see step 113IWS857), the process proceeds to step 113IWS858 and onwards and the pattern determination period begins. However, unless a pattern determination command is missed, step 113IWS857 will normally be judged as Y and the process will not proceed to step 113IWS858 and onwards.

In step 113IWS861A, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance (step 113IWS861A). For example, the value of the number of reserved memories when the look-ahead preview performance starts is set as the number of times K the look-ahead preview performance is executed, and the number of times K is subtracted by one when the change starts. When the subtraction result becomes 0, the change can be determined to be the target change of the look-ahead preview performance. If the change is the target change of the look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead flag is reset (step 113IWS861B) and the process proceeds to step 113IWS862. In this way, the look-ahead flag is set when the look-ahead preview performance starts, and the look-ahead flag is reset when the change of the preview target change of the look-ahead preview performance stops, and the look-ahead preview performance targeting the reserved memory that occurred while the look-ahead flag was set is not performed, so that multiple look-ahead preview performances are not executed in duplicate. Note that multiple look-ahead preview performances may be executed in duplicate.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 updates the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the special chart hit waiting process (step S173) (step 113IWS862).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving, will be described. Figures 10-11 to 10-15 are explanatory diagrams for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time-saving state. In Figures 10-11 to 10-15, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

Figures 10-11 to 10-14 show specific examples of the presentation mode when the normal state is controlled to time-saving state C. Figure 10-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to time-saving state C from time-saving state B.

As shown in FIG. 10-11(A), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is displayed every 100 spins when the symbols stop. In this example, in the image display device 5, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is displayed in the center of the screen, and the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed in the upper right. Then, for example, when there are 700 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the combination of symbols "134") is derived and displayed. At this time, the remaining spin count display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left, saying "700 spins left to start the rescue time reduction!". At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time reduction is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10-11(B), for example, when there are 600 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 and the small symbol 113IW101 stop and a missing symbol (in this example, the symbol combination "423") is derived and displayed. At this time, as in FIG. 10-11(A), the remaining spins display 113IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying "600 spins left until rescue time-saving mode begins!" At this time, an explanation of the effects of the rescue time-saving mode is displayed at the bottom of the screen by the caption display 113IW103.

In this example, as shown in Figures 10-11 (A) and (B), a teasing effect suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is performed every 100 changes, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the teasing effect may be configured not to be performed when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is between 400 and 700, but to be performed when the number of remaining changes is 300 or less (i.e., the remaining number of changes is 300, 200, or 100).

In addition, instead of necessarily executing the teasing effect when the number of remaining fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command specifying the number of rescue time reductions to be 2 is received, a lottery process based on random numbers is performed, and if it is decided to execute the teasing effect, the teasing effect is executed in the manner shown in Figures 10-11 (A) and (B). In this case, it is desirable to configure so that the execution rate of the teasing effect increases as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is reached decreases.

As shown in Figures 10-11(C) to 10-12(E), when there are 10 spins remaining before the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed when the symbol stops, but only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed, and a countdown display 113IW104 according to the remaining number of spins is displayed in the center of the screen. For example, the countdown display 113IW104 shows a countdown from "10" to "1" each time the symbol stops after the display of the varying symbols ends. Each figure shows an example in which a losing symbol (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", "278", and "216") is derived and displayed.

As shown in Fig. 10-11(C) to Fig. 10-12(E), after 10 spins remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving mode, an effect effect is performed in which an effect image in a display range according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is displayed, and as shown in Fig. 10-12(F) to Fig. 10-12(H), in a fluctuation in which the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving mode is 0, a time-saving entry effect is performed, the symbols stop, and the losing symbols (in this example, the combination of symbols "254") are displayed. At this time, the decorative symbols may not be displayed, and the losing symbols may be displayed only in the small symbols. Note that Fig. 10-12(G) and (H) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are temporarily stopped, and the special symbols continue to fluctuate. Fig. 10-13(I) to Fig. 10-14(M) show a period in which the losing symbols as small symbols are displayed as confirmed, and the special symbols also stop fluctuating.

In addition, in FIG. 10-12 (G), a character string indicating that the time-saving state will be controlled to 800 times is displayed on the image display device 5, thereby notifying the control to time-saving state C. Then, in FIG. 10-12 (H), a right-hit promotion image to promote right-hitting is displayed on the image display device 5. Note that since the case of controlling from the normal state to time-saving state C is shown here, the right-hit promotion image is displayed, but since right-hitting has already been performed when controlling from time-saving state B to time-saving state C, the display of the right-hit notification image is limited when the pattern stops (see FIG. 10-15 (D)).

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13(I), when the period for determining the symbol is entered, the mode effect start display 113IW105 "Super Hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect begins. Note that from this point on, in the mode transition effect, the decorative symbol 113IW100 is not displayed, and only the small symbol 113IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 10-13(J), when the mode transition presentation starts, an operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, which suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B. For example, the operation suggestion image 113IW106 displays the word "press" together with an image encouraging the pressing of the push button 31B.

As shown in FIG. 10-13(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 113IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display of the operation suggestion image 113IW106, the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1" is displayed, notifying the player that the rescue time reduction will begin. In addition, the right-hit instruction display 113IW108, which instructs the player to hit to the right, is displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

In this example, even if a jackpot is hit, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) can be configured to execute a presentation that displays the text display "V STOCK x 1" in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K). In this case, for example, in the start winning judgment process (step S101), the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a look-ahead judgment process to determine whether or not a jackpot will be hit and the type of fluctuation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead judgment result designation command that can identify the look-ahead judgment result. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance (so-called reserved consecutive performance) in the same manner as in FIG. 10-13 (K) based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one item in the reserved memory that will be a jackpot based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the reserved consecutive performance is executed by displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1". Also, for example, if it is determined based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command that there are two jackpots in the reserved memory, the text display "V STOCK x 2" is displayed to execute the reserved consecutive performance.

On the other hand, when the rescue time reduction is activated, there is a high probability that the extremely short fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction (see FIG. 10-1 (E)). Therefore, the fluctuation display will be consumed very quickly and a jackpot is likely to occur at a relatively early timing. Therefore, during the fluctuation display that has been activated by the rescue time reduction (in this example, the pattern determination period), the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is executed without checking the results of the pre-reading judgment. Therefore, the effect of displaying the text display "V STOCK x 1" shown in FIG. 10-13 (K) is an effect in the same manner as the pseudo-reserved consecutive effect, and is an effect that notifies the user that the rescue time reduction has been activated.

In addition, if the fluctuation that has reached the rescue time reduction is a jackpot fluctuation, for example, 30 seconds may be secured as the fluctuation time, and a performance that appears to be the rescue time reduction may be executed first, followed by a performance that notifies of a jackpot.

Although the example shows a case where the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 starts from the timing of the display of the text display 113IW107 "V STOCK x 1", the timing of the start of the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 113IW108 may start from the timing of the confirmation display of the stop pattern shown in FIG. 10-12 (H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-13 (L), a mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed to select the presentation mode for the rescue time reduction. For example, a screen to select one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode is selected by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined time has passed without selecting a presentation mode, the presentation mode that the cursor is aligned with is automatically confirmed. Also, even when the mode selection screen 113IW109 is displayed, the right hit instruction display 113IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 113IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-14 (M), when the selection of the presentation mode is completed, a start notification screen 113IW110 is displayed to notify the user that the rescue time reduction will begin. For example, the words "Rescue time reduction entered" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation begins, the game transitions to time reduction state C, and the rescue time reduction begins.

In this example, when the pattern stops, the remaining number of spins until the rescue time-saving feature and the explanation of the effects during the rescue time-saving feature and a countdown are displayed, but this may also be done when the pattern starts to change or while it is changing.

In addition, in this example, a pattern determination period of 20 seconds is secured in the variable display that results in rescue time reduction, and a mode transition effect and right-hit notification are executed, but the pattern determination period may remain the usual 0.5 seconds, and the game may be configured to transition directly to the time-saving state via rescue time reduction without performing a mode transition effect, etc.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed or when a jackpot is hit, but for example, when configuring to execute a story-based presentation (for example, a story reach presentation or a story such as whether to perform high-speed fluctuation), the selection buffer for that story and the story counter may also be cleared. Also, it may be possible to configure it so that a story can be set when the rescue time reduction is activated, or so that different stories can be set depending on the game state.

In this way, Fig. 10-11 to Fig. 10-14 show the case where the normal state is controlled to the time-saving state C, while Fig. 10-15 shows a specific example of the presentation mode when the time-saving state is controlled to the time-saving state C from the time-saving state B. For example, Fig. 10-15 (A) and (B) show examples of the display of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state B in the time-saving state B, in addition to the display of Fig. 10-11 (C) and Fig. 10-12 (E) showing examples of the display of the timing when there are 10 spins and 1 spin remaining until the transition to the rescue time-saving state in the normal state, a right-hit notification presentation (display of a right-pointing arrow image) is performed due to the time-saving state. This right-hit notification presentation is performed continuously while the time-saving state is controlled. It is to be noted that the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 10-15 (A) is 60, and the value of the time-saving state counter in Fig. 10-15 (B) is 51.

As shown in Figures 10-15(C) and (D), when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0, a time-saving promotion effect is performed. Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-15(D), a character string indicating the promotion is displayed. At this time, unlike Figure 10-12(H), the right-hit notification image is not displayed again because the game is already controlled to the time-saving state.

The countdown effect and the effect effect are executed only when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10, but this is not limited to this. For example, the countdown effect and the effect effect may be executed at a timing other than when the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is 10 (by executing a so-called false effect) to make the player expect to enter the rescue time reduction. In this case, for example, the change when the time reduction counter value is 50 may be ended, and the countdown display and the effect display may be started when the next change is started, and the countdown display and the effect display may be performed over multiple changes, and the countdown display and the effect display may be ended at a predetermined timing (in the illustrated example, the third change after the countdown display and the effect display were started). This false effect is not limited to being executed when the time reduction counter value is 50, but may also be executed when the time reduction counter value is 100 or 200.

The rate at which false effects are executed may also differ depending on the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period; for example, the rate at which they occur may be higher the fewer the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving period. This allows the player to feel that the rescue time-saving period is approaching, increasing interest. Also, this false effect may not be executed when a fluctuation pattern with a long fluctuation time (for example, a fluctuation pattern involving an SP reach) is selected.

As explained above, this characteristic part 113IW includes the following inventions:

As described in JP2005-95449A, there have been gaming machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the counting result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been gaming machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the counting result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the presentation control in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 113-1) to (means 113-7) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 113-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A variable display execution means (e.g., a part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a fluctuating game state);
A reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied;
A determination means capable of determining to control to an advantageous state;
A determination means (for example, a part that executes step S101 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of determining that the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state before the determination by the determination means;
a specific suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes step 113IWS1019 in the performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a specific suggestion performance (for example, a first mode of foresight notice performance. Specific examples of foresight notice performance are not limited to a countdown display, but may be a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is stopped and displayed, a hold change performance in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, or a zone performance in which a special background is displayed), which suggests that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state based on the judgment result by the judgment means;
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which a starting condition is more easily satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means can control the state to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., a value of a rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
The device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S113IWS804, S806, and S254 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute special suggestion effects (e.g., teasing effects, countdown effects, effect effects, and subtitle display effects) related to the establishment of a special condition,
The specific suggestion performance execution means is
It is possible to restrict the execution of a specific suggestion performance that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied (for example, when Y is determined in step 113IWS1015, the performance control CPU 120 prohibits the execution of a first mode of pre-reading preview performance that spans before and after the start of control for the rescue time reduction by not executing 113IWS1019).
A gaming machine characterized in that the execution of a specific suggestion presentation is restricted during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the presentation control CPU 120 is Y, step 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of a first type of pre-reading preview presentation in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

With this configuration, it is possible to prevent problems with the presentation while preventing the presentation from becoming too complicated and reducing a decline in interest.

In this example, if the game is already controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state is not prohibited (if step 113IWS1014 is Y, step 113IWS1015 is not performed), but this is not limited to this, and even if the game is controlled to the time-saving state, the execution of a pre-reading preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to the rescue time-saving state may be prohibited.

In addition, in this example, a special suggestion effect is executed during a specified period until the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value corresponding to a specified number of times less than the special number of times, and the execution of the specific suggestion effect is restricted during the specified period. Specifically, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction reaches 10, the execution of the countdown effect is started and the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is prohibited. This prevents the special suggestion effect and the specific suggestion effect from being executed at the same time, which prevents the effect from becoming complicated and reduces a decline in interest.

In addition, in this example, the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that spans both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performances, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performances may be prohibited from being executed if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) even if they span both before and after the start of control to reduce the rescue time.

Similarly, in this example, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction is prohibited, but the restriction method is not limited to this. For example, in a gaming machine capable of executing multiple types of look-ahead preview performance, some of the multiple types of look-ahead preview performance may be prohibited from being executed in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction, while other look-ahead preview performances may not be prohibited from being executed (may be executed) in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-2) In the means 113-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means, when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed, can control to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of the special condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened by giving priority to control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state rather than control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, and thereby controls to the time-shortened state via rescue time-shortened when a time-shortened miss pattern is stopped and displayed in a fluctuation that results in rescue time-shortened (fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0)).
The display control device further includes a special suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a portion that executes step 113IWS1019 in the effect control CPU 120) that can execute a special suggestion effect (e.g., a pre-reading notice effect of the second mode) that suggests that a special display result will be derived and displayed based on the determination result by the determination means,
The special suggestion effect execution means may restrict the execution of the special suggestion effect during a specified period from when the numerical information updated by the update means reaches a specific value from a specified value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "10") corresponding to a specified number of times (e.g., 790 times) that is less than the special number of times (e.g., 790 times) (e.g., when step 113IWS1016 in the effect control CPU 120 is Y, 113IWS1019 is not executed, thereby prohibiting the execution of the second type of pre-reading preview effect in the fluctuation immediately before control to the rescue time reduction).

This configuration makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated, suppressing a decline in interest, and increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 113-3) In means 113-1 or 113-2, the execution rate of the special suggestion effect may be higher in a predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is 11 or more) (see Figures 10-6 (A) and (B)).

This configuration can increase interest by making players look forward to the realization of special conditions, and can also prevent players from suffering disadvantages due to ending play just before a special condition is realized.

(Means 113-4) In any of means 113-1 to 113-3, the special suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of the special suggestion effect to be executed by one of a plurality of effect modes depending on the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction) (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D)).

This configuration makes players look forward to the realization of special conditions, increasing interest.

In addition to the caption display effects, if the execution of promotional effects, countdown effects, and effect effects that indicate the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is determined by lottery, the execution rate may vary depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

(Means 113-5) Any of means 113-1 to 113-4 may be provided with an explanatory performance execution means capable of executing an explanatory performance regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (see Figures 10-11 (A) and (B)).

Such a configuration can improve players' understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

The explanation performance may also be executed at a different rate or at a different rate depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. For example, the explanation performance may be executed at a higher rate the fewer the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction. In addition, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, the execution rate of the explanation performance may be lowered to prevent a reduction in the performance effect of the countdown performance or effect performance that indicates the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction.

(Means 113-6) In any of means 113-1 to 113-5, the special suggestion effect execution means may execute, as the special suggestion effect, a first special suggestion effect (e.g., a teasing effect, a countdown effect) in which it is easy to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met, and a second special suggestion effect (e.g., an effect effect, a caption display effect) in which it is more difficult to identify the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met than the first special suggestion effect (see Figures 10-11 (C) to 10-12 (E)).

Such a configuration can increase the player's interest in playing the game.

(Means 113-7) In any of the means 113-1 to 113-6, when variable display is not being performed and hold information is not stored in the hold storage means, a predetermined image display means (for example, a part in the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS256) capable of displaying a predetermined image (for example, a demo movie) is provided;
The special suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a special suggestion effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when a specified image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the specified image or the suggestion effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously), and the rate at which the special suggestion effect is executed when a specified image is displayed may differ depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met (see Figures 10-6 (A) and (B)).

With this configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not a special suggestion effect is being performed, and to promote operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, the selection ratio of the special suggestion effect mode when a specific image is displayed may be changed depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until the special condition is met (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the special suggestion effect mode, increasing interest and promoting operation of the gaming machine.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state when the count result reaches a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., when a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) changes without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) when the count result reaches a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the variable display number, there was insufficient interest when the special condition for the variable display number was established. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 114-1) to (means 114-8) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 114-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A state control means capable of controlling the display to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
When a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, the special state can be controlled;
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means can control to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the establishment of a special condition based on the establishment of the special condition when the state is controlled to a special state of an advantageous degree corresponding to the derivation and display of the special display result (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls (promotes) to a time-shortening state via a rescue time-shortening state based on the reaching of a rescue time-shortening fluctuation when controlled to a time-shortening state via a time-shortening loss);
Further, when a special condition is satisfied, a notification effect execution means (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 that performs steps S113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a notification effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect, a time-saving promotion effect) that notifies the satisfaction of the special condition is provided.
The gaming machine is characterized in that the notification effect execution means is capable of executing a notification effect based on the establishment of a special condition when the special display result is controlled to a special state of advantage corresponding to the derived display (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes a time-saving promotion effect when the variation pattern PA3-2 is selected).

With this configuration, when the special display result is controlled to a special state with a degree of advantage corresponding to the derived display, if a special condition is met, a special feeling can be given through the notification effect, thereby increasing interest.

(Means 114-2) In means 114-1, the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect when a special condition is met in the normal state, and the presentation manner of the notification effect differs between when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation control CPU 120 executes steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845 to execute a time-saving entry presentation when control is switched from the normal state to time-saving state C, and executes a time-saving promotion presentation when control is switched from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With this configuration, notifications can be presented in a way that is appropriate to the situation, giving players a sense of exclusivity and increasing their interest.

In this example, the presentation style of the notification effects (time-saving entry effect, time-saving promotion effect) performed during the change is different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0, but the timing of the execution of the notification effects is not limited to during the change. For example, the presentation style of the notification effects performed during the pattern determination period from when the pattern stops to when the next change starts may be different between a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the normal state = 0 and a change in which the rescue time-saving count counter in the time-saving state = 0. In that case, the presentation style during the change may be the same.

(Means 114-3) In the means 114-1 or 114-2, a launch promotion notification means (for example, a part in the performance control CPU 120 that performs steps 113IWS806, S809, and S845) capable of executing a launch promotion notification (for example, displaying a right-hit notification image shown in FIG. 10-12 (H)) to promote the launch of the game medium toward a special path is provided,
The launch promotion notification means may be capable of executing a launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the normal state, while restricting the execution of the launch promotion notification when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may display a right-hit notification image based on control from the normal state to time-saving state C (see Figure 10-12 (H)), and may not display a right-hit notification image based on control from time-saving state B to time-saving state C (see Figure 10-15 (D)). Note that while Figure 10-15 (D) displays a right-hit promotion image (a right-facing arrow displayed under the small pattern) based on control to time-saving state B, this right-hit promotion image is different from the right-hit notification image displayed based on control to time-saving state C).

Such a configuration can prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated.

If the execution of the launch promotion notification is restricted when a special condition is met in the special state, it may be possible to prohibit the execution of the launch promotion notification as shown in FIG. 10-15(D), or to execute the launch promotion notification in a less aggressive manner than when a special condition is met in the normal state. For example, the launch promotion notification may be made by reducing the display range or making the arrow transparent. In addition, when a special condition is met in the normal state, the launch promotion notification may be made on the image display device 5, which attracts a high level of attention from players, while when a special condition is met in the special state, the launch promotion notification may be made using light-emitting members or speakers 8L, 8R, which attract less attention from players than the image display device 5.

The launch promotion notification means can execute, in different modes, a first launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 10-12 (H)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path when a special condition is met in the normal state, and a second launch promotion notification (e.g., a right-facing arrow in FIG. 10-15 (A) to (D)) that promotes the launch of the gaming medium toward a special path while the special state is being controlled. When a special condition is met in the special state, the first launch promotion notification may not be executed, but the second launch promotion notification may be executed. This makes it possible to prevent the presentation from becoming too complicated while issuing notifications according to the situation.

(Means 114-4) In any of means 114-1 to 114-3, the presentation style of the notification presentation may be the same when a special condition is met in the normal state and when a special condition is met in the special state (for example, the presentation executed when control is made from the normal state to time-saving state C may be the same as the presentation executed when control is made from time-saving state B to time-saving state C).

With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of variation patterns and the amount of performance data, and reduce memory capacity.

(Means 114-5) In any of means 114-1 to 114-4, when a transition from a normal state to a special state occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be restricted (for example, when N in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1015), while when a transition from a low-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state B with 100 time-saving times) to a high-advantage special state (for example, time-saving state C with 800 time-saving times) occurs based on the establishment of a special condition, specific suggestion effects that predict the variable display executed after the special condition occurs may be executed (for example, when Y in step 113IWS1014, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 113IWS1019).

With this configuration, it is possible to appropriately provide specific suggestion presentations while minimizing the occurrence of problems with presentation.

(Means 114-6) Any of means 114-1 to 114-5 may be provided with a special suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion in the effect control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS806 regardless of whether or not the time-saving state is in effect) that can execute a special suggestion effect related to the establishment of a special condition in a special state.

With this configuration, it is possible to heighten interest by creating anticipation of the realization of special conditions in special situations.

The presentation style of the special suggestion effects may differ between the normal state and the time-saving state. For example, the text color of the countdown effect, or the color or pattern of the effect of the effect effect may be different.

(Means 114-7) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-6, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, a variable pattern other than the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, the variable patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that a special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a higher probability of determining a shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than a special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 10-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if a player has played for a long period of time and a loss in a long fluctuation pattern is selected with a high probability even when the time-saving rescue mode is activated, this can be expected to cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a loss in a time-saving rescue mode via a short fluctuation pattern is more likely to be selected, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

(Means 114-8) In any one of the means 114-1 to 114-7, a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that performs step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance,
The variable display pattern determination means may be configured so that the special state controlled when a special condition is satisfied has a lower probability of determining a specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result than the special state controlled based on the derived display of a special display result (see Figures 10-1 (D) and (E)).

Such a configuration can prevent a decline in interest. For example, if the probability of a missed reach being selected is high even after a rescue time-saving state has been reached after playing for a long period of time, it is expected that this will cause stress to the player. Therefore, by configuring the game so that a missed reach variation pattern is less likely to be selected in a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the stress caused to the player can be reduced.

Also, as described in JP2005-95449A, there have been machines that count the number of times the pattern changes, and control the machine to a certain variable state based on the count result reaching a value corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring (i.e., based on the machine changing a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) without a jackpot occurring). Similarly, there have been machines that control the game state to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state in which the pattern changes frequently) based on the count result reaching a specific value. However, in the gaming machine described in JP2005-95449A, there was room for improvement in the control of the gaming machine that can be controlled to a special state based on the number of times the variable display occurs. Therefore, the following gaming machines (means 115-1) to (means 115-4) are described in this characteristic section 113IW.

(Means 115-1) A gaming machine capable of controlling a game machine to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot game state) advantageous to a player based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern),
A first passage area (e.g., a first start winning hole) is provided at a position where a game medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a left area) among a plurality of paths through which a game medium (e.g., a game ball) can move can pass;
A second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where the game medium passing through a special path (e.g., a right area) different from the specific path can pass through;
a variable display execution means (e.g., a portion that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, variable display of first identification information based on the establishment of a first start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a first start winning hole) and variable display of second identification information based on the establishment of a second start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into a second start winning hole);
A state control means capable of controlling the engine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the second start condition is more likely to be satisfied than in a normal state;
updating means for updating numerical information (e.g., a relief time reduction counter);
The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes),
The second starting condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area,
The state control means is
The numerical information updated by the update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is “0”) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed,
It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to the time-saving state A by performing step 113IWS537).
a special output means (for example, a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs steps 113IWS42B and S42F) that can execute a special output (for example, output of easy-to-win state designation signals 1 and 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled after an advantageous state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot (time-saving state A)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established (for example, a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C));
Further, a specific output means (e.g., a part of the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS35) capable of executing a specific output (e.g., output of a launch position designation signal 3) capable of specifying that the game medium should be launched toward a special path in a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific output means is capable of executing a specific output commonly in a special state controlled after an advantageous state and in a special state controlled when a special condition is established (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 commonly performs step 113IWS35 regardless of which time-saving flag is set).

With such a configuration, the trigger for control to the special state can be specified externally, and the specific signal can be standardized. For example, it can be specified externally whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the occurrence of a jackpot or a rescue time-saving.

In this example, the test device outputs a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. Similarly, an external device such as a hall management computer can output a signal that can distinguish between the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, and can output a common signal that can specify that a right hit should be made whether the machine is controlled to the time-saving state via a jackpot or the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state. This allows the hall management computer to perform operational analysis such as the rate at which the rescue time-saving state is reached during actual operation and the customer demographics of players when the rescue time-saving state is reached, and also allows for common signals.

(Means 115-2) In the means 115-1, the state control means can control to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The special output means may be capable of executing a special output (e.g., output of easy-to-win state designation signals 2, 3) that can distinguish between a special state that is controlled when a special display result is derived and displayed (e.g., a time-saving state via a missed time-saving state (time-saving state B)) and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is met (e.g., a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state (time-saving state C)) (e.g., a part that performs steps 113IWS42D, S42F in the game control microcomputer 100).

With such a configuration, it is possible to externally specify the trigger for control to the special state. For example, it is possible to externally specify whether the trigger for control to the time-saving state is the stopping of a symbol that fails the time-saving state or a rescue time-saving state.

(Means 115-3) In the means 115-1 or 115-2, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
The state control means may be capable of controlling to a special state of advantage corresponding to the establishment of a special condition when a special condition is established and a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 may prioritize control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state over control to a time-shortened state via a time-shortened state, so that when a time-shortened loss pattern is displayed in a fluctuation that results in a rescue time-shortened state (a fluctuation that causes the rescue time-shortened count counter to become 0), the state control means may control to a time-shortened state via a rescue time-shortened state).

Such a configuration can increase the player's chances of recovery.

(Means 115-4) In any of the means 115-1 to 115-3, the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special display result (for example, a time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result in the normal state is derived and displayed,
The degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special display result is derived and displayed;
When a special condition is met and a special display result is derived and displayed, a signal control means (for example, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that performs step 113IWS37E when a time-saving missing pattern is displayed in a stopped state even if the fluctuation results in a time-saving rescue) may be provided.

With such a configuration, the display results can be properly notified to the outside.

The contents shown in this characteristic section 113IW may also be applied to the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 105-1) to (Means 107-15) below.

(Means 105-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and is controllable to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., The technique control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes, and there are a plurality of types of advantageous states including a specific advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot A) and a special advantageous state (e.g., 10R jackpot B), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state differs depending on which of the plurality of advantageous states is controlled to, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the special advantageous state is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to the specific advantageous state. (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and after a 10R jackpot B, it is mainly controlled to a time-saving state until the next jackpot occurs), and the advantage of the special state controlled when a special condition is met is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state (For example, after a 10R jackpot A, it is mainly controlled to a 100-time time-saving state, and it may be controlled to a 800-time time-saving state as a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving. Such a configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

(Means 105-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information, the ratio of players being controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state is different (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is different when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established is different when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 105-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the degree of advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 105-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 105-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate rescue degree can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 105-6) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (for example, fluctuation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may be configured to determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state controlled when a special condition is met than in a special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss fluctuation, in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern table E shown in Figure 10-1 (E), and in the time-saving state via a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern is selected using fluctuation pattern tables C and H shown in Figures 10-1 (C) and 10-1 (H)). With this configuration, a decline in interest can be prevented by transitioning to a special state with a faster play speed (for example, a time-saving state with a shorter fluctuation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 105-7) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (for example, variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on playing for a long period of time.

(Means 105-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of variable display in the special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 106-1) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; and a start condition (e.g., a first start winning slot or The present invention relates to a variable display executing means for executing a variable display when a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the second start winning hole) is satisfied and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state) is satisfied, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) for storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., a RAM 102) for holding numerical information and reserved information when the power supply is stopped, and a predetermined condition (e.g., a clear when the power is turned on) for clearing a predetermined condition. and recovery means (e.g., a portion that executes step S6 in the game control microcomputer 100) that executes recovery control to restore the numerical information updated by the update means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means and the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when power supply is started. The state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of a rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and after the recovery control is executed, the state control means may be controlled to a special state when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored reserved information, and the update means may update the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 updates the rescue time reduction counter when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). This configuration makes it possible to optimize control through initialization while minimizing the disadvantages to players when a power outage occurs.

(Means 106-2) When the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, the rate at which the player is controlled to a special state with a special advantageous degree (for example, a time-saving state that continues until the next jackpot occurs) after being controlled to an advantageous state differs from when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the selection rate of the jackpot type differs when the first special pattern changes and when the second special pattern changes, and the implementation of the variable display for the special condition to be established differs between when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when the player is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information). The number of rows may be common to the special number of times (for example, the number of times required to shorten the rescue time after a jackpot based on the variation of the first special symbol and after a jackpot based on the variation of the second special symbol is 800 times). With such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are exhibited when the first identification information is variable displayed and when the second identification information is variable displayed, thereby increasing interest, while the special number of times is common to the first identification information and when the second identification information is variable displayed, preventing excessive gambling.

(Means 106-3) A setting means is provided that can set one of a plurality of setting values including an unfavorable setting value (e.g., setting value "1") with a first probability (e.g., about 1/319) of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting value (e.g., setting value "6") with a second probability (e.g., about 1/270) with a higher probability of being controlled to an advantageous state than the first probability, and when the setting is set to an unfavorable setting value, the special condition is more likely to be established than when the setting is set to an advantageous setting value, and the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, after a 10R jackpot A, the time-saving state is mainly controlled to 100 times, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be controlled to 800 times. With such a configuration, even when an unfavorable setting value is set, the advantage of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is higher than the advantage of the special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state, so that the player can be rescued more effectively.

(Means 106-4) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which one of the multiple types of special states is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the selection ratio of the jackpot type is common regardless of which setting value is set, and the degree of advantage of the special state to which a special condition is established is common regardless of which setting value is set (for example, the length of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving may be common regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress an increase in gambling tendency due to the setting value being set, and to realize healthy gameplay.

(Means 106-5) When the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the advantageous state is controlled in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the proportion of the advantageous state among the multiple types is different, and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the first identification information and when the special condition is established in response to the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled after the special condition is established is common (for example, when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the first special symbol and when the time-shortened state is controlled through a rescue time-shortened state based on the variation of the second special symbol, both may be controlled to a time-shortened state of 800 times. With such a configuration, while different gameplay characteristics are exhibited in the case of performing the variable display of the first identification information and the case of performing the variable display of the second identification information, the advantageous degree of the special state controlled when the special condition is established is common regardless of the setting value, so that an appropriate degree of rescue can be achieved while suppressing an increase in gambling.

(Means 106-6) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) and a shortened variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA1-2 to PA1-4) in which the variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine the shortened variable display pattern more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when a special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (e.g., in the case of a miss variation, the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, and the variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (e.g., a time-saving state with a short variation time) based on having played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-7) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the variable display pattern determination means may determine a specific variable display pattern at a lower rate in the special state controlled when a special condition is established, when the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result, than in the special state controlled after being controlled in an advantageous state (for example, in the case of a miss variation, a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 10-1 (E) in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, and a variation pattern is selected using the variation pattern table H shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) in the time-saving state via a jackpot). With such a configuration, a decline in interest can be suppressed by transitioning to a special state with a high game speed (for example, a time-saving state in which the frequency of reach occurrence is suppressed) based on the fact that the game has been played for a long period of time.

(Means 106-8) The update means can update specific numerical information (e.g., time-saving counter) different from the numerical information based on the execution of a variable display in a special state, and the state control means can control to a special state by setting special information (e.g., a time-saving flag) and can end the special state by canceling the setting of the special information, and can end the special state based on the specific numerical information becoming a predetermined value (e.g., value of the time-saving counter: 0) corresponding to a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) in the special state, and can update the number of times updated by the update means even if the power supply is stopped. The game device includes a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding value information, specific numerical information, and special information setting information, and an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met (e.g., an output signal from a clear switch is on when the power is turned on), and the initialization means may initialize the special information setting information and specific numerical information when the predetermined condition is met, but not initialize the numerical information (e.g., resetting whether or not the time-saving flag is set and the value of the time-saving count counter, but not resetting the value of the rescue time-saving count counter). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased even when the predetermined condition is met.

(Means 107-1) A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), the gaming machine comprising: a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state; and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display; The state control means can control to a special state when the numerical information updated by the update means becomes a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter: 0) corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the numerical information when the first special symbol changes and when the second special symbol changes). The display control device further includes a suggestion effect execution means for updating the data, and executing a suggestion effect (for example, a teasing effect, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a subtitle display effect) related to the establishment of a special condition, and the suggestion effect execution means may vary the proportion of a plurality of effect modes in which the suggestion effect is executed according to the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the selection proportion of the numerical value to be displayed varies in the countdown effect (a numerical value corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is selected at a proportion of 100%, but the value to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), the range in which the effect is displayed varies in the effect effect (a range corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is displayed at a proportion of 100%, but the range to be displayed at a proportion corresponding to the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction may be determined by lottery), and the color of the subtitle display area varies in the subtitle display effect (see Figures 10-6 (C) and (D))), and the performance mode of the suggestion effect may be a mode suggesting the period until the special condition is established (see Figures 10-11 and 10-12). Such a configuration can increase interest by drawing attention to the presentation style of the suggestive presentation, and can also promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-2) The presentation mode of the suggestive presentation (e.g., countdown presentation) may be such that the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be specified (see Figs. 10-11 and 10-12). With such a configuration, the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is met can be clearly notified to the player.

(Means 107-3) The suggestive presentation is a presentation in which a specific image is displayed (for example, an effect presentation in which an effect image is displayed), and the specific image is displayed in a number of different ways, differing in at least one of color and size (including the size of a single image and the size of the display range of multiple images), and the period until the suggested special condition is met may differ depending on the way the specific image is displayed (see Figures 10-11 and 10-12). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the aspect of the specific image.

(Means 107-4) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning hole or the second start winning hole) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a demo movie), and the suggestive performance execution means is capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display performance and a demo movie performance can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive performance can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). The rate at which the suggestive performance is executed when the predetermined image is displayed may vary depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established (see Figs. 10-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-5) A variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of a start condition (e.g., the entry of a game ball into the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and the establishment of a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a variable state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is established but the start condition is not established, and a predetermined image (e.g., a demo image) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means. The game machine includes a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a video (e.g., a subtitle display effect), and the suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) when the predetermined image is displayed (e.g., a caption display effect and a demo movie effect can be executed in overlapping order. Either the display of the predetermined image and the suggestive effect can be executed first, or they can be executed simultaneously). Depending on the number of times the variable display is executed until a special condition is established, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed in a predetermined manner when the predetermined image is displayed may differ (see Figs. 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the presence or absence of a suggestive effect, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-6) The device includes a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition (e.g., a game ball entering the first start winning port or the second start winning port) and a start condition (e.g., neither a jackpot game state nor a changing state), a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer, a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a predetermined image display means capable of displaying a predetermined image (e.g., a demo movie) when the variable display is not being executed and no reserved memory is stored in the reserved memory means, and the suggestive performance execution means may be capable of executing a suggestive performance (e.g., a dialogue performance by audio output) based on at least one of detecting that an operation means (e.g., a hitting ball operation handle 30) has been operated and that a game medium has passed through a predetermined area (e.g., the first start winning port or the second start winning port) when the predetermined image is displayed. With this configuration, it is possible to provide suggestive effects to players who actually play the game, which can promote operation of the gaming machine.

(Means 107-7) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive effect (e.g., a caption display effect) is executed depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 10-6 (A) and (B)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-8) A setting means is provided that can set one of a number of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive performance execution means may vary the rate at which a suggestive performance (e.g., a caption display performance) is executed in a specific manner (e.g., "red") depending on which setting value is set (see Figs. 10-6 (C) and (D)). With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the manner of the suggestive performance, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted by suggesting the setting value.

(Means 107-9) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestion effect is executed, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-10) A setting means capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values with different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and a setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion effect suggesting the set setting value (for example, a part in the effect control CPU 120 of variant 1 that executes a setting suggestion effect as an effect during change), the setting suggestion effect execution means may have a different rate of executing a setting suggestion effect by a special mode (for example, a second mode) depending on which setting value is set, and the suggestion effect execution means may have a common rate of executing a suggestion effect by a specific mode (for example, "red") regardless of which setting value is set. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and the complexity of control can be suppressed.

(Means 107-11) The suggestive effect execution means may be configured to execute suggestive effects (for example, displaying an initial result according to the number of times until the rescue time reduction) at different rates during a specific period after the start of power supply, depending on whether an initialization process is executed when power supply is started or a recovery process is executed. With such a configuration, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect is executed, and operation of the gaming machine can be promoted.

(Means 107-12) A variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) is provided that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2), and the variable display pattern determination means can determine a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met, and can further include a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine a special variable display pattern before the special condition is met (for example, variable patterns PA3-1, PA3-2 can be changed only when the value of the rescue time-saving counter becomes 0), and can execute a specific notification effect (for example, time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met. With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is met, and to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is met.

(Means 107-13) A variable display pattern determination means is provided for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA1-1 to PA1-4 not accompanied by a reach effect) and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., variable patterns PA2-1 to PA2-3, PB2-1 to PB2-3 accompanied by a reach effect), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not obtained (see Figures 10-1 and 10-2), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern rather than a predetermined variable display pattern is higher. In the case where the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less is high (see FIG. 10-1 (A)), the rate at which the specific variable display pattern is determined when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result is lower in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, a variable period in which the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more). (For example, when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 11 or more, a variable pattern is selected using the variable pattern table shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), and when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less, a variable pattern is selected using a variable pattern table in which the selection rate of the variable patterns PA2-2 and PA2-3 in FIG. 10-2 (F) and (G) is changed to 0%). With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

(Means 107-14) A preview performance execution means is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is the specific display result and where it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is the specific display result than when it is not the specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is established than in a period prior to the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not the specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 107-15) A preview performance execution means (e.g., a portion in the performance control CPU 120 that executes step 113IWS802A) is provided that is capable of executing a preview performance that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in a specific mode (e.g., "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode than in the predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the preview performance may be executed more frequently in the specific mode during a predetermined period before the special condition is established than during a period prior to the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Explanation of Characteristic Part 116IW)
Next, the characteristic part 108IW of this embodiment will be described. In this characteristic part 108IW, the game state is controlled to one of low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state. In this example, in the high base state, the average special chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, and the average normal chart fluctuation time is shortened compared to the normal state, so that the probability of "normal chart hit" in the normal chart game is higher compared to the normal state. For example, while the normal chart hit probability is 10% in the normal state, the normal chart hit probability is increased to 90% in the time-saving state, making it easier for the game ball to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) described later. However, this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, in the high base state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab may be lengthened compared to the normal state, so that the game ball is more likely to win the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning hole). In addition, in a configuration in which the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) shown in FIG. 1 is provided, in the high base state, the game ball may be more likely to win the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning hole) compared to the normal state.

In addition, in this example, the probability of hitting a jackpot (jackpot probability) is increased in the high probability state compared to the low probability state. Hereinafter, in this example, the high base state is also referred to as the time-saving state, and the high probability state is also referred to as the probability change state.

In addition, in this example, in addition to the case where the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled after the jackpot game ends, there are also cases where the variable display result is a miss and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled based on the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled after the variable display result is a jackpot and the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed is also referred to as the time-saving state via a miss.

Furthermore, in this example, even if the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after the occurrence of a jackpot, the time-saving state (high base state) may be controlled (hereinafter, the time-saving state (high base state) controlled in this manner is also referred to as the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, or simply rescue time-saving. It is also referred to as "play time"). Note that in this example, even if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, it is not controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. However, this is not limited to such a configuration, and the configuration may be such that if the variable display has ended a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without the next jackpot occurring after the rescue time-saving has occurred, the time-saving state may be controlled to the rescue time-saving state again. Also, for example, if the next jackpot or time-saving miss occurs after the variable display has finished a certain number of times (800 times in this example), the game may be configured to be controlled to the time-saving state (rescue time-saving).

In the high base state, (1) control to increase the probability of hitting a normal symbol, (2) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, (3) control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port) and the variable winning ball device 6B (second start winning port), and (4) control to shorten the fluctuation time of the special symbol may be performed, but all of the controls (1) to (4) may be performed, or some of the controls (1) to (4) may not be performed. For example, the controls (1) to (4) performed may be different or the same for the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state.

Also, for example, in a low base state, the probability of a normal hit may be 1/1, or the probability of a miss may be so low that the probability of a normal hit is effectively 1/1. In other words, even if the control described above in (1) is not performed when the rescue time reduction is activated, a high base state may be achieved by performing some or all of the controls described above in (2) to (4).

In addition, it is preferable to define the number of fluctuations n until control is applied to the rescue time reduction and the number of time reductions N in the rescue time reduction as follows.
2.5P≦n≦3.0P
0.4P≦N≦3.8P
(P = denominator of the jackpot probability ML, n = number of fluctuations, N = number of time reductions)
Specifically, for example, when the jackpot probability is 1/300, the number of fluctuations n is 750 to 900, and the number of time-saving times N is 120 to 1140. As described later, in this example, when the setting value "6" with the highest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/270, so the number of fluctuations n is 675 to 810, and the number of time-saving times N is 108 to 1026. Also, when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set, the jackpot probability is about 1/319, so the number of fluctuations n is 797 to 957, and the number of time-saving times N is 127 to 1212. And, in this example, both the number of fluctuations n and the number of time-saving times N are set to "800", and the above-mentioned regulations are satisfied when they are set to any of the setting values. It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be configured to satisfy the above-mentioned regulations at least when the setting value "1" with the lowest jackpot probability is set.

In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 108IW, it is possible to simultaneously execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol in parallel.

(First embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine according to a first embodiment of the characteristic portion 116IW will be described.

(Type of time reduction)
11-1 is an explanatory diagram showing the types of time-saving in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In this example, the time-saving state (high base state) can be distinguished into a time-saving state A that is a time-saving state via a big win (low probability/high base state), a time-saving state B that is a time-saving state via a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state), and a time-saving state C that is a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times. That is, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. With this configuration, the advantage can be made different depending on the game state, and interest can be improved. In this example, if any of the 6R jackpots B to D occurs, regardless of whether the occurrence state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled until the next jackpot occurs after the jackpot game.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, if a time-saving miss occurs during the normal state and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (high base state) with 100 times of time-saving. On the other hand, if a time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the number of times of time-saving is not updated. In other words, even if a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (high base state) and the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 50 times, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 50 times and is not updated. Therefore, in this example, a time-saving miss that occurs during the time-saving state (high base state) is essentially invalid. Also, in this example, as described later, there is no case in which a time-saving miss is determined during the probability state (high probability state).

The method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs is not limited to that shown in FIG. 11-1. For example, when the time-saving miss occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again (for example, set to 100 times), or when the time-saving miss occurs only during the time-saving state (high base state) via the time-saving miss in the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) may be set again. Also, for example, even when a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 100 times during the normal state, and the number of times of time-saving may be controlled to 0 times during the time-saving state (i.e., the time-saving state falls to the normal state). Various modes of the method of controlling the number of times of time-saving when the time-saving miss occurs may be considered.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-1, in this example, when rescue time-saving occurs during normal and time-saving states, the time-saving state is controlled to a time-saving state with 800 times of time-saving. Thus, in this example, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, because the number of times of time-saving is greater.

In addition, although details will be described later, in this example, if a rescue time-saving state occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state), the number of time-saving times is updated, whereas if a time-saving miss occurs during a time-saving state that includes a rescue time-saving state (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, after the game is controlled to a time-saving state of 800 times due to the rescue time-saving function, even if the 800 fluctuation display times end without a jackpot occurring, the game will not be controlled to the rescue time-saving function again.

Here, the rescue time-saving achievement rate for each set value will be explained. The rescue time-saving achievement rate is the rate at which the game is controlled to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving. The time-saving state via rescue time-saving is controlled by making n (800) fluctuations without being controlled to a jackpot game state, so the rescue time-saving achievement rate K can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K = rescue time reduction achievement rate, P = denominator of jackpot probability ML, n = number of activations)

For example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/319, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 8.1%; if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/310, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 7.5%; if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.9%; if the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 6.3%; if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.7%; if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time reduction achievement rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the rescue time reduction achievement rate. This makes it possible to rescue the player even if the set value of the jackpot probability is low.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
11-2 to 11-4 are explanatory diagrams showing the variation patterns (variation times) of the special symbols and the decorative symbols in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. EXT shown in Fig. 11-2 to 11-4 is the second byte data of the performance control command (2 bytes) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-4, 14 types of first variation patterns #A to #N for the first special symbol and decorative symbol, and 13 types of second variation patterns #A to #M for the second special symbol and decorative symbol are used.

When the first special symbol variable display is executed, if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable pattern table A for the first special symbol in a low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) is selected and the variable pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-2 (A), if it is in a low probability/low base state (normal state), when the first special symbol variable display is executed, one of the first variable patterns #A to #F is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the first special symbol in the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B). As shown in FIG. 11-2 (B), if the state is high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, one of the first variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-2(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the first fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-2(A). Therefore, in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuation display is executed in the high probability/low base state (first probability fluctuation state), a long fluctuation display with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table C for the first special symbol in a high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), if it is in a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the first variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-2 (C), in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), if the display result of the first special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the probability is low/base state is high, the variation pattern table D for the first special symbol in the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D) is selected and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), if the probability is low/base state is high, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the first variation patterns #A to #F, one of the first variation patterns #J, #K, #L is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-3 (D), in the low probability/high base state, if the display result of the first special symbol variation display is a miss or a small win, if the first reserved memory count is 0, the first variation pattern #J, #K with a variation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the first reserved memory count is 1 or more, the first variation pattern #A, #D with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined. Also, as described below, the low probability/high base state ends when a predetermined number of variation displays are executed, but when the variation display of the final variation of the low probability/high base state is executed, the first variation pattern #L (special variation pattern) with a variation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the first special symbol variable pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 11-3 (E). As shown in FIG. 11-3 (E), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the first special symbol variable display is executed, either the first variable pattern #M or #N is determined.

As shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-3, the first variation patterns #M and #N are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the first variation pattern #M (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, as described below, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 11-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled (i.e., the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state, and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established.

In addition, when the first variation pattern #N (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation is executed that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, Figures 11-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled (i.e., that the rescue time-saving state will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), and then a presentation is executed that notifies the player that a jackpot will be reached. With this configuration, the player is informed that a jackpot will be reached after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

When the second special symbol variation display is executed, if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4(A). As shown in FIG. 11-4(A), if it is in a high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), when the second special symbol variation display is executed, in addition to the second variation patterns #A to #F, it is determined to be one of the second variation patterns #J and #K.

As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), if the display result of the second special symbol fluctuation display is a miss or a small win, if the second reserved memory count is 0, the second fluctuation pattern #J, #K with a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. On the other hand, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more, the second fluctuation pattern #A, #D with a fluctuation time of 5 seconds is determined.

In addition, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), the variation pattern is determined by selecting the variation pattern table B for the second special symbol for states other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4(B). As shown in FIG. 11-4(B), if the second special symbol variation display is executed when the state is not high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), one of the second variation patterns #G to #I is determined.

In the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B shown in FIG. 11-4(B), the fluctuation time specified by each of the second fluctuation patterns #G to #I is extremely long at 10 minutes or 5 minutes, compared to the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table A shown in FIG. 11-4(A). Therefore, in this example, when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed in a state other than the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state) (low probability/low base state, high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), low probability/high base state), a fluctuation display of a long fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 10 minutes or 5 minutes is executed.

In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction (if the value of the rescue time reduction counter described below becomes 0), the variable pattern is determined by selecting the variable pattern table E for the second special pattern when the rescue time reduction is established, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C). As shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), if the variable display results in a rescue time reduction, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, either the second variable pattern #L or #M is determined.

As shown in FIG. 11-4, the second variation patterns #L and #M are variation patterns exclusively used when the rescue time reduction is established, and are not used for variation displays that do not result in rescue time reduction, but are used only for variation displays that result in rescue time reduction. In this example, when the second variation pattern #L (missing rescue time reduction entry) is determined, a time reduction entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 11-23 (B) and (C)) is executed to notify the player that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (i.e., that the rescue time reduction will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), as described below. With this configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time reduction has been established and that the time reduction will be controlled to a time reduction state (low probability/high base state), and it is possible to increase the interest when the rescue time reduction is established. Furthermore, if the second variation pattern #M (a false jackpot with rescue time-saving entry) is determined, a presentation is executed that is the same as the time-saving entry presentation (see, for example, FIG. 11-23 (B) and (C)) that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled (i.e., that the rescue time-saving state will be controlled to a low probability/high base state), and then a presentation is executed that notifies the player that a jackpot will be hit. With this configuration, the player is notified that a jackpot will be hit after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving state has been entered, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

In this example, the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state are configured to use the same fluctuation pattern table (i.e., the average fluctuation time is the same) in all cases, but this is not limited to the above. For example, different fluctuation pattern tables may be used (i.e., the average fluctuation time is different) in the time-saving state via the jackpot, the time-saving state via the miss time-saving state, and the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state. For example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving state may be configured to have a higher rate of being determined as a fluctuation pattern with a shortened fluctuation time than the time-saving state via the jackpot or the miss time-saving state, and the average fluctuation time may be shorter. With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state occurs (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, in a time-saving state controlled via rescue time-saving, unlike a time-saving state controlled via a time-saving miss or a jackpot, a fluctuation pattern that results in a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) at the time of a miss is not determined (or the rate at which it is determined is low), and the average fluctuation time may be shortened. With this configuration, when the time-saving state is rescued (i.e. when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) does not result in a miss, so a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(First special symbol normal processing)
11-5 to 11-7 are flow charts showing the first special symbol normal process (step S110A) in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The first special symbol normal process is executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A. Note that the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S110A when the first special symbol display device 4A is not displaying the first special symbol.

In the first special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50A). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the first reserved memory number (step 061IWS51A). Specifically, it checks the count value of the first reserved memory number counter. If the first reserved memory number is 0, it sends a first customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52A).

If the first reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the first random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53A), decreases the value of the first reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the first reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54A). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to first reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of first reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. That is, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be identified. Note that in this example, the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number and the random number values stored in each storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number are also stored in such a way that the order in which they were extracted can be identified.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55A). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55A is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change processing (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

The timing of sending the setting value command is not limited to that shown in this example, and may be, for example, configured to send a setting value command each time the variable display ends, or configured to send a setting value command during the variable display.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56A). Specifically, if the probability change flag and high base flag are off, it determines that the state is a low probability/low base state and transmits a low probability/low base background designation command; if the probability change flag is off and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a low probability/high base state and transmits a low probability/high base background designation command; if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is on, it determines that the state is a high probability/high base state and transmits a high probability/high base background designation command; and if the probability change flag is on and the high base flag is off, it determines that the state is a high probability/low base state and transmits a high probability/low base background designation command.

The processing of step 061IWS56A (and step 061IWS56B described later) in which a background designation command corresponding to the current game state is sent to the performance control CPU 120 may be executed after the update processing of the rescue time-saving count counter and the high base count counter and the control processing related to the high base flag are performed in the first special symbol normal processing (and the second special symbol normal processing described later). That is, when the fluctuation starts, if the rescue time-saving count counter is updated and the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled due to the establishment of the rescue time-saving state, a low probability/high base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background, or if the high base count counter is updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is ended and the state is controlled to the normal state, a low probability/low base background designation command may be immediately sent to change the background.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601A). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS5601A (and step 061IWS5601B described later), if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter after step 061IWS5602A (and step 061IWS5602B described later) is not executed. Therefore, in this example, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction does not decrease even if the change display is executed, and only if the game is not in a high probability state (low probability state), the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction decreases when the change display is executed. Note that this is not limited to the configuration of this example, and the game may be configured so that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is uniformly decreased when the change display is executed even in a high probability state (high probability state).

When the probability flag is not set, that is, when the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603A). In this example, the process of step 061IWS5603A and the process of step 061IWS5603B described later are executed, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is updated uniformly regardless of whether the first special pattern variable display is executed or the second special pattern variable display is executed. That is, in this example, the rescue time reduction counter is configured to be updated at the timing when the first special pattern variable display starts and the timing when the second special pattern variable display starts. This configuration allows for optimization of the update of the rescue time reduction counter in a configuration in which the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed in parallel.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 1, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9501 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 126, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 957E (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command.

The game control microcomputer 100 then checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606A). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617A. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608A).

In this example, when the value of the rescue time-saving counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 by the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) and a rescue time-saving occurs, the time-saving state is controlled to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Also, if the state in which the rescue time-saving occurs is a time-saving state via a jackpot or a missed time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state is controlled again to 800 times (low probability/high base state). Therefore, in this example, if the next jackpot does not occur even after the 800 fluctuation display is executed after the RAM clear processing or after the end of a jackpot game, a rescue time-saving occurs and the state is controlled to the time-saving state.

As described above, in this example, as shown in FIG. 11-1, the time-saving state via rescue time-saving has a higher advantage than the time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss because the number of time-saving times is greater. In this example, steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described later) are processed so that the number of time-saving times is updated if a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state). For example, when a rescue time-saving occurs during a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (high base state) with 50 remaining times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state), the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is updated to 800. On the other hand, in this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B) described later is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) including a rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is not updated. For example, in a time-saving state (high base state) via rescue time-saving, when the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) is 500, even if a time-saving deviation occurs, the remaining number of times controlled to the time-saving state (high base state) remains at 500 and is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5608A (and steps 061IWS5606B to S5608B described below) and the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A (and steps 061IWS061IWS2030B to S2031B described below) are configured to control the state to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving effect, which is more advantageous than a time-saving effect that is not achieved, when a time-saving effect miss is derived and displayed in the variable display in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved. Specifically, when the variable display of the first special pattern in which the rescue time-saving effect is achieved (time-saving effect miss) begins, control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol where the time-saving rescue is established, but in this case the number of time-saving times is not updated due to the time-saving miss (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). With this configuration, even if the time-saving miss is derived and displayed in the variable display where the time-saving rescue is established, the advantage of the time-saving state due to the time-saving rescue can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In addition, in this example, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter subtracted at the start of the fluctuation becomes 0 and a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the high base counter is set to "800", but the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not set. If a rescue time reduction occurs, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs, or when a jackpot occurs. Therefore, in this example, even if the fluctuation display is executed a predetermined number of times (800 times in this example) without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction occurs, a rescue time reduction does not occur (i.e., the rescue time reduction is not controlled continuously to the 800th rescue time reduction).

Specifically, if the variable display is executed 800 times without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction ends and the game transitions to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., no new rescue time reduction occurs). Also, even if 800 variable displays are executed in the normal state to which the game transitions without a jackpot occurring, a rescue time reduction does not occur. After a rescue time reduction occurs, the rescue time reduction occurs again when, for example, a jackpot occurs after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the jackpot game ends, or when a RAM clear process is executed after the rescue time reduction occurs and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the next jackpot does not occur even if 800 variable displays are executed after the RAM clear process.

In addition, the configuration is not limited to this example. For example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" when the rescue time reduction occurs, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 each time a variable display is executed during the rescue time reduction. As soon as the rescue time reduction ends, a new rescue time reduction is established, and the rescue time reduction is continuously controlled until the next jackpot occurs.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800", and the process of updating the rescue time reduction counter is not executed during the rescue time reduction. This means that even if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring during the rescue time reduction, the rescue time reduction will not control the player (i.e., the player will not be continuously controlled to the rescue time reduction of 800 cycles), but if 800 variable display cycles are executed without a jackpot occurring after the rescue time reduction ends, the rescue time reduction may occur.

In addition, for example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction count counter is set to "800" and the high base count counter is set to "200". In this way, if the variable display is executed 200 times during the rescue time reduction without a jackpot occurring, the rescue time reduction ends and the normal state (low probability/low base state) is entered, and if the variable display is executed 600 times without a jackpot occurring in the normal state to which the rescue time reduction is entered, the rescue time reduction may be initiated.

In addition, in this example, the processing of step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later) is executed to set the number of time-saving times to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until a rescue time-saving occurs, but this is not limited to the above. For example, in step 061IWS5608A (or step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base number counter may be set to a value greater than "800," or a value less than this.

In addition, in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time reductions. For example, the high base count counter may be configured to be set to "100" if a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and to be set to "800" if a rescue time reduction occurs the second time.

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS5608A (and step 061IWS5608B described later), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 10% probability, and 800 times with a 90% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609A). By processing step 061IWS5609A, it becomes possible to identify that the fluctuation display is one in which rescue time reduction is established in the first fluctuation pattern setting process described below, and to determine the fluctuation pattern to be used exclusively when rescue time reduction is established.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610A) and also controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a right-hit lighting start command (step 061IWS5611A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described later) is executed, and in this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, in a low probability/high base state, the first special symbol variable display is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol variable display is executed in the long variable. However, since it is in a high base state, the normal symbol hit probability is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, it is advantageous for the player to aim at the right side of the game area and perform the launch operation of the game ball (right hit) in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, and the right-hit indicator 26 is lit up. In addition, if the right-hit indicator 26 is already lit, such as when a rescue time-saving event occurs during time-saving mode, the processing of steps 061IWS5610A to S5611A (and steps 061IWS5610B to S5611B described below) may be omitted.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send the command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614A). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615A). Whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the rescue time reduction counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data and controls to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616A). For example, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9601 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Also, if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 800, the game control microcomputer 100 controls to send command 9608 (H) as the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, proceed to step 061IWS5617A.

In this example, the game control microcomputer 100 counts the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and transmits a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the presentation control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction and execute a presentation suggesting that the rescue time reduction will be established or a presentation suggesting the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction (for example, a teasing presentation or a countdown presentation, as described below).

In addition, for example, unlike the configuration of this example, in a configuration in which rescue time reductions can occur consecutively, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is sent only when a rescue time reduction occurs the first time, and the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command or the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command is not sent when a rescue time reduction occurs the second time or later.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617A), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In this example, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/low base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/high base state, and high probability/low base state, so that when in the high base state, the state is controlled to one of the low probability/high base state and the high probability/high base state. However, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274 described below), so the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is not managed, and the value of the high base count counter is set to "0". Therefore, when the value of the high base count counter is not "0", the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state.

In the first embodiment, as described below, the high base flag is set and the number of times the variable display is executed in the high base state is managed when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state at the end of the jackpot game based on the 6R jackpot A, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a time-saving miss, and when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state via a rescue time-saving. In this example, when the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state is ended and the state is transitioned to the normal state (low probability/low base state) based on the fact that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol have been executed a total of a predetermined number of times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, or 800 times. See FIG. 11-1).

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., in the low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618A) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619A). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. In this example, the process of step 061IWS5618A and the process of step 061IWS5618B described later are executed, and the value of the high base count counter is updated regardless of whether the variable display of the first special pattern or the variable display of the second special pattern is executed.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag indicating that the game is in a high base state (step 061IWS5620A). In this example, if step 061IWS5619A (or step 061IWS5619B described later) judges that the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes have been performed a total of a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100, 200, or 800 times; see FIG. 11-1), and the processing of step 061IWS5620A (or step 061IWS5620B described later) is executed, terminating the low probability/high base state and transitioning to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621A). The lighting extension flag (state extension flag) is intended to continue the right-hit notification and continue the right-hit state until the fluctuation display ends.

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57A). Specifically, if the second jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating second special symbol, is set, it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the second special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58A. As a result, if the first special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating second special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value is stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating between big wins, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and the process may proceed to step 061IWS59A, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the second special symbol is fluctuating as a big win in step 061IWS57A, the processing of steps 061IWS58A to S63A may not be performed, and a miss random number (fixed value) may be set as the random number for winning judgment to perform a small win judgment, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for winning judgment was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the second special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the first random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58A) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59A, the game state is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

As described above, in this example, the advantage of the time-saving state controlled after a jackpot game is different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 100 times the number of time-saving times, and when a 6R jackpot A occurs during a time-saving state (high base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to have 200 times the number of time-saving times. With this configuration, in this example, the execution of the jackpot determination module in step 061IWS59A (described later and step 061IWS59B) is configured to be executed after the update process of the rescue time-saving count counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A (described later and step 061IWS5602B to S5608B).

Therefore, in this example, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it is assumed that a jackpot has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and the advantage of the time-saving state to be controlled after the end of the jackpot game is determined. Specifically, if the display result of the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a 6R jackpot A, it is assumed that a 6R jackpot A has occurred in the time-saving state due to the rescue time reduction, and it is controlled to a time-saving state with 200 time reductions after the end of the jackpot game (the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287 described later). With this configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player due to the rescue time reduction (for example, to reduce the amount of investment by the player).

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the varying display of the first special symbol (step 061IWS61A). Then, based on the random number for determining the type of jackpot, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62A), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63A), and proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60A, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64A). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the first small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern (step 061IWS66A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67A) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68A). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67A to S68A may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65A, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69A). If the high probability flag is set (i.e., if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached), the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A. In this example, by executing the process of step 061IWS69A (and step 061IWS69B described later), if the high probability state (high probability state) is reached, it is determined that the win will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether time reduction has been missed in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later).

If the probability of winning is not set (i.e., if the probability is low), the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70A). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71A.

In this example, if a time-saving deviation occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), the deviation is effectively invalidated by a configuration in which the number of time-saving times is not updated (see steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A described later). However, the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, when the time-saving state (high base state) is in the time-saving state (high base state), the process of determining whether or not the time-saving deviation has occurred in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) is not executed, and it may be determined that the deviation has occurred without time-saving.

For example, among the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later) may not be executed, and in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, the process of determining whether the time-saving miss is in step 061IWS70A (and step 061IWS70B described later). In other words, in the case of the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state, a time-saving miss may not occur, but in the case of the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a time-saving miss, a time-saving miss may occur.

When multiple types of time-saving misses are provided, each with a different degree of advantage (e.g., the number of times the time-saving is applied), the type of time-saving miss is determined to be the type corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type-determining random number stored in the random number buffer area. In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the type-determining random number extracted in the first start winning determination process (step S101A) and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer, and determines the type of time-saving. In this case, the determination process can be configured to use a common type-determining random number not only for the big win type determination and the small win type determination, but also for the time-saving type determination.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71A). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72A).

Then, in step 061IWS89A, the value of the first special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89A).

(First variation pattern setting process)
11-8 is a flow chart showing the first variation pattern setting process (step S111A) in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091A).

When the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., when the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092A) and selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table E for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 11-3 (B), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS1717A.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710A). If the high probability variation flag is not set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in a low probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table A for the low probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., low probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol variation pattern table D for the low probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-3 (D) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1713A).

If the probability variable flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1714A). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1715A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/high base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the first special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for the high probability/high base state shown in FIG. 11-2 (C) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1716A).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in Figures 11-2 and 11-3 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS17093A, 061IWS1712A, S1713A, S1715A, and S1716A and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the first special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717A).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704A).

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705A), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A (step 061IWS1706A).The game control microcomputer 100 then updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol fluctuation process (step 061IWS1707A).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the first special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the first special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the first special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the first special symbol variation pattern table E is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(First special symbol variation process)
FIG. 11-9 is a flow chart showing the first special symbol variation process (step S112A) in the first special symbol process process. In the first special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120A). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not in a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121A).

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the first variable time timer (step 061IWS1122A), and when the first variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123A), it performs control to send a first symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

If the first variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B (step 061IWS1125A). Whether or not a jackpot pattern is being derived and displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B can be determined, for example, by checking whether or not the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not a second jackpot flag is set, which indicates that a jackpot will be obtained based on the variable display of the second special pattern.

If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126A). Whether or not the second special pattern display device 4B is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the second special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing and whether or not the second small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern, is set. If the second special pattern display device 4B is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125A) or a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1126A), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129A). In this case, if the first big win flag or the first small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the first big win flag or the first small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop process (step S113A) (step 061IWS1130A).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125A to S1126A and S1129A, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop and display a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129A.

In this example, when the second special pattern display device 4B derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the first forced pattern determination command. Also, when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a stop pattern of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, control is not performed to send the second forced pattern determination command (see steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B, S1129B described below). In other words, in this example, even if rescue time reduction is established by executing the variable display of the other special pattern while executing the variable display of one of the first and second special patterns, the variable display of the one special pattern is not forcibly stopped.

In this example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the second special symbol becomes a small win while the first special symbol is being displayed, if the display result of the first special symbol is a big win, or if it is a big win and the big win type is high in favor (for example, 6R big win B), the first special symbol is not forced to stop, and the first special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the second special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120A is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121A to S1130A is skipped, and the first variable time timer of step 061IWS1122A is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a small win and the variable display of the first special symbol, which is a big win with a high advantage, is being executed, the update of the first variable time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. Then, when the small win game ends, the value of the role control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the role control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the first variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed, and the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the first special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127A). Therefore, even if the second special pattern changes to a small win while the first special pattern is being changed to a miss or small win, the update of the first change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the first special pattern continues to be changed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the first change time timer resumes.

(First special symbol stop processing)
11-10 and 11-11 are flow charts showing the first special symbol stop processing. In the first special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 first checks whether the lighting extension flag is set (step 061IWS2010A). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011A). The CPU 103 also controls the right-hit display 26 to end its lighting (step 061IWS2012A) and transmits a right-hit lighting end command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013A).

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5621A and S5617B to S5621B is executed to end the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 11-1) begins, and the processing of steps 061IWS2010A to S2013A and S2010B to S2013B is executed to turn off the right-hit display 26 when the variable display for the specified number of times (100th, 200th, or 800th time; see FIG. 11-1) ends.

Next, the CPU 103 causes the first special pattern display device 4A to derive and display the stopping pattern of the first special pattern (step 061IWS2014A). In this case, if the first forced pattern determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129A of the first special pattern change process, the CPU 103 causes the missing pattern to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping pattern of the first special pattern, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the change.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015A). If the first jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot start flag indicating that a jackpot has started (step 061IWS2016A). The CPU 103 also clears the first jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017A).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018A) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018A and S2019A, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the first special symbol, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

In this example, after the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed, the jackpot game starts when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41. Therefore, the right-hit display 26 may be configured to start lighting up when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41.

If the first big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015A), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020A). If the first small win flag is set, control is performed to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021A). The CPU 103 also clears the first small win flag (step 061IWS2022A). Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the role control process flag to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step 061IWS2026A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027A.

In step 061IWS2027A, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the first special pattern normal processing (step 061IWS2027A).

If the first small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020A), the CPU 103 checks whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost (step 061IWS2030A). Note that whether or not it has been decided that the time-saving effect will be lost can be determined, for example, by checking the stopping pattern of the special pattern stored in the stopping pattern memory area in step 061IWS72A.

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031A). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the CPU 103 proceeds to step 061IWS2036A.

When the high base flag is not set (in this example, the time-saving miss does not occur in the high probability state (high probability state), so the normal state (low probability/low base state) is in effect), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032A). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033A).

In this example, by processing steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below), if a time-saving error occurs in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the state is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times, and if a time-saving error occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) continues and the number of time-saving times (i.e. the value of the high base number counter) is not updated.

In this example, the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A (and steps 061IWS2030B to S2033B described below) is configured so that if a time-saving deviation occurs during a time-saving state including rescue time-saving (high base state), the number of time-saving times is not updated. With this configuration, in this example, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed in parallel, the advantage of the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving can be secured, and the degree of rescue for the player can be increased (for example, the amount of investment by the player can be reduced).

In this example, when a time-saving miss occurs in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) is not updated. However, this is not the only possible configuration. For example, when a time-saving miss occurs in a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) via a jackpot or a time-saving miss (low probability/high base state) (or when the remaining number of times in the time-saving state is less than 100 times due to a time-saving miss), the number of time-saving times (i.e., the value of the high base number counter) may be updated and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving times may be controlled again.

In addition, in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described later), the high base count counter may be configured to be set to values corresponding to multiple types of time-saving counts. For example, if the time-saving count is not achieved the first time, the high base count counter may be set to "100," and if the time-saving count is not achieved the second time, the high base count counter may be set to "200."

Also, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined by performing a lottery process based on random numbers, and in step 061IWS2033A (and step 061IWS2033B described below), a value corresponding to the number of time-saving times determined by the lottery process may be set in the high base number counter. In this case, for example, the number of time-saving times may be determined to be 100 times with a 90% probability, and 200 times with a 10% probability. Also, when the number of time-saving times is determined by a lottery process, the number of time-saving times may be determined by using the type-determining random numbers used to determine the jackpot type and the time-saving type, or the number of time-saving times may be determined by using a dedicated random number.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034A) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36A.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2034A to S2035A (and steps 061IWS2034B to S2035B described below), in this example, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up when the time-saving feature is missed.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step 061IWS2036A).

In this example, when the time-saving feature does not work, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is not set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is not reset), but the present invention is not limited to this configuration. The value of the rescue time-saving counter may be set to "800" (i.e., the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated is reset) even when the time-saving feature does not work, such as when a jackpot occurs or when the rescue time-saving feature is activated.

As shown in Figures 11-10 to 11-11, in this example, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, and when a time-saving miss occurs, a right-hit notification is configured to be executable to prompt the player to launch the game ball to the right of the game area. Also, when the jackpot pattern is stopped and displayed as the first special pattern, a gate notification may be configured to be executable as the right-hit notification to prompt the player to aim at the passing gate 41 and launch the game ball.

Also, when the jackpot pattern is displayed in a stopped state with the second special pattern, the right hit notification or gate notification is not executed, and when the game ball enters the first start winning hole in that state, the right hit notification or gate notification is executed (in this case, since the game ball is waiting to pass through the gate, even if the game ball enters the first start winning hole, the display of the first special pattern does not start immediately, and the first reserved memory is entered).

Conversely, when the passing of a game ball through the passage gate 41 is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is likely to be performed), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a low degree of recognition (e.g., low-volume sound output or small-screen display) to encourage the player to launch the game ball to the left of the game area. On the other hand, when the winning of a game ball into the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided on the right side of the game area) is detected in a normal state (low probability/low base state) (i.e., when a right-hit operation is suspected to be performed intentionally), a left-hit notification may be configured to be issued in a manner with a high degree of recognition (e.g., high-volume sound output or large-screen display). With such a configuration, the launch notification can be issued accurately. In particular, with the above configuration, a mild left-hit notification may be given to a player who accidentally launches a game ball to the right of the game area in a manner that reduces awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine, while a left-hit notification may be given to a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation in a manner that increases awareness of the surroundings of the gaming machine. With this configuration, a player who intentionally performs a right-hit operation can be prompted by a staff member at the gaming establishment to return to a left-hit operation.

In the above case, the system may be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the number of game balls detected on the right side of the game area, such as at the passing gate 41 or the second start winning port, reaches a certain number. The system may also be configured to issue a left-hit notification when the passing gate 41 detects game balls multiple times (e.g., five times) within a specified period (e.g., one minute), and to issue a left-hit notification when the second start winning port (or a special winning port provided on the right side of the game area) detects a specific number of game balls (e.g., one ball) or more that are less than the specified number.

In addition, this feature unit 116IW displays a demo when a specific condition is met, but if a game ball is detected entering the passing gate 41 or the second start winning hole (or a special winning hole provided to the right of the game area) while the demo display is being displayed in the normal state, the execution of the demo display that was being executed may be terminated and a left-hand hit notification may be issued.

(Second special symbol normal processing)
11-12 to 11-14 are flow charts showing the second special symbol normal processing in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. The second special symbol normal processing is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing. Note that the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating the second special symbol normal processing when the second special symbol display device 4B is not displaying the second special symbol.

In the second special symbol normal processing, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120) (step 061IWS50B). Note that when the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), that is, when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting processing (step S121) to small win end processing (step S128), and when neither a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) nor a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened) is in progress.

If the value of the reel control process flag indicates normal reel control processing (step S120), the game control microcomputer 100 checks the value of the second reserved memory number (step 061IWS51B). Specifically, it checks the count value of the second reserved memory number counter. If the second reserved memory number is 0, it sends a second customer waiting demo display designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS52B).

If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to reserved memory number = 1 in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 and stores it in the second random number buffer area of RAM 102 (step 061IWS53B), decreases the value of the second reserved memory number by 1 (decreases the count value of the second reserved memory number counter by 1), and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 061IWS54B). In other words, each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory number buffer of RAM 102 is stored in the storage area corresponding to second reserved memory number = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each second reserved memory number are extracted always matches the order of second reserved memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4. In other words, in this example, the contents of each storage area are shifted each time the variable display start condition is met, so the order in which each random number value was extracted can be determined.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the transmission of a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the presentation control board 12 (step 061IWS55B). Note that in this example, the processing of step 061IWS55B is executed, so that a setting value command is sent each time the variable display starts, but a setting value command is also sent when the setting change process (processing to change the setting value) is executed when the power is turned on.

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 sends a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS56B). Note that the specific method of sending the background designation command is the same as the process shown in step 061IWS56A of the first special pattern normal processing.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set (step 061IWS5601B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B.

If the probability of a special bonus is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0 (step 061IWS5602B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts 1 from the value of the rescue time reduction counter (step 061IWS5603B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (step 061IWS5604B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 126 or less (N in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the presentation control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5605B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0 (step 061IWS5606B). If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is not 0, the game proceeds to step 061IWS5617B. If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 0, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of rescue time reduction (step 061IWS5607B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets "800" to the high base counter, which indicates the remaining total number of times that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display that can be executed in the high base state (step 061IWS5608B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue fluctuation flag indicating that the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established (step 061IWS5609B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 controls the right-hit indicator 26 to start lighting up (step 061IWS5610B) and also controls the performance control CPU 120 to send a right-hit lighting start command (step 061IWS5611B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 061IWS5604B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets 7F (H) uniformly as the EXT data and controls to send command 957F (H) as the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5614B). Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800) (step 061IWS5615B). If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is in units of 100, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a value corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction counter to the EXT data, and performs control to send a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS5616B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the value of the high base count counter is "0" (step 061IWS5617B), and if it is "0", proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

If the value of the high base count counter is not "0", i.e., if it is in a low probability/high base state, the game control microcomputer 100 subtracts "1" from the value of the high base count counter (step 061IWS5618B) and determines whether it has become "0" (step 061IWS5619B). If the value of the high base count counter has not become "0", the process proceeds to step 061IWS57B.

When the value of the high base count counter becomes "0", the game control microcomputer 100 resets the high base flag, which indicates that a high base state is in progress (step 061IWS5620B).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the lighting extension flag (state extension flag) indicating that the lighting of the right-hit display 26 should be extended until the end of the fluctuation (step 061IWS5621B).

The game control microcomputer 100 then determines whether or not the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot (step 061IWS57B). Specifically, if the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the display of the fluctuating first special symbol, is set, it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot. If it is determined that the first special symbol is fluctuating during a jackpot, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B without carrying out any processing beyond step 061IWS58B. As a result, if the second special symbol starts fluctuating during a jackpot fluctuating first special symbol, it is configured to forcibly determine a miss regardless of whether a jackpot determination value has been stored.

The method of forcibly determining a miss is not limited to the above. For example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between jackpots, a process may be performed to set a miss random number (fixed value) as the random number for determining a win, and then the process may proceed to step 061IWS59B, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for determining a win was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

In addition, for example, if the first special symbol is fluctuating between big wins in step 061IWS57B, the processing of steps 061IWS58B to S63B may not be performed, and a miss random number value (fixed value) may be set as the random number for hit determination and a small win determination may be performed, forcing a miss regardless of which random number for hit determination was obtained at the time of the initial winning.

If the first special symbol is not in the jackpot fluctuation state, the game control microcomputer 100 reads the random number for hit determination from the second random number storage buffer (step 061IWS58B) and executes the jackpot determination module (step 061IWS59B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that a jackpot has occurred if the random number for hit determination matches a predetermined jackpot determination value. In step 061IWS59B, the game status is taken into account and a determination is made as to whether or not a jackpot has occurred is made using either the non-variable jackpot determination table or the variable jackpot determination table.

When it is decided that a jackpot has been reached (step 061IWS60B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second jackpot flag indicating that a jackpot has been reached based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step 061IWS61B). Then, based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, it determines whether the jackpot type is 6R jackpot A, 6R jackpot B, 6R jackpot C, or 6R jackpot D (step 061IWS62B), stores the jackpot type (step 061IWS63B), and proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

In addition, if the big win is not determined in step 061IWS60B, the game control microcomputer 100 executes the small win determination module (step 061IWS64B). The small win determination module is a program that determines that a small win will occur if the random number for winning determination (which may be a random number for small win determination) matches a predetermined small win determination value. If it is determined that a small win will occur (step 061IWS65B), the game control microcomputer 100 sets a second small win flag indicating that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the second special pattern (step 061IWS66B). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the small win type based on the winning type determination random number (step 061IWS67B) and stores the small win type (step 061IWS68B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In addition, there may be multiple types of small wins, each with a different opening pattern (i.e., ease of winning) for the variable winning ball device 061IW17 (special winning port), or there may be only one. If there is only one type of small win, the processing of steps 061IWS67B to S68B may be omitted.

Also, if a small win is not determined in step 061IWS65B, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high probability flag is set or not (step 061IWS69B). If the high probability flag is set, i.e., if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), the game proceeds to step 061IWS71B. In this example, by executing the processing of step 061IWS69B, if the game is in a high probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the game will be a miss without time reduction without performing the process of determining whether or not the game will be missed with time reduction in step 061IWS70B.

If the probability of winning is not set, i.e., if the probability is low, the game control microcomputer 100 uses a time-saving loss judgment table to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred, and performs a lottery process based on the random number for time-saving loss judgment to determine whether or not the time-saving loss has occurred (step 061IWS70B). In this case, it is determined that the time-saving loss has occurred with a probability of approximately 1/400. Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS71B.

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 determines the stopping pattern of the special pattern according to the determination result of the jackpot type and the time-saving type (step 061IWS71B). In this case, for example, if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot A, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "1", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot B, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "3", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot C, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "5", if it is determined to be a 6R jackpot D, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "7", if it is determined to be a small jackpot, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "9", if it is determined to be a time-saving miss, the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "2", and if it is determined to be a miss (no time-saving), the stopping pattern of the special pattern is determined to be "-". In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 stores the determined special symbol stop pattern in a stop pattern memory area provided in the RAM 102 (step 061IWS72B).

Then, in step 061IWS89B, the value of the second special chart process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step 061IWS89B).

(Second variation pattern setting process)
11-15 is a flowchart showing the second variation pattern setting process in the first embodiment of the feature unit 116IW. In the second variation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the rescue variation flag is set (step 061IWS17091B).

If the rescue fluctuation flag is set, i.e., if the fluctuation display indicates that rescue time reduction is established, the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue fluctuation flag (step 061IWS17092B) and selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table C for when rescue time reduction is established, shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS17093B). Then, it proceeds to step 061IWS1717B.

If the rescue variation flag is not set, it is checked whether the high probability variation flag is set (step 061IWS1710B). If the high probability variation flag is set, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS1711B). If the high base flag is not set (i.e., if the game is in a high probability/low base state), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the variation pattern table A for the second special symbol in a high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) as the variation pattern table for determining the variation pattern (step 061IWS1712B). If the high probability flag has not been set (N in step 061IWS1710B) or if the high base flag has been set (Y in step 061IWS1711B), the game control microcomputer 100 selects the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table B for times other than the high probability/low base state shown in FIG. 11-4 (B) as the fluctuation pattern table for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 061IWS1713B).

Then, the game control microcomputer 100 determines which of the variation patterns shown in FIG. 11-4 will be used based on the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 061IWS1712B and S1713B and the variation pattern determination random number stored in the second special pattern determination buffer (step 061IWS1717B).

Once the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 100 performs control to send a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1704B).

In addition, when the second special symbol fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) is determined in step 061IWS1717B, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the second fluctuation time timer and starts measuring the fluctuation time (step 061IWS1705B), and starts displaying the fluctuation of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (step 061IWS1706B). Then, the game control microcomputer 100 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol fluctuation processing (step 061IWS1707B).

In this example, by executing the above process, when the second special symbol variation display is executed, if the game state is a high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table A is selected and the normal variation time variation display is executed. On the other hand, if the game state is a state other than the high probability/low base state, the second special symbol variation pattern table B is selected and the long variation variation display is executed. Also, in the case of the second special symbol variation display that establishes the rescue time reduction, the second special symbol variation pattern table C is selected and the variation display dedicated to when the rescue time reduction is established is executed.

(Second special symbol variation processing)
11-16 is a flowchart showing the second special symbol variation process in the second special symbol process process. In the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) (step 061IWS1120B). The case where the value of the reel control process flag is a value indicating the reel control normal process (step S120) is when the value of the reel control process flag is not a value indicating the gate passage waiting process (step S121) to the small win end process (step S128), and when the game is not a big win game (the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened a predetermined number of times) or a small win game (the special variable winning ball device 17 is opened).

If the value of the reel control process flag is set to a value indicating normal reel control processing (step S120), the CPU 103 performs control to send one of the display result designation commands to the performance control CPU 120 based on the decision result of whether or not a jackpot has been determined and the decision result of the jackpot type, if they have not been sent yet (step 061IWS1121B).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the second variable time timer (step 061IWS1122B), and when the second variable time timer times out (step 061IWS1123B), it performs control to send a second symbol determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1124B). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

If the second variable time timer has not timed out, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol (step 061IWS1125B). Whether or not the first special symbol display device 4A is displaying a jackpot symbol can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop processing and whether or not the first jackpot flag, which indicates that a jackpot will occur based on the variable display of the first special symbol, is set.

If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a big win pattern, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern (step 061IWS1126B). Whether or not the first special pattern display device 4A is deriving and displaying a small win pattern can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the first special pattern process flag is a value corresponding to the first special pattern stop processing and whether or not the first small win flag, which indicates that a small win will occur based on the variable display of the first special pattern, is set. If the first special pattern display device 4A is not deriving and displaying a small win pattern, the process ends.

When the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a big win pattern (Y in step 061IWS1125B), or when the first special pattern display device 4A derives and displays a small win pattern (Y in step 061IWS11256), the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second forced pattern determination command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS1129B). In this case, if the second big win flag or the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the second big win flag or the second small win flag. Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the second special pattern stop processing (step 061IWS1130B).

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS1125B to S1126B and S1129B, in this characteristic section 116IW, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a big hit or a small hit while the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, so that a situation in which the first special symbol and the second special symbol simultaneously produce a big hit or a small hit does not occur. In this case, if the variable display of the second special symbol is a forced miss, the performance control CPU 120 side controls to forcibly stop the display of a miss symbol as a result of the variable display of the decorative symbol, based on the second forced symbol determination designation command sent in step 061IWS1129B.

In this example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, the second special symbol is forced to stop regardless of the display result, but this is not limited to the configuration. For example, if the first special symbol becomes a small win while the second special symbol is being displayed, and the display result of the second special symbol is a big win and the big win type has a high advantage (for example, 6R big win C), the second special symbol is not forced to stop, and the second special symbol change process may be terminated as it is. In this case, based on the fact that the first special symbol becomes a small win, the value of the role control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small win opening pre-processing (step S126), and the game moves to a small win game. Therefore, after the next timer interruption, step 061IWS1120B is judged as N, the processing of steps 061IWS1121B to S1130B is skipped, and the second variable time timer of step 061IWS1122B is not updated. Therefore, if the variable display of the first special symbol is a small hit and the variable display of the second special symbol that will result in a sure-win is being executed, the update of the second variable time timer is interrupted during the small hit game, and the variable display of the second special symbol continues to be executed. Then, when the small hit game ends, the value of the reel control process flag is updated again to a value corresponding to the reel control normal processing (step S120), and the update of the second variable time timer is resumed.

Also, in this example, if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, and the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the second special pattern change process ends (see N in step 061IWS1127B). Therefore, even if the first special pattern changes to a small win while the second special pattern is being changed, which would result in a miss or small win, the update of the second change time timer is interrupted during the small win game, and the second special pattern change display continues to be executed, and when the small win game ends, the update of the second change time timer resumes.

In this example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the player aims the game ball at the left side of the play area and shoots it (hits it from the left) in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6Aa, which serves as the first start winning hole, and cause the first special symbol to change and be displayed. In principle, the game ball will not enter the second start winning hole located on the right side of the play area and cause the second special symbol to change and be displayed. However, the player may mistakenly perform the shooting operation (or may intentionally aim for the second special symbol, which is more advantageous than the first special symbol, even if a long change is performed), and the second special symbol may change and be displayed. In other words, there is a risk that a jackpot symbol will be derived and displayed in a change and displayed that the player does not intend, or that the player may intentionally aim for the second start winning hole.

Therefore, in this example, during the execution of the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the other special symbol based on the derived and displayed small winning symbol in the variable display of the other special symbol. For example, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player wins in the second start winning hole unintentionally and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol if the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is a small winning. Also, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), even if the player intentionally performs a firing operation (right hit) aiming for a win in the second start winning hole and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is a long fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes), so the fluctuation efficiency is extremely poor. Then, if the first special symbol is displayed and a small win symbol is derived during the second special symbol display, the second special symbol display is forcibly stopped at a losing symbol. This configuration makes it possible to avoid the big win symbol being derived from the unintended special symbol display, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Second special symbol stop processing)
11-17 and 11-18 are flow charts showing the second special symbol stop processing. In the second special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 103 checks whether the lighting extension flag is set or not (step 061IWS2010B). If the lighting extension flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the lighting extension flag that was set (step 061IWS2011B). In addition, the CPU 103 controls to end the lighting of the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2012B) and also controls to send a right-hit lighting end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2013B).

Next, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol display device 4B to derive and display the stopping symbol of the second special symbol (step 061IWS2014B). In this case, if the second forced symbol determination command was sent in step 061IWS1129B of the second special symbol variation process, the CPU 103 causes the second special symbol to be forcibly derived and displayed as the stopping symbol of the second special symbol, regardless of the result of the determination at the start of the variation.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the second jackpot flag is set (step 061IWS2015B). If the second jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot start flag (step 061IWS2016B). The CPU 103 also clears the second jackpot flag (step 061IWS2017B).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-hit display 26 (step 061IWS2018B) and also performs control to send a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2019B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS2027B.

By executing the processing of steps 061IWS2018B and S2019B, in this example, when a jackpot occurs in the variable display of the second special pattern, the right-hit indicator 26 starts to light up. That is, in this example, since the special variable winning ball device 7 (big winning hole) is provided to the right of the play area, it is more advantageous for the player to perform a right-hit operation during jackpot play, and the right-hit indicator 26 is turned on.

If the second big win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2015B), the CPU 103 determines whether the second small win flag is set (step 061IWS2020B). If the second small win flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to send a small win start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2021B). The CPU 103 also clears the second small win flag (step 061IWS2022B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the reel control process flag to a value corresponding to the pre-processing for the small win (step 061IWS2026B).Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing for the second special symbol (step 061IWS2027B).

If the second small win flag is not set (N in step 061IWS2020B), the CPU 103 checks whether it has been decided that the time reduction has been missed (step 061IWS2030B).

If it is decided that the time-saving feature should be disabled, the CPU 103 checks whether the high base flag is set (step 061IWS2031B). If the high base flag is set (i.e., the game is in a low probability/high base state), the process proceeds to step 061IWS2036B.

If the high base flag is not set (i.e., in the normal state (low probability/low base state)), the CPU 103 sets the high base flag based on the occurrence of a time-saving miss (step 061IWS2032B). The CPU 103 also sets the high base count counter to "100" (step 061IWS2033B).

Next, the CPU 103 controls the right-hit display 26 to start lighting (step 061IWS2034B) and transmits a right-hit lighting start command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 061IWS2035B). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS36B.

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2036B).

Then, the CPU 103 sets the value of the second special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the normal processing of the second special pattern (step 061IWS2037B).

(External output signal)
FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal output from the pachinko game machine 1. In this example, in step S23, a process is performed to output a signal as shown in FIG. 11-19 to an external device such as a hall management computer. As shown in FIG. 11-19, in this example, the external output signals are a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, a fluctuation stop signal, a security signal, a door open signal, a prize ball signal, and an out ball signal. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game. The jackpot 2 signal is a signal output during a jackpot game and during a high base state. The jackpot 3 signal is a signal output during a pattern determination period when the time reduction is not performed. The jackpot 4 signal is a signal output at the start of a variable display that becomes a rescue time reduction. The fluctuation stop signal is a signal output at the start of a pattern determination period. The security signal is a signal output at the time of error detection. The door open signal is a signal outputted to the outside when the door is opened. The prize ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 prize balls are dispensed. The out ball signal is a signal outputted to the outside when 10 out balls are detected. In an external device such as a hall management computer, the number of jackpots can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal, the number of consecutive wins can be measured by the jackpot 1 signal and the jackpot 2 signal, the number of high base control via time reduction misses can be measured by the jackpot 3 signal, and the number of high base control via rescue time reduction can be measured by the jackpot 4 signal.

In this example, in addition to the case where the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, so when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the external output of the jackpot 3 signal is started at the end of the pattern determination period. Also, since the high base state may also be transitioned to when the time-saving rescue is activated, when a variable display that results in a time-saving rescue is executed, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started at the start of the variable display. Note that, for example, when the high base state is transitioned to when the time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, a signal may be output from a dedicated terminal different from the terminal that outputs the jackpot signal 2, so that it may be possible to externally identify that the transition to the time-saving state was triggered by the time-saving miss pattern being derived and displayed. Also, for example, the jackpot 2 signal may be output externally during jackpot play and during a high probability/high base state, and the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be output externally at the start of a low probability/high base state (or during a low probability/high base state), making it possible to distinguish between a high probability/high base state and a low probability/high base state externally.

In this example, when the rescue time is reduced, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal is started in response to the start of the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction, and the variable stop signal is output to the outside at the start of the pattern determination period in response to the end of the variable display. With this configuration, a signal that can be specified to be controlled to a high base state based on the rescue time reduction can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing. In addition, when the jackpot 4 signal and the variable stop signal are output, it is possible to avoid missing signals externally. In addition, the number of times that the rescue time is reduced by the output of the jackpot 4 signal can be specified externally. In this way, it is possible to specify the trigger, timing, and number of times that the high base state is controlled in an external device such as a hall management computer, so that it is possible to perform operational analysis of gaming machines in gaming establishments, such as the actual operational rescue time reduction achievement rate and the type of customer demographic when the number of rescue times is reached.

In this example, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). However, if the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving stops being displayed or at the start or end of the pattern determination period, for example, the external output of the jackpot 4 signal may be started when the high base flag is set and the state transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

The jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output even during jackpot play. In addition, while this example shows a case where separate external output signals (jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal) are output when the time-saving feature is missed and when the time-saving feature is rescued, a shared external output signal may be output.

The jackpot 3 signal and jackpot 4 signal may also be configured to be output at a timing after the fluctuation stop signal is output during the pattern determination period.

For example, the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the losing pattern, and the jackpot 3 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output, or the change stop signal may be output at the start of the pattern determination period of the variable display that results in a rescue time reduction, and the jackpot 4 signal may be output during the pattern determination period after the change stop signal is output. This configuration makes it possible to avoid signals being missed externally when the change stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal are output simultaneously.

The jackpot 3 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a time-saving miss. The jackpot 4 signal may be configured to continue to be output even during a high base state via a rescue time-saving. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to appropriately determine the type of time-saving even during a high base state.

(Game state transition)
Next, the transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the first embodiment of the feature part 116IW. In the first embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable. Also, since it is in the low base state, the normal hit probability is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball win the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning port and execute the variable display of the first special symbol, the player aims at the left side of the game area and performs the launch operation of the game ball (left shot). Therefore, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the start winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6Aa as the first start winning hole, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, mainly a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B occurs.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/low base state, the game will transition to a low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (100 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288).

As shown in FIG. 11-20, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS2032A, S2032B). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving occurs (after RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (see steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B).

When the game moves to the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the second special symbol is displayed in the normal time, whereas the first special symbol is displayed in the long time. Also, because the game is in the low base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is low at 1/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is opened less frequently. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole and to display the second special symbol, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability change state), the starting winning occurs mainly in the winning ball device 061IW6B as the second start winning hole, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state, a 6R jackpot C or a 6R jackpot D will mainly occur.

As shown in Figure 11-20, when a 6R jackpot C occurs in a high probability/low base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition again to the high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2253 to S2260). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R jackpot D occurs in a high probability/low base state, after the jackpot play ends, the game transitions to a high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), and the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) is maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2269, S2274).

When the game moves to the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, since the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims at the right side of the game area and performs the firing operation (right shot). Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or a 6R jackpot B will mainly occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a high probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a high probability/high base state, after the jackpot game ends, the state transitions to a low probability/high base state, and the low probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

When the game moves to the low probability/high base state, the first special symbol is displayed in the normal display time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in the long display time. However, because the game is in the high base state, the probability of hitting the normal symbol is high at 999/1000, and the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab is frequently in the open state. Therefore, in order to make the game ball enter the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole and to cause the first special symbol to be displayed, the player aims the game ball at the right side of the game area and performs the shooting operation (right shot). Therefore, in the low probability/high base state, the start winning mainly occurs in the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab as the first start winning hole, and the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In addition, because the first special symbol is primarily displayed in a variable manner, if a jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state, a 6R jackpot A or 6R jackpot B will typically occur.

As shown in FIG. 11-20, when a 6R jackpot B occurs in a low probability/high base state, if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/low base state (first special probability state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs (see steps 061IWS2204 to S2206, S2240). However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R jackpot A occurs in a low probability/high base state, the game will transition back to the low probability/high base state after the jackpot play ends, and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the variable display ends a predetermined number of times (200 times in this example) (see steps 061IWS2284-S2286, S2288).

Also, as shown in Figure 11-20, if the rescue time-saving mode is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game will be controlled again to the low probability/high base state with the time-saving number of 800 (see steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5607B to S5608B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

Specifically, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via a time-saving miss, if the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A, S5617A to S5620A, S2030B to S2033B, S5617B to S5620B).

In addition, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurs in a low base state, when the display of the first special pattern changes and the display of the second special pattern changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2288, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B). Also, if the game is controlled to a low probability/high base state via a jackpot that occurred in a high base state, when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 200 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the game transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS2284, S2286, S2287, S5617A-S5620A, S5617B-S5620B).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state is controlled via the rescue time reduction, if the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A, S5617A to S5620A, S5607B to S5608B, S5617B to S5620B).

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-20, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), a 6R jackpot C is generated and the state is controlled again to the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), or a 6R jackpot D is generated and the state is controlled to the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), so even if a jackpot occurs, there is a 100% probability of the state returning to the probability variable state. Therefore, in the high probability/low base state (first probability variable state), it can be said that at least two more jackpots are guaranteed to occur during the probability variable state (two loops). On the other hand, in the high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), if a 6R jackpot B occurs, the state is controlled to the high probability/low base state and the probability variable state continues, but if a 6R jackpot A occurs, the state transitions to the low probability/high base state and the probability variable state ends. Therefore, in the high probability/high base state (second probability state), it can be said that only one more jackpot is guaranteed to occur during the probability state (one loop).

In this example, the jackpot types are all 6-round jackpots, 6R jackpots A to D, but this is not the only possible embodiment. For example, this example shows a case where the jackpot is controlled to a low probability/high base state when a 6R jackpot A occurs, but even when controlled to the same low probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot A, or a 10-round jackpot, 10R jackpot A, with different numbers of rounds. Similarly, even when controlled to the same high probability/high base state, it may be configured to have a 4-round jackpot, 4R jackpot D, or a 10-round jackpot D, with various possible embodiments.

As shown in Figures 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19, in this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state), the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a normal variable time, whereas the second special symbol's variable display is executed in a long variable time. In other words, the first special symbol's variable display is executed in a shorter variable time (or the probability of execution is high) than the second special symbol's variable display. Thus, in this example, the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability variable state) are states in which the first special symbol's variable display is more likely to have a shorter variable time than the second special symbol's variable display (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the first shortened state). In this example, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability change state) that are the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display is 100%, but the configuration is not limited to such a percentage. For example, in the first shortened state, the percentage of the first special symbol variable display having a shorter variable time than the second special symbol variable display may be lower than 100%, but may be configured to be at least higher than the second shortened state described below.

In addition, in this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (or the rate at which it is displayed is high). Therefore, in this example, the high probability/low base state (first probability state) is a state in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol (hereinafter, such a state is also referred to as the second shortened state). In this example, in the high probability/low base state (first probability state) which is the second shortened state, the rate at which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol is 100%, but the present invention is not limited to such a ratio configuration. For example, in the second shortened state, the percentage of times that the second special symbol's variable display has a shorter variable time than the first special symbol's variable display may be configured to be lower than 100%, but at least higher than in the first shortened state.

In this example, in the first shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the first special pattern, and in the second shortened state, the image display device 5 mainly displays the decorative pattern in response to the display of the second special pattern.

As described above, in this example, even if the display of one of the first and second special symbols is being changed and the other special symbol is changed, the display of the one special symbol is not forcibly stopped. In this configuration, for example, when the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the other special symbol, in the normal state, if the display of the second special symbol is being changed and a rescue time reduction is achieved by the display of the first special symbol, and the display is controlled to the rescue time reduction (high base state), the display of the second special symbol being changed continues without being forcibly stopped. Here, as the control of the rescue time reduction (high base state), in addition to the control related to the normal symbols, such as the control to increase the probability of winning the normal symbol, the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and the control related to the normal symbol, such as the control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first starting winning port), if the control related to the special symbols is performed, such as the control to shorten the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., control to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol), the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency) cannot be executed until the fluctuation display of the second special symbol being executed (for example, a fluctuation time of 10 minutes) ends, and the benefit of the rescue time reduction cannot be enjoyed. In such a state, even if the rescue time reduction is controlled, the progress of the game will be significantly delayed and interest will decrease.

In this example, when the rescue time reduction is established, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the change time of the first special symbol (i.e., the change display of the first special symbol is controlled to the first shortened state (in this example, low probability/high base state) in which the probability that the change display of the first special symbol will be a change display with a shorter change time than the change display of the second special symbol) in addition to the control of the normal symbols. With this configuration, when the rescue time reduction is established, it is controlled to the first shortened state (low probability/high base state), so even if the change display of the second special symbol (long change) that is being executed continues, it is possible to execute the change display of the first special symbol with a shortened change time (i.e., improved change efficiency), and the benefit of the rescue time reduction can be enjoyed. In addition, when the rescue time reduction is controlled, the game can be played smoothly, and interest can be increased.

The display of the second special symbol (long fluctuation) that is currently in progress continues even after the transition to the first shortened state's rescue time reduction (high base state), but if a jackpot occurs due to the display of the first special symbol with the shortened fluctuation time, it will be forcibly stopped at the losing symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the processing of steps 061IWS1125B, S1129B).

(Example of control of game state)
Next, an example of control of the game state will be described. Fig. 11-21 is a time chart for explaining an example of control of the game state in the first embodiment.

Of Figures 11-21, Figure 11-21(A) shows an example of control of the game state when, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), the display of the second special symbol that results in a time-saving miss is started, and while the display of the second special symbol is being executed, the display of the first special symbol that results in a rescue time-saving miss (no time-saving) is started.

As shown in Figure 11-21 (A), when the display of the first special pattern that establishes the rescue time-saving function starts to change (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), the losing symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of the first special symbol when the rescue time reduction is established (T2 timing), but at this time the losing symbol is not forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the second special symbol that is being executed.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), after the rescue time-saving effect is established and a transition is made to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving effect (low probability/high base state), the time-saving effect is deduced and displayed in the display of the second special symbol that started before the display of the first special symbol that established the rescue time-saving effect (T3 timing), but at this time the number of times the time-saving effect has occurred is not updated due to the time-saving effect not occurring (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving effect due to the rescue time-saving effect, which has a higher degree of advantage and has a greater number of times the time-saving effect has occurred than the time-saving effect not occurring, is maintained.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-21(A), the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss (no time-saving effect), but even if the display result of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established is a miss for the time-saving effect, the control of the game state does not change. Specifically, when the display of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established (miss for the time-saving effect) starts (T1 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state (low probability/low base state) to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A). Then, the display of the first special symbol variable display for which the rescue time-saving effect is established derives and displays a miss for the time-saving effect (T1 timing), but at this time the number of time-saving effects is not updated due to the miss for the time-saving effect (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030B to S2031B). In other words, the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving feature, which has more time-saving attempts and is more advantageous than the time-saving feature that is missing, will be maintained.

Of Figures 11-21, Figure 11-21(B) shows an example of control of the game state when the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving ends at the start of a variable display that results in a time-saving error.

As shown in Figure 11-21 (B), in the time-saving state due to rescue time-saving (low probability/high base state), when the variable display that is the time-saving deviation starts, the high base count counter is updated and the value becomes 0 (t1 timing), control is performed to end the rescue time-saving and transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS5617A to S5620A).

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-21 (B), when the display of the first special symbol indicates that the time-saving feature has failed (t2 timing), control is performed to transition from the normal state to a time-saving feature state (low probability/high base state) due to the time-saving feature having failed (corresponding to the processing of steps 061IWS2030A to S2033A).

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 11-22 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in FIG. 7. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads out the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop pattern) of the decorative pattern according to the variable pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 100IWS802). That is, the performance control CPU 120 executes the process of step 100IWS802, thereby realizing a display result determination means that determines the display result of the variable display of the identification information (the stop pattern of the decorative pattern) according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determination means. In addition, when a pseudo consecutive win is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 also determines a chance pattern (for example, a combination of patterns that are not a reach but are one pattern away from the jackpot pattern, such as "223" or "445") as a provisional stop pattern during the pseudo consecutive win in step 100IWS802. The performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop pattern of the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the performance control CPU 120 may determine whether or not a jackpot has been reached based on the received variation pattern command, and determine the stop pattern of the decorative pattern based only on the variation pattern command.

In step 100IWS802, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same even numbers as the stopping symbols (normal jackpot pattern). Also, for example, if the received display result designation command indicates a 6R jackpot B to D, the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns in which three symbols are the same odd numbers as the stopping symbols (variable jackpot pattern). Also, if the received display result designation command indicates a "small jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative patterns of "135" as the stopping symbols (small jackpot pattern).

In the case of a "miss", a combination of decorative symbols other than those mentioned above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols where the two symbols on the left and right are aligned is determined. Also, even if there is a miss, if it is a "time-saving miss", a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. If there are multiple types of time-saving misses, the system may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of the miss symbols including different special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) according to the type of time-saving miss.

However, in this example, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, it is effectively invalidated, so when in a high base state, even if the received display result designation command indicates a "time-saving miss," the combination of decorative patterns for a "miss" is displayed, rather than a combination of decorative patterns for a miss pattern including a special pattern (e.g., a star pattern). Note that in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, even if a time-saving miss occurs in a high base state, a special pattern corresponding to the time-saving miss is displayed.

The performance control CPU 120, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating the combination of decorative patterns is associated with a numerical value. In other words, the stopping pattern is determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

As for the decorative patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a jackpot (a combination of the same patterns on the left, center, and right) are called jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a chance jackpot (a combination of the same odd-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called chance jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a normal jackpot (non-chances jackpot) (a combination of the same even-numbered patterns on the left, center, and right) are called non-chances jackpot patterns. Among jackpot patterns, stopping patterns that evoke a miss are called miss patterns.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the execution of a preview performance to be executed during the display of the fluctuation (step 108IWS802A). As a preview performance, for example, a timer performance can be executed in which a countdown is started after the fluctuation starts, and when the count reaches "0", a performance image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the execution setting of the timer performance can be set.

In this example, the preview effect can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot or a miss, and is configured so that the preview effect is executed more frequently in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of the preview effect suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the rate at which the preview performance is executed is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed but does not result in a jackpot during the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) . In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed at a lower rate in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, if a display (e.g., a countdown display) that suggests the upcoming rescue time reduction can be executed during a specified period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time reduction), then by restricting the execution of a timer display as a preview display at this time, it is possible to avoid multiple numbers indicating the counter being displayed, preventing them from interfering with each other.

In addition, in this example, a preview effect can be executed in a red presentation mode (e.g., a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (e.g., a blue presentation image is displayed), and the system is configured so that the probability of executing a preview effect in the red presentation mode is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. Therefore, the execution of a preview effect in the red presentation mode suggests that there is a high probability of a jackpot.

In this configuration, the ratio of executing the preview performance in the red performance mode when the display result is a miss is lower in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. In addition, the pre-reading preview performance may also be configured to be executed in the predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is more than 10).

In addition, when multiple types of preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with different jackpot expectations are configured to be executable, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a high jackpot expectation may be restricted from being executed during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less). For example, when the jackpot expectation is classified into five stages, only the preview effects (and pre-reading preview effects) with a jackpot expectation of the fourth stage or higher may be restricted from being executed. In addition, for example, when a preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed is configured to be executable, the execution of the preview effect (and pre-reading preview effect) that suggests that the time reduction will be missed may be restricted during a predetermined period before the rescue time reduction (in this example, the period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less).

In addition, for example, even if there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is activated, if a variable display is executed that indicates a jackpot or a time-saving feature failure, the execution of the preview effect (and the look-ahead preview effect) may not be restricted.

In addition, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving, the execution of the look-ahead preview performance or the preview performance may be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be reduced (or not executed). In this case, the execution rate of the preview performance in the case of a miss may be reduced (or not executed), or the execution rate of the type of preview performance with a high expectation may be reduced (or not executed). In addition, if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the rescue time-saving, that is, the reserved memories are stored before the fluctuation of the rescue time-saving is reached and are executed after being controlled to the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving, It may be configured to restrict (prohibit) the execution of a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed. This makes it possible to restrict the execution of look-ahead preview performances that span before and after the control of the time-saving rescue is performed, and to avoid malfunctions in the performance. Note that even if the number of reserved memories is a value greater than the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is performed, when in a time-saving state (for example, a time-saving state via a jackpot or a time-saving state via a missed time-saving rescue), it may be possible to execute a look-ahead preview performance that targets reserved memory corresponding to the fluctuation that will be performed after control of the time-saving rescue is performed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 (step 108IWS805). Note that whether the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0 can be determined, for example, by checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command is 0.

When the number of remaining changes until the rescue time reduction is reached is 0, the presentation control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot or not (step 108IWS806A). When the display result is not a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry presentation that notifies the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, the time-saving entry presentation can notify the player that the rescue time reduction will control the player to the time-saving state at the appropriate time, thereby increasing the player's interest when the rescue time reduction is reached.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the presentation control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry pseudo presentation that notifies the player that a jackpot has been reached after executing a presentation of a common type to the time-saving entry presentation (step 100IWS806C). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after first recognizing that the number of remaining changes until the time-saving rescue period is reached is 0, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In this example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed is reached, a special change pattern (second change pattern #M) is used to execute a time-saving feature appearance effect, but this is not limited to this. For example, a full rotation effect (i.e., a jackpot is confirmed) in which the three decorative symbols change while remaining aligned, which is not executed except when the number of times the time-saving feature has been changed, may be executed. By configuring it in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and to increase interest.

In addition, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the rescue time-saving fluctuations is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for a jackpot as usual may be used, or a fluctuation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be used.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a miss when the number of times the time-saving change is reached, a dedicated time-saving change pattern for a miss is used, but this is not limited to the above. For example, a normal miss pattern may be used, or a change pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short change time may be used. By configuring in this way, the change pattern can be made common before and after the number of times the time-saving change is reached, and data capacity can be reduced. In this case, when the next change display starts, the image display device 5 switches to a background image corresponding to the time-saving state (see steps 061IWS56A, S56B), and this change in background image can notify the user that the time-saving state has been controlled by the time-saving change.

If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is not 0, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance selects a process table corresponding to the change pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process proceeds to step 108IWS812. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, or 700, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a promotional effect (for example, an effect that suggests the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) corresponding to the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached. If the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached is 10 or less, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance may select a process table including a countdown effect (for example, an effect that counts down the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached) or an effect effect (for example, an effect that changes depending on the number of remaining changes until the time reduction is reached).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data is set that the performance control CPU 120 refers to when controlling the performance device. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (performance parts) such as the image display device 5 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data that is a collection of multiple combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating the manner of change that constitutes the change manner during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the image display device 5 is included. In addition, the process timer setting value is set to the change time for that change manner. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and controls the display of the decorative pattern in the change manner set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. In addition, the process table is stored in the ROM in the performance control board 12. In addition, a process table is prepared according to each change pattern.

The process table used when controlling the performance of a variation pattern involving a reach performance has process data set therein which indicates that the left pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, and that the right pattern is to be stopped and displayed when a further predetermined time has elapsed. In addition, instead of setting the pattern to be stopped and displayed in the process table, an image for displaying the pattern may be generated by synthesizing according to the determined stopping pattern, or the provisional stopping pattern in the pseudo consecutive or sliding performance.

The performance control CPU 120 also controls the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1) (step 108IWS813). For example, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123 to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In this characteristic section 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern command.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value equivalent to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Example of performance)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state C, which is the rescue time-saving state, will be described. Fig. 11-23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the time-saving state in the first embodiment is shifted to. In Fig. 11-23, the performance screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the example shown in FIG. 11-23, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is stopped and then the variable display that results in the rescue time reduction is started, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), a time reduction entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. Also at this time, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs right-hit is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11-23(C), the blackout state is resolved, and an image is displayed (for example, a "Chance mode has been entered" display shown in FIG. 11-23(C)) to notify the player that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) is about to begin, and a special sound effect is output.

In the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, the time-saving entry effect is executed when the rescue time-saving feature is initiated, so that a notification that the time-saving feature will be activated can be issued at an appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving feature, thereby enhancing interest.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when a change display is being executed based on a change pattern (for example, first change pattern #M) that is specifically designed for when rescue time-saving is established, the time-saving entry effect is executed, so that the player can be clearly notified by the time-saving entry effect that the game will be controlled to the time-saving state based on the establishment of rescue time-saving.

In addition, in the configuration shown in FIG. 11-23, when the time-saving entry effect is executed (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving is started), the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed, so that the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

When the time-saving state, including the rescue time-saving state, ends and transitions to the normal state, a left-hand hit instruction display instructing the player to hit left may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance, notifications that are generally made during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning to not forget to remove the prepaid card or a warning to prevent addiction, may be made, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer may be displayed. In this case, the notifications and logo display in the time-saving entry performance may be made in the same manner as the notifications and logo display in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. In addition, these notifications and logo displays may not be made during the time-saving entry performance, but may be made during the ending period of the first big win after the time-saving state has been entered by the rescue time-saving.

When the display result is a jackpot when the number of times the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect is reached, as shown in FIG. 11-23(B), a blackout effect is started in the same manner as the time-saving time-saving effect, making it difficult to see the effect display (e.g., decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5, and a right-hit instruction display 100IW108 that instructs the player to hit right is displayed. Then, instead of the effect shown in FIG. 11-23(C), the blackout state is eliminated and an effect is executed in which a jackpot pattern (e.g., the combination of patterns "777") is stopped and displayed. Then, the game moves to a jackpot game. With this configuration, the player is notified of a jackpot after once recognizing that the time-saving time-saving time-saving time-saving effect has been achieved, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

In addition, when the configuration of this feature unit 116IW is applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a special feature game in which control is made to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the special feature during a small win game, when the display result of the variable display that results in a rescue time-saving feature is a small win, a fake time-saving entry performance may be executed, and then a notification of a small win may be made.

(Modification 1-3)
Next, the configuration of modified example 1-3 will be described. In this example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a time reduction entry presentation is configured to notify that control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) will start, but since it is also configured to start control of the time reduction state (rescue time reduction) at the start of the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, it may be configured to execute the time reduction entry presentation in the variable display immediately before the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established.

In this case, for example, in the first special pattern normal processing and the second special pattern normal processing, when the value of the updated rescue time reduction counter is "1", a rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, indicating that the fluctuation display is immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established, and in the first fluctuation pattern setting processing and the second fluctuation pattern setting processing, if the rescue immediately before rescue fluctuation flag is set, a dedicated fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the first fluctuation pattern #M or the first fluctuation pattern #N) is determined to be used only for the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established. Then, in the variable display start setting processing, if the remaining number of rescue time reductions is 1, a process table including a time reduction entry performance is selected. By such processing, a time reduction entry performance can be executed in the fluctuation display immediately before the fluctuation display in which rescue time reduction is established.

Figure 11-24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode up to the transition to the time-saving state in variant 1-3 of the first embodiment. In Figure 11-24, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the modified example 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed in the variable display immediately before the variable display that establishes the rescue time-saving effect. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-24(A), when the variable display two times before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect is stopped and then the variable display immediately before the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving effect starts, as shown in FIG. 11-24(B), a time-saving entry effect (blackout effect) is started that makes it difficult to see the effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5. However, since the time-saving state has not been entered at this point, right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing right-hit is not displayed.

Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 11-24(C), the blackout state is cleared, and an image is displayed (for example, the "Entering Chance Mode" display shown in FIG. 11-24(C)) to notify the user that control of the time-saving state (rescue time-saving) has begun, and sound effects are output. At this point, the time-saving state has not yet been entered, so the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing the player to hit to the right is not displayed.

After that, when the variable display that results in the rescue time-saving starts, control of the time-saving state begins, and the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 instructing a right hit is displayed, as shown in FIG. 11-24 (D).

In the configuration of variant 1-3 shown in FIG. 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving mode begins, so the player can prepare to hit the right in anticipation of the start of the rescue time-saving mode. In this respect, too, a notification that the time-saving mode will be entered can be issued at the appropriate time based on the establishment of the rescue time-saving mode, which can increase interest.

In addition, when a time-saving entry effect is executed in the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established, the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established executes the change display using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, the change pattern can be made common when the rescue time-saving is established and before it is established, and data capacity can be reduced. Note that the change display that executes the time-saving entry effect (the change display immediately before the change display in which the rescue time-saving is established) may also execute the change display using a change pattern that is also used in other change displays (i.e., a change pattern that is not exclusive to when the rescue time-saving is established).

In addition, in the configuration of variant example 1-3 shown in Figure 11-24, the time-saving entry effect is executed immediately before the rescue time-saving feature starts, but the right-hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when the variable display indicating that the rescue time-saving feature is established starts (i.e., when control of the time-saving state by the rescue time-saving feature starts), so the right-hit notification can be executed appropriately.

In addition, when the display result of the variable display immediately before the variable display in which the rescue time-saving feature is established is a jackpot, it may be possible to execute a performance that gives the illusion of entering the time-saving feature. With this configuration, the player is informed of the jackpot after first recognizing that the rescue time-saving feature has been established, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases their interest.

In addition, the configuration that enables the execution of a time-saving entry effect and a time-saving entry appearance effect when a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, or when a variable display immediately prior to a variable display that establishes a rescue time-saving effect is executed, is not limited to gaming machines with the configuration shown in the first embodiment of this characteristic unit 116IW, but can also be applied to gaming machines with other configurations, such as a gaming machine with a high probability/low base state (small hit RUSH) in which small hits occur frequently, as shown in the second embodiment.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the characteristic part 116IW will be described. Note that in this embodiment, detailed descriptions of parts that perform the same configurations and processes as those in the first embodiment will be omitted, and the description will focus mainly on parts that are different from the first embodiment.

In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a normal state (low probability/non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) in which a small hit is more likely to occur than in the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT state: a first KT state and a second KT state. In the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, the game state includes a state controlled to a low probability state and a non-KT state (low probability/non-KT state: normal state), a state controlled to a low probability and a first KT state (low probability/first KT state), a state controlled to a high probability and a first KT state (high probability/first KT state), and a state controlled to a high probability and a second KT state (high probability/second KT state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, small hits are likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 17 is likely to be in an open state, but the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is extremely long, and even if a small hit occurs, there are very few cases in which the game ball wins in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17 (for example, about one ball per 100 fluctuations). Specifically, in the first KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a high base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is long. In addition, in the second KT state among the KT states, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 6B is short, and when a small hit occurs, the game ball is likely to win in the downstream special variable winning ball device 17. Specifically, in the second KT state, it is controlled to a state in which small hits are likely to occur and is controlled to a low base state so that the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B is short.

In the second embodiment, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)) when the display result is other than a big win or a miss in the time reduction. In other words, the first special symbol is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss in the time reduction, and the display result is not a miss (no time reduction) (or the rate of small wins is higher than that of misses (no time reduction)). However, in the non-KT state (normal state), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 17 is short when the display result of the first special symbol is a small win, making it extremely difficult (or practically impossible) to win a game ball in the special variable winning ball device 17.

(Transition of Game State in the Second Embodiment)
The transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW will be described. FIG. 12-1 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the way of transition of the game state in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW. First, in the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)), the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the normal variable time, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the long variable, so that the player performs the launch operation (left hit) of the game ball aiming at the left side of the game area. Therefore, in the normal state, the start entry into the first start entry hole mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. Also, since the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed, when a jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, a 10R sure-change jackpot, a 6R sure-change jackpot, or a 6R normal jackpot mainly occurs.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, when a 6R variable probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/low base state, if a game ball enters V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Also, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs in the low probability/low base state, after the jackpot game ends, it will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or the 50 variable display times are completed.

Also, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the time-saving state (in this example, low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state)) is controlled via the time-saving miss and the rescue time-saving state. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-1, even if a miss occurs in the low probability/low base state (normal state), if a time-saving miss pattern is derived and displayed, the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment). Furthermore, even if a miss occurs, if a rescue time-saving state occurs (after the RAM clear processing or after a jackpot game, if the next jackpot does not occur and the number of fluctuations reaches 800), the state is controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, and the rescue time reduction counter can be updated at the timing when the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are started (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment).

After transitioning to the KT state (high probability/high base state, low probability/high base state, high probability/low base state), in the second embodiment of this feature unit 116IW, the first special symbol is displayed in a long variation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal variation time, so the player aims the game ball to the right of the game area and performs the firing operation (right hit). Therefore, in the KT state, the start entry into the second start entry port mainly occurs, and the second special symbol is mainly displayed. Also, since the second special symbol is mainly displayed in a variation, when a jackpot occurs in the KT state, it mainly occurs as a 10R special jackpot, a 6R special jackpot, or a 2R special jackpot.

As shown in Figure 12-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 6R jackpot is 50% in total, so once the high probability/high base state is entered, the high probability/high base state will loop at a rate of 50%.

As shown in Figure 12-1, when a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, if a 6R high probability jackpot occurs in a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. Note that after a 6R normal jackpot occurs and the state becomes low probability/high base state, if the next jackpot does not occur and 50 variable displays end, the state will transition to a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) as shown in FIG. 12-1.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the rescue time-saving is activated in the low probability/high base state (after the RAM clear process or after a jackpot game, when the number of changes reaches 800 without the next jackpot occurring), the game is again controlled to the low probability/high base state (first KT state) with the number of time-saving times of 800 (for example, this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5608A and S5607B to S5608B in the first embodiment). Note that the number of time-saving times in the second embodiment corresponds to the remaining number of times that the first special symbol change display and the second special symbol change display can be executed in the low probability/high base state (first KT state).

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment, similar to the first embodiment, when the variable display of the first special pattern and the variable display of the second special pattern are executed a total of a predetermined number of times in the low probability/high base state, the low probability/high base state ends and transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state).

For example, if the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) via a time-saving miss, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 100 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to a low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS2030A-S2033A, S5617A-S5620A, S2030B-S2033B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In addition, when the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is controlled via the rescue time reduction, when the display of the first special symbol changes and the display of the second special symbol changes are executed a total of 800 times, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) ends and the state transitions to the low probability/low base state (normal state) (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A-S5608A, S5617A-S5620A, S5607B-S5608B, S5617B-S5620B in the first embodiment).

In the example shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state is controlled to a low probability/high base state with 50 time-saving times, but as in the first embodiment, the advantageous degree of the time-saving state controlled after the jackpot game may be different depending on the game state when the jackpot occurs. For example, when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a normal state (low base state), the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 100 time-saving times, and when a 6R normal jackpot occurs during a high base state, the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state with 200 time-saving times. In this case, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a jackpot, it may be determined that the jackpot has occurred in a high base state, and the state may be controlled to a low probability/high base state of 200 time reductions after the jackpot game ends (for example, the execution of the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B in the first embodiment corresponds to the part that is executed after the update process of the rescue time reduction counter and the setting process of the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). This configuration can increase the degree of rescue for the player.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, when a 10R or 2R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if a game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state transitions to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/low base state is maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if a game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state. In addition, in the second embodiment of this feature part 116IW, when the variable display of the second special pattern is executed, the probability of a 10R or 2R jackpot is 50%, so once the high probability/low base state is entered, the high probability/low base state will loop at a rate of 50%. Also, when a 6R jackpot occurs in a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state), if the game ball enters the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the game will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) after the jackpot game ends, and the high probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs. However, if the game ball does not enter the V region 061IW104 during the jackpot game, it may not be controlled to the high probability state.

Note that in FIG. 12-1, a case where the first special symbol is displayed in a low probability/low base state (normal state (non-KT state)) is described, but there is also a possibility that the second special symbol is displayed in a low probability. In this case, if a 10R or 2R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). Also, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs, and the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state).

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R guaranteed jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R guaranteed jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during jackpot play, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in the low probability. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

In addition, in FIG. 12-1, a case where the second special symbol is displayed in the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state) is described, but there is also a possibility that the first special symbol is displayed in a low rate. In this case, if a 10R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/low base state (high probability/second KT state). In addition, if a 6R sure-variable jackpot occurs, if the game ball enters the V area 061IW104 during the jackpot game, the state will transition to the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state). In addition, if a 6R normal jackpot occurs, the state will transition to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), and the low probability/high base state will be maintained until the next jackpot occurs or 50 variable displays are completed.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature unit 116IW, in the low probability/low base state (normal state), the first special symbol is displayed in a normal change time, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a long change. In other words, the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time (or the rate at which it is displayed) than the second special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/low base state (normal state) is a first shortened state in which the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol is high. Note that in the second embodiment, in the low probability/low base state (normal state) which is the first shortened state, the rate at which the first special symbol is displayed in a shorter change time than the second special symbol may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the second shortened state.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the second embodiment of the feature part 116IW, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state), the first special symbol is displayed in a long fluctuation, whereas the second special symbol is displayed in a normal fluctuation time. In other words, the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time (or the rate at which it is displayed is high) than the first special symbol. Thus, in the second embodiment, the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), the high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and the high probability/low base state (second KT state) are second shortened states in which the second special symbol is displayed in a shorter fluctuation time than the first special symbol. In the second embodiment, in the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and high probability/low base state (second KT state) which are the second shortened state, the percentage at which the second special pattern fluctuation display is a fluctuation display with a shorter fluctuation time than the first special pattern fluctuation display may be configured to be, for example, 100%, or may be configured to be lower than 100% but at least higher than the first shortened state.

In the second embodiment, when the rescue time reduction is established in the normal state, the rescue time reduction is controlled by increasing the probability of winning the normal symbol, shortening the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, and lengthening the opening time of the variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port). In addition, in addition to the control related to the normal symbol, the rescue time reduction is controlled by shortening the fluctuation time of the second special symbol (i.e., controlling to a second shortened state in which the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is more likely to have a shorter fluctuation time than the fluctuation display of the first special symbol). In other words, a transition is made to a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment).

However, in the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, even if the rescue time reduction is established by the execution of the rescue time reduction by executing ...

Therefore, in the second embodiment, as described above, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that when the display result is other than a big win or a miss with the time-saving feature, it will be a small win (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving feature)). In other words, the display of the first special pattern is configured so that the display result is either a big win, a small win, or a miss with the time-saving feature, and it will not be a miss (without time-saving feature) (or the rate of small wins is higher than a miss (without time-saving feature)). In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, if a small winning symbol is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the first and second special symbols while the variable display of the other special symbol is being executed, a losing symbol can be forcibly derived and displayed in the variable display of the one special symbol (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes the processes of steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment).

In the second embodiment, by combining these configurations, when the first special symbol is displayed during the second special symbol display (long change), a rescue time reduction is established by executing the first special symbol display. In addition to the control for the normal symbols, the rescue time reduction (high base state) is controlled by shortening the second special symbol's change time (i.e., the second special symbol is controlled to a second shortened state (in this example, a low probability/high base state (first KT state)) in which the probability that the second special symbol display will have a shorter change time than the first special symbol display is high). In this case, the display result of the first special symbol display that establishes the rescue time reduction is a small win unless it is a big win or a time reduction miss. Then, based on the fact that a small win pattern is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display, the second special symbol display (long change) being executed is forcibly stopped at a miss pattern. Therefore, without waiting for the long fluctuation time (for example, 10 minutes) to expire, it is possible to execute the fluctuation display of the second special symbol with a shortened fluctuation time (i.e., improved fluctuation efficiency), and it is possible to enjoy the benefits of the rescue time reduction. In addition, when controlled by the rescue time reduction, the game can be smoothly progressed, and interest can be increased.

(First special symbol normal processing in variant example 2)
12-2 to 12-5 are flowcharts showing the normal processing of the first special symbol in the second variant example.

In variant 2, the processes in steps 061IWS50A to S56A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 12-3, in the second modification, the processing of step 061IWS5601A shown in the first embodiment is not executed, so the update processing of the rescue time reduction counter is executed even in the high probability state (high probability state). In other words, not only in the non-high probability state (low probability state), but also in the high probability state (high probability state), the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time reduction is executed is uniformly decreased when the fluctuation display is executed. Therefore, in the second modification, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", the high probability flag may be set.

When the value of the rescue time reduction counter after subtraction becomes "0", if the special chance flag is set (Y in step 061IWS56061A), i.e., if rescue time reduction is established in the special chance state, the process moves to step 061IWS5701A.

In addition, in variant 2, the high base count counter is set to "100" after a special jackpot, and each time a change display is executed, the high base count counter is decremented by 1 by the processing of steps 061IWS5717A to S5719A. Here, if the special jackpot flag is set when the value of the high base count counter after the decrement becomes "0", that is, if the special jackpot state after a special jackpot play has reached 100 changes but has not fallen out of special jackpot state, the process of resetting the high base flag (step 061IWS5620A) is not executed. In this case, the high probability state and high base state are maintained until the state falls out of special jackpot state.

On the other hand, if the high base count counter value after subtraction becomes "0" and the high probability flag is not set, i.e., if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations and only the high probability flag is reset (when the processing of steps 061IWS5705A and S5711A described below is executed), or if the game was controlled to a low probability/high base state after a normal jackpot, the high base flag is reset (step 061IWS5620A). In variant 2, if the game falls into the high probability state after a jackpot game due to a high probability jackpot with less than 100 fluctuations, the high probability state (high probability state) ends immediately, but the time-saving state (high base state) continues until it reaches 100 fluctuations due to the processing of step 061IWS56191A.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes of steps 061IWS5607A to S5611A, S5614A to S5616A, S5617A to S5619A, and S5620A to S5621A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment. In the second modification, when step 061IWS5621A is completed, the process proceeds to step 061IWS5702A.

In step 061IWS5701A, the game control microcomputer 100 sets a rescue time reduction flag indicating that rescue time reduction has been achieved in the special probability state (step 061IWS5701A).

Next, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the probability of winning is set (step 061IWS5702A), and if it is not set, proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the probability of a bonus is set (Y in step 061IWS5702A), the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment stored in the random number buffer area (different from the random number for jackpot judgment or the random number for jackpot type judgment, and is a random number dedicated to fall judgment) and performs a fall lottery process based on the random number for fall judgment (061IWS5703A). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 reads out the random number for fall judgment extracted in the start winning judgment process (step S101) and stored in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer in advance, and performs a probability of a bonus fall lottery judgment. When the value matches the fall judgment value, the game control microcomputer 100 decides to end the probability of a bonus. In the second modified example, in the process of step 061IWS5703A, it is decided to end the probability of a bonus with a probability of 1/800, for example.

If the special probability state is not to be dropped (the special probability state is not to be ended) (N in 061IWS5704A), the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A. If it is decided to end the special probability state (Y in step 061IWS5704A), the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game (step 061IWS5705A). For example, by providing a counter that can count the number of fluctuations in the special probability state after a jackpot game, and checking the counter in step 061IWS5705A, it is possible to determine whether there have been less than 100 fluctuations after a jackpot game.

If the change after the big win is less than 100 (Y in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the probability change flag (step 061IWS5711A) and sets the provocation reach A flag indicating that provocation reach A will be executed (step 061IWS5713A). Then, the process proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

In the second variant, when the probability of a jackpot being played in the probability of a jackpot state after a jackpot game is lost with less than 100 fluctuations, only the probability of a jackpot flag is reset by the processing of step 061IWS5711A. In addition, after the display result of the ongoing fluctuation display suggests whether a jackpot will be reached or the probability of a jackpot will be lost and the probability of a jackpot state will end, a provocative reach A is executed to notify the player that the probability of a jackpot state will be lost.

If the fluctuation is not less than 100 after the jackpot (N in step 061IWS5705A), the game control microcomputer 100 determines whether the rescue time-saving flag is set (step 061IWS5706A), and if it is not set, it resets the high probability flag and high base flag, and ends the high probability state and the time-saving state (step 061IWS5712A). In addition, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach A flag, which indicates that provocative reach A will be executed (061IWS5713A).

In this example, the same provocation reach A is executed in both cases where the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play and where the player falls out of the special mode after 100 times. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, if the player falls out of the special mode less than 100 times after a special mode jackpot play, the player may be notified that the player will fall out of the special mode and then be notified that the time-saving state will continue. This can prevent the player from becoming too disappointed when the player falls out of the special mode in a short period of time.

If the rescue time-saving flag is set (Y in step 061IWS5706A), the game control microcomputer 100 resets the rescue time-saving flag (step 061IWS5707A) and sets the high base count counter to "800" (step 061IWS5708A). The game control microcomputer 100 also resets the probability change flag (061IWS5709A). After that, it sets the provocation reach B flag, which indicates that provocation reach B will be executed (061IWS5710A), and proceeds to step 061IWS57A.

If the rescue time reduction is established after the probability change, the state is controlled to the time reduction state (high base state) due to the rescue time reduction from the time when the rescue time reduction is established, and if the rescue time reduction is established before the probability change, the state is controlled to the normal state from the time of the probability change, the benefit received depending on the timing of the rescue time reduction will be significantly different, and there is a risk of insufficient rescue. Therefore, in the second modification, the processing of steps 061IWS5706A to S5708A is configured so that if the rescue time reduction is established in the probability change state, the state is controlled to the time reduction state due to the rescue time reduction when the probability change occurs. Therefore, the count of 800 times of the time reduction due to the rescue time reduction will not start when the rescue time reduction is established, but after the probability change occurs and the transition to the time reduction state occurs. With this configuration, rescue due to the rescue time reduction can be received appropriately.

In addition, by processing step 061IWS5707A, the rescue time-saving flag is reset when the game falls into the special probability state and is controlled to a time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving. This configuration allows the information that the rescue time-saving has been established in the special probability state to be properly managed.

Information indicating the state of the rescue time-saving flag is stored, for example, in RAM 102. When the RAM clear process is executed, the rescue time-saving flag and the special probability flag are reset. In other words, when the RAM clear process is executed during a special probability state in which the rescue time-saving flag has been established, the game state becomes a normal state (low probability/low base state) in which the rescue time-saving flag is not set. With this configuration, information indicating that the rescue time-saving flag has been established during a special probability state can be appropriately managed.

In the RAM clear process, the high probability flag is reset, but the rescue time reduction flag is maintained. Also, if the high probability flag is not set at the start of the fluctuation but the rescue time reduction flag is set, control may be made to the rescue time reduction (low probability/high base state). In other words, if the RAM clear process is executed when the game is in a high probability state where rescue time reduction has been established, the game state will be the normal state (low probability/low base state), but when the fluctuation display starts, control may be made to the rescue time reduction.

In addition, in step 061, the IWS5710A process suggests whether the display result of the ongoing variable display will be a jackpot or a drop into the special probability state, which will end the special probability state, and then executes a provocative reach B that first notifies the player that the drop into the special probability state will occur, and then notifies the player that the time-saving rescue function will control the player to a time-saving state (high base state).

As shown in FIG. 12-5, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, the rescue time reduction flag is reset if set (step 061IWS631A). By processing step 061IWS631A, it is possible to appropriately manage information that rescue time reduction has been established in a high probability state. It is also possible to prevent excessive rescue from being performed.

In addition, in variant 2, when a jackpot is determined to have occurred by execution of the jackpot determination module, if the sure win flag is set (Y in step 061IWS632A), the game control microcomputer 100 sets the provocative reach C flag, which indicates that provocative reach C will be executed (061IWS633A).

Step 061: IWS632A to S633A processes the ongoing variable display to indicate whether it will result in a jackpot or a drop into the probability variable state, ending the probability variable state, and then a provocative reach C is executed to notify the player that a jackpot will occur.

In addition, in the second modification, the processes in steps 061IWS57A to S63A and S64A to S89A are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the first variation pattern setting process of the second variant, it is determined whether any of the provocation reaches A to C is set, and if set, the variation pattern for executing the corresponding provocation reach is determined. The other processes are the same as those shown in the first embodiment.

In the second modification, the second special symbol normal processing and the second variation pattern setting processing execute the same processing as the first special symbol normal processing and the first variation pattern setting processing. Therefore, in the second modification, in both the first special symbol variation display and the second special symbol variation display, it is possible to execute a probability drop lottery or an instigation reach.

In the first and second variation pattern setting processes, when any of the provocation reaches A to C is set and the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game exceeds 100 variations, a provocation reach may be executed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a common presentation (for example, a common background image may be displayed) may be executed regardless of whether or not a high probability state has occurred until the number of variations in the high probability state after a jackpot game reaches 100 variations. In other words, the player may not be able to recognize whether a high probability state has occurred until the 100th variation. Also, as shown in FIG. 12-6, a high probability state fall judgment presentation may be executed to notify whether a high probability state has occurred or the high probability state is continuing at the 100th variation.

For example, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern A is executed to notify the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached. Also, if the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached but the player is under control of the rescue time reduction, a probability of falling into the probability variation state determination presentation of pattern B is executed to notify the player that the rescue time reduction is under control after notifying the player that the probability of falling into the probability variation state has already been reached.
In addition, if a jackpot is hit at the 100th variation, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern C that notifies the player of the jackpot is executed. In addition, if the probability change state continues, a probability change fall judgment presentation in the form of pattern D that notifies the player of the continuation of the probability change state is executed.

The configuration shown in Figure 12-6 can create tension for the player during the period from the 100th change onwards in the special probability state, increasing interest.

In addition, in the second variant, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, the player is notified that the game has fallen out of the high probability state, and then the player is notified that the rescue time reduction will occur. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration. For example, when the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, no notification may be given even if the game falls out of the high probability state. In other words, even if the game falls out of the high probability state, no notification may be given or the presentation may change, and the game may fall out of the high probability state without the player noticing.

(Example of the second modification)
Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2 will be described. Fig. 12-7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of the provocation reach in Modification 2. In Fig. 12-7, the presentation screen transitions in the order of (1) (2) (3-1) for provocation reach A, (1) (2) (3-2) (4) for provocation reach B, and (1) (2) (3-3) for provocation reach C.

In the probability bonus state, as shown in FIG. 12-7(1), when the left and right decorative patterns are aligned, a provocative reach begins in which the friendly character 014IW002 and the enemy character 014IW003a engage in a battle, as shown in FIG. 12-7(2).

In the case of provocation reach A, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-1), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to inform the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will drop out of the probability drop state. After that, the game will transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state).

In the case of provocation reach B, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-2), a probability drop image 014IW004a is displayed to notify the player that the ally character 014IW002 has lost the battle and will fall into probability drop, but as shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), a text display of "Entering Chance Mode" and a rescue time-saving image 014IW004c are displayed to notify the player that the rescue time-saving control will be applied. Note that this is not limited to the form shown in FIG. 12-7 (4), and for example, the time-saving entry performance shown in FIG. 11-23 may be executed. After that, the game transitions to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

In the case of the provocation reach C, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (3-3), the ally character 014IW002 wins the battle, and a jackpot image 014IW004b is displayed to notify the player that a jackpot has been reached. After that, the game moves to the jackpot game state.

In the second modification, when a rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state, a rescue time reduction establishment notification is executed to notify the fact. For example, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (1) and (2), when a rescue time reduction is established at the start of the fluctuation, a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction). The rescue time reduction establishment notification as shown in FIG. 12-8 can be realized, for example, by transmitting a presentation control command indicating that a rescue time reduction has been established to the presentation control board 12 when the main board 11 determines that a rescue time reduction has been established, and by controlling the presentation control board 12 to display a "Chi" icon 014IW003d on a part of the image display device 5 when the presentation control command is received. This configuration allows the player to recognize that the game will be controlled to a time reduction state after the high probability state ends, giving the player a sense of security and increasing the interest.

Note that the notification of rescue time-saving activation as shown in FIG. 12-8 may be made (or drawn) not only in the special state, but also when rescue time-saving activation is activated in the normal state, or when the game is controlled to the time-saving state by rescue time-saving activation.

(Example of control of game state in Modification 2)
Next, a description will be given of an example of control of the gaming state in Modification 2. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 12-9 (A), if the rescue time reduction has not been established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state occurs, the high probability state flag and high base flag are reset when the drop to high probability state occurs (T1 timing), and the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/low base state.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-9(B), if the rescue time reduction is established in the high probability state before the drop to high probability state, for example, if the rescue time reduction is established at timing t1 in FIG. 12-9(B), the rescue time reduction flag is set at timing t1. Then, when the drop to high probability state occurs (timing t2), the high probability flag and rescue time reduction flag are reset, and the high base flag is maintained. In other words, the game state transitions from a high probability/high base state to a low probability/high base state.

The configuration shown in variant example 2 can be applied to both the first and second embodiments described above. When applied to the configuration of the first embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (second special probability state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur. When applied to the configuration of the second embodiment, for example, a fall lottery may be executed when in a high probability/high base state (first KT state), and if the lottery is won, a transition to the normal state (low probability/low base state) may occur.

In the first and second embodiments described above, both are configured so that the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display can be executed in parallel, but the configuration is not limited to this configuration. The configuration shown in variant example 2 can also be applied to a configuration in which the special symbol variable display is executed in the order of the starting winnings, or a configuration in which either the first special symbol variable display or the second special symbol variable display is executed with priority.

In addition, the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls to a big win game based on the variable display result, but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration of controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic unit 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a gaming machine that is configured to be able to execute a role game that controls to a big win game based on the game ball winning (V winning) in a specific area (V winning area) in the role game during a small win game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, the number of times the time until the rescue time reduction occurs is fixed at 800, but this is not limited to the above. For example, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900" depending on whether the RAM clear process is being executed or a jackpot has occurred, or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched randomly to "800" or "900".

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples described above, information that can identify the number of times the rescue time reduction has occurred may be retained. For example, the high base flag set for the second rescue time reduction after a transition may be different from the high base flag set for the first rescue time reduction.

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples shown above, different effects may be executed in the time-saving state via a jackpot, the time-saving state via a missed time-saving state, and the time-saving state via a rescue (for example, a different background display may be displayed, or a different fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) may be determined).

In addition, in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a case has been shown where the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example are applied to a gaming machine in which high probability control is performed until the next high probability state occurs (or until the game falls into high probability state), but this is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when controlling to a high probability state after the end of a high probability state, a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above may be applied to a so-called ST machine in which an upper limit is set for the number of special symbol games (i.e., the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol) in which high probability control is performed.

Specifically, a case will be described in which a configuration for controlling to a time-saving state via rescue time-saving shown in the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example described above is applied to a gaming machine configured as a so-called ST machine, in which the probability of a jackpot is about 1/100, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state at a rate of 100% after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times (e.g., 8 times) of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set. Note that in the ST gaming machine, multiple types of jackpots (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot and 5R probability variable jackpot, etc.) are provided as the display results of the first special pattern change display and the second special pattern change display, and when a jackpot occurs, the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage (e.g., 10R probability variable jackpot) is set at a predetermined rate (e.g., 5%). In addition, when the jackpot with the highest degree of advantage is obtained, the game state is controlled to a probability variable state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot game state, and the upper limit number of times of the special game in which the probability variable control is performed is set to 8 times. If no jackpot occurs in the 8 special game games where the probability control is performed, the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state), and the upper limit number of special game games where the high base control is performed will be set to 249. In other words, after the jackpot game state ends, if the next jackpot does not occur, the game will be controlled to a probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 probability games, and then to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time games.

The ST gaming machine described above can be configured so that if, after the power is turned on to the gaming machine or after a jackpot occurs, the next jackpot does not occur even after a predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 250 times) have ended in a non-probability state (low probability state), a rescue time-saving state is established and the machine is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state).

When this configuration is applied, if a jackpot with the highest degree of advantage occurs, after the jackpot game state ends, the game will first be controlled to a high probability state (high probability/high base state) with 8 high probability states. At this time, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is reset (for example, set to "250") due to the occurrence of a jackpot. And since it is a high probability state (high probability state), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated.

When the 8-time chance state (high probability/high base state) ends without a jackpot occurring, the game is controlled to a 249-time time-saving state (low probability/high base state). At this time, the game is in a non-chances-of-chance state (low probability state), so the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is updated (e.g., decremented by 1) each time a special game (i.e., the first special symbol changing display and the second special symbol changing display) is played.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) of 249 times ends without a jackpot, the state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state). However, at this time, the value of the rescue time-saving counter is "1". Therefore, when the next special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is executed, rescue time-saving is established and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). Here, if there is a reserved memory stored during the time-saving state of 249 times (low probability/high base state), rescue time-saving is established by executing the special game (display of the first special pattern or the second special pattern) based on the reserved memory, and the state is controlled to the time-saving state (low probability/high base state). With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from being aware that the state has been changed to the low base state (normal state), and it is possible to increase interest.

When the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends and the state is controlled to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. In this case, for example, it may be determined whether the number of reserved memories stored at the time when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends is greater than the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time-saving state is established, and if it is determined to be greater, the background image corresponding to the high base state may be continuously displayed. Hereinafter, the normal state controlled after the time-saving state ends with 249 times of time-saving and before the rescue time-saving state is established (i.e., the normal state controlled once after the time-saving state and in which the rescue time-saving state is established within a short period (for example, the period until the reserved memories stored in the time-saving state are consumed)) is also referred to as the special normal state to distinguish it from other normal states.

In addition, for example, when the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) ends and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) is controlled by the rescue time-saving state, a mode transition effect may be executed to indicate that control of the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) by the rescue time-saving state will begin. In this case, after the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) ends, the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display in the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving state occurs (for example, the variable display immediately after the time-saving state ends or the variable display immediately before the rescue time-saving state is established), or the mode transition effect may be executed during the execution of the variable display that causes the rescue time-saving state to occur.

For example, in the ST gaming machine described above, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage (e.g., a 5R special jackpot) occurs among multiple types of jackpots, the machine will be controlled to a special state with 8 special states (high probability/high base state) after the jackpot game state ends, and then controlled to a time-saving state with 32 time-saving states (low probability/high base state) if the next jackpot does not occur. In other words, if a jackpot with a low degree of advantage occurs, even if the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) after the special state (high probability/high base state) ends, rescue time-saving will not be established within a short period of time (e.g., the period until the reserved memory stored in the time-saving state is consumed).

In this case, if the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) is 32 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time), a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) corresponding to the normal state (low probability/low base state) is executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state, while if the number of time-saving times is 249 (i.e., if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), a similar left-hit notification may not be executed after the final fluctuation in the time-saving state. In other words, a left-hit notification (for example, display of a left-hit instruction display instructing a left-hit on the image display device 5) may not be executed when transitioning to the special normal state. With this configuration, if the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time after the end of the time-saving state, the player is not made aware that he or she has once transitioned to the low-base state (normal state), which can improve interest.

In addition, for example, by differentiating the types of presentation control commands such as background designation commands, jackpot start designation commands, and jackpot end designation commands sent from the main board 11 side between the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) where the number of time-saving times is 32 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is not established within a short period of time) and the time-saving time is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time-saving is established within a short period of time), the presentation control board 12 side may distinguish between these time-saving states and perform presentation control that matches each time-saving state (for example, displaying the corresponding background image, character image, story image, etc., outputting BGM, etc.). The method of distinguishing between time-saving states on the presentation control board 12 side is not limited to this, and for example, the type of jackpot or the number of time-saving times after jackpot play may be specified by the received display result designation command.

In addition, when the number of time reductions is 249 (i.e., when the rescue time reduction is established within a short period of time), even if the configuration is such that the left-hit notification (for example, the display of the left-hit instruction display on the image display device 5 instructing left-hit) is not executed on the performance control board 12 side after the final fluctuation in the time reduction state is completed, the main board 11 side executes processing (for example, turning off the right-hit indicator 26, stopping the output of the right-hit test signal output as a test signal, changing the launch position designation signal, etc.) corresponding to the transition to the normal state (i.e., switching from the state of right-hit to the state of left-hit). Once the normal state (i.e., the special normal state) is transitioned to, the main board 11 side may temporarily stop the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), or may continue the external output. In addition, while continuing the external output of the signal corresponding to the high base state (for example, the jackpot 2 signal), the output of the launch position designation signal output as a test signal may be changed (or the output of the right-hit test signal may be stopped).

In addition, for example, the effects executed may be different between the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) and the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state). For example, effects (such as a countdown effect) that indicate that a rescue time-saving count will be achieved or the number of times until it is achieved may be executed in the normal state (or a normal state other than the special normal state), but may not be executed in the time-saving state (or a time-saving state with 249 times the time-saving count) in which the number of remaining times of the time-saving count is indicated. This configuration makes it possible to prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

The configuration that can obtain the above-mentioned effect is not limited to the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state controlled after the probability-changing state used in the above explanation, or the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established. For example, the number of changes (non-probability-changing state) at which the rescue time-saving is established may be configured to be greater than the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state, and smaller (or equal) than the sum of the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state and the upper limit memory number (e.g., 4) of the special game based on the entry into the start winning hole (e.g., the second start winning hole) that is easy to enter in the time-saving state. With such a configuration, even if the game moves to the low base state (normal state) after the end of the jackpot game state through the probability-changing state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state (low probability/high base state), the rescue time-saving can be established without generating a new start winning in the low base state (normal state), so that the player is not aware that the game has moved to the low base state (normal state) before the rescue time-saving is established, and interest can be improved.

In addition, for example, if the number of fluctuations (non-probability bonus state) at which the rescue time-saving feature is established is smaller than (or the same as) the number of time-saving features in the time-saving feature state, the rescue time-saving feature can be established before the time-saving feature state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after the probability bonus state (high probability/high base state) ends (i.e., the number of time-saving features can be updated by establishing the rescue time-saving feature).

In addition, in the above-mentioned ST gaming machine, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) that is controlled after passing through a special probability state (high probability/high base state) after the end of the jackpot gaming state may be different when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the first special pattern and when a jackpot occurs due to the changing display of the second special pattern (or the proportion of advantageous time-saving times among the multiple types of time-saving times may be different). In this case, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 32 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 32 out of 249), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, after the jackpot game state ends, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled through the high probability state (high probability/high base state) may be 249 (or the number of time-saving times is 32, with a high probability of 249 out of 249).

In addition, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be different (or the ratio of advantageous rounds among multiple types of round numbers may be different) when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol. For example, when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the first special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 5 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high), and when a jackpot occurs due to the variable display of the second special symbol, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may be 10 rounds (or the ratio of 5 rounds out of 5 rounds or 10 rounds is high). With this configuration, the degree of advantage can be made different between the game state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed and the game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, thereby improving interest.

In addition, even in the above ST gaming machine, different variation pattern tables may be used for the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state) and the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state). For example, in the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving state (low probability/high base state), a variation pattern table may be used in which the variation time is shortened at a higher rate (and, for example, the variation pattern in which a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is executed at the time of a miss is lower) than in the time-saving state (low probability/high base state) controlled after the probability change state (high probability/high base state). With this configuration, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, for example, when the rescue time-saving state is reached (i.e., when a jackpot has not occurred for a long period of time), the rate of misses in the reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the characteristic part 116IW and each modified example shown above, for example, the types of jackpots may be a sure-variable jackpot in which the sure-variable state (high probability/high base state) continues after the jackpot game state ends until the next jackpot occurs, a non-sure-variable jackpot A which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 100 time-saving cycles, and a non-sure-variable jackpot B which is controlled to a time-saving state (low probability/high base state) with 249 time-saving cycles, and a rescue time-saving mode may be established if the next jackpot does not occur even after 250 variable display cycles have ended in the non-sure-variable state after the gaming machine is powered on or a jackpot occurs. That is, a jackpot type may be set in which the time-saving state is controlled until just before the rescue time-saving is established (specifically, the sum of the number of times the time-saving state is activated and the upper limit number of memories (e.g., 4) of the special game based on entering a start entry port (e.g., a second start entry port) that is easier to enter in the time-saving state is greater than (or the same as) the number of fluctuations (non-variable state) at which the rescue time-saving is established). With this configuration, a transition of the game state is made from the time-saving state after the jackpot game to the time-saving state due to the rescue time-saving (actually, the game is controlled to the normal state (i.e., special normal state) once before the rescue time-saving is established), which can increase interest.

As explained above, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 116-1-1) to (Means 116-6).

(Means 116-1-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 061IWS56) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter). and special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The update means is The special state control means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the identification information starts (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter being "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A and S5606B to S5607B), and further includes an announcement effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS806B) capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, a time-saving entry effect shown in FIG. 11-23) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition when a variable display in which a special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-1-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 when step 0) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter) and a special state control means (for example, a portion in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284) capable of controlling to a special state (for example, a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state). The numerical information is updated at the timing when the display is started and the variable display of the second identification information is started (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time-saving count counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and the means further includes an announcement effect execution means capable of executing an announcement effect (for example, the time-saving entry effect shown in Figure 11-24) that notifies that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition when a variable display immediately before the variable display in which the special condition is established is being executed. With this configuration, a notification that a special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition can be issued at an appropriate time, enhancing interest.

(Means 116-2) Means 116-1-1 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (for example, a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time reduction) and a second variable pattern #L (missing entry into rescue time reduction)), and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern when a special condition is met (for example, , the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B), before the special condition is established, the special variable display pattern is not determined, and the notification effect execution means can execute the notification effect when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS17093A, S17093B, or the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS805, S806B). With such a configuration, the notification effect can clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled based on the establishment of the special condition.

(Means 116-3) Means 116-1-2 includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1717A and S1717B) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is met, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is met (for example, the configuration of the modified example shown in FIG. 11-24). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when and before the special condition is met, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 116-4) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-3, the special state control means can control the special state to a different degree of advantage after the end of the advantageous state depending on whether the advantageous state was controlled to a special state or a non-special state (e.g., a low base state) in which the advantageous state was controlled (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the processing of steps 061IWS2284, S2286 to S2287. If a 6R jackpot A occurs during a normal state (low base state) and the time-saving state (high base state) is controlled, the time-saving state is controlled to 100 times the time-saving count, and if a 6R jackpot A occurs during the time-saving state (high base state), When a special condition occurs and the time-saving state (high base state) is entered, the time-saving state is controlled to 200 times (see FIG. 11-1). When the variable display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is a specific display result, the special state is considered to have been controlled to an advantageous state, and the degree of advantage of the special state to be controlled after the advantageous state ends is determined (for example, the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the jackpot determination module of steps 061IWS59A and S59B after updating the rescue time-saving count counter and setting the high base flag in steps 061IWS5602A to S5608A and S5602B to S5608B). With such a configuration, the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 116-5) In any of means 116-1-1 to 116-4, a game area in which the game medium can be shot into a first path (e.g., a path by hitting with the left) and a second path (e.g., a path by hitting with the right), and a launch promotion notification means capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward either the first path or the second path (e.g., a portion in the image display device 5 that displays the right hit instruction display 100IW108 or the left hit instruction display), are provided, and the launch promotion notification means is capable of executing a launch promotion notification to the effect that the game medium should be shot toward the second path when a notification performance is executed (e.g., the right hit instruction display 100IW108 is displayed when a time-saving entry performance is executed. See Figs. 11-23 (B) and (C)). With such a configuration, the launch promotion notification can be executed appropriately.

(Means 116-6) Any of means 116-1-1 to 116-5 is provided with a signal output means (e.g., see FIG. 11-19) capable of outputting a signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition in response to the start of a variable display in which the special condition is satisfied, and outputting a signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) capable of identifying that a variable display has been executed in response to the end of the variable display. With such a configuration, a signal capable of identifying that a special state will be controlled based on the establishment of a special condition can be output to the outside at an appropriate timing.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 117-1) to (Means 117-5).

(Means 117-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol), and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a game control microcomputer 100 that executes steps 061IWS5603A, S5 603B) and a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (for example, a low probability/low base state) (for example, in a high base state, control is performed to increase the probability of a normal winning, control to shorten the variation time of a normal pattern, and control to lengthen the opening time of the variable winning ball device 061IW6Ab (first start winning port)). , S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284), a variable display execution means capable of executing the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information in parallel (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S25A and S25B), and a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information at a higher rate (for example, a variable display of the first special symbol is variable displayed for a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second special symbol). The low probability/low base state (normal state), low probability/high base state, and high probability/high base state (second probability state) in the first embodiment are executed in a variable time. See Figs. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19. The second shortened state has a high probability of the variable display of the second identification information being a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information. For example, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a variable time shorter than the variable display of the first special symbol. The game control system includes a shortened state control means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206) that can control the game state (first probability variable state; see Figs. 11-2 to 11-4 and 11-19) and an update means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, , the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B), and the special state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (for example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (for example, 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607). A portion for executing steps S061IWS1125B and S1129B), the variable display execution means, during execution of the variable display of one of the first and second identification information, does not derive and display the display result of the variable display of the one of the first and second identification information based on the establishment of a special condition by the execution of the variable display of the other identification information (for example, see FIG. 11-21 (A)), and, during execution of the variable display of the second identification information, based on the deriving and displaying of a specific display result in the variable display of the first identification information, is capable of deriving and displaying a predetermined display result (for example, a losing pattern) different from the specific display result in the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a portion for the game control microcomputer 100 to execute steps S061IWS1125B and S1129B), and the shortened state control means, when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition, is capable of control to the first shortened state (for example, a portion for the game control microcomputer 100 to execute steps S061IWS5607A and S5607B). When the rescue time reduction is established, the game transitions to a low probability/high base state in which the first special symbol changes over a shorter time than the second special symbol. See FIG. 11-20.) With this configuration, the game is controlled to the first shortened state after the special condition is established, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 117-2) In means 117-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) that is different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display in which a special condition is established, the special condition is established. The special state can be controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A to S2031A, and S2030B to S2031B. See FIG. 11-21 (A)), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special display result has been derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established (for example, the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving is 800 times, while the number of time-saving times in the time-saving state via time-saving loss is 100 times. See FIG. 11-1). With such a configuration, even if the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is established, the special state is controlled based on the fact that the special condition has been established, so that the degree of rescue for the player can be increased.

(Means 117-3) In means 117-1 or 117-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is established by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, does not control to a special state with a degree of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 117-4) In any of means 117-1 to 117-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 117-5) In any of Means 117-1 to 117-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (for example, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B). With such a configuration, in a configuration where the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the update of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 118-1) to (Means 118-5).

(Means 118-1) A gaming machine that can execute variable display of first identification information (e.g., first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (e.g., second special symbol) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., jackpot symbol), and includes update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., rescue time reduction counter), and special state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a state in which control is performed to increase the probability of a normal hit in a high base state, control to shorten the fluctuation time of a normal symbol, and control to lengthen the opening time of a variable winning ball device 6B (second starting winning port)) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). 5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, and S2284), a first shortened state in which the variable display of the first identification information is likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the second identification information (for example, a low probability/low base state (normal state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a shorter variable display time than the variable display of the second special symbol. See FIG. 12-1), and A second shortened state in which the variable display of the second identification information is more likely to be a variable display with a shorter variable display period than the variable display of the first identification information (for example, a low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state), a high probability/high base state (high probability/first KT state), and a high probability/low base state (second KT state) in the second embodiment in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in a shorter variable time than the variable display of the first special symbol. See FIG. 12-1). and a shortened state control means (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps S061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2032A, S2032B, S2260, S2274, S2284, S2514, and S2206 in the first embodiment), in which the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (e.g., the part that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the relief time shortening counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed (e.g., steps S061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B in the first embodiment). the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result as a display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and while the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information is being executed, based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information, a specific display result and a predetermined display result different from the special display result can be derived and displayed in the variable display of the one of the identification information (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, S1129B in the first embodiment), and the shortened state control means is capable of control to the second shortened state when controlled to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition (e.g., controlled to the low probability/high base state (low probability/first KT state) in the second embodiment). With this configuration, while the variable display of one identification information is being executed, a specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information based on the derived special display result, and the variable display of the one identification information is controlled to the second shortened state after the special condition is met, allowing the game to proceed smoothly and increasing interest.

(Means 118-2) In means 118-1, the variable display execution means is capable of deriving and displaying a special display result (e.g., a pattern that does not match the time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2032A and S2032B in the first embodiment), and when the special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where a special condition is met, the special state control means A special state can be controlled based on the fulfillment of a condition (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A, S5607B, S2030A-S2031A, and S2030B-S2031B in the first embodiment), and the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the special display result being derived and displayed is lower than the degree of advantage of the special state controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition (e.g., in the time-saving state via rescue time-saving, the number of time-saving times is 800, whereas in the time-saving state via time-saving loss, the number of time-saving times is 100. See FIG. 12-1). With such a configuration, even if a special display result is derived and displayed in a variable display where a special condition is fulfilled, the special state is controlled based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the degree of salvation of the player can be increased.

(Means 118-3) In means 118-1 or 118-2, the special state control means is capable of controlling to a special state based on the special condition being satisfied during the execution of a variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information, which is a special display result, if a special condition is satisfied by the execution of a variable display of the other identification information before the display result of the variable display of the one identification information is derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS5607A and S5607B in the first embodiment), and even if a special display result is derived and displayed in the variable display of one of the identification information, does not control to a special state of advantage based on the special display result being derived and displayed (e.g., corresponding to the part that executes steps 061IWS2030A to S2031A, S2030B to S2031B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to ensure the advantage of a special state based on the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(Means 118-4) In any of means 118-1 to 118-3, the variable display execution means can derive and display a special display result (e.g., a small winning pattern) different from the specific display result and the predetermined display result as the display result of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and can derive and display the predetermined display result in the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information based on the special display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the other identification information during the execution of the variable display of one of the first identification information and the second identification information (e.g., corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS1126A, S1129A, S1126B, and S1129B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the specific display result being derived and displayed in the variable display of the unintended identification information, and to minimize the effect of the player's intentional strategy.

(Means 118-5) In any of Means 118-1 to 118-4, the update means can update the numerical information at the timing when the variable display of the first identification information starts and the timing when the variable display of the second identification information starts (e.g., this corresponds to the part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment). With such a configuration, in a configuration in which the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed in parallel, it is possible to optimize the updating of the numerical information.

Furthermore, this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples disclose the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 119-1) to (Means 119-6).

(Means 119-1) A gaming machine that can execute a variable display of a first identification information (e.g., a first special pattern) and a variable display of a second identification information (e.g., a second special pattern) and can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to a player based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes an update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment) that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time reduction counter), and a special state control means (e.g., a step in the first embodiment that executes steps 061IWS5603A and S5603B) that can control to a special state (e.g., a high base state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state (e.g., a low probability/low base state). a specific state control means capable of controlling the specific state (for example, a high probability state) which is more likely to be controlled to an advantageous state than the normal state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS2206 in the first embodiment); an end determination means for determining by lottery that the specific state is to be ended in the specific state (for example, a portion that executes step 061IWS5703A in the second modified example); and a normal state control means capable of controlling the specific state to the normal state based on the determination by the end determination means (for example, a portion that executes steps 061IWS5704A and S5712A in the second modified example). and notification performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the processes of steps S061IWS5710A, S5713A, and S633A in the second modified example, and the process of determining a variation pattern depending on the state of the provocation reach flags A to C in the first embodiment) capable of executing notification performance capable of notifying whether a specific state will end or a specific display result will be derived and displayed in relation to the control of the specific state, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, a part that executes steps S061IWS5603A and S5603B in the first embodiment), and the special state control means updates the numerical information updated by the update means. When a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value (e.g., the value of the rescue time reduction counter is "0") corresponding to a special number of times (e.g., 800 times) as the number of times the variable display is executed, the special state can be controlled (e.g., the part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes steps 061IWS5606A to S5607A, S5606B to S5607B), and when a special condition is established in the special state, the special state can be controlled after the end determination means determines that the special state will end after the special condition is established (e.g., the part in which in variant example 2 executes steps 061IWS56061A, S5701A, S5704A, S5701A to S5709A. See Figure 12-9), and the notification effect execution means can notify, when a special condition is established in the specific state, by a notification effect (e.g., the provocative reach B shown in Figures 12-7 (3-2) and (4)). With this configuration, even if the specific state ends, the notification effect will notify the player that the special state will be entered based on the establishment of a special condition, which gives the player a sense of security and increases their interest.

(Means 119-2) Means 119-1 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised to an advantageous state (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS631A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-3) Means 119-1 or 119-2 includes special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time reduction flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition when the special condition is established in a specific state, and the special information is erased based on control being exercised in the special state after the specific state ends (e.g., the part that executes step 061IWS5707A in variant 2). With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-4) Means 119-1 to 119-3 include special information storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of storing special information (e.g., a rescue time-shortening flag) indicating the establishment of a special condition in a specific state when the special condition is established in the specific state, and the specific state control means can end control of the specific state by executing an initialization process (e.g., the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the special information is erased by executing the initialization process. With such a configuration, information indicating that a special condition has been established in a specific state can be appropriately managed.

(Means 119-5) Means 119-1 to 119-4 are provided with a special condition fulfillment notification effect execution means capable of executing a special condition fulfillment notification effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-8(2), a "Chi" icon 014IW003d is displayed on a part of the image display device 5, indicating that the game will be controlled to a chance mode (rescue time reduction)). With such a configuration, the player can recognize that the game will be controlled to a special state after the end of the specific state, which gives the player a sense of security and increases the game's interest.

(Means 119-6) In means 119-1 to 119-5, the special state control means can control the special state until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in a specific state, if the specific state ends before the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes steps 061IWS5705A, S5711A, S5717A to S5720A in modified example 2), and the notification effect execution means can execute a notification effect that notifies the player that the specific state will end or that a specific display result will be displayed when the variable display is executed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, the part that executes the processing of steps 061IWS5710A, S5713A, S633A in modified example 2 and the processing that determines the variable pattern depending on the state of the provocative reach flags A to C after the 100th change after being controlled to the probability variable state. See FIG. 12-6). With such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of tension and increase the interest.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown below in (Means 1A) to (Means 8A) may be applied.

(Means 1A) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can control to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and an update means that can update numerical information (e.g., a rescue time-saving count counter) based on the execution of the variable display, and the state control means can control to the special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means The stage further includes a predetermined suggestion effect execution means that updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a predetermined suggestion effect (e.g., a notice effect) when the variable display is executed, and a special notification effect execution means that is capable of executing a special notification effect (e.g., a time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that control of a special state will begin based on the establishment of a special condition, and the predetermined suggestion effect execution means has a common ratio of executing the predetermined suggestion effect during the period before the special condition is established (for example, the execution ratio of the notice effect does not change between a period when the number of times remaining until the time-saving rescue is 10 or less and a period when the number of times remaining is 11 or more). With such a configuration, the sudden execution of the special notification effect can provide a sense of surprise to the player, thereby increasing the interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display that meets a special condition is started, and the special notification effect is a form in which the effect display displayed on the display means before the special notification effect is started is made difficult to see (for example, blacked out when the variation starts). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest.

(Means 3A) Means 1A is provided with a variable display execution means for effect that can execute a variable display of the effect identification information (e.g., decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect when the variable display that meets the special condition ends, and the special notification effect is in a form that makes the effect identification information difficult to see (e.g., blacking out when the variation ends). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a form in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest. It can also prevent the effects from becoming cumbersome.

(Means 5A) Any of means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) Any of means 1A to 5A includes a variable display pattern determination means (for example, a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and when a special condition is established, the variable display pattern determination means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is established, and the special notification effect execution means can execute a special notification effect after a non-specific display result (for example, a losing pattern) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display where the special condition is established (for example, in the variable display where the rescue time reduction is established, a variable pattern dedicated to the rescue time reduction is not used. Then, after the losing pattern is derived and displayed, the establishment of the rescue time reduction is notified). With such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is being controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to clearly notify the player of the change in the game state, thereby increasing the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 7A) In any of means 1A to means 6A, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of a start condition and the satisfaction of a start condition, a hold memory means (e.g., a first hold memory number buffer and a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, a backup memory means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means even when the power supply is stopped, an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process to initialize the memory contents of the backup memory means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and a recovery means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6) capable of executing a recovery process to restore the numerical information updated by the update means and the hold information stored in the hold memory means based on the memory contents of the backup memory means when the power supply is started. With this configuration, control can be optimized through initialization processing, and disadvantages to players can be reduced when a power outage occurs in a situation where reserved memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before the power supply is stopped.

(Means 8A) Any of means 1A to 6A includes a state storage means capable of storing special state information (e.g., the state of the high base flag) that can identify that the device is being controlled to a special state, an execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (e.g., the value of a time-saving count counter) that can identify the number of times a variable display has been executed in a special state, a backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) that can retain the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information even when power supply is stopped, and an initialization means (e.g., a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) that can execute an initialization process to initialize the stored contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, and when the special state information, execution count information, and numerical information are held by the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met, the initialization means initializes the special state information and the execution count information in the initialization process but does not initialize the numerical information (e.g., initializes the state of the high base flag and the value of the time-saving count counter, but does not initialize the value of the rescue time-saving count counter (i.e., sets the value before power outage)). Such a configuration can prevent the numerical information from being intentionally initialized, increasing the degree of relief available to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) below may be applied.

(Means 1B) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is met by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means is configured to control the state to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed. The numerical information is updated in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed and in the case where the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where it is not a specific display result (for example, it is capable of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in both cases of a jackpot and a miss), and when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is higher than that of a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, the reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern is more likely to be determined in the case of a jackpot), and when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result, the probability of determining a specific variable display pattern is lower in a predetermined period before a special condition is established than in a period before the predetermined period (for example, immediately before the rescue time reduction occurs, the probability of determining a reach (or a reach with particularly high expectations) variation pattern in the event of a miss is lower). With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed even though a variable display using a specific variable display pattern is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is met.

(Means 2B) Means 1B is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing suggestive effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests the establishment of a rescue time-saving function, or a caption display while waiting for customers), and the suggestive effect execution means is more likely to execute suggestive effects in a specified period before the special condition is established than in the period before the specified period. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player look forward to the establishment of a special condition, thereby increasing interest. It is also possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage caused by ending play just before the special condition is established.

(Means 3B) Means 1B or 2B includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation regarding the rescue time reduction (for example, an explanation of the rescue time reduction function and the effects during the rescue time reduction)). Such a configuration can enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) Any of means 1B to 3B includes a preview performance execution means capable of executing a preview performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the preview performance execution means is capable of executing a preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed more frequently when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result than when the specific display result is not the case, and the preview performance is executed less frequently in a specified period before the special condition is met (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in the period before the specified period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview performance is executed in a specified period before the special condition is met but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of means 1B to 4B, a notice performance execution means is provided that can execute a notice performance (e.g., a timer performance) that notifies the user that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, and the notice performance execution means can execute a notice performance in a specific mode (e.g., performance mode "red") and a predetermined mode (e.g., performance mode "blue") in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and where the notice performance is executed in a specific mode more frequently than in a predetermined mode when the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, and the notice performance is executed in a specific mode less frequently in a predetermined period before the special condition is established (e.g., a period when the number of times remaining until the rescue time reduction is 10 or less) than in a period before the predetermined period when the display result of the variable display is not a specific display result. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a notice performance is executed in a specific mode but a specific display result is not derived and displayed in a predetermined period before the special condition is established.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1C) to (Means 8C) below may be applied.

(Means 1C) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes a state control means that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #M (missing entry into rescue time-saving mode)). , and the state control means can control to a special state when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the variable display pattern determination means can determine to a special variable display pattern when the special condition is established, and further includes a specific notification effect execution means that does not determine to a special variable display pattern before the special condition is established and can execute a specific notification effect (e.g., time-saving entry effect) that notifies the player that the special state will be controlled when the special condition is established and variable display by the special variable display pattern is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the special state will be controlled by the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase the interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In means 1C, the specific notification effect execution means is capable of executing a specific notification effect when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, and is equipped with a special notification effect execution means capable of executing an effect in a common form with the specific notification effect and then executing a special notification effect (e.g., an effect that looks like a time-saving mode has started) that notifies the player that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. With such a configuration, the player is notified that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state after once recognizing that a special condition has been met, which provides a sense of surprise to the player and increases interest.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is met is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, a predetermined notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a predetermined notification effect (e.g., a full rotation effect) that notifies the player that a specific display result is derived and displayed in a manner that is not executed before the special condition is met. Such a configuration can provide the player with a sense of surprise and specialness, and can increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect to notify that the specific display result is derived and displayed in the same manner as before the special condition is satisfied (for example, even when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 0, this is realized by determining the jackpot variation pattern in the same manner as when the value is not 0). With such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be made common when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of means 1C to 4C, the display period (e.g., 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met is longer than the display period (e.g., 0.5 seconds) of the display result of the variable display before the special condition is met, and a notification effect execution means is provided that can execute a notification effect (e.g., a mode transition effect that notifies that control of the time-saving state by rescue time-saving will begin) that notifies players that control of the time-saving state will begin during the display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met. With such a configuration, a period for executing a notification effect in the normal state can be secured, the effect can be clarified when switching game states, and interest can be increased.

(Means 6C) Any of means 1C to 5C includes a signal output means for outputting a specific signal (e.g., a variable stop signal) corresponding to the start of a display period of the display result of the variable display when a special condition is met, at the start of the display period, and outputting a special signal (e.g., a jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of a special state after outputting the specific signal. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid signals being missed externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means outputs a special signal at the start of a special process (e.g., a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied has elapsed. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of signal omissions externally when a specific signal and a special signal are output simultaneously.

(Means 8C) In any of means 1C to 6C, a first passing area (e.g., a first start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a specific path (e.g., a path by hitting from the left) can pass through, a second passing area (e.g., a second start winning port) provided at a position where a gaming medium passing through a special path (e.g., a path by hitting from the right) can pass through, and a variable display execution means capable of executing, as variable display of identification information, a variable display of a first identification information based on the first start condition being satisfied and a variable display of a second identification information based on the second start condition being satisfied, and a means capable of specifying that the gaming medium should be launched toward the special path. and a special output means capable of executing a special output (for example, outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that the game is in a gaming state in which the player is expected to perform a right hit, or an announcement that the game is in a state in which the player will perform a right hit), where the first start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the first passing area, the second start condition is established based on the game medium passing through the second passing area, and the special output means is capable of executing a special output at the start of a special process (for example, a next change postponement process for extending the period until the start of the next change) that is executed after the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is established has elapsed. With such a configuration, a special output that can specify that the game medium should be launched toward a special path at an appropriate timing can be executed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1D) to (Means 5D) below may be applied.

(Means 1D) A gaming machine that executes a variable display of a first identification information and a variable display of a second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns, and the state control means determines whether the numerical information updated by the update means is in accordance with the number of times the variable display has been executed. The special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the number of times being a specific value corresponding to the number of times of special play as the number of times of ...

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means (e.g., a part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a reserved memory means (e.g., a first reserved memory number buffer and a second reserved memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as reserved information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., an effect in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, or an effect in which the color or shape of the reserved display is changed) that predicts the variable display corresponding to the reserved information stored in the reserved memory means. and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, a zone display that displays a special background, etc., and the look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display when a special condition is satisfied among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is satisfied, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance that predicts a variable display after the variable display when the special condition is satisfied (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance that predicts a reserved memory that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and corresponds to a change that occurs after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the control process becoming complicated and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

(Means 3D) In means 1D or 2D, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing a special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is being executed, and the special notification effect is a mode in which the background display in the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, when the next variable display is executed, a background image corresponding to a time-saving state due to rescue time-saving is displayed). Such a configuration can provide a sense of surprise to the player, increasing interest, and prevent the effects from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any of means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestion effect execution means capable of executing suggestion effects related to the establishment of a special condition (for example, a countdown effect or effect that suggests that a rescue time-saving feature will be established, or a caption displayed while waiting for customers, etc.), and the suggestion effect execution means limits the execution of suggestion effects during a predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, a period when there are 10 or fewer plays remaining until the rescue time-saving feature is established). With such a configuration, the special notification effect is suddenly executed, which gives the player a sense of surprise and increases his interest.

(Means 5D) Any of means 1D to 4D includes an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing explanatory effects regarding a special state based on the establishment of a special condition (for example, displaying a caption including an explanation of the rescue time-saving function or the effects during rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 116IW and each of the modified examples, the gaming machine configurations shown in (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) below may be applied.

(Means 1E-1) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern in which the variable display period is shortened compared to the predetermined variable display pattern, The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the derivation and display of the fixed display result, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a higher probability of determining the shortened variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving is more likely to be determined to be a variable pattern with a shortened variable time than the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the variable display is executed by the shortened variable display pattern at a higher rate, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is shortened, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern) being derived and displayed, and that is equipped with a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, an update means that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, and a variable display pattern determination means (e.g., a part in which the gaming control microcomputer 100 executes a variable pattern setting process) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern (e.g., a first variable pattern #C) corresponding to the execution of a reach performance, and the state control means determines a variable display pattern even when a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display. The special state can be controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state based on the variable display, and the special state can be controlled when a special condition is established by the numerical information updated by the update means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of times the variable display is executed, and the update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and the variable display pattern determination means has a lower rate of determining the specific variable display pattern when the display result of the variable display becomes a non-specific display result in the special state controlled when the special condition is established than in the special state controlled after being controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the time-saving state via the rescue time-saving has a lower rate of determining the variable pattern that becomes a reach (or a reach with a particularly high expectation) when the display result is a miss than in the time-saving state via the jackpot). With such a configuration, when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number, the rate at which the display result of the variable display by the specific variable display pattern becomes a non-specific display result is lower, so that a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) Means 1E is provided with background display means capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for the special state controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state controlled when a special condition is met (for example, different background images for the time-saving state via a jackpot and the time-saving state via a rescue time-saving). With such a configuration, the difference in game state can be clearly notified to the player, enhancing interest.

(Means 3E) In means 1E or means 2E, a variable display execution means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112A) capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (for example, a first hold memory number buffer or a second hold memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance (for example, a chance eye performance or a hold change performance) with the variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means as the preview target, and the look-ahead notice execution means has a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a special state controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state controlled when the special condition is satisfied (for example, a different ratio of executing the look-ahead notice performance and a different ratio of which of the multiple types of look-ahead notice performance is executed between a time-saving state via a rescue time-saving state and a time-saving state via a jackpot). With this configuration, the frequency and type of pre-reading preview effects can be made different between the special state that is controlled after control to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when a special condition is met, which can increase interest.

(Means 4E) In any of means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the satisfaction of the start condition and the satisfaction of the start condition, a hold storage means (e.g., a first hold storage number buffer and a second hold storage number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, and a pre-reading preview effect (e.g., a performance in which a special decorative pattern (chance eye) is displayed in a stopped state, a hold change effect in which the color or shape of the hold display is changed, a special background display, etc.) and a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display when the special condition is established is the subject of a notice among the variable displays corresponding to the reserved information stored before the special condition is established, while restricting the execution of the look-ahead notice performance in which the variable display after the variable display in which the special condition is established is the subject of a notice (for example, restricting (prohibiting) the execution of a look-ahead notice performance in which the reserved memory corresponding to a change that is stored before the change in the rescue time-saving is reached and that is performed after the time-saving state is controlled via the rescue time-saving is the subject of a notice). With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process and to avoid the occurrence of inconsistencies in the performance content.

The configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW can be configured by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above characteristic part 090IW, characteristic part 113IW, and characteristic part 116IW. For example, when applying the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 090IW to the configuration shown in the above characteristic part 120IW, the value of the small win counter can be decremented by 1 to end the time-saving state when a small win with a V win occurs during the time-saving state, while the value of the small win counter can be configured not to be decremented when a small win without a V win occurs during the time-saving state.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) based on the execution of a variable display of first identification information and a variable display of second identification information, and the derived display of a specific display result (e.g., a jackpot pattern), and includes state control means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-17, and a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-19) that can control the gaming machine to a special state (e.g., a time-saving state) in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than in a normal state, and update means (e.g., a part that executes steps 100IWS166 and 100IWS173 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-13) that can update numerical information based on the execution of the variable display (e.g., a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the gaming control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 8-14). 8-13, a portion executing step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100; and FIG. 8-17, a portion executing step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100). The update means updates the numerical information when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed.
moreover,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
An example of such a gaming machine is one in which, during the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed below the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 59 and 96).
According to such a configuration, rescue of the player can be realized in an appropriate manner. Specifically, even if the game state changes and the variable display of any of the identification information is executed, the numerical information continues to be updated, so that the player can be rescued more easily and the motivation of the player to play can be increased. Furthermore, according to such a configuration, the group presentation can be executed more appropriately.

In other words, since the numerical information is updated when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is more likely to reach the special number of times and the player is more likely to be rescued than when the numerical information is updated only when either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and therefore the player's motivation to play can be increased, and in the first display period, the first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed, and then in the second display period, which is longer than the first display period, a new character is displayed and the display of the displayed character ends, so that by eliminating the situation in which only a single character is displayed, it is possible to reliably convey to the player that it is a group presentation, and the start and continuation of the group presentation can be suitably executed to increase the interest of the group presentation. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is less likely to reduce the interest of the player when installed in an amusement facility and can increase the player's motivation to play.

The frequency with which the group performance is performed may also be changed based on the updated value by the update means. This allows attention to be drawn to both the number of changes and the group performance.

Furthermore, as an example of a form of a gaming machine that can enhance the interest, there is a gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to the player based on the display result of the variable display becoming a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 48, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 95 to FIG. 101) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 60 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 95 (a23) to FIG. 97 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 98 (a31) to FIG. 99 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of the currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 100 (a37) to FIG. 101 (a42)),
In the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the character displayed first is displayed below the first situation and a part of the character displayed second is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figs. 58 and 95). An example of this gaming machine will be described below as another example.

(Other examples)

[Pachinko machine configuration, etc.]
13 and 14 are front views of a pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. In Fig. 13 and Fig. 14, the layout of the main components of a pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is shown. The pachinko game machine 1, which is an example of a game machine, is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

In the pachinko game machine 1, the game is played by displaying special symbols in a variable manner. The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying multiple types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described later, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described later, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. The variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). The variable display may be expressed as a variable display or a variation.

In addition, two types of special symbols are provided as special symbols that are variably displayed on the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, one special symbol is also called the "first special symbol" or "first special symbol," and the other special symbol is also called the "second special symbol" or "second special symbol." In addition, a special symbol game using the first special symbol is also called the "first special symbol game," and a special symbol game using the second special symbol is also called the "second special symbol game."

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A character called Yume Yume-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the left side of the image display device 5. Yume Yume-chan is the main character who appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Also, a character called Jam-chan who appears in the performance executed by the pachinko game machine 1 is drawn on the game board 2 on the lower right side of the image display device 5. Jam-chan is a character who appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. Yume Yume-chan is the main character, so she has the highest importance of all the characters and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters including Jam-chan. Also, Jam-chan has the highest importance of all the characters other than the main character Yume Yume-chan and appears more frequently (number of times) in the performance than other characters other than Yume Yume-chan. Also, a character with a higher priority than other characters, such as Yume Yume-chan or Jam-chan, may be the character that appears first in the scene where a character is selected, the character that is placed in the most prominent position, or the character that is ranked highest among all selected characters.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole (electric chute) that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 20). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, equipped with an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 13, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7A having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7A has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 20), and the large winning opening door forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a regular large winning opening) as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7A has a large prize opening door in the space between the game board 2 located at the back of the pachinko game machine 1 and the glass door frame 3a (see FIG. 15) located at the front side (player side) of the pachinko game machine 1, and this large prize opening door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front sides of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the normal large prize opening. Specifically, when the solenoid 82 is in the off state, the large prize opening door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the normal large prize opening, and the game ball cannot enter (pass) through the normal large prize opening. On the other hand, when the solenoid 82 is in the on state, the large prize opening door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the normal large prize opening, and the game ball can easily enter the normal large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, it is detected by the count switch 23 as it passes through an area provided inside the regular large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the count switch 23 (see FIG. 20), a number of game balls corresponding to the detection (for example, 10 balls per detection) are paid out to the player as prize balls. When a game ball enters the regular large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10. When the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23 reaches an upper limit (for example, 10 balls), one round ends and the regular large prize opening is controlled to a closed state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a V-variable winning ball device 7B is provided next to the special variable winning ball device 7A. The V-variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 83 (see FIG. 20), and forms a large winning opening (hereinafter referred to as a V-large winning opening) that can be switched between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door.

For example, the special variable winning ball device 7B has a large winning port door in the space between the game board 2 and the glass door frame 3a, and this large winning port door slides open and closes horizontally between the back and front of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the path for the game ball to the V large winning port. Specifically, when the solenoid 83 is in the off state, the large winning port door slides to the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 to close the V large winning port, preventing the game ball from entering (passing through) the V large winning port. On the other hand, when the solenoid 83 is in the on state, the large winning port door slides to the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 to open the V large winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the V large winning port.

The game ball that enters the V large prize opening is detected by the V prize opening switch 24 (see FIG. 20) as it passes through a specific area (also called the V prize opening area) provided inside the V large prize opening. When the game ball is detected by the V prize opening switch 24, the game state is controlled to a high probability state. In other words, in this embodiment, a V prize occurs on the condition that the game ball enters the V large prize opening during a round of the high probability game state, and the game state is controlled to a high probability state. The normal high probability prize opening and the V large prize opening are collectively referred to as high probability prize openings. The high probability prize opening is also referred to as an attacca.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

In the pachinko game machine 1, normal symbols are variably displayed as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L and 8R are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3 to play and output sound effects, etc.

At a predetermined position on the game board 2 (above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided. The movable body 32 is configured so that a member with the letters "POWER" attached is located in front of a member with the letter "2". This forms the letters "POWER2". "POWER2" may be the model name of the pachinko game machine 1, or may be a name representing the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, the title of an anime or the name of a singer). The letters attached to the movable body 32 may also represent the name of the main character or the character with the second highest priority after the main character (for example, "Yume Yume" representing the main character Yume Yume-chan) that appears in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1. In this embodiment, the model name of the pachinko game machine 1 (Powerful 2) is shown on the movable body 32.

In this embodiment, the movable body 32 is movable between a position above the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 1 and a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14. Specifically, of the member bearing the word "POWER" and the member bearing the word "2," only the member bearing the word "POWER" falls from the position shown in FIG. 1, and the movable body 32 stops at a position covering the front of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 14. The movable body 32 is also referred to as a role-playing object.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls loaned from a predetermined ball loaning machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed (or depressed) by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 20).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined command operation by pressing it. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 20).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a special symbol LED board 9020 at the bottom left of the game board 2. The special symbol LED board 9020 is an LED board that is controlled by the game control microcomputer 100 and notifies the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(a) described later, in the special symbol LED board 9020, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022.

The pachinko game machine 1 further includes a fourth symbol unit 9050 at the bottom left of the image display device 5. The fourth symbol unit 9050 is an LED board that is controlled by the performance control CPU 120 and notifies the change in the special symbol, the number of reserved memories, the right-hit display, and the like by turning on/off/blinking the LEDs. In the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the special symbol (first special symbol) in the first special symbol game and the type of the special symbol (second special symbol) in the second special symbol game are represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053, for example, as shown in FIG. 17(b) described later, in the fourth symbol unit 9050, the type of the first special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054, and the type of the second special symbol is represented by a combination of lighting modes such as turning on/blinking/off by multiple LEDs provided in the special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054.

The pachinko game machine 1 has a game board 2 and a game machine frame 3 with multiple lamps. Specifically, the pachinko game machine 1 includes a role lamp 9A provided on the movable body 32, a board left lamp 9B provided on the left side of the game board 2, a board-top lamp 9C provided above the game board 2, an attacca lamp 9E provided near the special variable winning ball device 7B, a V attacca lamp 9F provided near the special variable winning ball device 7A, a V lamp 9G that notifies the player that a round of a big win game state in which a V big winning hole is open and a V winning can occur, or that a V winning has occurred, an electric chute lamp 9H provided near the variable winning ball device 6B, a stick controller lamp 9J provided on the stick controller 31A, a trigger button lamp 9K provided on the push button 31B, a frame left lamp 9L provided on the left side of the game machine frame 3, and a frame right lamp 9R provided on the right side of the game machine frame 3. The V lamp may be for notifying the player that a big win has occurred.

The reel lamp 9A is composed of multiple lamps, namely reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Specifically, the component labeled "POWER" included in the movable body 32 is divided into four parts, with reel lamp 9A1 located behind the "P" and "O" parts, reel lamp 9A2 located behind the "W" and "E" parts, reel lamp 9A3 located behind the "R" and "F" parts, and reel lamp 9A4 located behind the "U" and "L" parts. As a result, when reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 light up (emit light) behind the component labeled with the word "POWER", "POWER" lights up (emits light).

The left board lamp 9B is made up of multiple lamps, such as left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5. A main character (for example, "Yume Yume", which refers to the main character Yume Yume-chan) in the content used in the pachinko game machine 1 is depicted on the left side of the game board 2, and the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are each positioned behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted. As a result, when the left board lamps 9B1 to 9B5 light up (emit light) behind the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted, the part of the game board 2 where the main character is depicted lights up (emits light).

As shown in FIG. 14, the board lamps 9C are composed of multiple lamps such as board lamps 9C1 to 9C13. The upper side of the game board 2 is divided into three areas, left, center, and right, and the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged on the back side of the game board 2. The parts of the game board 2 where the board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, and board lamps 9C9 to 9C13 are arranged are made of a transparent material that can transmit light, so that when the board lamps 9C1 to 9C13 light up (emit light) on the back side of the upper part of the game board 2, the upper part of the game board 2 lights up (emits light) in white, red, or the like.

The attacca lamp 9E is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7B. As a result, when the attacca lamp 9E lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B. In addition, the V attacca lamp 9F is located on the back side of the game board 2 near the special variable winning ball device 7A. As a result, when the V attacca lamp 9F lights up (emits light) on the back side of the game board 2, it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7A.

The V lamp 9G is located behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V". As a result, when the V lamp 9G lights up (emits light) behind the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V", the part of the game board 2 that is marked with a "V" lights up (emits light). The electric chute lamp 9H is located near the variable winning ball device 6B, and when it lights up (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the area near the special variable winning ball device 7B.

The stick controller lamp 9J is provided on the stick controller 31A, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the stick controller 31A. The trigger button lamp 9K is provided on the push button 31B, and when lit (emits light), it lights up (emits light) the push button 31B.

The left frame lamp 9L is composed of multiple lamps 9L1 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 16) provided on the left side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The right frame lamp 9R is composed of multiple lamps 9R2 to 9L12 (described later in FIG. 16) provided on the right side of the gaming machine frame 3, and when each lamp is turned on (lights up), the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 is turned on (lights up). The left frame lamp 9L and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as frame lamps. The role lamp 9A, the left board lamp 9B, the top board lamp 9C, the attacca lamp 9E, the V attacca lamp 9F, the V lamp 9G, the electric chute lamp 9H, the stick controller lamp 9J, the trigger button lamp 9K, the left frame lamp 9L, and the right frame lamp 9R are collectively referred to as game effect lamps 9.

Figure 15 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment. The main board 11 housed in the board case 201 is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17 (see Figure 20).

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 30 (see FIG. 20) is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 30 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacka) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

Figure 16 is a diagram for explaining the frame lamps. The frame left lamp 9L has a group of 12 lamps, frame left lamps 9L1 to 9L12, arranged counterclockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame left lamp 9L lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (12 lamps in this example), causing the left side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow. Meanwhile, the frame right lamp 9R has a group of 11 lamps, frame left lamps 9R2 to 9L12, arranged clockwise from the top to the bottom of the gaming machine frame 3. The frame right lamp 9R lights up or blinks each of the multiple lamps (11 lamps in this example), causing the right side of the gaming machine frame 3 to glow.

17 is a diagram for explaining the special symbol LED board 9020 and the fourth symbol unit 9050. As shown in FIG. 17(a), the special symbol LED board 9020 includes a special symbol 1 variable display section 9021 showing the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9022 showing the variable display of the second special symbol, a special symbol 1 memory display section 9023 showing the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9024 showing the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a regular symbol memory display section 9025 showing the regular symbol reserved memory number, a regular symbol display section 9026 showing the variable display of the regular symbol, a right-hit display section 9030 encouraging the player to hit the right, a special symbol display section 9028 showing the presence or absence of a special symbol state, a time-saving display section 9029 showing the presence or absence of a time-saving state, and a round display section 9027 showing the number of rounds of the jackpot. Each display unit can inform the player of the presence or absence of variable display of special or normal symbols, the results, the current game status, the number of reserved symbols, etc., by lighting or blinking with a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9021 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9022 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

Furthermore, the special chart LED board 9020 can prompt the player to hit to the right by lighting/blinking/turning off the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030. In this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit to the right, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit to the right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit to the left, the lighting means such as the LED in the right hit display unit 9030 turns off. After the pattern is determined, the CPU 103 transmits a right hit display lighting designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns on the right hit display unit 9030, and after the pattern is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state, it transmits a right hit display turning off designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right hit display unit 9030. In addition, if the pachinko game machine 1 has a jackpot or a small jackpot that is not controlled to a high base after the jackpot game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right-hit display unit 9030 only during the jackpot round. In this case, the CPU 103 sends a jackpot end designation command to the performance control CPU 120 and turns off the right-hit display unit 9030.

Here, right-hand hit refers to operating the ball-hitting handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the second flow-down path, which is one of the first and second flow-down paths through which the game medium can flow down in the game area provided on the game board 2. The first flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the left area of the game area, and beyond which there is a first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, but there is no second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. The second flow-down path is, for example, a path that passes through the right area of the game area, and beyond which there are a second start winning hole and a large winning hole (normal large winning hole, V large winning hole) formed in the variable winning ball device 6B. When the player launches the game ball toward the first flow-down path, the game ball flows toward the first start winning hole through the first flow-down path. When a player shoots a game ball toward the second flow path, the game ball passes through the second flow path and flows toward the second start winning hole or the big winning hole (normal big winning hole, V big winning hole).

In this embodiment, during the jackpot game after the jackpot occurs and during the game state after the jackpot game (time-saving state or probability change state), the player hits the right side to cause the game ball to enter the second start winning hole or the large winning hole provided on the right side of the game area, and during that time, the right-hit display unit 9030 encourages the player to hit the right side. By hitting the right side while the display encouraging the player to hit the right side is being displayed, the player can make the game ball enter the second start winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 3 balls) are paid out and the player can obtain the right to play the second special game, or can make the game ball enter the normal large winning hole and a predetermined number of prize balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out. Furthermore, as will be described in more detail later, during the round of the special jackpot, the V-large prize opening opens, and the player can obtain the right to enter the game ball into the V-large prize opening and be controlled into the special jackpot state by hitting to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is being displayed. Therefore, hitting to the right while the display encouraging the player to hit to the right is being displayed can give the player an overall advantage. Note that, unlike hitting to the right, operating the ball-hitting operation handle 30 to launch the game ball toward the first flow path (hitting style) is also called hitting to the left.

As shown in FIG. 17(b), the fourth symbol unit 9050 includes a special symbol 1 memory display section 9051 that indicates the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special symbol game, a special symbol 2 memory display section 9052 that indicates the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special symbol game, a special symbol 1 variable display section 9053 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special symbol 2 variable display section 9054 that indicates the status or display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, and a right hit display section 9055 that encourages the player to hit right. Each display section can inform the player of the presence or absence of a variable display of a special symbol, the reserved number, and a right hit instruction by lighting/blinking/turning off the light using a lighting means such as an LED.

For example, the special symbol 1 variable display unit 9053 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the first special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means. The special symbol 2 variable display unit 9054 notifies the player whether or not a variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol game is being performed, and the stopping symbol of the second special symbol determined by the result of the variable display, by lighting/blinking/extinguishing an LED or other lighting means.

In the following, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the first special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special pattern 1 variable display unit 9053 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the first special pattern. Also, the display of the change in the stopped pattern of the second special pattern by lighting means such as LEDs in the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9022 and the special pattern 2 variable display unit 9054 is also referred to as the change display (variable display) of the second special pattern.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when the player is prompted to hit right, the lighting means such as LED in the right hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 lights up (emits light), and when the player is not prompted to hit right, that is, when the player is prompted to hit left, the lighting means such as LED in the right hit display unit 9055 turns off. The performance control CPU 120 turns on the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display lighting command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined, and turns off the right hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a right hit display turning off command from the CPU 103 after the symbol is determined by the final variation in the high base state before returning to the normal state. In addition, when the pachinko game machine 1 has a big hit or a small hit that is not controlled to the high base after the big hit game state, the performance control CPU 120 may turn on the right hit display unit 9055 only during the big hit round. In this case, the performance control CPU 120 turns off the right-hit display unit 9055 based on receiving a jackpot end command from the CPU 103.

Figure 18 is a view looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. As shown in Figure 1, the game board 2 is fixed so that it covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in Figure 18, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the rear side of the game board 2 can be seen.

Figure 19 is a diagram for explaining the display mode of the screen in the image display device 5. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 is used to display images such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. Specifically, in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, variable display of decorative symbols (such as symbols showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "center", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The special symbol games and variable display of decorative symbols executed in synchronization are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

At the bottom of the screen of the image display device 5, there is provided a first pending memory display area 5D capable of displaying the first pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, a second pending memory display area 5U capable of displaying the second pending memory number by the number of circular pending displays, and an active display area 5A for displaying the pending display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed as the active display.

At the top right corner of the screen of the image display device 5, a fourth pattern 5J is displayed, indicating that the special pattern is being variably displayed, and indicating the first and second reserved memory counts. At the left edge of the screen of the image display device 5, small patterns 5M, which are smaller than the decorative patterns, are displayed. The small patterns are arranged vertically in a row, corresponding to the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the decorative patterns displayed in the "right" decorative pattern display area 5R. Furthermore, the small patterns 5M are never made invisible during the variably displayed state, and are also the patterns that are always displayed on the screen of the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 19, the decorative pattern is arranged in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the small pattern 5M is arranged at the left end of the screen of the image display device 5 in a size smaller than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 5M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 19(a), the screen of the image display device 5 is rectangular or nearly rectangular, but as described above, the game board 2 is fixed so as to cover the edges of the screen of the image display device 5. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 19(b), when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is viewed from the front, part of the screen of the image display device 5 (especially the edges) cannot be seen or is difficult to see because of the game board 2.

[Board configuration]
20 is a diagram for explaining various boards mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. As shown in FIG. 20, the pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 connected to a power switch 91 is also mounted. The various control boards are a concept that includes not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, power from an AC power source, such as an external power source of 100V AC, such as a commercial power source, can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12, via the power supply board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of the special game (including management of reserved balls), execution of the regular game (including management of reserved balls), big win game state, small win game state, game state, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, an output circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, an I/O (Input/Output port) 105, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 106.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the special LED board 9020, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and a switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23, V winning switch 24) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The output circuit 111 transmits the solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 to solenoid 81, solenoid 82, or solenoid 83.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 30, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 in accordance with the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

The fourth pattern unit 9050 is connected to the performance control board 12, and each display section can be lit (blinked) under the control of the control CPU 120.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 having the above-mentioned configuration, the game proceeds as follows. The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period when the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is reserved up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special game is started by the special game 1 variable display unit 21 of the special game LED board 9020.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special game is started by the special game 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special game LED board 9020.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to a big win game state or a small win game state (when a start winning occurs but the special game based on the start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special game, a "big win" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 corresponds to a specific special pattern (big win pattern, the actual pattern varies depending on the type of big win described below). In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a specific special pattern (big win pattern) in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 is also referred to as a "specific display result". In addition, a "small win" occurs when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special 1 variable display unit 9021 or the special 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special LED board 9020 corresponds to a specific special pattern (small win pattern) different from the big win pattern. In addition, when the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 is a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern, it is a "miss". In addition, the lighting mode corresponding to a special pattern (missing pattern) different from the big win pattern and the small win pattern in the combination of the lighting modes of the multiple LEDs provided on the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 and the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 is also called a "miss display result".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game state is controlled to a big win game state, which is advantageous for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "small win", the game state is controlled to a small win game state. Note that a small win does not necessarily have to be set as a win type.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. This predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined upper limit number of times (10 times or 7 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

The "jackpot" has a set type of jackpot. For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

In the small win game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening state. For example, in the small win game state, the large prize opening is opened in the same opening state as the large prize opening in the large prize game state for some large prize types (the number of times the large prize opening is opened is the same as the number of rounds, and the timing of closing the large prize opening is also the same, etc.). Note that, like the large prize types, small prize types may also be set for "small prizes."

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. A high probability state and a low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

After the small win game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game becomes "small win" is continued (however, if the special game when the "small win" occurs is the special game of the specified number of times in the number cut, the game state will naturally change). Note that the display result of the special game does not have to be "small win".

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area within a big prize opening) during a big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game state may be controlled to a special probability state after the big win game state.

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, turning on or off the game effect lamp 9, operating the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, a reach performance is executed in response to the above-mentioned reach state being reached during the variable display of the decorative pattern. In the pachinko game machine 1, a plurality of types of reach performances are executed with different rates (also called the reliability of a big hit or the expectation of a big hit) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) becoming a "big hit" according to the performance state. The reach performances include, for example, a normal reach, a super reach with a higher reliability of a big hit than a normal reach, and a strongest reach with an even higher reliability of a big hit than a super reach. In addition, the super reach is divided into the first half of the super reach and the second half of the super reach. In this embodiment, the reliability of a big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the normal reach. In addition, the reliability of a big hit is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the first half of the super reach. In addition, the reliability of a jackpot is higher when the display result of the variable display is derived in the strongest reach than when the display result of the variable display is derived in the second half of the super reach. Note that, below, "Super Reach" is also referred to as "SP Reach," "the first half of the Super Reach" as "the first half of the SP," and "the second half of the Super Reach" as "the second half of the SP."

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "jackpot" (the specific display result described above), a confirmed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (such as "7") may be displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (such as "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "small win", a fixed decorative pattern (such as "1 3 5") that is a predetermined small win combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "small win"). As an example, decorative patterns that constitute chance eyes are displayed stationary on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Note that a common fixed decorative pattern may be derived and displayed when the display result of the special game is a "big win" of some big win types (big win types in a big win game state that are the same as in a small win game state) and when it is a "small win".

When the display result of the special game is a combination of lighting patterns corresponding to a "miss" (the miss display result described above), the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss", after the state of the variable display of the decorative patterns becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, other effects, such as a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability, are executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect may be executed that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

During a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. As a jackpot performance, a performance to notify the number of rounds or an upgrade performance to indicate that the value of the jackpot game state will increase may be executed. Also, during a small jackpot game state, a small jackpot performance to notify the player of the small jackpot game state is executed. In addition, a common performance may be executed during a small jackpot game state and a jackpot game state for some jackpot types (a jackpot type in a jackpot game state of the same mode as a small jackpot game state, for example, a jackpot type in which the game state after that is a high probability state), so that the player cannot tell whether he is currently in a small jackpot game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, a common performance may be executed after the end of the small jackpot game state and after the end of the jackpot game state, so that it is not possible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

[Various tables related to jackpots]
Various tables relating to jackpots will be explained with reference to Figures 21 and 22.

(Winning type)
21 is a diagram for explaining the types of winning. As shown in FIG. 21, the winning type table shows the probability of winning after the end of the jackpot game state, the base after the end of the jackpot game state, and the number of openings (number of rounds) in the jackpot for each type (kind) of winning in the jackpot.

Specifically, there are three types of jackpots: normal jackpot 1 and 2, and special jackpot 1 to 9. In the following, each round may be indicated with the letter "R." For example, the first round is also called the 1st round, and the second round is also called the 2nd round.

Normal jackpot 1 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of a 3-round jackpot game state. In normal jackpot 1, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times).

Normal jackpot 2 is a jackpot that is controlled to a low probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of three rounds. In normal jackpot 2, this low probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

Variable jackpots 1 to 5 are jackpots that are controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of three rounds of jackpot play. In variable jackpot 1, this high probability, high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 6 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 5-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot 6, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot 7 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the jackpot game state of 7 rounds. In the probability of a jackpot 7, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed for a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

The probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9 is a jackpot that is controlled to a high probability state and a high base state after the end of the 10-round jackpot game state. In the probability of a jackpot being 8 or 9, this high probability high base state continues until a variable display (special chart change) is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times).

(each random number)
Fig. 22 is a diagram for explaining each random number. As shown in Fig. 22, each random number is used as follows. Specifically, Random 1 is a random counter for determining whether or not a jackpot is reached. Random 1 is, for example, incremented by one from 1 until it reaches its upper limit of 65536, after which it is incremented again from 1. Random 2 is a random counter (for determining the type of jackpot) that determines the type of jackpot.

Random 3 and Random 4 are random counters (for determining the later fluctuation pattern) that determine the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as the later fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the later fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern. Later fluctuation refers to the latter part of the fluctuation of the special pattern. Random 3 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a miss, and for example, is updated by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 65519, and then is incremented again from 1. Random 4 is a random counter that determines the later fluctuation pattern that corresponds to a win, and for example, is incremented by 1, and is incremented from 1 to its upper limit of 239, and then is incremented again from 1.

Random 5 is a random counter (for determining a previous fluctuation pattern) that determines the fluctuation pattern (hereafter referred to as a previous fluctuation pattern) (fluctuation time) that corresponds to the previous fluctuation among the fluctuation patterns. A previous fluctuation refers to the fluctuation in the first half of the special pattern fluctuation. For example, Random 5 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 251, and then incremented again from 1. Random 6 is a random counter (for determining a normal pattern hit) that determines whether or not a hit based on a normal pattern will occur. For example, Random 6 is incremented by one from 1 up to its upper limit of 201, and then incremented again from 1.

In this embodiment, whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot determination (Random 1). Then, which of the multiple types of jackpots will be the jackpot is determined based on the value of a random number for jackpot type determination (Random 2). At this time, the jackpot pattern can also be determined based on the value of Random 2.

First, the random number for determining the subsequent fluctuation pattern (Random 3, 4) is used to determine the subsequent fluctuation pattern depending on whether the result is a hit or a miss, and then the random number for determining the previous fluctuation pattern (Random 5) is used to determine the previous fluctuation pattern. In this way, in this embodiment, the fluctuation pattern is determined by a two-stage lottery process.

(Big hit determination table, big hit type determination table)
23 is a diagram for explaining the big win determination table and the big win type determination table. These tables are stored in the ROM 101.

Figure 23 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value that is compared with Random 1 is set. There are two types of jackpot determination tables: a normal (non-high probability) jackpot determination table used in the normal state (a game state that is not in the high probability state, i.e., a non-high probability state), and a high probability jackpot determination table used in the high probability state.

The normal jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the upper column of FIG. 23(a), and the special jackpot determination table has jackpot determination values set for the number of determination values listed in the lower column of FIG. 23(a). The special jackpot determination table has a greater number of jackpot determination values set than the normal jackpot determination table, as a result of adding a special jackpot determination value specific to the special jackpot state to the jackpot determination values common to the normal jackpot determination table. This means that in the special jackpot state, a jackpot determination is made with a higher probability than in the normal state.

At a predetermined time, the CPU 103 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 104 and compares the extracted value with the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot. If the random number value for determining a jackpot matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 23(a), it decides to determine a jackpot (normal jackpot or special jackpot) for the special symbol. Note that FIG. 23(a) shows the probability (percentage) of a jackpot or the probability (percentage) of a miss.

Figures 23(b) and (c) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table. Figure 23(b) is a first special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the first special pattern. Figure 23(c) is a second special pattern jackpot type determination table used to determine the type of jackpot when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot based on the second special pattern.

The first special chart jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23(b) has a number of determination values set for normal jackpots 1 and 2 and special jackpots 1 to 4, which are compared with the random 2 value for jackpot type determination. For example, as shown in FIG. 23(b), for the first special chart, normal jackpot 1 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, normal jackpot 2 is assigned 25 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 1 is assigned 5 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 2 is assigned 37 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, special jackpot 3 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values, and special jackpot 4 is assigned 4 random 2 values out of 100 random 2 values.

The second special symbol jackpot type judgment table in FIG. 23(c) has judgment values set for the number of judgment values corresponding to each of the special jackpots 5 to 9, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 2. For example, as shown in FIG. 23(c), for the second special symbol, special jackpot 5 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 6 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 7 is assigned 5 of 100 Random 2 values, special jackpot 8 is assigned 70 of 100 Random 2 values, and special jackpot 9 is assigned 10 of 100 Random 2 values.

Using these various jackpot type determination tables, the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type that corresponds to the jackpot type determination value with which the value of Random 2 matches, and determines the jackpot pattern with which the value of Random 2 matches. This simultaneously determines the jackpot type and the jackpot pattern that corresponds to the jackpot type.

[Performance control command]
FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining an example of a presentation control command. The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, which is the main control board, transmits various presentation control commands to the presentation control CPU 120 according to the game control state. The presentation control command is, for example, a two-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). Note that the command form shown in FIG. 24 is an example, and other command forms may be used. Note that, in the following, "(H)" indicates hexadecimal, but may be omitted in this specification.

Command 80XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (previous variation pattern) corresponding to the previous variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the previous variation pattern). The previous variation on the sub side refers to the variation of the first half of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of previous variation patterns, there is a previous variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the previous variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8101 (H) is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Command 8102 (H) is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display of the second special symbol. When the performance control CPU 101 receives command 8101 (H) or command 8102 (H), it controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative pattern.

Command 84XX (H) is a variation pattern command that specifies the variation pattern (post-variation pattern) corresponding to the post-variation among the variation patterns of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern (XX corresponds to the number of the post-variation pattern). The post-variation on the sub side refers to the latter half of the variation of the decorative pattern that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special pattern. When a unique number is assigned to each of the multiple types of post-variation patterns, there is a post-variation pattern command that corresponds to each of the post-variation patterns identified by that number.

Command 8C01 (H) is a display result 1 designation command (miss designation command) indicating that a miss has been determined. Command 8C02 (H) is a display result 2 designation command (normal jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C03 (H) is a display result 3 designation command (normal jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a normal jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C04 (H) is a display result 4 designation command (probability jackpot 1 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 1 has been determined. Command 8C05 (H) is a display result 5 designation command (probability jackpot 2 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 2 has been determined. Command 8C06 (H) is a display result 6 designation command (probability jackpot 3 designation command) indicating that a special jackpot 3 has been determined. Command 8C07(H) is a display result 7 designation command (probability change jackpot 4 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 4 has been determined. Command 8C08(H) is a display result 8 designation command (probability change jackpot 5 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 5 has been determined. Command 8C09(H) is a display result 9 designation command (probability change jackpot 6 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 6 has been determined. Command 8C10(H) is a display result 10 designation command (probability change jackpot 7 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 7 has been determined. Command 8C11(H) is a display result 11 designation command (probability change jackpot 8 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 8 has been determined. Command 8C12(H) is a display result 12 designation command (probability change jackpot 9 designation command) indicating that probability change jackpot 9 has been determined. The miss designation command, normal jackpot 1, 2 designation command, and special jackpot 1-9 designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8C commands.

Command 8D01 (H) is a first pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the first special pattern. Command 8D02 (H) is a second pattern change designation command that indicates the start of variable display of the second special pattern. The first pattern change designation command and the second pattern change designation command, or these collectively, are also referred to as 8D commands. Command 8F00 (H) is a pattern confirmation designation command that specifies the end of the variation of the first special pattern and/or the second special pattern.

Command 9000 (H) is an initialization command that specifies initialization (specifies the display of the initial screen when power is turned on) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is a power outage recovery command that specifies the recovery from power outage (specifies the display of the power outage recovery screen) that is sent when power supply to the gaming machine is resumed. Command 9500 (H) is a normal state command that specifies the background of the normal state. Command 9501 (H) is a time-saving state command that specifies the background of the time-saving state. Command 9502 (H) is a special probability state command that specifies the background of the special probability state. The normal state command, time-saving state command, and special probability state command, or these are collectively referred to as 95 series commands or background command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

Command A001 (H) is a jackpot start 1 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 1. Command A002 (H) is a jackpot start 2 designation command that specifies the start of normal jackpot 2. Command A003 (H) is a special jackpot start 3 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 1. Command A004 (H) is a special jackpot start 4 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 2. Command A005 (H) is a special jackpot start 5 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 3. Command A006 (H) is a special jackpot start 6 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 4. Command A007 (H) is a special jackpot start 7 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 5. Command A008 (H) is a special jackpot start 8 designation command that specifies the start of special jackpot 6. Command A009 (H) is a special jackpot start 9 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 7. Command A010 (H) is a special jackpot start 10 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 8. Command A011 (H) is a special jackpot start 11 command that specifies the start of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot start 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A0 series commands.

A1XX (H) is a command for specifying when the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is open for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying when the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A1 series command. A2XX (H) is a command for specifying after the large prize opening is open, indicating that the large prize opening is closed for the number of times (rounds) indicated by XX. The command for specifying after the large prize opening is open is also referred to as an A2 series command.

Command A301 (H) is a jackpot end 1 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 1. Command A302 (H) is a jackpot end 2 designation command that specifies the end of normal jackpot 2. Command A303 (H) is a jackpot end 3 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 1. Command A304 (H) is a jackpot end 4 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 2. Command A305 (H) is a jackpot end 5 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 3. Command A306 (H) is a jackpot end 6 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 4. Command A307 (H) is a jackpot end 7 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 5. Command A308 (H) is a jackpot end 8 designation command that specifies the end of special jackpot 6. Command A309 (H) is a jackpot end 9 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 7. Command A310 (H) is a jackpot end 10 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 8. Command A311 (H) is a jackpot end 11 command that specifies the end of special jackpot 9. Each of the jackpot end 1-11 commands, or all of them collectively, are also referred to as A3 series commands.

Command AD00(H) is a high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command that specifies that a V win has occurred. The high probability jackpot determination device passage designation command is a command that is sent when the game ball that has passed through the V large winning port enters the V winning area and is detected by the V winning switch 24.

Command B100(H) is a first start winning designation command that specifies that a first start winning has occurred. Command B200(H) is a second start winning designation command that specifies that a second start winning has occurred.

Command C1XX(H) is a first reserved memory number designation command that designates that the first reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The first reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C1 series command. Command C2XX(H) is a second reserved memory designation command that designates that the second reserved memory number has reached the number indicated by XX. The second reserved memory number designation command is also referred to as a C2 series command.

Commands C4XX(H) and C6XX(H) are presentation control commands that indicate the contents of the winning judgment results, such as a jackpot judgment, a jackpot type judgment, and a variation pattern type judgment, when a starting winning is made at the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port. Of these, command C4XX(H) is a design designation command that indicates the winning judgment results, such as whether or not a winning will occur and the type of jackpot.

C7XX(H) is a special prize opening entry designation command that indicates the passage of the game ball through the special prize opening on the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

A command in which MODE is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT is 0 is a right-hit display off command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned off. A command in which MODE data is FD (H) and the 4th bit of EXT data is 1 is a right-hit display on command, which indicates that the right-hit display is turned on. In this embodiment, the right-hit display on command is also referred to as an FD command.

At the time of start winning, the game control microcomputer 100 judges whether or not a jackpot will be reached, the type of jackpot, and the range of judgment values for the value of the random number for judging the type of fluctuation pattern. Then, a value specifying a jackpot and a value specifying the type of jackpot are set in the EXT data of the designation command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The game control microcomputer 100 also sets a value specifying the range of judgment values as the judgment result of the type of fluctuation pattern in the EXT data of the fluctuation type command, and controls the transmission of this to the performance control CPU 120. The performance control CPU 120 can recognize whether or not the display result will be a jackpot and the type of jackpot based on the value set in the designation command, and can recognize the type of fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type command.

[Fluctuation pattern]
The contents of the variation patterns and how the variation patterns are determined will be described with reference to Figures 25 to 31.

In this embodiment, multiple types of fluctuation patterns are set by the main game control microcomputer 100. Each fluctuation pattern is managed by a main fluctuation number and is composed of a combination of a front fluctuation pattern that is a fluctuation pattern corresponding to a front fluctuation and a back fluctuation pattern that is a back fluctuation, and each combination contains different contents. The front fluctuation pattern corresponds to the front fluctuation pattern command (80XX (H)) described using FIG. 24, and the back fluctuation pattern corresponds to the back fluctuation pattern command (84XX (H)) described using FIG. 24.

(Main side front fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 25 is a diagram for explaining an example of a previous fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of previous fluctuation patterns each assigned with a previous fluctuation number, previous fluctuation number 1 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8000(H)) that specifies a normal fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 13 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 2 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8001(H)) that specifies a shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 7 seconds). Previous fluctuation number 3 is a previous fluctuation pattern command (8002(H)) that specifies a super shortened fluctuation (for example, a fluctuation of a decorative pattern over 3 seconds).

Previous change number 4 is a previous change pattern command (8003 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ×) (a reach that is in reach mode but the movable body 32 does not move). Previous change number 5 is a previous change pattern command (8004 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (reel ○) (a reach that is in reach mode and the movable body 32 moves). Previous change number 6 is a previous change pattern command (8005 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) (a reach that is in reach mode and develops into a final reach).

Previous change number 7 is a previous change pattern command (8006 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is executed after one pseudo change. A pseudo change is a variable display (variable display) in which the variable display (variable display) of the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and then resumed from the start of the variable display (variable display) to the derived display of the display result of the variable display. Such a performance in which pseudo changes are repeated is also called a pseudo consecutive. By executing a pseudo consecutive, a variable display based on one reserved memory can be made to look like multiple pseudo variable displays to the player. Note that a variable display that is temporarily stopped and then resumed is also called a "re-variable display". Previous change number 8 is a previous change pattern command (8007 (H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is executed after one pseudo change. Previous change number 9 is a previous change pattern command (8008 (H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after one pseudo change.

Previous change number 10 is a previous change pattern command (8009(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ×) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 11 is a previous change pattern command (800A(H)) that specifies that a normal reach (character ○) is to be executed after two pseudo changes. Previous change number 12 is a previous change pattern command (800B(H)) that specifies a normal reach (final reach development) after two pseudo changes.

A change time is specified for each previous change pattern, and an animation (video) is displayed on the image display device 5 for each change time. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, it takes about 33.3 msec for one still image (called a frame) that makes up the video. For example, for patterns with previous change numbers 7 to 9, the change time is set to 41,500 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,246. For patterns with previous change numbers 10 to 12, the change time is set to 62,000 msec, and the number of frames is about 1,861.

(Main side rear fluctuation pattern)
FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining an example of a post-fluctuation pattern on the main side. Among the multiple types of post-fluctuation patterns each assigned with a post-fluctuation number, post-fluctuation number 1 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8400(H)) that specifies a 13-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 2 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8401(H)) that specifies a 7-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 3 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8402(H)) that specifies a 3-second fluctuation. Post-fluctuation number 4 is a post-fluctuation pattern command (8403(H)) that specifies the execution of a pseudo consecutive fake. A pseudo consecutive fake is a performance that appears to execute a pseudo consecutive but does not execute the pseudo consecutive after all.

Later change number 5 is a later change pattern command (8404(H)) that specifies a normal reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state but does not develop into an SP reach and becomes a miss state). Later change number 6 is a later change pattern command (8405(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach but becomes a miss state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 7 is a later change pattern command (8406(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach but becomes a miss state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 8 is a later change pattern command (8407(H)) that specifies a final reach (miss) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach but becomes a miss state in the final reach).

Later change number 9 is a later change pattern command (8408(H)) that specifies a normal reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that becomes a reach state and then a hit state). Later change number 10 is a later change pattern command (8409(H)) that specifies the first half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into an SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the first half of the SP reach). Later change number 11 is a later change pattern command (840A(H)) that specifies the second half of the SP (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into the second half of the SP reach and then becomes a hit state in the second half of the SP reach). Later change number 12 is a later change pattern command (840B(H)) that specifies a final reach (hit) (a change in the decorative pattern that develops into a final reach and then becomes a hit state in the final reach).

(Determination of subsequent fluctuation pattern)
The after-variation pattern is determined by using different random counters depending on whether the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot or a miss in the jackpot determination. FIG. 27 is a diagram for explaining the after-variation pattern determination table in the case of a miss. As shown in FIG. 27, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using the random 3 described in FIG. 22. Furthermore, when the jackpot is determined to be a miss in the jackpot determination, the after-variation pattern is determined by using different judgment value numbers according to the number of reserved memories after consumption, and the after-variation number determined is also different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 27(a), when the number of reserved memories after consumption is 0, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. Note that the probability of determining one of the post-change numbers 6 to 8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

When there is only one reserved memory after consumption, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 1, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is two, one of the post-change patterns is determined from post-change numbers 2, 4, and 5-8, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability that one of the post-change numbers 6-8 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of post-change numbers 6-8) is approximately 1/102.

When the number of reserved memories after consumption is three, one of the following change patterns is determined from the following change numbers 3, 4, and 5 to 8, and a different judgment value number is set for each following change pattern. The probability that one of the following change numbers 6 to 8 that develops into an SP reach or final reach is determined (selection rate of following change numbers 6 to 8) is approximately 1/102.

In this way, the subsequent variation pattern is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, and further, the subsequent variation number is determined using a different judgment value number depending on the number of reserved memories after consumption, so the type of variation pattern changes depending on the number of remaining reserved memories, which adds variety to the game and increases the interest of the game.

Figure 28 is a diagram for explaining the post-fluctuation pattern determination table at the time of a jackpot. As shown in Figure 28, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using Random 4 described in Figure 22. Furthermore, when a jackpot is determined in the jackpot determination, the post-fluctuation pattern is determined using different determination value numbers depending on the type of jackpot.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 28(a), when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1, 2, or 5 to 8 is determined, a post-change pattern is determined from post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each post-change pattern. The probability of determining one of post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If either the guaranteed jackpot 3 or 9 is determined, one of the post-change patterns is determined from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value number is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being determined to be one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12 that develop into the SP reach or final reach (selection rate of the post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

If the probability of winning jackpot 4 is reached, one of the post-change patterns is selected from the post-change numbers 9 to 12, and a different judgment value is set for each of the post-change patterns. The probability of being selected as one of the post-change numbers 10 to 12, which develop into an SP reach or final reach (selection rate of post-change numbers 10 to 12) is approximately 1/1.1.

In this way, the subsequent fluctuation pattern is determined using different judgment values depending on the type of jackpot, so the type of fluctuation pattern changes depending on the type of jackpot, which adds variety to the game and makes it more interesting.

Also, as shown in FIG. 27, the probability of being determined to be one of the variable numbers 6 to 8 after developing into the SP Reach or Final Reach is approximately 1/102 when there is a miss, but is higher at approximately 1/1.1 when there is a jackpot, so if there is a development into the SP Reach or Final Reach, the player can be made to expect a jackpot to occur.

(Determination of previous fluctuation pattern)
29 is a diagram for explaining the previous fluctuation pattern determination table. The previous fluctuation pattern is determined by using the number of random 5 determination values that differ according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first. Furthermore, the previous fluctuation number that is determined also differs according to the type of the previous fluctuation pattern that is determined first.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29(a), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29(b), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 2 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29(c), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 3 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29(d), when the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 4 is determined, the post-fluctuation pattern of post-fluctuation number 1 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 29(e), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 5 or 9 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4 or 7 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29(f), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 6 or 10 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 4, 7, or 10 is determined. As shown in FIG. 29(g), if the post-change pattern of post-change number 7 is determined, the post-change pattern of post-change number 5, 8, or 11 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 29(h), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 11 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 5, 8, or 11. As shown in FIG. 29(i), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 8 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12. As shown in FIG. 29(j), when the post-change pattern of post-change number 12 is determined, the post-change pattern is determined to be one of post-change numbers 6, 9, or 12.

(All fluctuation patterns)
Fig. 30 is a diagram for explaining an example of the total fluctuation pattern on the main side. When the rear fluctuation pattern and the front fluctuation pattern are determined as described in Fig. 27 to Fig. 29, the fluctuation pattern becomes one of the main fluctuation patterns 1 to 26 as shown in Fig. 30.

Figure 31 is a diagram for explaining an example of all fluctuation patterns on the sub side. Furthermore, on the sub side, fluctuation patterns of sub fluctuation numbers 1 to 26 are also defined so as to correspond to each of the fluctuation patterns of main fluctuation numbers 1 to 26.

[Each preview performance]
FIG. 32 is a diagram for explaining the lottery table in each advance notice performance. In this embodiment, an advance notice performance may be executed that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol will become a predetermined jackpot symbol. The advance notice performance is a performance that suggests or predicts the occurrence of a jackpot, and is also a performance that makes the player expect a jackpot. The advance notice performance includes a group advance notice performance (also called a group advance notice or a group performance) and a SP first half title advance notice performance (also called a SP first half title advance notice).

The group preview performance is a performance that displays an image of multiple objects progressing in a group. The multiple objects include any object that progresses, such as characters such as people, fish, and animals, or machines such as airplanes and cars. There may be one type of object such as a character, or multiple types. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of group preview performances are provided. Specifically, a six-person group preview in which six characters dressed as maids progress in a group, a Bakuchu group preview in which a mouse character with a bomb body named Bakuchu progresses in a group, and a Boingo group preview in which a character named Boingo progresses in a group can be executed.

In this embodiment, when a post-change pattern of post-change numbers 6-8 and 10-12 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined, whether or not the group preview performance will be performed is determined by a group preview lottery, and the type of group preview performance to be performed is determined.

Figure 32(a) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage A. In this embodiment, even if a variable display is performed based on the same fluctuation pattern, multiple types of stages are provided that have different presentation styles (background images, BGM, sound effects, characters that appear, etc.). As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage A is a stage where presentation is performed by a character called Yume Yume, who is one of six characters dressed as maids.

As shown in FIG. 32(a), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8 corresponding to a miss is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 15%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 13%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12 corresponding to a win is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 85%, of which the six-person group preview is determined with a probability of 55%, and the Boingo group preview is determined with a probability of 30%.

Considering that the probability of a miss is about 319/320 and the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of subsequent fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 being determined is about 1/102, the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 6 to 8 being determined when a miss is about 1/102. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 15%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a miss is about 0.15%. On the other hand, considering that the probability of a jackpot is about 1/320 and the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of subsequent fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 being determined is about 1/1.1, the probability of the subsequent fluctuation pattern of fluctuation numbers 10 to 12 being determined when a hit is about 1/320. In this case, the probability of the group forecast being executed is about 85%, so the probability of the group forecast being executed when a hit is about 0.27%. From this, the probability of a jackpot when the group forecast is executed (reliability, expectation) is about 64%. The reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 64%, and if it exceeds 50%, it can be executed to give the player hope that a jackpot will occur.

Figure 32(b) shows a lottery table for executing a group preview lottery on stage B. As will be described in more detail later, in this embodiment, stage B is a stage where a performance is performed by a character called Bakuchu.

As shown in FIG. 32(b), if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 10%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 8%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 2%. Also, if the after-variation pattern of after-variation numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, is determined, the group preview performance is executed with a probability of 90%, of which the group preview is determined to be the Bakuchu group preview with a probability of 60%, and the Boingo group preview with a probability of 30%.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when a miss occurs is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 10%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a miss occurs is approximately 0.10%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when a hit occurs is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the group forecast is executed is approximately 90%, so the probability that the group forecast is executed when a hit occurs is approximately 0.28%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot occurring when the group forecast is executed is approximately 74%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the group forecast is not limited to 74%, and as long as it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when it is executed.

The SP First Half Title Preview is an effect that suggests that a jackpot will occur if the game develops into an SP Reach, based on the display mode of the text image showing the title of the first half of the SP Reach. In this embodiment, the display of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed on both Stage A and Stage B, but the preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title is executed only on Stage B. Note that a preview effect that changes the display mode of the text image of the SP First Half Title may also be executed on Stage A.

In this embodiment, when a post-change pattern of post-change numbers 6 to 12 that develop into an SP reach or final reach is determined, the SP first half title preview lottery determines whether or not it will be executed, and the type of SP first half title preview to be executed.

As shown in FIG. 32(c), if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 6 to 8, which correspond to a miss, is determined, there is a 20% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made, and if the after-change pattern of after-change numbers 10 to 12, which correspond to a win, there is an 80% probability that the SP first half title announcement will be made.

As mentioned above, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 6 to 8 is determined when the player loses is approximately 1/102. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 20%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player loses is approximately 0.20%. On the other hand, the probability that the subsequent variation pattern of the variation numbers 10 to 12 is determined when the player wins is approximately 1/320. In this case, the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 80%, so the probability that the SP first half title announcement is executed when the player wins is approximately 0.25%. From this, the probability (reliability, expectation) of a jackpot when the SP first half title announcement is executed is approximately 56%. Note that the reliability (expectation) of the SP first half title announcement is not limited to 56%, and if it exceeds 50%, the player can expect a jackpot to occur when it is executed.

Thus, the reliability (expected jackpot) of the group preview is 64% (in the case of stage A) or 74% (in the case of stage B), while the reliability (expected jackpot) of the SP first half title preview is 56%, making the group preview more reliable than the SP first half title preview. For this reason, when the group preview is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the SP first half title preview is executed, and players tend to expect the group preview to be executed more than the SP first half title preview.

In addition, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with only a 2% probability when it is a miss, but with a 30% probability when it is a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Six-person Group Forecast in Stage A is executed with a 13% probability when it is a miss, but with a 55% probability when it is a hit, so even if the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Six-person Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Six-person Group Forecast.

Similarly, the Boingo Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with only a 2% probability on a miss, but with a 30% probability on a hit, so when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is highly likely to be a big hit. On the other hand, the Bakuchu Group Forecast in Stage B is executed with an 8% probability on a miss, but with a 60% probability on a hit, so even if the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, it is more likely to be a miss than the Boingo Group Forecast. For this reason, when the Boingo Group Forecast is executed, it is more advantageous for the player than when the Bakuchu Group Forecast is executed, and players tend to expect the Boingo Group Forecast to be executed more than the Bakuchu Group Forecast.

Furthermore, the six-person group announcement in stage A is executed with a probability of 13% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 55% when it is a hit. On the other hand, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed with a probability of 8% when it is a miss, but with a probability of 60% when it is a hit. For this reason, the explosive chocolate group announcement in stage B is executed more frequently when it is a big hit than the six-person group announcement in stage A. As a result, when the explosive chocolate group announcement is executed in stage B, it is more advantageous for the player than when the six-person group announcement is executed in stage A, and players tend to expect the six-person group announcement to be executed more than the six-person group announcement.

The reliability of the group preview in stage A and the reliability of the group preview in stage B may be designed to be the same. In this case, it is sufficient that both the group preview in stage A and the group preview in stage B are more reliable than the SP first half title preview, and the Boingo group preview is more reliable than the 6-person group preview and the Bakuchu group preview.

[motion]
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, the main operations on the main board 11 will be described.

(Special pattern processing)
33 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control main process. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started up, and the game control main process is executed by the CPU 103.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 33, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, the CPU 103 performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, the CPU 103 judges whether the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, if the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, a clear signal in the ON state is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such a clear signal in the ON state is input, it is sufficient to judge in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is sufficient to check or inspect the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors, and to judge whether the recovery condition can be satisfied.

When the restoration condition is met (Y in step S3), the CPU 103 executes a restoration process (step S4) and then executes a setting confirmation process (step S5). The restoration process in step S4 causes the CPU 103 to set a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (N in step S3), the CPU 103 executes an initialization process (step S6) and then executes a setting change process (step S7). The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by the operation of the ball hitting operation handle 30, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc., are stopped, and control may be performed such that a missing symbol or the like is frozen and a display corresponding to a game stop state other than a missing symbol is performed. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, the CPU 103 determines whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when the power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the CPU 103 stores (updates and stores) the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 in the backup area of the RAM 102, and turns off the display monitor 29. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, it may perform control to notify the user that the setting is being checked or changed. For example, it may display a specific image on the image display device 5, output a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, or cause a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 to emit light in a specific manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, and it is possible to control it to the setting confirmation state. When the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or if the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch 92 is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch 92 is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but it is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). The CPU 103 then sets the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (for example, every 2 ms) (step S9), and permits the interrupt (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process.

(Game control timer interrupt processing)
Fig. 34 is a flow chart showing an example of a game control timer interrupt process. When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flow chart of Fig. 34. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in Fig. 34 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined main side error process to perform an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After this, the CPU 103 executes a predetermined information output process to output data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots that have occurred), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the special state has been entered) to be supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, the CPU 103 executes a game random number update process to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, management of the execution and reservation of the special symbol game, control of the big win game state and small win game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display unit 26, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting up the normal symbol memory display unit 25.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

(Special pattern processing)
Fig. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol process. The special symbol process is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in Fig. 34. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 34.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "big win" or a "small win", and if it is a "big win", the type of big win is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a big win pattern, a small win pattern, or a miss pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the fluctuation pattern to one of multiple types using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when the fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as whether or not there is a reach), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (such as the type of reach presentation), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process of making settings to change the special pattern in the special pattern 1 variable display section 21 and the special pattern 2 variable display section 22, and a process of measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special symbol stop process of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". This special symbol stop process includes a process for stopping the variation of the special symbol in the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 and the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22, and setting the special symbol to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "0". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability of winning is controlled and the end of the number of times is reached, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for setting the jackpot opening port to open by starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state based on the display result being "jackpot". When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5" and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

The set values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player. The game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the game characteristics are such that the probability of a jackpot in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability of ... On the other hand, the game may be of a type in which the rate at which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch during a jackpot game varies depending on the variable special chart (so-called V-type), and when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a jackpot is 1/320 and the probability of a small jackpot is 1/50, and the game may be of a type in which the game ball passes through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 during a high base (during time-saving control) (so-called one-type two-type mixed type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 1 to 3, the game is the same, but a setting may be provided in which the probability of a jackpot or small jackpot is higher than when the set value is any of 1 to 3, but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is smaller (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any of 4 to 6). When the game is changed depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the setting value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a presentation switch (a switch for executing a predetermined presentation each time the game ball passes through a predetermined area), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the predetermined switch may be used as a game switch (a switch for controlling the game state to a special bonus state or a jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through the predetermined switch).

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Start winning judgment process)
FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the start winning judgment process. The CPU 103 executes the start winning judgment process in S101 of the special symbol process shown in FIG. 35. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A is on or not based on a detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A (step S51). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is on (Y in step S51), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S52). The CPU 103 may specify the first special symbol reserved memory number by reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown, for example. When the number of reserved first special charts is not the upper limit in step S52 (N in step S52), the storage value of a start port buffer provided in a game control buffer setting section (not shown), for example, is set to "1" (step S53).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S51 (N in step S51) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step S52 (Y in step S52), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step S54). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (Y in step S54), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step S55). The CPU 103 may specify the second special symbol reserved memory number by, for example, reading the second reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit not shown. If the number of reserved second special charts is not the upper limit in step S55 (N in step S55), the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set to "2" (step S56).

After executing either step S53 or step S56, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step S57). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. Also, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory count is also updated to add 1 (step S58). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory counter provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown), may be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step S58, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM 1 for determining a jackpot, the random number value RANDOM 2 for determining the type of jackpot, and the random number values RANDOM 3 and RANDOM 4 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown) (step S59). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit (not shown), while when the start port buffer value is "2", numerical data indicating the random number values RANDOM 1 to RANDOM 4 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit (not shown).

The numerical data indicating the random number value RANDOM1 for determining a jackpot and the random number value RANDOM2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the result of the variable display of the special and decorative patterns is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the result of the variable display is a "jackpot". The random number values RANDOM3 and RANDOM4 for determining the variable pattern are used to determine the variable pattern including the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns. By executing the process of step S59, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special and decorative patterns.

Following the processing of step S59, the start port winning designation command is set to be sent according to the start port buffer value (step S60). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is made to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, by executing the command control processing of S27 shown in FIG. 34 after the special pattern process processing is completed.

Following the processing of step S60, the CPU 103 stores a random number value in a storage area corresponding to the reserved memory (step S61). After that, the CPU 103 clears the start port buffer and initializes the stored value to "0" (step S62), and then ends the start winning determination processing. This ensures that even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start winning of a game ball, the processing based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

(Special pattern normal processing)
FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal special symbol processing. As shown in FIG. 37, in the normal special symbol processing, the CPU 103 judges whether there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the first special symbol) or the second reserved memory buffer (a memory buffer for storing reserved memory information of the second special symbol) (step S1001). If there is no reserved memory data in either the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (N in step S1001), it judges whether a predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (step S1002). If the predetermined period has not passed since the fluctuation stop (N in step S1002), the normal special symbol processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the predetermined period has passed since the fluctuation stop (Y in step S1002), a process for transmitting a customer waiting demo designation command is performed (step S1003), and the normal special symbol processing is terminated. Here, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted is set. Then, when the special symbol normal processing is executed after the next timer interruption after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is set, so that the customer waiting demo designation command is not transmitted again. Such a customer waiting demo designation command transmission completion flag is reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

When there is reserved memory data in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer (Y in step S1001), the CPU 103 determines whether the first data among the data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (step S1004). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is not data indicating "second" (i.e., data indicating "first") (N in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special pattern pointer (a flag indicating whether the special pattern process is being performed on the first special pattern or the second special pattern) (step S1005). If the first data set in the reserved specific area is data indicating "second" (Y in step S1004), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "second" to the special pattern pointer (step S1006).

In this embodiment, depending on whether data indicating "first" or "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern and the display of the second special pattern are performed using a common processing routine. When data indicating "first" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the first special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the first reserved memory buffer. On the other hand, when data indicating "second" is set in the special pattern pointer, the display of the second special pattern is performed based on the reserved memory data stored in the second reserved memory buffer.

By the control of steps S1004 to S1006, if there is at least one second reserved memory data in the second reserved memory buffer, the display of the second special symbol changes based on the data in the second reserved memory is executed in priority over the display of the first special symbol changes based on the data in the first reserved memory.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 (step S1007). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number=1 in the first reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer, and stores it in the reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S1008). Specifically, when the special pattern pointer indicates "first," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the first reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the first reserved memory buffer. When the special pattern pointer indicates "second," the CPU 103 subtracts one from the count value of the second reserved memory number counter, and shifts the contents of each storage area in the second reserved memory buffer.

In other words, when the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved memory number = n-1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "2nd", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved memory buffer of the RAM 102 in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved memory number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which the random numbers stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) are extracted always matches the order of the first pending memory number (or second pending memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4.

Next, the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a reserved memory number designation command indicated by the special pattern pointer to the performance control CPU 120 based on the value of the reserved memory number counter indicated by the special pattern pointer after subtraction (step S1009). In this case, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "first", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a first reserved memory number designation command. Also, if the special pattern pointer is set to a value indicating "second", the CPU 103 controls the transmission of a second reserved memory number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 sends a background designation command (step S1010), reads Random R (random number for determining a jackpot) from the reserved memory buffer, and executes the jackpot determination module (step S1011). In this case, the CPU 103 reads the random number for determining a jackpot extracted in the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and performs a jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that executes a process that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see FIG. 22) with the random number for determining a jackpot, and determines that a jackpot has occurred if they match. In other words, it is a program that executes the process of determining a jackpot.

In the process of determining a jackpot, when the game state is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the probability of a jackpot is higher than when the game state is in a non-probability variable state (normal game state and time-saving state). Specifically, a probability variable jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the lower column of FIG. 23(a) are set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance, and a normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numbers in the upper column of FIG. 23(a) are set) in which a smaller number of jackpot determination values are set than in the probability variable jackpot determination table are provided. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the game state is in a probability variable state, and when the game state is in a probability variable state, it performs the process of determining a jackpot using the probability variable jackpot determination table, and when the game state is in a normal state or time-saving state, it performs the process of determining a jackpot using the normal time jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the random number for determining a jackpot (RANDOM 1) matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIG. 23(a), the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot. If it determines that a jackpot has occurred (Y in step S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012. Note that determining whether or not to determine whether or not to determine a jackpot means determining whether or not to transition to a jackpot game state, but also means determining whether or not to determine whether or not the stopped symbol in the special symbol is a jackpot symbol.

Whether the current game state is in a high probability state is confirmed by checking whether the high probability state flag is set. The high probability state flag is set when the game state transitions to a high probability state, and is reset when the high probability state ends. Specifically, the high probability state flag is set in the process of ending a jackpot game, and is then reset at the timing when the variable display of the special pattern ends and the stopped pattern is displayed stationary when either the variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 150 times) or the next jackpot has been determined, whichever occurs first, is met.

If the value of the random number (Random 1) for determining a jackpot does not match any of the jackpot determination values (N in step S1011), proceed to step S1015 described below.

If the value of the random number (RANDOM 1) for determining a jackpot in step S1011 matches any of the jackpot determination values, the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step S1012). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends. Then, as a table to be used to determine the jackpot type as one of the multiple types, the first special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23(b) and the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23(c) are selected. Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 selects the first special symbol jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 23(b). Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 selects the second special symbol jackpot type determination table in FIG. 23(c). Then, the CPU 103 reads out the random number for determining the type of jackpot extracted during the start winning determination process and stored in advance in the first reserved memory buffer or the second reserved memory buffer, and uses the selected jackpot type determination table to determine the type of jackpot and the jackpot pattern that correspond to the value that matches the value of the random number for determining the type of jackpot (Random 2) stored in the reserved memory buffer (step S1013).

The CPU 103 also sets jackpot type data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step S1014).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the special symbol to be stopped (step S1015). Specifically, if the jackpot flag is not set, the special symbol is set to a "-" symbol, which is a losing symbol. If the jackpot flag is set, the special symbol is set to the jackpot symbol determined in step S1014 according to the determination result of the jackpot type.

Then, the CPU 103 sends a display result designation command (step S1016) and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the variable pattern setting process (step S111) (step S1017).

(Variation pattern setting process)
FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. As shown in FIG. 38, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, the CPU 103 determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on Random 3 and Random 4 according to the number of reserved memories and the presence or absence of a jackpot (step S1101). Specifically, in the case of a miss, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 27 according to the number of reserved memories, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 3. In addition, in the case of a jackpot, the CPU 103 selects the subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 28 according to the type of jackpot, and determines the subsequent fluctuation pattern based on the selected subsequent fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of Random 4.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on RANDOM 5 (step S1102). Specifically, the CPU 103 selects a previous fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 29 according to the previous fluctuation pattern determined in S1102, and determines the previous fluctuation pattern based on the selected previous fluctuation pattern determination table and the value of RANDOM 5.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a change pattern command corresponding to the determined change pattern (front change pattern and rear change pattern) to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1103).

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the change time corresponding to the selected change pattern in the change time timer formed in the RAM 102 (step S1104). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to send a pattern change designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1105), and updates the value of the special pattern process flag to a value corresponding to the special pattern change process (step S112) (step S1106).

(Special pattern variation processing)
Fig. 39 is a flow chart showing an example of special symbol variation processing. As shown in Fig. 39, in the special symbol variation processing, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variation time timer (step S1201), and when the variation time timer times out (Y in step S1202), updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step S1203). When the variation time timer does not time out (N in step S1202), the processing ends as it is.

(Special symbol stop processing)
FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. As shown in FIG. 40, in the special symbol stop processing, the CPU 103 sets an end flag to end the variable display of the special symbol, and performs control to derive and display the stop symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 or the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 (step S1301). If data indicating "first" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the first special symbol on the special symbol 1 variable display unit 21 is ended, and if data indicating "second" is set in the special symbol pointer, the variation of the second special symbol on the special symbol 2 variable display unit 22 is ended. In addition, a symbol determination designation command is set in the performance control CPU 120 (step S1302). As a result, the symbol determination designation command is transmitted to the performance control CPU 120. Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the big win flag is set (step S1303). If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1303), the process proceeds to step S1309.

If the jackpot flag is set (Y in step S1303), the CPU 103 resets the probability bonus flag and the time-saving flag (step S1304). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a jackpot start command and a right-hit display lighting command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1305).

Also, by referring to the opening pattern data stored in ROM 101, data indicating the opening mode of the normal large prize winning port and the V large prize winning port, such as the number of times to open (for example, 5 times or 10 times), the opening time (for example, 29 seconds), and the interval time between rounds (for example, 0.5 seconds), are set in a predetermined memory area (step S1306). For example, in the case of a normal jackpot of 3R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in all of 1 to 3R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In the case of a jackpot of 5R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 3R and 5R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 4R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. In addition, in the case of a jackpot of 10R, the opening mode in which the normal large prize winning port is opened in 1 to 8R and 10R, and the V large prize winning port is opened in 9R is stored in a predetermined memory area provided in RAM 102. The data on the number of times it was opened (5 times or 10 times) is set in an opening counter to count the number of times it was opened.

The large prize opening control timer is also set to a value equivalent to the fanfare time, which is the jackpot display time (the time during which the occurrence of a jackpot is notified, for example, on the image display device 5) (step S1307). Thereafter, in the jackpot opening pre-processing, the large prize opening control timer is decremented by 1, and when it reaches 0, the large prize opening is opened and the round begins. The value of the special symbol process flag is then updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step S1308), and the process ends.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the jackpot flag is not set (N in step S1304), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a time-saving flag indicating that the game is in a time-saving state is set (step S1309). If the time-saving flag is not set (N in step S1309), the CPU 103 proceeds to the processing of step S1316. If the time-saving flag is set (Y in step S1309), the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the counter value of the time-saving count counter indicating the remaining number of fluctuations in the time-saving state (step S1310). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (step S1311). If the value of the time-saving count counter has become 0 (Y in step S1311), the CPU 103 determines that the duration of the time-saving state has ended and resets the time-saving flag (step S1312). As a result, when a fluctuation display that results in a miss display is performed a specific number of times (150 times) in the time-saving state, the game state transitions from the time-saving state to the non-time-saving state. In step S1311, if the time-saving counter value is not 0 (N in step S1311), the process proceeds to step S1316.

After step S1312, it is determined whether or not a high probability flag indicating a high probability state is set (step S1313). If the high probability flag is set (Y in step S1313), the high probability flag is reset (step S1314). Next, in response to the game state transitioning from the time-saving state to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 transmits a normal state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1315) and proceeds to step S1316. If the high probability flag is not set in step S1313 (N in step S1313), the process of step S1314 is not performed and the process proceeds to step S1315. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step S1316), and the process ends.

(Pre-opening process for big win)
41 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening pre-processing. As shown in FIG. 41, in the big win opening pre-processing, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the big win opening control timer by 1 (subtract update) (step S1401). Then, it is determined whether the value of the big win opening control timer is 0 (step S1402), and if the value of the big win opening control timer is not 0 (N in step S1402), the process is terminated.

If the value of the large prize opening control timer is 0 (Y in step S1402), a command to specify that the large prize opening is open is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1403). Then, the solenoid 82 is driven according to the opening pattern to open the regular large prize opening (step S1404). As a result, the regular large prize opening is opened in the first round.

Next, the CPU 103 sets the large prize opening control timer to a large prize opening opening time (e.g., 29 seconds) corresponding to the maximum time that the large prize opening can be opened (large prize opening opening time) based on the opening pattern data (e.g., data stored in RAM 102 by step S1306) (step S1405). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the large prize opening process (step S115) (step S1406), and ends the process.

(Processing during jackpot opening)
42 is a flow chart showing an example of the big win opening process. As shown in FIG. 42, in the big win opening process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the big win opening control timer (step S1501).

Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (step S1502). If the value of the large prize opening control timer has reached 0 (Y in step S1502), the process proceeds to step S1511. If the value of the large prize opening control timer has not reached 0 (N in step S1502), the process determines whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open (step S1503). Whether the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is currently open can be determined from the value of the opening count counter.

If it is determined in step S1503 that the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is not open (N in step S1503), the process ends.

If the regular large prize opening or the V large prize opening is open (Y in step S1503), it is determined whether the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (step S1504). If neither the count switch 23 nor the V prize switch 24 is on (N in step S1504), the process ends. On the other hand, if either the count switch 23 or the V prize switch 24 is on (Y in step S1504), the prize number counter is incremented by +1 (updated) (step S1505).

Next, it is determined whether or not the high probability determination flag is set (step S1506). The high probability determination flag is a flag that is set when it is determined that the machine will be controlled to the high probability state when a V win occurs. If the high probability determination flag is set (Y in step S1506), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the high probability determination flag is not set (N in step S1506), it is determined whether or not the V winning switch 24 is on (step S1507). If the V winning switch 24 is not on (N in step S1507), the process proceeds to step S1510. On the other hand, if the V winning switch is on (Y in step S1507), the high probability determination flag is set (step S1508), a high probability determination device pass command is sent (step S1509), and the process proceeds to step S1510.

Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the winning number counter has reached a predetermined number (for example, 10) (step S1510). If the value of the winning number counter has not reached the predetermined number (N in step S1510), the process ends.

When the value of the winning number counter is a predetermined number (Y in step S1510), the CPU 103 performs either control to drive the solenoid 82 to close the normal large prize opening, or control to drive the solenoid 83 to close the V large prize opening (step S1511). Next, the CPU 103 performs a process to clear (set to 0) the value of the winning number counter (step S1512). Next, the CPU 103 updates (step S1513) the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the post-large prize opening process (step S116), and ends the process.

(Post-opening processing)
43 is a flow chart showing an example of a big win release post-processing. As shown in FIG 43, in the big win release post-processing, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the opening number counter is 0 or not (step S1601).

If the value of the opening count counter is 0 (Y in step S1601), a jackpot end command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1602), a value corresponding to the jackpot end time (the time at which the jackpot game is notified, for example, on the image display device 5 that the jackpot game has ended) is set in the jackpot entry port control timer (step S1603), the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S117) (step S1604), and the process ends.

In step S1601, if the value of the opening count counter is not 0 (N in step S1601), a command to specify when the large prize opening is to be opened is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1605), and the large prize opening control timer is set to a value equivalent to the interval time from the end of a round to the start of the next round (step S1606).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not it is before the round in which the V large prize opening is opened (also called the V opening round), i.e., whether or not the next round is a V opening round (step S1607). If it is not before the V opening round (N in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 82 to open the normal large prize opening (step S1608). On the other hand, if it is before the V opening round (Y in step S1607), control is performed to drive the solenoid 83 to open the V large prize opening (step S1609).

After step S1608 or step S1609, the CPU 103 sends a command to the performance control CPU 120 to specify whether the jackpot opening is in progress (step S1610). The CPU 103 then updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot opening process (step S115) (step S1611), and ends the process.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 44 is a flow chart showing an example of the jackpot end process. As shown in FIG. 44, in the jackpot end process, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot control timer in which the jackpot end time is set (step S1701). Then, the CPU 103 judges whether the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (whether the jackpot end time has elapsed) (step S1702). If the value of the jackpot control timer is not 0 (N in step S1702), the process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot control timer is 0 (Y in step S1702), the jackpot flag is reset (step S1703).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the high probability flag, which is set by passing through the V winning area, is set (step S1704). If the high probability flag is not set (N in step S1704), the process proceeds to step S1705. If the high probability flag is set in step S1704 (Y in step S1704), the high probability flag indicating that the game is in a high probability state is set (step S1707). Next, a high probability state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1708), the high probability flag is reset (step S1709), and the process proceeds to step S1710.

In step S1710, a time-saving flag is set to indicate that the time-saving state is active (step S1710), and the time-saving count counter is set to 150 (step S1711). Then, the process proceeds to step S1712.

On the other hand, if the probability of a bonus has not been set in step S1704 (N in step S1704), then in step S1705, a time-saving flag is set indicating that the game is in a time-saving state (step S1705), the time-saving counter is set to 100 (step S1706), and the process proceeds to step S1712.

In step S1712, a time-saving state designation command is sent to the performance control CPU 120 (step S1712). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step S1713), and ends the process. Note that the performance control CPU 120 is able to recognize whether the game is in a special, time-saving, or normal state based on the special state designation command sent from the CPU 103.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described.

(Performance control main processing)
When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control main process. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 45 is started, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (N in step S73), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to emit an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (Y in step S73), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L, 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the process returns to step S73. Before returning to step S73, other processes may be executed.

(Performance control process)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the performance control process. The performance control process is a process executed in step S76 of FIG. 45. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 46, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, a judgment, decision, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice performance is performed based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, a process for displaying the reserved display is executed based on the reserved memory number specified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S177 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag value is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning waiting process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning waiting process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is received, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning waiting process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "4". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "5". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Variable display start setting process)
Fig. 47 is a flow chart showing an example of variable display start setting processing. As shown in Fig. 47, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the result of the variable display is determined to be a miss (step S7101). If it is determined to be a miss, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a command corresponding to a non-reach variable pattern has been received as a variable pattern command (step S7103).

When the performance control CPU 120 determines that it has received a command corresponding to a non-reach fluctuation pattern, it uses the data table for determining a losing symbol to determine the display result of a losing symbol that does not result in a reach as the final stop of the performance symbol (step S7105), and proceeds to step S7106.

If the process of step S7103 determines that the pattern is not a non-reach fluctuation pattern (if the pattern is determined to be a reach fluctuation pattern), the stopping patterns of the performance patterns that make up the reach pattern combination are determined (step S7104), and the process proceeds to step S7106.

Also, if the processing in step S7101 does not determine a miss (if a jackpot is determined), the CPU 101 for controlling the presentation determines the stopping patterns of the presentation patterns that make up the combination of jackpot patterns according to the type of jackpot (step S7102), and proceeds to step S7106.

Next, a performance setting process (step S7106) is executed to set various performances in the variable display (for example, group preview setting process), and then the process proceeds to step S7107.

In step S7107, the performance control pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of performance control patterns. In step S7107, depending on the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command and the various performance control (performance operation) patterns specified by the performance control pattern of the performance determined in the processing of step S7106, one of the multiple pattern variation control patterns stored in the pattern variation control pattern table that corresponds to the various specified performance operation patterns is selected and determined as the pattern to be used.

The control pattern table stored in ROM 121 stores multiple types of pattern change control patterns that indicate the control contents of various performance operations, such as the display operation of the changing performance pattern in the display area of the image display device 5 during the period from when the change in the performance pattern begins to when the final performance pattern, which is the final stopping pattern, is stopped and displayed, the display operation in a reach performance, the display operation due to a pseudo consecutive performance, and the display operation in a preview performance.

In addition, each pattern change control pattern includes control data for controlling various performance operations according to the display change of the performance pattern, such as a performance control process timer setting value, a performance control process timer judgment value, performance display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and an end code, and the contents of various performance controls and the timing of switching the performance controls are set in chronological order.

Next, a process table corresponding to the effect control pattern is selected (step S7108). Then, the process timer (effect setting process timer) in the process data of the selected process table is started (step S7109).

After executing the processing of step S7109, control of the performance devices (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, and speakers 8L, 8R as performance components) is started (step S7110) according to the contents of the process data (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound number data). For example, a command is output to cause the image display device 5 to display an image (including a performance pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern according to the display control execution data. Also, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 to control the turning on/off of light-emitting elements such as various LEDs. Also, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 to output audio from the speakers 8L, 8R.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step S7111), the value of the performance control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172) (step S7112), and the variable display start setting processing ends.

(Group advance notice setting process)
48 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice setting process. The group advance notice setting process is a process included in the variable display start setting process (step S171).

As shown in FIG. 48, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (step S7061). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 when it loses, and whether or not it has received a variation pattern command including a subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 when it wins. Note that the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 6 to 8 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 8 to 15, and the variation pattern including the subsequent variation pattern of subsequent variation numbers 10 to 12 is the variation pattern of main variation numbers 18 to 26.

If the CPU 120 for controlling the performance does not receive a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (N in step S7061), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the CPU 120 for controlling the performance receives a fluctuation pattern command capable of executing a group preview (Y in step S7061), it converts the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command into the number of frames (step S7062). For example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22, the previous fluctuation time is 41,500 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,246, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 91,900 msec, so the number of frames is about 3,000. Also, for example, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26, the previous fluctuation time is 62,000 msec, so the number of frames is about 1,861, and the subsequent fluctuation time is 142,800 msec, so the number of frames is about 4,288.

The performance control CPU 120 executes a group preview lottery (step S7063). Specifically, the performance control CPU 120 uses the group preview lottery table shown in Figures 32 (a) and (b) to determine whether or not to execute a group preview based on the post-variation number, and the type of group preview to execute.

The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the group preview lottery has been won. If the performance control CPU 120 has not won the group preview lottery (N in step S7064), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has won the group preview lottery (Y in step S7064), it extracts a performance control pattern for executing the group preview according to the stage (step S7065) and ends the process.

For example, as shown in Example 1, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 985th frame of the 1246 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 22 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1385th frame of the 3000 frames in the later fluctuation.

For example, as shown in Example 2, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage A, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 1600th frame of the 1861 frames in the previous fluctuation. Also, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 26 and stage B, the performance control pattern is set to execute the group preview from the 2000th frame of the 4288 frames in the later fluctuation.

In this way, in this embodiment, in the case of stage A, the group announcement is executed in the pre-change, whereas in the case of stage B, the group announcement is executed in the post-change.

(Group notice execution processing)
49 is a flowchart showing an example of the group advance notice execution process. The group advance notice execution process is a process included in the variable display performance process (step S172).

As shown in FIG. 49, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the number of frames corresponding to the performance control pattern set in the variable display start setting process (step S7201). For example, when a performance control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern of main variation number 26 is set, the performance control CPU 120 subtracts one frame from the total number of frames, which is frame 6149.

If the performance control CPU 120 has not set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (N in step S7202), it ends the process. On the other hand, if the performance control CPU 120 has set a performance control pattern for executing the group preview (Y in step S7202), it determines whether or not the frame for the execution timing of the group preview has been reached (S7203). For example, in the case of the variation pattern of main variation number 26 and stage A, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not the 1600th frame has been reached.

If the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has not yet been reached (N in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 ends the process. On the other hand, if the frame for the execution timing of the group announcement has been reached (Y in step S7203), the performance control CPU 120 controls various performance devices to execute the group announcement (step S7204). For example, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamp 9 to light, blink, or turn off based on the group announcement lighting table shown in Figures 64 to 70 described below, and controls the speakers 8R and 8L to output sound. After that, the performance control CPU 120 ends the process.

[Outline of game progress]
In the pachinko game machine 1 configured as described above, the game proceeds as follows. In the pachinko game machine 1, the player first hits the ball from the left to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left side of the game area. When the launched game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started. When the first special symbol game results in the display mode of the special symbol 1 variable display section 21 showing the big win symbol, a big win occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the first special symbol game are normal jackpots 1 and 2, and probability jackpots 1 to 4. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed, and a right-hit promotion effect is executed to encourage the player to make a right hit. The right-hit promotion effect is executed by displaying text (for example, "right hit") and a graphic image (for example, an arrow pointing to the right, which is the direction of the second flow path) on the screen of the image display device 5 to encourage a right hit, and also by lighting up the right-hit display unit 9030 of the special symbol LED board 9020 and the right-hit display unit 9055 of the fourth symbol unit 9050 with lighting means such as LEDs to encourage a right hit. This causes the player to make a right hit from that point on.

During a round in the jackpot game state, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (for example, three times for a 3R regular jackpot, and ten times for a 10R special jackpot). The jackpot opening is continued until a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds) has elapsed, or until the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot reaches a predetermined number (for example, 10), whichever comes first.

When the ending performance following the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to a time-saving state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times). Furthermore, if a V win occurs during the jackpot round, the game state is controlled to a high probability state for a predetermined number of times (e.g., 100 times) of fluctuations while being controlled to the time-saving state.

Even in the special probability state or time-saving state after the jackpot round, the right-hit promotion effect continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. Therefore, after the first jackpot (also called the first hit) occurs, the player is always prompted to hit right by the right-hit promotion effect, even in the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends.

In the time-saving state, control is performed to shorten the average special chart change time (period during which the special chart changes) compared to the normal state, and control is performed to shorten the average regular chart change time (period during which the regular chart changes) compared to the normal state, and further control is performed to increase the probability of a "regular chart hit" in the regular chart game compared to the normal state. Also, in the time-saving state, electric chute support control may be performed to increase the frequency at which the variable winning ball device 6B that forms the second start winning port is opened, thereby increasing the frequency at which the game ball enters the second start winning port, making it easier to win in the second start winning port (high entry, high frequency).

In the time-saving state after the jackpot round, the released game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, starting the second special game. If the result of the second special game is that the special game 2 variable display section 9022 shows a jackpot pattern, a jackpot (also called a consecutive win) occurs.

As mentioned above, the types of jackpots in the second special game include guaranteed jackpots 5 to 9. When a jackpot occurs, a fanfare effect is executed. The right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 continues from the first jackpot.

During a round in which a jackpot game is in progress, the jackpot opening is opened a predetermined number of times (e.g., 10 times). Each opening of the jackpot opening continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds) has elapsed or the number of game balls that have entered the jackpot opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 10), whichever comes first.

Then, when the ending presentation after the jackpot game state ends, the game state is controlled to the time-saving state and the probability variable state (high probability, high base state) for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 times) in the same way as the first hit. Even in the probability variable state after the jackpot round in a consecutive hit, the right-hit promotion presentation continues to be executed by the image display device 5, the right-hit display unit 9030, and the right-hit display unit 9055. For this reason, after the first hit occurs, consecutive hits occur in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends, and the player is always encouraged to hit right by the right-hit promotion presentation, even in the probability variable state or the time-saving state after the jackpot round ends in the consecutive hit.

When the probability variable state or time-saving state ends without a jackpot occurring in either the probability variable state or time-saving state after the first jackpot round ends, or the probability variable state or time-saving state after the consecutive jackpot round ends, the game state is controlled to the normal state (low probability low base state), and the right-hit promotion effect by the image display device 5, right-hit display unit 9030, and right-hit display unit 9055 also ends. As a result, the player will again use the left hit to launch the game ball toward the first flow path that passes through the left area of the game area.

[Swarm preview production design]
Next, the design of the group preview performance during the development stage of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Group advance notice work process)
Fig. 50 is a flow chart showing an example of a group advance notice work process. As shown in Fig. 50, the group advance notice work process includes, in the order of work, a summary creation process (step S901), an animation creation process (step S902), a main video production process (step S903), an authoring process (step S904), a sound creation process (step S905), a lottery incorporation process (step S906), a video incorporation process (step S907), a sound incorporation process (step S908), a lamp data creation process (step S909), and a lamp incorporation process (step S910).

In the outline creation process of step S901, an outline is created for newly designing a group preview for the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the animation production process in step S902, storyboards for the animation used in the group previews are created, characters and backgrounds to be used in the animation are designed, a video storyboard is created that serves as a script for creating the animation, CG is produced for the animation, and the actual animation is produced.

In the main video production process of step S903, the video data used in the group preview is created using the animation created in the animation production process. The video data used in the group preview is created in this main video production process, but the playback time of the created video data is created longer than the execution time of the group preview actually executed in the pachinko game machine 1. As a result, even if the execution time of the group preview is lengthened due to a design change, the video data created in this video production process can be used as is without being changed. In addition, in this video production process, the playback timing is also designed for each video data so that the video data is played at a timing predetermined for each performance. For example, in the variation pattern of main variation number 22, the group preview of stage A is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 985th frame, and the group preview of stage B is incorporated into the main video so that the group preview is executed from the 1385th frame. Additionally, in the variation pattern of main variation number 26, the swarm preview animation for stage A is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 1600th frame, and the swarm preview animation for stage B is incorporated into the main video so that it is executed from the 2000th frame.

In the authoring process of step S904, the video data created in this video production process is used to create software (program) for video playback to be executed on the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the sound creation process of step S905, various sound data such as background music (BGM) and sound effects used in the group preview are created to match the video of the group preview.

In the lottery incorporation process of step S906, data is created for various lotteries related to the group notice, such as the group notice lottery. In addition, in this lottery incorporation process, the expectation (reliability) of the group notice, etc. is designed. The created lottery data is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as lottery software executed in the pachinko game 1.

In the video embedding process of step S907, the video playback software created in the authoring process is embedded in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as video playback software executed in the group preview.

In the sound incorporation process of step S908, the sound data created in the sound creation process is incorporated into the pachinko gaming machine 1 as software for sound playback executed by the group preview.

In the lamp data creation process of step S908, various lighting data such as lighting, blinking, and extinguishing for lighting means (light-emitting means) such as lamps and LEDs used in group warnings is created.

In the lamp installation process of step S910, the data for various lamps, LEDs, etc., such as turning on, blinking, and turning off, created in the lamp data creation process, is incorporated into the pachinko game machine 1 as software for lamp playback executed in the pachinko game 1.

Through the work in each of these processes, data such as lottery, video, and sound related to the group preview performance is created and incorporated as software to be executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

(This video was produced by)
The actual video production process for the group preview will be specifically described with reference to Figures 51 to 54. Figures 51 to 54 are diagrams for explaining an example of the actual video production process.

As shown in FIG. 51, first, in STEP 1, character images to be used in the group preview are prepared. For example, a main character named Yume Yume is used in the group preview, and four images g1 to g4 are prepared to show Yume Yume's running style. Note that such character images are created in the animation production process.

Next, in STEP 2, a video creation tool is used to create a video of a character stamping its feet using four character images g1 to g4. For example, when the video creation tool is started, a timeline screen 710 is displayed. In the timeline screen 710, one or more layers are arranged on the vertical axis, and the horizontal axis is the time axis. The layers are arranged in numerical order from the top, such as layer 1, 2, 3, etc., and the higher an image is placed (i.e., the lower the number), the closer it is to the back on the screen of the image display device 5. The number of layers and the width of the time axis can be set to the user's desired value.

In STEP 2, each character image g1 to g4 is arranged in a column of a specific layer. For example, in the example shown in (a), character images g1 to g4 are arranged on the timeline corresponding to layer 1, constituting video data A1 to A4. Video data A1 to A4 results in a stepping video pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4.

By repeatedly placing the set of stepping video data A1 to A4 created as described above on a timeline, a video of the character stepping is repeated. For example, in the example shown in (b), the video data A1 to A4 are repeated for three periods. This stepping video data is then output. In this manner, stepping videos are created for other characters in a similar manner.

As shown in FIG. 52, in STEP 3, a video in which a character progresses is created. First, the screen size of the image display device 5 is set to a predetermined size. For example, in the example shown in (a), the width of the X axis along the horizontal direction on the screen is set to 800, and the widths of the X and Y axes along the vertical direction on the screen are set to 640. Note that the value corresponding to the center position on both the X and Y axes is 0. Therefore, the screen size is -400≦X≦400, -320≦Y≦320.

Using the setting screen 730 of the video creation tool, it is possible to set the width of movement of the video data. For example, in the example shown in (b), one period of the stepping video data A1 to A4 of the pattern consisting of character images g1 to g4 is set to 500, and it is set to move linearly on the X axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As shown in FIG. 53, in STEP 4, a video is created in which multiple characters progress. For example, in the example shown in (a), video data is created using a similar creation procedure in which a character called Jam-chan, used in the group preview, moves in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500.

As described above, when video data is created for multiple characters moving in a straight line on the X-axis in the range of -1000≦X≦500, the video data for each character is placed on a different layer, as shown in (b). Also, by shifting the time axis between characters, the timing of their appearance can be shifted. Furthermore, by shifting the Y-axis positions between characters, the positions on the Y-axis at which characters appear can be shifted. The Z-axis is the axis between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen, and by inputting a value, the performance of the group preview (the Boingo group preview in this embodiment) can be designed so that the characters move between the front side (near side) and back side (depth side) of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 54, in STEP 5, the group preview video is finally created. For example, as shown in (a), the group preview video is completed by arranging video data for six types of characters, characters A to F, on the timeline of the layer.

Also, by changing the length of the video data on the timeline, the speed at which the characters move can be changed while maintaining the animation itself, which is a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4. For example, the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is the same as the video data of character C placed on layer 9, in which a repeat of three periods of a pattern of character images g1-g4, but the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 10 is shorter than the length on the timeline of the video data of character C placed on layer 9. As a result, character C placed on layer 10 progresses on the screen at a faster speed than character C placed on layer 9, while maintaining the same animation as character C placed on layer 9.

In the six-person group preview, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed in the coordinates arranged on the screen. For example, in the example shown in Figure 54(a), video data for multiple characters is not placed on the timeline at the same timing and for the same length.

Furthermore, as shown in (b), by placing video data of dust clouds on layer 1, which is the layer furthest from the back, it is possible to combine video of multiple characters progressing with the dust cloud video.

In this way, video data for a group preview in which multiple characters progress can be created. Note that, in the actual creation of the video data for the group preview, it is assumed that the game board 2 covers the edge of a screen of a predetermined size (for example, 19 inches), and the video data for the group preview is created with a mask covering the area of the screen where the game board 2 covers. Furthermore, so that it can be applied to sizes larger than the predetermined screen size (for example, 19 inches) (for example, 20 inches), the video data for the group preview is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size.

(Group advance notice work process)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing the overall image of the six-person group announcement. As shown in FIG. 55, in the six-person group announcement included in the group announcement performance, an image of six characters such as maid A to maid F progressing in a group is displayed. The group announcement performance is not limited to six characters, and multiple characters of each character appear, making it the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed in the pachinko game machine 1. Since maids A to F are all wearing the same or almost the same maid clothes, it is difficult to distinguish the types of characters except by recognizing them by their faces. In this embodiment, the patterns of the aprons worn by each character are different for each character, but it is difficult to recognize the difference at first glance. Note that maid A is Yume Yume-chan, the main character, and maid B is Jam-chan, the character with the next highest priority after Yume Yume-chan, the main character.

In the six-person group preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, or part of the character image (for example, the face or legs) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it. For example, of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are six maids A (Yume Yume-chan), but five of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the six maids A who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids B (Jam-chan), but four of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids B who appear, one has a face that does not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, there are five maids C who appear, but three of them have their faces visible. In other words, of the five maids C who appear, two have their faces that do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids D appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids D who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids E appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids E who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5. Of the characters appearing in the six-person group preview, five maids F appear, but the faces of three of them are visible. In other words, of the five maids F who appear, the faces of two do not fit within the display area of the image display device 5.

In this way, the multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed to fit within the display area of the screen, with only a portion of the entire body (e.g., the face) not fitting within the display area of the screen, and other portions of the entire body (e.g., parts other than the face) fitting within the display area of the screen.

The multiple characters displayed in the group preview performance include characters with low importance in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maids C to F, and characters with higher importance than Maids C to F in the content of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan), and Maid A and Maid B are less likely to have their faces displayed within the display area of the screen and the rest of their body displayed within the display area of the screen than Maids C to F. In other words, the six-person group preview is designed so that Maid A and Maid B are more likely to appear with their faces visible than Maids C to F.

(Auxiliary display)
FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining the auxiliary display used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 56, in the group preview performance, an auxiliary display is performed to emphasize that the character is moving forward. In this embodiment, an image of dust cloud is displayed as the auxiliary display. If the image of dust cloud is displayed near the character, or more effectively, so as to follow behind the moving character, the player can be made to think that dust cloud is generated by the character's movement, and thus the manner in which the character runs through can be emphasized. As shown in FIG. 54(b) above, the image of dust cloud as the auxiliary display is arranged on layer 1 located at the rearmost side. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 56, the image of dust cloud is arranged to be located behind any of the characters that appear.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 56, the layer on which maid E's image is placed is in front of the layer on which maid C's image is placed, so maid E's image is displayed in front of maid C's image. On the other hand, the auxiliary display image corresponding to maid E is positioned behind both maid E's image and maid C's image.

In this way, when the display of maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid E takes priority over the display of the other maid C, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E and the display of maid C overlap, the display of that maid C takes priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to that maid E.

(Motion Blur Processing)
FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining the motion blur processing used in the group preview performance. As shown in FIG. 57, in the group preview performance, the motion blur processing is applied to the advancing character. The motion blur processing is a processing for displaying an object (for example, a character) as an afterimage, and the motion blur processing is applied to the display of the advancing character, so that the afterimage of the character is displayed behind the advancing character. This makes it possible to create a dynamic group preview performance. In addition, when an image obtained by the motion blur processing for one character overlaps with an image obtained by the motion blur processing for another character, the image obtained by the motion blur processing for the one character becomes transparent so as not to impede the visibility of the other character.

(Contours of overlapping characters)
Fig. 58 is a diagram for explaining the outline of characters when they overlap in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 58, in the group preview performance, one character may overtake another character. In that case, when the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character.

For example, in the example shown in (a), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid F, is shown overtaking maid F, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid F, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid F.

Furthermore, in the example shown in (b), maid B, who is positioned in front of maid A, is shown overtaking maid A, but in this case, the outline of maid B is thicker than the outline of maid A, and maid B is displayed more emphasized than maid A. Also, maid A, who is positioned in front of maid D, is shown overtaking maid D, but in this case, the outline of maid A is thicker than the outline of maid D, and maid A is displayed more emphasized than maid D.

When a character overtakes another character, the outline of the character is not limited to being thicker, but the character may be displayed more emphasized than the other characters by increasing the size of the character, making the character brighter than the other characters, or making the contrast of the character clearer than the other characters.

(Display on the screen of the image display device)
Fig. 59 is a view of the gap between the game board 2 and the image display device 5 during the execution of the group advance notice performance. As shown in Figs. 56 to 58 above, the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, so when the pachinko game machine 1 is viewed from the front, the part of the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 that is covered by the game board 2 cannot be seen. However, as shown in Fig. 59, when looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 located on the back side of the game board 2 can be seen.

Here, in Figure 59, the six-person group preview shows a change from a first situation as shown in (a) in which the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed, to a second situation as shown in (b) in which Maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her is displayed more than in the first situation, and Maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in her entirety, but only part of her (in this example, part of her face) is displayed. Also, the first character displayed (Maid A) and the second character displayed (Maid B) have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction of the screen.

Such a change from the first situation to the second situation occurs whether the image display device 5 is viewed with the game board 2 covering the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 or when the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5. That is, FIG. 59 shows the case where the image display device 5 is viewed while looking between the game board 2 and the image display device 5, but as shown in FIG. 19(b), even when the game board 2 covers the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, in the six-person group preview, the first situation in which the main character Maid A (Yume-Yume-chan) is not yet displayed in its entirety but part of the maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed changes to the second situation in which the first maid A displayed in its entirety is not yet displayed but part of the maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) displayed in its entirety is not yet displayed but part of the maid B (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

(Full image of the Bakuchugun trailer)
60 is a diagram showing an overall image of the Bakuchu group preview. As shown in Fig. 60, in the Bakuchu group preview included in the group preview performance, an image of Bakuchu characters progressing in a group is displayed.

In the Bakuchu Group Preview, the character image may fit within the display area of the image display device 5, but in other cases, part of the character image (for example, ears or feet) may not fit within the display area of the image display device 5 and may extend beyond it.

In this way, in the Bakuchu Group Preview, the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is created by arranging on the screen an animated image of one type of character moving in a progressing manner. Note that the video data for the Bakuchu Group Preview is created in the same manner as the video data for the 6-person Group Preview, based on the work process shown in Figures 50 to 54.

(Volume change and brightness data table for group preview performance)
Fig. 61 is a diagram for explaining the change in volume and the brightness data table in the group preview performance. As shown in Fig. 61, the group preview performance (6-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo group preview) is divided into a first display period (1000 msec), a second display period (1310 msec), and a third display period (830 msec).

The first display period is the period from when the display of the characters first starts in the group preview performance to when the display of the characters first ends. More specifically, the first display period is the period from when any character first appears in the group preview performance to when any character first disappears. For example, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and the first character continues to progress at the top, the first display period is the period until the first character disappears. Alternatively, if a character appears first in the group preview performance and is overtaken by another character, the first display period is the period until the other character disappears from the edge of the screen. Note that in this embodiment, the display of the second character displayed in the first display period ends before the display of the first character ends. That is, in the first display period, the first character appears, the first character is overtaken by the second character, and the second character disappears from the edge of the screen first.

The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which the state in which the display of new characters begins and ends continues. More specifically, the second display period is the period from when any character first disappears in the group preview performance, during which new characters continue to appear one after another, until the last character appears. Note that the second display period is a period longer than both the first display period and the third display period. Also, the number of characters appearing in the second display period is greater than in both the first display period and the third display period.

The third display period is a period during which the display of characters ends without the start of the display of new characters. More specifically, the third display period is the period from when the last character appears in the group preview performance until all characters disappear. Note that the last character to disappear is not limited to the last character to appear, but may be the character overtaken by the last character to appear. Note that the third display period is a period longer than the first display period.

Regarding changes in the volume during the group preview performance, speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance at a timing related to the start of the first display period, increase the volume of the performance sound to a specific volume during the first display period, maintain the volume of the performance sound at the specific volume during the second display period, and decrease the volume of the performance sound during the third display period.

For example, as shown in FIG. 60, for the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, the volume is minimum (e.g., mute or minimum volume) at the beginning of the first display period, then gradually increases in stages until it reaches a specified value, and thereafter is maintained at the specified value (e.g., set volume or maximum volume). The volume remains at the specified value in the second display period as well. Then, in the third display period, the volume is maintained at the specified value, and then gradually decreases in stages until it reaches the minimum.

The gradual increase in volume from the minimum to the specified value during the first display period is referred to as a volume fade-in. The gradual decrease in volume from the specified value to the minimum during the third display period is referred to as a volume fade-out. In this embodiment, the fade-in time from when the sound effect is output during the first display period until the volume of the sound effect increases from the minimum to the specified value is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the sound effect starts to decrease during the third display period until the volume of the sound effect reaches the minimum.

The brightness data table is composed of a plurality of brightness data for lighting each of a plurality of lighting means. The plurality of lighting means include game effect lamps such as the frame lamp 9 (frame left lamp 9L, frame right lamp 9R), role lamp 9A, board left lamp 9B, board top lamp 9C, attacca lamp 9E, V attacca lamp 9F, V lamp 9G, electric chute lamp 9H, stick controller lamp 9J, and trigger button lamp 9K. The brightness data table includes a first brightness data table corresponding to the first display period, a second brightness data table corresponding to the second display period, and a third brightness data table corresponding to the third display period. In other words, during the first display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the first brightness data table, during the second display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the second brightness data table, and during the third display period, the predetermined game effect lamp 9 lights up, blinks, or goes out based on the brightness data contained in the third brightness data table.

(Timing of the six-person group announcement in Stage A)
62 is a diagram for explaining the timing of occurrence of the six-person group announcement in stage A. As described above, in stage A, the six-person group announcement is executed from the 1600th frame during the previous variation.

For example, as shown in FIG. 62, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of fluctuation number 9, which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the six-person group announcement is executed (1600th frame) belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (1600th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which hits in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total change time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the six-person group announcement starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23 that hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group announcement is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group announcement starts in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately 2430th frame) of the total change time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the six-person group forecast starts from the 53280 msec (1600th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26 that hits in the final reach, the timing (1600th frame) when the six-person group forecast is executed belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, in the predetermined period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the six-person group forecast starts in the first half of the predetermined period (1600th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the six-person group announcement is made (1600th frame) is in the first half of the total change time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total change time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-fluctuation time is set to be longer, so in the specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the six-person group preview is not configured to start in the first half of the specified period (1600th frame). However, even in the case of a variable number 10 to 15 fluctuation pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, in the specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the six-person group preview may be configured to start in the first half of the specified period.

Figure 63 is a diagram to explain the timing of the occurrence of the Bakuchu Group Premonition in Stage B. As mentioned above, in Stage B, the Bakuchu Group Premonition is executed from the 2000th frame during the post-change.

For example, as shown in FIG. 63, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 37400 msec (1123 frames), and the Bakuchu group announcement starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation number 9 which is a miss in the first half of the SP reach, the timing (2000th frame) when the Bakuchu group announcement is executed belongs to the latter half of the total fluctuation time (2984 frames). In other words, in the case of a miss in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (2984 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a miss display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group announcement starts in the latter half of the specified period (2000th frame).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 93300 msec (2801 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 20, which is a hit in the first half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the first half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4662 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames), close to halfway (2331st frame) of the total fluctuation time (4662 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 99900 msec (3000 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 23, which hits in the latter half of the SP reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the latter half of the SP reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (4861 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 2430th frame) of the total fluctuation time (4861 frames) (the latter half).

In the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the latter half of the final reach, the fluctuation time of the previous fluctuation is 62000 msec (1861 frames), the fluctuation time of the later fluctuation is 142800 msec (4288 frames), and the Bakuchu group notice starts from the 66600 msec (2000th frame) of the previous fluctuation. Therefore, in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the variable number 26, which hits in the final reach, the timing when the Bakuchu group notice is executed (2000th frame) belongs to the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames). In other words, in the case of a hit in the final reach, when it is suggested that it is a display result, during the specified period (6149 frames) from the start of the variable display to the indication that the variable display is a hit display result, the first display period of the Bakuchu group notice starts in the first half of the specified period (2000th frame). Furthermore, the timing when the Bakuchu Group Announcement is executed (2000th frame) is in the first half of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames), close to halfway (approximately the 3074th frame) of the total fluctuation time (6149 frames) (the latter half).

In this embodiment, in the case of a variable number 10-15 variable pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the post-variation time is set to be longer, so the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview is not configured to start in the first half (2000th frame) of the specified period from when the variable display starts until when it is suggested that the variable display is a miss. However, even in the case of a variable number 10-15 variable pattern that results in a miss in the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach, the first display period of the Bakuchu group preview may be configured to start in the specified period from when the variable display starts until when it is suggested that the variable display is a miss.

[Brightness data]
With reference to Figs. 64 to 88, the brightness data referred to by the performance control CPU 120 when controlling various lighting means in the pachinko game machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described. These brightness data tables are stored in the ROM 121. For example, the performance control CPU 120 moves the lighting (light-emitting) location of the game effect lamp in accordance with the display in the group notice based on the brightness data stored in the brightness data table. In this embodiment, the lighting location literally refers to a location that is lit, and for example, the location where a lit lamp is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where other lamps that are not lit (i.e., lamps that are turned off) are located is not called the lighting location. Note that in another example, the lighting location refers to a location that is lit with high brightness, and for example, the location where a lamp that is lit with high brightness is located among the multiple lamps included in the frame lamp is called the lighting location, and the location where a lamp that is lit with a brightness lower than the brightness of the lamp located at the lighting location is not called the lighting location.

More specifically, the data (also called elements) for turning on or off the lamps is specified by a brightness data table, and if data of 0 (for example, data of "000" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in such a brightness data table, the specific lamp will be turned off. Also, if there is no storage area of the data referenced by a specific lamp in the brightness data table, or if the brightness data table itself does not exist, the specific lamp will be turned off. On the other hand, if there is a brightness data table referenced by a specific lamp, and one or more data (for example, "100", "010", "001" corresponding to RGB) is stored in the storage area of the data referenced by the specific lamp, the specific lamp will be turned on. Note that, for example, when a specific performance such as a big win notice performance is executed during a performance corresponding to a normal background, even if the data of the specific lamp is not specified in the brightness data table referenced in the specific performance, if the data of the specific lamp is specified in the brightness data table referenced in the performance corresponding to the normal background, the specific lamp will be turned on.

(Parent table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 64 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the group notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 64, in the parent table in the group notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the group notice performances is specified for each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E.

For example, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 3140 msec to match the group preview performance.

(Child table in group preview brightness data table)
Fig. 65 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 65, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first display period when the group preview performance is executed (the performance period shown in Figures 97 to 98 and 153 to 155 described below), grandchild tables W1 for the frame lamp, Y1 for the reel lamp 9A, L1 for the left panel lamp 9B, U1 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A1 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used during the first display period correspond to the first brightness data table shown in Figure 61.

During the second display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below) when the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W2 for the frame lamp, Y2 for the reel lamp 9A, L2 for the left panel lamp 9B, U2 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A2 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the second display period correspond to the second brightness data table shown in Figure 61.

During the period when the group preview performance is executed, in the third display period (the period of the performance shown in Figures 101, 102, 158, and 159 described below), grandchild tables W3 for the frame lamp, Y3 for the reel lamp 9A, L3 for the left panel lamp 9B, U3 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A3 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables used in the third display period correspond to the third brightness data table shown in Figure 61.

As shown in FIG. 65, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the group preview performance in the first, second, and third display periods: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

The V lamp 9G is located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, near where the character appears in the group preview performance), but since it is not used in the group preview performance, its grandchild table is not prepared. The V lamp 9G is a lamp that notifies the player that a round of jackpot gameplay in which a V win can occur is in progress, or that a V win has occurred, or that a jackpot has occurred. If it is lit in the group preview performance, the player will mistakenly think that a V win or jackpot has occurred. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the V lamp 9G is not used in the group preview performance. The V lamp 9G may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance, but even in this case, it should not be used in the group preview performance.

The stick controller lamp 9J on the stick controller 31A and the trigger button lamp 9K on the push button 31B are located in a position related to the direction in which the character moves in the group preview performance (for example, directly below where the character moves in the group preview performance), but are not used in the group preview performance, so their grandchild tables are not prepared. The stick controller lamp 9J is lit to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A in the operation performance (the performance shown in FIG. 134 (c91) described later), and the trigger button lamp 9K is a lamp that is lit to encourage the player to press the push button 31B in the PUSH performance (the performance shown in FIG. 95 (a19) described later), so if they were lit in the group preview performance, the player would mistakenly think that he or she could operate the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. In order to avoid such inconvenience, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are not used in the group preview performance. The stick controller lamp 9J and trigger button lamp 9K may be located in other positions, such as near the left panel lamp 9B, as positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance, but even in this case, they should not be used during the group preview performance.

The features of grandchild tables W1 to W3 used as grandchild tables in group preview performances can be summarized as follows. Specifically, W2 has a greater number of high-brightness lit spots than W1. As for the switching interval, W1 controls the lighting at equal intervals of 100 msec, while W2 controls the lighting at irregular intervals of 50 to 80 msec, which is shorter than W1, and W3 controls the lighting at a short interval of 10 msec for the frame left lamp 9L, but a long interval of 80 msec for the frame right lamp 9R.

For the lighting pattern, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that the lighting location moves in accordance with the direction of the group notice and lights up at high brightness, while the brightness data for W2 is specified so that the lighting is done at multiple locations and the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness in accordance with the direction of the group notice. For the first brightness data, the brightness data for W1 is specified so that all lamps are turned off or turned on at low brightness, while the brightness data for W2 and W3 is specified so that specified lighting locations are illuminated at high brightness. On the other hand, for the last brightness data, the brightness data for W3 is specified so that both the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R are turned off or turned on at low brightness.

Regarding the luminance data loop, W1 and W3 do not specify that the same luminance data is used repeatedly, whereas W2 specifies that the same luminance data is used repeatedly. Regarding the 10-minute luminance data for troubleshooting, W1 and W3 are specified, whereas W2 is not.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 66(a), in the grandchild table W1 used in the first display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is defined for malfunction countermeasures. In addition, in W1, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness for each time, and the combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low brightness and data for turning on each lamp at high brightness is composed of second luminance data different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T1-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each other time.

In W1, in the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is specified for "R" for all lamps included in the frame lamp, and a "0" indicating extinguishment is specified for "G" and "B". As a result, as shown in Figures 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the frame lamp are extinguished or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed. In this embodiment, in order to make the effect more effective by lighting each lamp mainly in red, "R" is assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "G" and "B" are assigned a "0" indicating off. However, for example, if each lamp is mainly lit in green, "G" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "B" can be assigned a "0" indicating off. If each lamp is mainly lit in blue, "B" can be assigned a "1" indicating low brightness, and "R" and "G" can be assigned a "0" indicating off.

In addition, in W1, as shown by the dotted arrows, the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves at equal intervals of 100 msec from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 to the frame left lamp from T1-2 to T1-10. Here, the vicinity of the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 corresponds to the location where the characters appear in the group preview, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As for the frame left lamp, the brightness data is specified so that it is initially turned off or turned on at a low brightness, and as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move, it gradually lights up at a high brightness in stages. On the other hand, the brightness data is specified so that the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8, which were initially turned on at high brightness, are turned off or turned on at a low brightness as the location of the lamp that lights up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the characters move. As a result, as shown in Figures 96 to 98 and 153 to 155 described below, in the group preview, the frame lamps will also change position to light up at high brightness from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in accordance with the performance in which the characters appear from the right edge of the screen and progress.

W1 also includes data for turning on one frame lamp at high brightness and turning off other frame lamps adjacent to that one, and the brightness data is specified so that the location of the lit lamps moves in stages. This makes it possible for W1 to move the location of the lamp that is lit at high brightness in accordance with the direction the character is moving.

In addition, in W1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the frame lamps are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when moving to the next second display period.

If this 10-minute data were not provided, when lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the lighting control of the lamps would be performed again from T1-1, and even though the group preview character had already appeared and progressed, the location of the lamps that are lit with high brightness would move again from near the frame right lamps 9R5-9R8 from T1-2 to T1-10, as shown by the dotted arrow, causing the player to feel uncomfortable. However, in this embodiment, since 10 minutes of data is provided at T1-11, even if lighting control was performed using W1 and the transition to W2 did not occur due to some abnormality, the frame lamps can be lit in a light emission mode that matches the grandchild table W2 for 10 minutes, so that a sense of discomfort is not created. And if the abnormality is resolved during these 10 minutes, the player can continue playing without feeling particularly uncomfortable.

In W1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

The brightness data for troubleshooting a 10-minute malfunction specified in W1 is brightness data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state of T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 66(b), in the grandchild table W2 used in the second display period, RGB data is defined for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In addition, in W2, the first luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp included in the frame lamp at low luminance and data for turning on each lamp at high luminance for each time period, and second luminance data is a combination of data for turning off or turning on each lamp at low luminance and data for turning on each lamp at high luminance, which is different from the first luminance data. For example, if the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-2 is the first luminance data, the collection of data for each lamp corresponding to T2-3 can be the second luminance data. Predetermined luminance data is also defined for each of the other times.

In W2, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that one at high brightness. For example, in W2, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness in multiple locations. As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. Furthermore, W2 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W1.

In addition, because W2 does not have brightness data for troubleshooting purposes like W1, lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T2-1 to T2-10. If lighting control is performed using W2 and some abnormality prevents transition to W3, and the lamp lighting control is performed again from T2-1, the frame lamps will simply be repeatedly lit sporadically at high brightness, so the player will not feel uncomfortable.

Also, unlike W2, it is possible to provide all the data referenced at each time over the entire time without repeating the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10, but it takes time to create each piece of data and time to confirm that the created data is correct, which is very inefficient. On the other hand, as in W2 of this embodiment, by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10 to control the lighting, it is only necessary to create one set of data that is repeatedly referenced, and time efficiency can be improved. The reason why one set of data is repeatedly used to control the lighting during the second display period in the group preview performance is that the second display period in the group preview performance is longer than the first display period and the third display period, and the second display period in the group preview performance is a time period in which the screen is filled with multiple characters and the multiple characters progress as a group, so that the lighting mode corresponding to such a performance can be achieved by simply repeating the same lighting.

As shown in FIG. 66(c), in the grandchild table W3 used in the third display period, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a short interval of 10 msec, and RGB data is specified for the frame right lamp over T3-7 to T3-38 at a subsequent long interval of 80 msec.

In addition, in W3, as shown by the dotted arrows, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased from T3-2 to T3-30, so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. In addition, for T3-7 to T3-38, the brightness data is specified at 80 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12, which are located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview, go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 10 msec. As a result, as shown in Figures 101, 102, 158, and 159 described later, the frame lamps also change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko game machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W3, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T3-30. Furthermore, in W3, like W1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

In W3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for feature lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a group advance notice brightness data table. As described above, the reel lamp 9A is composed of a plurality of lamps such as reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 67, the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 are sequentially represented as "RRRR" corresponding to the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a monochromatic (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. Note that a monochromatic LED has fewer filters that block light than a full-color LED, and therefore emits a stronger spectrum. For this reason, the brightness data corresponding to high brightness for a single-color LED is smaller than that for a full-color LED.

As shown in FIG. 67(a), in the grandchild table Y1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In Y1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" indicating low brightness is set for all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A. As a result, as shown in FIG. 96 (a22) and FIG. 153 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for the player to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamps 9A when moving to the next second display period.

In Y1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(b), in the grandchild table Y2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the accessory lamp 9A over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In Y2, the brightness data includes one lamp that is lit at high brightness, and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the role lamps 9A are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that Y2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as Y1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 67(c), in the grandchild table Y3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in Y3, like Y1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the reel lamp 9A lights up at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the reel lamp 9A when moving to the next performance.

In Y3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the left panel lamp 9B is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5, and in the brightness data table shown in FIG. 68, the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 are sequentially represented as "WWWWW" corresponding to them. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In the case of the above-mentioned role lamp 9A, the LED is only red, but even in the case of an LED that is only white, such as the left panel lamp 9B, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 68(a), in the grandchild table L1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In L1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, a "1" is set to indicate low brightness for all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B. As a result, as shown in Figures 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamps 9B light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamps 9B when moving to the next second display period.

In L1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(b), in the grandchild table L2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the left panel lamp 9B over the range T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

L2 includes brightness data that lights one lamp at high brightness and also lights other lamps adjacent to that lamp at high brightness, and the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that light up at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the left lamp 9B on the board lights up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that L2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as L1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 68(c), in the grandchild table L3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T3-1 to T3-6 at 80 msec intervals. After that, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in L3, like L1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the left panel lamp 9B lights up at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the left panel lamp 9B when moving to the next performance.

In L3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the group notice brightness data table. As described above, the on-board lamp 9C is composed of a plurality of lamps such as the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C13, and each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to off, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to on. Of "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness. If off is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in a multi-color LED is greater than the high brightness value used in a single-color LED. Note that, although the above-mentioned role lamp 9A was only a red LED, even in the case of a board lamp 9C that is only a white LED, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 69(a), in the grandchild table U1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In U1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps included in the role lamp 9A are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, all lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

In addition, in U1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the panel lamps 9C light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the panel lamps 9C when moving to the next second display period.

In U1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 69(b), in the grandchild table U2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the on-panel lamp 9C over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In U2, the brightness data is specified so that one lamp is lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the lamps 9C on the board are lit sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that U2 does not have the same luminance data for troubleshooting purposes as U1, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using the luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 69(c), in the grandchild table U3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in U3, similar to U1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the on-board lamp 9C is turned off or lit at a low luminance so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the on-board lamp 9C when moving to the next performance.

In U3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

In addition, in U1, U2, and U3, only the data "0" is specified for the single-colored on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8. In other words, on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 are not used in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in group preview brightness data table)
FIG. 70 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the attacca lamp in the group notice brightness data table. Each of the attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. On the other hand, the V attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data in "0" to "6". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "6" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of the "1" to "6", "1" to "3" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "4" to "6" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If the concept of low brightness includes off, then "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness. In this way, the high brightness value used in multi-color LEDs is greater than the high brightness value used in single-color LEDs. Note that while the above-mentioned feature lamp 9A had only red LEDs, even in the case of a white-only LED such as the V-attacker lamp 9F, the value representing high brightness is set to a maximum of "6".

As shown in FIG. 70(a), in the grandchild table A1 used in the first display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T1-1 to T1-10 at equal intervals of 100 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T1-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

In A1, during the first 100 msec (T1-1) of the first display period, all lamps are set to "1" or "0", indicating low brightness. As a result, as shown in Figures 96 (a22) and 153 (b43) described below, at the beginning of the first display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness. This makes it easier for players to notice that the group preview performance is about to be executed.

Also, in A1, luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T1-11) of the first display period. During these 10 minutes, the luminance data is specified so that the lamps are lit sparsely at high luminance in accordance with the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the lamps when moving to the next second display period.

In A1, the brightness data for the 10 minutes of malfunction countermeasures described above is specified, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T1-1 to T1-10.

As shown in FIG. 70(b), in the grandchild table A2 used in the second display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp over T2-1 to T2-10 at non-equidistant intervals of 50 to 80 msec.

In A2, the brightness data is specified so that one lamp is lit at high brightness and other lamps adjacent to that lamp are also lit at high brightness, and the lamps that are lit at high brightness change sparsely (randomly). As a result, as shown in Figures 99, 100, 156, and 157 described below, during the second display period in the group preview performance, the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance.

Note that in A2, unlike A1, no luminance data is provided for troubleshooting purposes, so lighting control is performed by repeatedly using luminance data from T2-1 to T2-10.

As shown in FIG. 70(c), in the grandchild table A3 used in the third display period, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T3-1 to T3-6 at intervals of 80 msec. Then, brightness data is specified from T3-7 to T3-38 at short intervals of 10 msec.

Furthermore, in A3, like A1, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the last 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T3-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity in the lighting state of the attacca lamp 9E, electric chute lamp 9H, and V attacca lamp 9F when moving to the next performance.

In A3, the brightness data for the 10 minutes described above is specified as a countermeasure against malfunctions, so lighting control is not performed by repeatedly using the brightness data from T3-1 to T3-38.

(Parent table in reach line luminance data table)
71 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the reach line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 71, in the parent table in the reach line brightness data table, the presentation time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The reach line effect differs from the group preview effect in that it is an effect that predicts that the display result of the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols will result in the display result of a jackpot symbol stopping, and is an effect that suggests (or informs) the player that a reach has been reached. In the reach line effect, as shown in Figures 91 to 94 and Figures 141 to 144 described below, a line of light (also called a reach line) appears with a flash of light from the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward (left and right) as if to connect the left and right decorative symbols that make up the reach, and then the reach line disappears.

In the parent table of the reach line brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 1500 msec to match the reach line presentation.

(Child table in reach line data table)
72 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the reach-line brightness data table. As shown in FIG. 72, in the child table in the reach-line brightness data table, the reach-line performance time is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period when the reach line performance is being executed and a flash occurs (the period of the performance shown in Figures 91 (a8), (a9) and Figures 141 (a8), (a9) described below), grandchild tables W11 for the frame lamp, Y11 for the reel lamp 9A, L11 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U11 for the top lamp 9C, and A11 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, grandchild tables W12 are provided for the frame lamp, Y12 for the role lamp 9A, and L12 for the left panel lamp 9B during the period when the reach line occurs (period of performance shown in Figures 92 and 142 described below). Note that during the period when the reach line occurs, the top panel lamp 9C and the attacca lamp 9E are not used, so no grandchild tables are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, during which the reach line expands inward and outward while contracting (the performance period shown in Figures 93 (a13) to 94 (b17) and Figures 143 (a13) to 144 (b17) described below), grandchild tables W13 for the frame lamp, Y13 for the role lamp 9A, L13 for the left lamp 9B of the board, U13 for the upper lamp 9C, and A13 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period when the reach line performance is being executed, and the reach line disappears (the performance period shown in Figures 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described below), grandchild tables W14 are provided for the frame lamp, Y14 for the reel lamp 9A, L14 for the left lamp 9B, U14 for the upper lamp 9C, and A14 for the attacca lamp 9E.

As shown in FIG. 72, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when a flash occurs, the period when the reach line expands and contracts inward and outward, and the period when the reach line disappears: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp. On the other hand, four types of brightness data tables are provided for the brightness data tables referenced in the reach line performance during the period when the reach line occurs: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, and the board left lamp 9B.

In this way, in the reach line performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance or for a smaller number of lamps than in the group preview performance.

(Grandchild table for frame lamps in reach line brightness data table)
73 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data represents brightness in hexadecimal numbers "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), in the grandchild table W11, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses common data symmetrically to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. The reach line effect is an effect that suggests to the player that a reach has been reached, and is not an effect that stimulates the player's sense of expectation by suggesting a jackpot, as in the group notice effect. For this reason, the reach line effect does not perform elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually, as in the group notice effect, but sets common brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controls each lamp together. Furthermore, because the reach line effect has a shorter execution time than the group preview effect, instead of using elaborate lighting control such as setting different brightness data for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and controlling each lamp individually as in the group preview effect, common brightness data is set for the frame right lamp 9R and the frame left lamp 9L and the lamps are controlled together.

In W11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 91(a8) and 141(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 73(b), in the grandchild table W12, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W12, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 92 and 142 (described later), while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(c), in the grandchild table W13, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 93 and 143 described below, while a reach line is occurring, the brightness data is specified so that, of the lamps included in the frame lamps, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right sides of the screen are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 73(d), in the grandchild table W14, only the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the brightness data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the brightness data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the brightness data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the brightness data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12.

In W14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, the frame lamp goes out when the reach line disappears, as shown in FIG. 94 (a18) and FIG. 144 (b18) described later.

(Subtable for accessory lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 74 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 74(a), in the grandchild table Y11, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T11-1 to T11-2 at intervals of 30 msec. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91(a8) and FIG. 141(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 74(b), in the grandchild table Y12, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 142 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in Figure 74 (c), in the grandchild table Y13, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A from T13-1 to T13-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 93 and 143 described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the reel lamp 9A are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 74(d), in the grandchild table Y14, brightness data is specified for the reel lamp 9A for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(a18) and FIG. 144(b18) described later, the reel lamp 9A also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for left lamp in reach line brightness data table)
75 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 75(a), in the grandchild table L11, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over the period T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91(a8) and FIG. 141(b8) described below, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in FIG. 75(b), in the grandchild table L12, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T12-1 to T12-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 92 and FIG. 142 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 75(c), in the grandchild table L13, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 143 described later, the brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the left panel lamp 9B are lit at high brightness while a reach line is occurring.

As shown in FIG. 75(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the board left lamp 9B for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(a18) and FIG. 144(b18) described later, the board left lamp 9B also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for on-board lamps in reach line brightness data table)
FIG. 76 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for on-board lamps in a reach line brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5 and 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-color (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-color (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76(a), in the grandchild table U11, brightness data is defined for the on-board lamp 9C from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91(a8) and FIG. 141(b8) described below, the brightness data is defined so that at the timing when a flash occurs, the lamps included in the on-board lamp 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76(b), in the grandchild table U13, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamps 9C over T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 93 and FIG. 143 described later, the brightness data is specified so that, while a reach line is occurring, the lamps included in the on-board lamps 9C, other than the central on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8, are lit at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 76(d), in the grandchild table L14, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C for 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in FIG. 94(a18) and FIG. 144(b18) described later, the on-board lamp 9C also goes out when the reach line disappears.

(Grandchild table for Attacka lamps in Reach Line Brightness Data Table)
FIG. 77 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the reach line brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric chute lamp 9H is a multi-colored LED (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored LED (in this example, white), and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 77(a), in the grandchild table A11, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T11-1 to T11-2 at 30 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in FIG. 91(a8) and FIG. 141(b8) described later, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F light up at high brightness when a flash occurs.

As shown in Figure 77 (b), in the grandchild table A13, brightness data is specified for each lamp from T13-1 to T13-4 at 60 msec intervals. In particular, as shown in Figures 93 and 143 described below, the brightness data is specified so that the attacca lamp 9E, the electric chute lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F are lit at high brightness while the reach line is occurring.

As shown in Figure 77 (d), in the grandchild table A14, brightness data is specified for each lamp over 100 msec (T14-1), but the value is "0." As a result, as shown in Figures 94 (a18) and 144 (b18) described below, the Attacka lamp 9E, the Electric Tube lamp 9H, and the V Attacka lamp 9F also go out in conjunction with the disappearance of the reach line.

(Parent table of background preview brightness data table)
Fig. 78 is a diagram for explaining an example of a parent table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 78, in the parent table in the background notice brightness data table, the performance time of each of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9, such as the frame lamp (frame right lamp 9R, frame left lamp 9L), the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attack lamp 9E, is specified.

The background preview effect is different from the group preview effect in that it predicts that the display result of the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns will result in a jackpot pattern stopping, and is an effect in which a specific character (for example, Jam-chan) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background).

In the parent table of the background preview brightness data table, each lamp in the game effect lamp 9 is controlled over a period of 5,500 msec to match the background preview performance.

(Child table of background preview brightness data table)
Fig. 79 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the background notice brightness data table. As shown in Fig. 79, in the child table in the background notice brightness data table, the time of the background notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the first 2000 msec of the period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W21 for the frame lamp, Y21 for the reel lamp 9A, L21 for the left lamp 9B, U21 for the upper lamp 9C, and A21 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the period of time during which the background preview performance is being performed, in the middle 100 msec, grandchild tables W22 for the frame lamp, Y22 for the reel lamp 9A, L22 for the left lamp 9B, U22 for the upper lamp 9C, and A22 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

During the final 600,000 msec period during which the background preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W23 for the frame lamp, Y23 for the reel lamp 9A, L23 for the left lamp 9B, U23 for the upper lamp 9C, and A23 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided.

As shown in FIG. 79, six types of brightness data tables are provided for the first 200 msec, the middle 100 msec, and the final 600,000 msec in the brightness data tables referenced in the background preview performance: the frame left lamp 9L, the frame right lamp 9R, the role lamp 9A, the board left lamp 9B, the board top lamp 9C, and the attacca lamp.

In this way, in the background preview performance, a brightness data table is provided for the same number of lamps as in the group preview performance.

(Sub-table for frame lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 80 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a background advance luminance data table. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the data represents luminance in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low luminance lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high luminance lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low luminance, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low luminance.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), in the grandchild table W21, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W21, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 80(b), in the grandchild table W22, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W22, luminance data is specified for each lamp from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 80(c), in the grandchild table W23, only the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L is specified, and the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R is omitted, but the luminance data of the frame right lamp 9R uses data that is symmetrical to the luminance data of the frame left lamp 9L. For example, the luminance data of each of the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12 is common to the luminance data of each of the frame left lamps 9L2 to 9L12. In W23, luminance data is specified for each lamp over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Subtable for feature lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 81 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for a reel lamp in a background notice brightness data table. Each of the reel lamps 9A1 to 9A4 is a single-color (red in this example) LED, and the brightness is expressed as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 81(a), in the grandchild table Y21, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 81(b), in the grandchild table Y22, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 81(c), in the grandchild table Y23, brightness data is specified for the accessory lamp 9A over T23-1 to T23-6, alternating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for left side lamp)
FIG. 82 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the left panel lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the left panel lamps 9B1 to 9B5 is a single-color (white in this example) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F.""0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F,""1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 82(a), in the grandchild table L21, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 82(b), in the grandchild table L22, brightness data is specified for the left panel lamp 9B from T22-1 to T22-2 at 20 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 82(c), in the grandchild table L23, brightness data is specified for the left lamp 9B over T23-1 to T23-6, with 240 msec and 230 msec being repeated.

(Sub-table for on-board lamps in background preview brightness data table)
FIG. 83 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the on-board lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13 is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". Each of the on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8 is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the lamp, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the lamp. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. When turning off the lamp is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 83(a), in the grandchild table U21, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T21-1 to T21-4 at 50 msec intervals.

As shown in FIG. 83(b), in the grandchild table U22, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 83(c), in the grandchild table U23, brightness data is specified for the on-board lamp 9C over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(Background preview brightness data table for Attacka lamp)
FIG. 84 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for the Attacca lamp in the background notice brightness data table. Each of the Attacca lamp 9E and the electric tube lamp 9H is a multi-colored (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". The V Attacca lamp 9F is a single-colored (in this example, white) LED, and the brightness is represented as data from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 84(a), in the grandchild table A21, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T21-1 to T21-2 at intervals of 50 msec.

As shown in FIG. 84(b), in the grandchild table A22, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F from T22-1 to T22-2 at intervals of 20 msec.

As shown in FIG. 84(c), in the grandchild table A23, brightness data is specified for each lamp of the attacca lamp 9E, the electric tube lamp 9H, and the V attacca lamp 9F over T23-1 to T23-6, repeating between 240 msec and 230 msec.

(All lights on brightness data table)
85 is a diagram for explaining an example of a full-lighting luminance data table. As shown in Fig. 85(a) to (h), in the full-lighting luminance data table, high-luminance luminance data (the maximum value "F" in this example) is specified for each game effect lamp 9 such as the frame lamp, the accessory lamp 9A, the left panel lamp 9B, the panel upper lamp 9C, the attack lamp 9E, the V attack lamp 9F, the electric chute lamp 9H, the V lamp 9G, the stick controller lamp 9J, and the trigger button lamp 9K.

(Push effect brightness data table)
86 is a diagram for explaining an example of a luminance data table during a PUSH effect. The PUSH effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 95 (a19) described later.

Figure 86 (a) shows the brightness data table S41 for the stick controller lamp 9J. In S41, brightness data is specified for the stick controller lamp 9J over T41-1 to T41-4 at 20 msec intervals. Note that the lighting color of the stick controller lamp 9J during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the lighting color of the frame lamps and the like during the group preview performance.

Figure 86 (b) shows the brightness data table T41 for the trigger button lamp 9K. In T41, brightness data is specified for the trigger button lamp 9K over T51-1 to T512 at intervals of 150 msec. The color of the trigger button lamp 9K during a PUSH performance is the same color (red in this example) as the color of the frame lamps and the like that are lit during the group preview performance.

(Child Table in Group Preview Luminance Data Table According to Modification)
Fig. 87 is a diagram for explaining an example of a child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example. As shown in Fig. 87, in the child table in the group notice brightness data table according to the modified example, the time of the group notice performance is subdivided for each lamp in the game effect lamp 9, and a grandchild table (also called a brightness data table) to be referred to in each time period is specified.

For example, during the period in which the group preview performance is executed, up to the middle of the first display period (2000 msec), grandchild tables are provided for the frame lamp W101, the role lamp 9A Y101, the left panel lamp 9B L101, the top panel lamp 9C U101, and the attacca lamp 9E A101. These grandchild tables correspond to the first brightness data table in the modified example.

During the period in which the group preview performance is executed, the remainder of the first display period, the second display period, and partway through the third display period (2790 msec), grandchild tables W102 for the frame lamp, Y102 for the reel lamp 9A, L102 for the left panel lamp 9B, U102 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A102 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the second brightness data table in the modified example.

During the remaining period of the third display period (150 msec) during which the group preview performance is executed, grandchild tables W103 for the frame lamp, Y103 for the reel lamp 9A, L103 for the left panel lamp 9B, U103 for the top panel lamp 9C, and A103 for the attacca lamp 9E are provided. These grandchild tables correspond to the third brightness data table in the modified example.

In this way, in the group preview brightness data table relating to the modified example, in the first brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins at a timing related to the start of the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the first display period, in the second brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the first display period and control of the game effect lamp 9 continues during the second display period, control of the game effect lamp 9 ends during the third display period, and in the third brightness data table, control of the game effect lamp 9 begins during the third display period.

(Frame Lamp Grandchild Table in Group Pre-announcement Brightness Data Table According to Modification)
FIG. 88 is a diagram for explaining an example of a grandchild table for frame lamps in a group notice brightness data table according to a modified example. Each lamp included in the frame lamp is an LED of multiple colors (in this example, three colors: red (R), green (G), and blue (B)), and the brightness is expressed as data in hexadecimal numbers from "0" to "F". "0" is data corresponding to turning off the light, and "1" to "F" are data corresponding to turning on the light. Of "1" to "F", "1" to "7" are data corresponding to low brightness lighting, and "8" to "F" are data corresponding to high brightness lighting. If turning off the light is included as a concept of low brightness, "0" is included in the data corresponding to low brightness.

As shown in FIG. 88(a), in the grandchild table W101, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T101-1 to T101-10 at equal intervals of 20 msec, and furthermore, in the final time T101-11, data for 10 minutes (600,000 msec) is specified for troubleshooting purposes.

As shown in FIG. 88(b), in the grandchild table W102, RGB data is specified for each lamp over T102-1 to T102-10 at non-uniform intervals of 50 to 80 msec. In W102, the brightness data is specified so that the lamps that are lit at high brightness vary sparsely (randomly), including brightness data that lights up one frame lamp at high brightness and other frame lamps adjacent to that frame lamp at high brightness. For example, in W102, sparse high brightness data (e.g., "A") is specified so that the lamps are lit at high brightness over multiple locations. As a result, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps are lit at high brightness sparsely in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. In addition, W102 is designed to light more frame lamps at high brightness than W101.

As shown in FIG. 88(c), in the grandchild table W103, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp and frame right lamp over T103-1 to T103-6 at intervals of 14 msec. After that, RGB data is specified for the frame left lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a short interval of 2 msec, and RGB data is specified for the frame right lamp over T103-7 to T103-38 at a subsequent long interval of 14 msec.

In addition, in W103, from T103-2 to T103-30, the number of lamps that are turned off or turned on at low brightness is increased so that the lamps that were lit at high brightness near the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 are gradually turned off or turned on at low brightness in stages. Also, for T103-7 to T103-38, the brightness data is specified at 14 msec intervals for the frame right lamps 9R2 to 9R12, while the brightness data is specified so that the frame left lamps 9L5 to 9L12, which are located in the direction in which the characters move in the group preview, go from high brightness to off or low brightness at short intervals of 2 msec. This causes the frame lamps to change their positions from the right to the left of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to match the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview.

In addition, in W103, brightness data is specified so that all lamps included in the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness during the transition to T103-30. Furthermore, in W103, similar to W101, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified for the final 10 minutes (600,000 ms) (T103-39) of the third display period. During these 10 minutes, the brightness data is specified so that the frame lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness so that there is no sense of incongruity regarding the lighting state of the frame lamps when transitioning to the next performance.

[Presentation Mode of Pachinko Game Machine 1]
Next, the performance of the pachinko game machine 1 during play will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 174. In this embodiment, the performance will be described when one of the main variation patterns 9, 12, 15, 20, 23, and 26, in which pseudo variations are performed twice, is selected. In the figures, the lighting and blinking of each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is indicated by hatching.

(Performance on Stage A)
The performance aspects on stage A will be described with reference to Figures 89 to 111.

As shown in FIG. 89(a1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) flying as a character appearing on stage A is displayed. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 89(a2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed, indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 89(a3).

As shown in FIG. 90(a4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, as shown in FIG. 90(a5), a third variable display is performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 90(a6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 91 (a7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 91 (a8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data tables shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 77. In the state shown in FIG. 91 (a8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit with high brightness. During the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R.

As shown in Figure 91 (a9), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (a ray) that connects the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can suggest to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state.

As shown in FIG. 92 (a11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92 (a12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 92, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 93 (a13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (a14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93 (a15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 93, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit up at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 94 (a16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 94 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 94 (a18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

As shown in FIG. 94 (a18), after the reach line performance ends, if a group of six is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 95 (a19); if a background is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 104 (a101); and if a lamp is announced, the performance will transition to that shown in FIG. 105 (a111).

As mentioned above, the six-person group preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which six characters dressed as maids proceed in a group. The background preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific character (for example, a main character, a rare character, etc.) is displayed with a specific background (for example, a starry sky background). The lamp preview is a presentation that suggests that the display result of the variable display of the special pattern or decorative pattern will be a predetermined jackpot pattern, and is a presentation in which a specific lamp (for example, the role lamp 9A, etc.) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In the lamp preview, one or more of the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash, or a lamp other than the game effect lamp 9 may light up or flash.

In stage A, a group announcement (for example, a six-person group announcement or a Boingo group announcement) is executed after the reach line performance of the previous change. For example, when a six-person group announcement is executed after the reach line performance, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 95 (a19). When the PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for the pressing operation are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a text image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during the PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 86. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flashing. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a20), when the push button 31B is pressed during the PUSH effect, an effect occurs in which the image showing the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the button press. By the output of the PUSH sound, the player can recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L and 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, a group of six) begins. In addition, when the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button press. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 95 (a21), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a22), the six-person group preview begins, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group preview performance is about to begin.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a23), in the first display period, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character. Note that the state shown in FIG. 96 (a23) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), and represents the first situation in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet displayed in its entirety, but only part of maid A (in this example, part of her face) is displayed.

During the execution of the six-person group preview, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 64 to 70. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 96 to 98, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the character appears in the group preview begin to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit up at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction in which the character moves. Note that when a group preview performance (six-person group preview, Bakuchu preview, Boingo preview described below) is executed, the brightness of images other than the images related to the group preview performance (for example, background images and images related to the SP reach first half preview performance) is reduced. The brightness of other images that has been reduced during the group preview performance gradually returns to its original brightness in stages during the third display period. On the other hand, the display of information related to games that are important to the player in terms of winning or losing or the degree of advantage, such as the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, the second reserved memory display area 5U, and the active display area 5A, is given a high priority and is not lowered in brightness even when the group preview performance is executed.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 61, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R separately from the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in FIG. 96 (a24), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 96 (a24) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 59 (b), and represents a second situation in which maid A, who is displayed first, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of maid A is more visible than in the first situation, and maid B (Jam-chan), who is displayed second, is not yet displayed in its entirety, but part of maid B (part of her face in this example) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 97 (a25), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. As shown in FIG. 97 (a26), an animation is displayed in which the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear. As shown in FIG. 97 (a27), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 98 (a28), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 98 (a29), the second character to appear, who is running at the top (leading), begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 98 (a30), the second character to appear, who is running at the top, is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 99 (a31), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 99 and FIG. 100, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. Also, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 99 (a32) to FIG. 100 (a36), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run through the screen from the left side to the right side.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a37), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 101 and FIG. 102, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the left side, where they are turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 101 (a37), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a38), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 101 (a38), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 101 (a39), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in Fig. 102 (a40) and (a41), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Fig. 102 (a42), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends.

Now, referring to FIG. 103, a comparative example of a six-person group preview will be compared with the six-person group preview of this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a201), similar to this embodiment shown in FIG. 96 (a23), the first situation is reached in which the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is not yet entirely displayed, while part of maid A (part of her face in this example) is displayed.

In the present embodiment shown in FIG. 96 (a24), the first maid A is not yet entirely displayed, but part of her is more visible than in the first situation, and the second maid B (Jam-chan) is not yet entirely displayed, but part of her (part of her face in this example) is displayed. In contrast, in the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a202), the second maid B does not appear, but continues to run, and the whole of maid A is displayed. And in the comparative example shown in FIG. 103 (a203), the second maid B finally appears after the first maid A runs past the left side of the center of the screen. In this comparative example, only one character appears, and it does not look like a group preview performance.

In contrast, in this embodiment, as shown in Figures 96 to 102, an animation is displayed in which multiple characters appear and run one after the other without any gaps, so that multiple characters proceed as a group, creating a powerful presentation. Also, the number of characters overtaking other characters is smaller than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character, which prevents the group preview presentation from becoming too complicated. Note that the number of characters overtaking other characters may be greater than the number of other characters that are overtaken by the overtaking character. In this case, a dynamic group preview presentation can be shown to the player.

When a background preview is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 104 (a101). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for which the button can be pressed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 86.

As shown in FIG. 104 (a102), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 104 (a103), a specific character (in this example, Maid B (Jam-chan)) is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 together with a specific background (in this example, a starry sky background) as a background preview effect. Furthermore, during the background preview effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 70. In addition, sound effects are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the background preview effect.

When a lamp notice is executed after the reach line effect, a PUSH effect is executed as shown in FIG. 105 (a111). When the PUSH effect is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit for which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "PUSH!!" Furthermore, during the PUSH effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit up in a manner corresponding to the PUSH effect, based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 86.

As shown in FIG. 105 (a112), when push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image of "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of image display device 5 disappear. In addition, when push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. When push button 31B is pressed, game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all frame lamps light up at high brightness.

After that, as shown in FIG. 105 (a113), a lamp preview is executed, and a specific lamp (such as a role lamp 9A) included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the performance of the lamp preview.

After the third display period of the group notice ends as shown in FIG. 102 (a42), or after the background notice shown in FIG. 104 (a103) or the lamp notice shown in FIG. 105 (a113) ends, the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 106 to FIG. 110. The symbol forwarding effect is an effect that encourages the player to see whether the variably displayed decorative symbol (in this embodiment, the decorative symbol in the central decorative symbol display area 5C) will stop in the decorative symbol that has become a reach state, and whether the decorative symbol that stops is a decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot symbol. During the symbol forwarding effect, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 106 (a43), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in Fig. 106 (a44) to Fig. 107 (a48), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in Fig. 108 (a49) to Fig. 109 (a54), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in Fig. 110 (a55) to (a57), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in Fig. 110 (a57), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding performance is completed, as shown in Fig. 111 (a58) and (a59), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to a performance effect called whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 111 (a59), by gradually increasing the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to whiteout, the performance image for the later change that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

(SP Reach First Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 112 to 120, the presentation pattern in the first half of the SP reach will be explained.

As shown in Fig. 112 (a61) and (a62), after the transition to the post-variation, a character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Fig. 112 (a63), the title of the SP Reach is displayed. In this embodiment, the SP Reach is performed in which a maid character such as Yume-chan catches a Bakuchu, so the title "Catch a Bakuchu!" is displayed. During the first half of the SP Reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, a performance sound is also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Figure 113 (c1), when the first half of the SP reach is performed, an image of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) standing with her legs apart is displayed. After that, as shown in Figure 113 (c2), an image of the opposing character (enemy character), Bakuchu, looking surprised is displayed. After that, as shown in Figures 113 (c3) to 114 (c5), an animation of Maid A chasing a fleeing Bakuchu is displayed.

As shown in Figure 114 (c6), after an animation of Maid A jumping on the Bakuchu is displayed, if there is a miss (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 9), the presentation shown in Figure 115 (c11) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 20), the presentation shown in Figure 117 (c21) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the latter half of the SP reach (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 12, 23) or the final reach (if the fluctuation pattern is main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 120 (c31) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 114(c6) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 115(c11). In the effect shown in FIG. 115(c11), an image of Maid A looking depressed after not being able to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 115(c12), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a performance effect called blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 115(c13), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, as shown in Fig. 116 (c14) and (c15), by gradually increasing the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout, the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 116 (c16), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 114 (c6), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 117 (c21). In the presentation shown in FIG. 117 (c21), an image of Maid A catching a Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 117 (c22), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 117 (c23), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (c24) and (c25), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 118 (c26), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 119 (c27) to (c29), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c31) is performed after the effect shown in FIG. 114 (c6). In the effect shown in FIG. 120 (c31), an image of maid A being depressed because she was unable to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the decorative symbol display area 5C in the center. After that, as shown in FIG. 120 (c32), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to blackout. Up to this point, the effect is the same as when the first half of the SP reach is a miss as shown in FIG. 115 (c11) and (c12). However, when moving to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach, as shown in FIG. 120 (c33), an effect is executed in which the movable body 32 falls, which did not occur when the first half of the SP reach is a miss.

After the effect of the movable body 32 falling is executed, if the game moves to the second half of the SP reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 12 and 23), the effect shown in FIG. 121 (c41) will be displayed, and if the game moves to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation numbers 15 and 26), the effect shown in FIG. 128 (c71) will be displayed. In this way, the fluctuation patterns that result in a jackpot include a fluctuation pattern that initially appears to confirm a miss in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach. This allows the player to think that a miss is confirmed in the first half of the SP reach, and then transitions to the second half of the SP reach or the final reach through rescue, which can increase the excitement of the game.

(SP Reach Second Half Presentation Mode)
With reference to Figures 121 to 127, the presentation style in the latter half of the SP reach will be explained.

When moving to the second half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 120 (c33), the presentation moves to that shown in FIG. 121 (c41). In the presentation shown in FIG. 121 (c41), the character images and background images become completely invisible.

After that, as shown in FIG. 121 (c42), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the image of the latter half of the SP Reach that was switched to on the rear side becomes visible. During the latter half of the SP Reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the latter half of the SP Reach.

As shown in Fig. 121 (c42), when the latter half of the SP reach is performed, an image is displayed of Maid A (Yume Yume-chan) and Maid B (Jam-chan) standing with their arms folded and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Fig. 121 (c43) to Fig. 122 (c45), an animation is displayed in which Maid A and Maid B chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Figure 121 (c46), after an animation of Maid A and Maid B jumping on the explosive chocolate is displayed, if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 12), the presentation shown in Figure 123 (c51) will be displayed, if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 23), the presentation shown in Figure 125 (c61) will be displayed, and if there is a transition to the final reach (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of main fluctuation number 15, 26), the presentation shown in Figure 128 (c71) will be displayed.

If a miss is confirmed in the latter half of the SP Reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122 (c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 125 (c51). In the effect shown in FIG. 125 (c51), an image of Maid A and Maid B looking depressed after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the missing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 123 (c52), the color of the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually turns black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 123 (c53), the image including the character image and the missing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" becomes completely invisible.

After that, as shown in Fig. 124 (c54) and (c55), as the transparency of the entire front screen that has turned black due to the blackout is gradually increased, the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, as shown in Fig. 124 (c56), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed in the latter half of the SP reach, after the presentation shown in FIG. 122 (c46), the presentation will transition to that shown in FIG. 125 (c61). In the presentation shown in FIG. 125 (c61), an image of Maid A and Maid B catching Bakuchu and giving a peace sign is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 125 (c62), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 125 (c63), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (c64) and (c65), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 126 (c66), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Fig. 127 (c67) to (c69), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance in the final reach)
With reference to Figures 128 to 138, the presentation mode in the final reach will be described.

When moving to the final reach, the effect shown in FIG. 122(c46) is followed by the effect shown in FIG. 128(c71). When moving to the final reach, the entire screen suddenly goes black as shown in FIG. 128(c71), and a cross-shaped light effect is displayed in the center of the screen as shown in FIG. 128(c72). After that, as shown in FIG. 128(c73), an effect is executed to notify the start of the final reach, and the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed on the entire screen, along with a text image saying "Let's go!". The light effect display effect as shown in FIG. 128(c72) is purposely inserted between the blackout effect shown in FIG. 128(c71) and the effect in which the face image of the main character is displayed as shown in FIG. 128(c73). This makes it easier for the player to understand that the final reach is about to develop by the effect shown in FIG. 128(c72).

After that, the final reach performance is executed. During the second half of the final reach performance, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the second half of the final reach.

As shown in Fig. 129 (c74), an image of Maid A giving a peace sign is displayed. After that, as shown in Fig. 129 (c75) to Fig. 129 (c78), images of one character are displayed at multiple timings, and as shown in Fig. 129 (c79), an image of the entire sentence is displayed to indicate the theme of the performance that will be executed in the final reach. In this example, it is displayed as "Everyone gather together."

After that, as shown in Figures 131 (c80) to 132 (c85), animations are displayed at multiple timings to introduce the characters that will appear in the final reach performance. For example, in this example, supporting characters appear in order, such as Maid F, Maid E, Maid D, Maid C, Maid B, and Maid A, and high priority characters such as the main character appear near the end (or in the latter half). Note that characters with high priority such as the main character may also appear in order. In other words, it is preferable for high priority characters such as the main character to appear at the beginning (or in the first half) or near the end (or in the second half) so that they stand out more than low priority characters such as supporting characters.

After that, as shown in Figure 133 (c86), when the final reach performance is executed, an image is displayed of the six characters who appeared in the six-person group preview standing with their arms around each other and declaring war on Bakuchu. After that, as shown in Figures 133 (c87) to 134 (c89), an animation is displayed in which the six characters chase after the fleeing Bakuchu.

As shown in Fig. 134 (c90), an animation of six characters chasing each other is displayed, and then, as shown in Fig. 134 (c91), a trigger effect is executed. When the trigger effect is executed, an image showing the stick controller 31A and a meter image showing the time limit for which the stick controller 31A can be operated are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, along with an image of the text "GET BACK!!"

After the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger effect shown in FIG. 134 (c91), if there is a miss (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 15), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 135 (c101), and if there is a jackpot (in the case of the fluctuation pattern of the main fluctuation number 26), the effect will transition to that shown in FIG. 136 (c111).

When a loss is confirmed in the final reach, the stick controller 31A is pulled during the trigger performance shown in FIG. 134 (c91), and then the performance shown in FIG. 135 (c101) is transitioned to. In the performance shown in FIG. 135 (c101), an image of six characters feeling down after failing to catch the Bakuchu is displayed, and the losing symbol "4" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C. After that, as shown in FIG. 135 (c102), the color of the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" gradually becomes black due to a blackout, and finally, as shown in FIG. 135 (c103), the image including the character image and the losing decorative symbols "3", "4", and "3" completely disappears.

After that, although not shown in the diagram, the transparency of the entire front screen, which has turned black due to the blackout, is gradually increased, and the normal background effect image that was switched to on the back side becomes visible. Then, the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the loss is confirmed.

If a jackpot is confirmed at the final reach, the presentation shown in FIG. 134 (c91) is followed by the presentation shown in FIG. 136 (c111). In the presentation shown in FIG. 136 (c111), an image of six characters catching Bakuchu is displayed, and the jackpot symbol "3" stops as a decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C.

After that, a fanfare effect is executed. In the fanfare effect, as shown in FIG. 136 (c112), the decorative pattern of "3", "3", and "3" gradually expands in stages, and as shown in FIG. 136 (c113), the decorative pattern is displayed so that it extends beyond the top of the screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (c114) and (c115), an animation of the decorative pattern moving is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (c116), the variable display of the decorative pattern stops completely, and the variable display of the small pattern 5M also stops completely, and the big win is confirmed.

After that, as shown in Figure 138 (c117) to (c119), the face image of the main character, Maid A (Yume Yume-chan), is displayed large, and an animation of the words "FEVER!" appears.

(Performance on Stage B)
The presentation on stage B will now be described with reference to Figures 139 to 159.

As shown in FIG. 139 (b1), when the variable display starts based on one reserved memory, on the screen of the image display device 5, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the fourth symbol 5J is variably displayed, and further, the small symbol 5M is variably displayed. On the screen, a background image including images of characters and scenery is displayed as the background during the variable display. In this embodiment, an image of Bakuchu is displayed as the character appearing in stage B. During the variable display, the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the variable display, and the performance sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the variable display.

As shown in FIG. 139(b2), when the pseudo consecutive performance is performed and the character "x2" is displayed indicating that the second variable display will be performed, the second variable display will be performed as shown in FIG. 139(b3).

As shown in FIG. 139(b4), a pseudo consecutive performance is performed, and when the letters "x3" are displayed, indicating that a third variable display will be performed, a third variable display is performed, as shown in FIG. 140(b5). After that, as shown in FIG. 140(b6), when a "3" stops in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and also in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, the variable display mode becomes a reach mode.

As shown in FIG. 141(b7), a decorative pattern for the reach line effect is displayed to notify that the variable display mode has become the reach mode. As shown in FIG. 141(b8), the reach line effect starts. At this time, a flash of light appears from the center of the screen of the image display device 5. During the reach line effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 are lit in a mode corresponding to the reach line effect based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 77. Note that the brightness data table shown in FIG. 71 to FIG. 77 is the same as the brightness data table used in the reach line effect of stage A. In the state shown in FIG. 141(b8), all the lamps included in the frame lamp are lit at high brightness. Note that during the reach line effect, a performance sound corresponding to the reach line effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 141 (b9), the decorative design in the center of the screen begins to rotate left and right, and the flashes of light get larger.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b10), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and a reach line appears in the center of the screen. The reach line is a line of light (ray) connecting the left and right decorative patterns that make up the reach state, and is colored a specific color such as blue or red. The display of the reach line can indicate to the player that the state of the variable display has become a reach state, or that it will become a reach state. The reach line that appears in stage B may be the same as the reach line that appears in stage A, or may be different in color, shape, size, etc., for example.

As shown in FIG. 142 (b11), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen continues to rotate left and right, the flash of light gets larger, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to extend left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142 (b12), the decorative symbol in the center of the screen returns to its original position, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 142, during the reach line performance, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 143 (b13), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen gradually expands in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b14), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143 (b15), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen expands further, and the reach line in the center of the screen extends further left and right (outside) of the screen. As shown in FIG. 143, during the reach line, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen are lit up at high brightness.

As shown in Figure 144 (b16), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen now gradually shrinks in stages, and the reach line in the center of the screen begins to shrink left and right (inward) of the screen. As shown in Figure 144 (b17), the decorative pattern in the center of the screen shrinks further, and the reach line in the center of the screen shrinks further left and right (inward) of the screen, stopping in its original position. At this time, the frame left lamps 9L6, 9L7, 9R6, and 9R7 located on the left and right of the screen light up with high brightness. After that, as shown in Figure 144 (b18), the reach line in the center of the screen disappears. At this time, the game effect lamp 9 also goes out.

After the reach line effect ends as shown in FIG. 144 (b18), the symbol forwarding effect is executed as shown in FIG. 145 to FIG. 149. During the symbol forwarding effect, the lamps included in the game effect lamps 9 are lit in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, effect sounds are also output from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the symbol forwarding effect.

As shown in FIG. 145 (b19), when the symbol advance performance starts, the variably displayed decorative symbol located in the central decorative symbol display area 5C is displayed large and begins to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (for example, a slow speed). At this time, the symbol advance performance starts from the same decorative symbol (i.e., the decorative symbol that constitutes a jackpot) as the decorative symbols located in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R that are in a reach state, but the starting position is a position below and away from the decorative symbol that is in a reach state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 145(b20) to FIG. 146(b24), the decorative pattern in the middle continues to be variably displayed at a predetermined first speed (e.g., a slow speed). Then, as shown in FIG. 147(b25) to FIG. 148(b30), the speed of the variably displayed decorative pattern increases as the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed, and finally, as shown in FIG. 149(b31) to (b33), the decorative pattern in the middle is variably displayed at a predetermined second speed (e.g., a speed faster than the first speed). As shown in FIG. 149(b33), when the decorative pattern in the middle has been variably displayed for roughly two revolutions, the pattern advance performance ends.

After the symbol forwarding effect has ended, as shown in Fig. 150 (b34) and (b35), the color of the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state gradually turns white due to whiteout, and eventually the image including the character image and the decorative symbol of "3" that has entered the reach state becomes completely invisible. After that, as shown in Fig. 150 (b36), the transparency of the entire screen on the front side that has turned white due to whiteout is gradually increased, and the effect image for the later change that was switched to on the back side appears on the screen.

As shown in Figures 151 (b37) and (b38), after the transition to post-variation, character animation is displayed until the title image of the SP Reach is displayed. The character in question may be a high-priority character such as the main character, or it may be a character that appears in the SP Reach. As shown in Figure 151 (b39), the title of the SP Reach ("Catch the Bakuchu!") is displayed. During the performance of the first half of the SP Reach, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach based on a predetermined brightness data table. In addition, performance sounds are also output from speakers 8L and 8R in a manner corresponding to the first half of the SP Reach.

In stage B, a group notice (for example, Bakuchu notice or Boingo group notice) is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach of the later change is being performed. For example, when the Bakuchu group notice is executed during the period when the title display of the first half of the SP reach is being performed, a PUSH performance is executed as shown in FIG. 152 (b40). When the PUSH performance is executed, an image showing the push button 31B and a meter image showing the time limit during which the push operation can be performed are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a character image of "PUSH!!" is displayed. Furthermore, during the PUSH performance, each lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 is lit in a manner corresponding to the PUSH performance based on the brightness data table shown in FIG. 86. For example, during the PUSH performance, the stick controller lamp 9J and the trigger button lamp 9K are lit or flash. Note that during the PUSH performance, a sound effect urging the player to press the push button 31B may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R. In this way, in the PUSH presentation, the player is prompted to press the push button 31B by an image display, a lit or blinking lamp, or a sound.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b41), when the push button 31B is pressed during a PUSH effect, the image indicating the push button 31B, the meter image, and the text image "PUSH!!" that were displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 disappear. When the push button 31B is pressed, a PUSH sound is output from the speakers 8L, 8R in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. The output of the PUSH sound allows the player to recognize that the push button 31B has been effectively pressed during the PUSH effect. The output of the PUSH sound from the speakers 8L, 8R ends before the group preview effect (in this example, the Bakuchu group preview) begins. When the push button 31B is pressed, the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the button being pressed. In this example, all the frame lamps light up at high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 152 (b42), the display on the screen of the image display device 5 temporarily returns to displaying the normal background image, and the game effect lamp 9 lights up or flashes in a manner corresponding to the background.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b43), the Bakuchu group announcement starts, but before the character appears, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the fact that the group announcement performance is about to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b44), the first character appears in the first display period. Note that the state shown in FIG. 153 (b44) represents a first situation in which the entirety of the character displayed first is not yet displayed, but part of the character displayed first (part of the face in this example) is displayed.

When the Bakuchu group preview is being performed, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner that corresponds to the group preview performance, based on the brightness data table shown in Figures 64 to 70. For example, in the first display period shown in Figures 153 to 155, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near where the character appears in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that are lit at high brightness moves in accordance with the direction the character is moving.

During the group preview performance, a performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R. As shown in FIG. 61, the volume of the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance starts to be output at a timing related to the start of the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is increased to a specific volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is maintained at the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is decreased during the third display period. When the group preview performance starts, a start sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output from speakers 8L and 8R separately from the performance sound corresponding to the group preview performance, but the output of the start sound stops by the time the second character appears.

As shown in FIG. 153 (b45), the second character appears shortly after the first character appears. Note that the state shown in FIG. 153 (b45) represents a second situation in which the first character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the first character is displayed in a manner similar to that shown in the first situation, and the second character is not yet entirely displayed, but part of the second character is displayed (in this example, part of the face).

As shown in Figure 154 (b46) to (b48), characters appear one after another, and an animation of them running from the left side of the screen to the right side is displayed. Note that the display area on the screen used in the group preview performance is larger than the display area for "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the SP first half title preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 155 (b49), the characters continue to progress, and eventually the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) reaches the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 155 (b50), the first displayed character running in the lead (in the lead) begins to disappear from the left edge of the screen. As shown in FIG. 155 (b51), the first displayed character running in the lead is the first to disappear from the left edge of the screen. This ends the first display period.

As shown in FIG. 156 (b52), during the second display period, an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side. During the second display period shown in FIG. 156 and FIG. 157, the frame lamps are lit sparsely with high brightness in accordance with the way the characters advance in a group in the group preview performance. This causes the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. In addition, the performance sound corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R includes, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through. After that, as shown in FIG. 156 (b52) to FIG. 157 (b57), an animation is displayed in which characters appear one after another and run from the left side of the screen to the right side.

When the characters run in a group from the left side of the screen to the right side, they cover the entire screen, making it difficult or impossible for the player to see the title display "Catch the Bakuchu!".

As shown in FIG. 158 (b58), in the third display period, the last character appears and an animation of the last character running from the left side of the screen to the right side with the other characters is displayed. Note that no new characters appear in the third display period. In the third display period, as shown in FIG. 158 and FIG. 159, in line with the performance in which the characters disappear to the left edge of the screen in the group preview, the frame lamps also change position from the right side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the left side, where they are turned off or lit at a low brightness. Note that, as shown in FIG. 158 (b58), when the third display period begins, all of the game effect lamps 9 are temporarily lit at a high brightness.

As shown in FIG. 158 (b59), the frame lamps begin to go out as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen. In the example shown in FIG. 158 (b59), some of the right frame lamps 9R are out because no characters are displayed in the right half of the screen. As shown in FIG. 158 (b60), the number of right frame lamps 9R that are out increases as the character continues to disappear to the left edge of the screen.

As shown in FIG. 158, as the character disappears to the left edge of the screen, the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" gradually reappears in stages. At this time, if the SP first half title preview lottery is won, the display mode (e.g., color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the title display "Catch a Bakuchu!" changes, and the SP first half title preview is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (b39), before the Bakuchu group preview is executed, the text "Catch a Bakuchu!" in the title display in the first half of the SP reach is white, but as shown in FIG. 157 (b56), when the character image in the group preview is displayed on the layer in front of the layer in which the title display is being performed, the title display becomes difficult to see or becomes invisible. While the entire screen is covered by the character images in the group preview, the text "Catch the Bakuchu!" in the title display turns red, and as the characters in the group preview disappear to the left edge of the screen, the red title display gradually appears in stages, as shown in Figures 158 (b59) and (b60).

As shown in Figures 159 (b61) and (b62), the number of game effect lamps 9 that are turned off increases as the characters gradually disappear in stages. As shown in Figure 159 (b63), when the last character disappears, the group preview performance ends. After that, the performance transitions to the first half of the SP reach, as shown in Figure 113 (c1).

(Boingo Group Trailer)
The presentation of the Boingo Group announcement will be described with reference to Figures 160 to 169.

In the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview mentioned above, multiple characters progress in groups from the right edge of the screen to the left edge. In this way, the 6-person group preview and Bakuchu group preview are presentations in which the characters progress in the X-axis direction on the X-Y plane shown in Figure 52. On the other hand, the Boingo group preview allows the character (Boingo) to move in the Z-axis direction of the screen as well. In other words, the Boingo group preview is a 3D presentation in which the character progresses in a three-dimensional, X-Y-Z space.

Figures 160 to 165 are diagrams for explaining the presentation mode when the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement is executed on Stage A. Note that when the Boingo Group is executed on Stage B, the presentation mode is the same as that shown in Figures 160 to 165. Also, although not shown, the Boingo Group Pre-Announcement performance also has a first display period, second display period, and third display period, just like the 6-person Group Pre-Announcement performance and the Bakuchu Group Pre-Announcement performance.

As shown in FIG. 160 (d1), the Boingo Swarm Prediction starts, but before the characters appear, the game effect lamp 9 goes out. This draws the player's attention to the upcoming execution of the Swarm Prediction performance.

When the Boingo Group Preview is being performed, for example, based on the brightness data tables shown in Figures 64 to 70, the lamps included in the game effect lamp 9 light up in a manner corresponding to the group preview performance. For example, the frame right lamps 9R5 to 9R8 located near the location where the characters appear in the group preview start to light up at high brightness, and then the location of the lamps that light up at high brightness moves in the direction the characters move in. Also, in the group preview performance, the frame lamps light up sparsely at high brightness in accordance with the way the characters move forward in a group. This allows the frame lamps to light up or flash in accordance with the animation display of the characters forming a group and running through. Also, the performance sounds corresponding to the group preview output from speakers 8L, 8R include, for example, footsteps in accordance with the animation display of the characters running through.

As shown in FIG. 160 (d2), a preliminary image with light effects is displayed as a preliminary performance before a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen. The specific position is a group appearance point where a group of characters appears. After that, as shown in FIG. 160 (d3), the first character appears from the specific position that has been made difficult to see by the preliminary image with light effects.

After that, as shown in Fig. 161 (d4) and (d5), the second and third characters appear, and an animation is displayed in which each character gradually progresses toward the screen in stages. As shown in Fig. 161 (d6), as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the character appears becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character.

After that, as shown in Fig. 162 (d7) to (d9), the characters move in groups from the depth of the screen to the front, so that the entire screen is covered with characters. As shown in Fig. 163 (d10) to (d12), the last character appears and moves from the depth of the screen to the front.

After that, as shown in Fig. 164 (d13) and (d14), the last character moves from the depth of the screen to the front, covering most of the screen. Then, as shown in Fig. 164 (d15), the last character is enlarged and displayed over a range from one end of the screen to the other, until the entire screen is covered by the last character.

After that, as shown in Figures 165 (d16) and (d17), the original background image is displayed as the last character disappears from the screen, and as shown in 153 (d18), the group preview performance ends when the last character disappears.

Figure 166 is a diagram for explaining the details of the Boingo Group Prediction. Figures 166 (A) to (F) correspond to Figures 160 (d3) to 161 (d6), 162 (d8), and (d9), respectively.

As shown in Figure 166 (A), the first character appears from the group emergence point, and as shown in Figures 166 (B) to (F), characters appear one after another from the group emergence points. Here, as the first character displayed (the first character) is enlarged, the specific position where the characters appear becomes difficult to see or cannot be seen due to the first character. For this reason, as shown in Figures 166 (E) and (F), even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image.

Now, with reference to Figures 167 and 168, a comparative example of a Boingo swarm preview will be compared with the Boingo swarm preview of this embodiment. In the comparative example shown in Figure 167, a character (Boingo) appears at a specific position on the screen (the swarm appearance point), but a prelude image with a light effect as shown in Figure 160 (d2) is not displayed. For this reason, in order to eliminate the sense of incongruity caused by the character suddenly appearing large, an animation must be created in which the character is displayed small and then gradually becomes larger in stages, as shown in Figures 167 and 168.

In the comparative example, the character must go through animation displays as shown in Fig. 167 (d101) to Fig. 168 (d105) before it can be displayed at the size shown in Fig. 160 (d3) as shown in Fig. 168 (d106), which takes extra time and requires the creation of images for the animation. In contrast, in the case of the embodiment, as shown in Figs. 160 (d2) and (d3), a pre-image with a light effect is displayed as a pre-image before the character appears, and the character can be displayed from the beginning at a certain size (the size shown in Fig. 160 (d3) or Fig. 168 (d106)) by displaying the first character from a specific position that is difficult to see due to the display of the pre-image with this light effect.

(A variation of the Boingo Group preview)
FIG. 169 is a diagram for explaining the performance mode when the Boingo group preview according to the modified example is executed. The example shown in FIG. 169 may be replaced with the example shown in FIG. 165. For example, as shown in FIG. 169 (d101) to (d103), the title image of the first half of the SP may be displayed as the last displayed character disappears. That is, as shown in FIG. 160 (d1), while the entire screen is covered by the character image in the group preview performance on the layer on the front side of the layer on which the image of the normal background is displayed, as shown in FIG. 169 (d103), the image of the normal background may be switched to the title image of the first half of the SP. In this way, the group preview performance may be executed during the execution of the preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance.

The title image in the first half of the SP in the Boingo Group Preview may also be displayed in a different way to predict a big win, as shown in FIG. 159. Also, instead of the final character being enlarged to cover the entire screen, the background image used in the group preview performance may be animated to roll up like a scroll, switching to the next performance.

(Dog Pack Announcement)
The presentation of the dog pack announcement will be described with reference to Figures 170 to 172.

In this embodiment, the six-person group announcement, the Bakuchu announcement, and the Boingo group announcement are given as examples of group announcement effects, but the pachinko gaming machine 1 may also execute a group announcement effect called a dog group announcement, as shown in Figures 170 to 172.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 170(e1), the first character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 170(e2), multiple dog characters appear one after another, until the screen area is covered by the characters, as shown in FIG. 170(e3).

After that, as shown in Figure 171 (e4) to (e6), as the last character displayed disappears, the title image of the first half of the SP is displayed. That is, while the entire screen is covered by character images in the group preview performance on the layer in front of the layer displaying the normal background image as shown in Figure 170 (e3), the normal background image is switched to the title image of the first half of the SP as shown in Figure 171 (e6). Then, on the screen after the multiple characters located at the very end have passed, the title image of the first half of the SP, which corresponds to the performance of the first half of the SP reach, is displayed.

In addition, the title image in the first half of the SP in the dog pack prediction may predict a jackpot by changing the display mode as shown in FIG. 159.

As shown in FIG. 172, when comparing the six-person group forecast and the dog group forecast, the distance X2 between the first and last characters displayed in the dog group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis) is shorter than the distance X1 between the first and last characters displayed in the six-person group forecast (the length between them on the X-axis). Also, since the execution time is the same or approximately the same for both, the speed V2 at which the characters advance in the dog group forecast is slower than the speed V1 at which the characters advance in the six-person group forecast. Furthermore, the density D2 of multiple characters in the dog group forecast is greater than the density D1 of multiple characters in the six-person group forecast. Also, the dog group forecast performance has a higher expectation (reliability) of a jackpot than the six-person group forecast performance, and the dog group forecast performance has a lower appearance rate (execution probability) than the six-person group forecast performance.

(Execution of group preview performance during reach line performance)
With reference to Figures 173 and 174, we will explain the presentation mode when a group preview presentation is executed during a reach line.

As shown in FIG. 173(f1), when a reach line effect is executed, a group preview effect is executed as shown in FIG. 173(f2)-(f4), and then a symbol advance effect is executed as shown in FIG. 174(f5) and (f6).

[Main components and effects]
Below, the technical effects obtained by the various configurations of the pachinko gaming machine 1 are listed individually.

(1-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102),
a congratulatory effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a fanfare effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a congratulatory effect (for example, a fanfare effect) for displaying an image for congratulating the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the specific display result;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
The celebration performance can be executed after the group performance (for example, the fanfare performance shown in FIG. 117 to FIG. 119 is executed after the six-person group notice performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102 is executed),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a failure display result different from the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variable pattern of variable number 9), during a first predetermined period from the start of the variable display to the suggestion that the variable display is the failure display result (for example, the period T1 + T2 shown in Figure 62), the first display period starts in the latter half of the first predetermined period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 62 and 63),
When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), in a second specified period from the start of the variable display to the time when it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result (for example, the period T3+T4, the period T5+T6, or the period T7+T8), the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 62 and 63).

In this way, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, while the sense of elation may fade over time until the result of the variable display is determined, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a losing display result, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by executing the group preview performance in the latter half of the variable display time. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, a fanfare performance, which is a celebration performance, is executed, so that a sense of elation can be provided by executing the group preview performance in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be sustained or reawakened by the celebration performance.

The "specific display result" is a display result that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result. In other words, even if the specific display result is derived, it is a display result for controlling the game state to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Also, a jackpot occurs when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the jackpot becomes the specific display result. Furthermore, a jackpot occurs when the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becomes a specific special pattern (for example, a jackpot pattern combination such as "3, 3, 3" or "7, 7, 7") and stops, and the display of the specific special pattern becomes the specific display result.

A "missing display result" is a display result that is different from the specific display result, and is a display result that is not controlled to an advantageous state based on the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the missing display result. In other words, even if a missing display result is derived, it is a display result that does not control the game state to an advantageous state. In this embodiment, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display unit 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Also, when the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display unit 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 becomes a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a miss, the result of the game becomes a miss, and the combination of lighting modes corresponding to the miss becomes the missing display result. Furthermore, when the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 stop as a specific predetermined pattern (for example, a losing pattern combination such as "3, 2, 3"), the result of the game is a loss, and the display of the predetermined pattern becomes a losing display result.

An "advantageous state" is a state that is advantageous to the player, and is a gaming state that is controlled to provide a gaming value award rate (for example, a payout rate of gaming balls) of 1 or more or exceeds 1. In this embodiment, examples of advantageous states include a jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a normal jackpot 1 or 2 or a special jackpot 1 to 9 occurs. The advantageous state may also be a small jackpot gaming state that is controlled when a small jackpot occurs, or a special jackpot state or a time-saving state.

The "new display of a character" may be the same type of character as the character first displayed in the group preview performance, or it may be a different type of character than the character first displayed in the group preview performance.

A "congratulatory effect" is an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result, and is also an effect that displays an image to congratulate the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result and will be controlled to an advantageous state based on that. "Congratulating" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. "Congratulating" also includes increasing the player's anticipation of the advantageous state by suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display has become a specific display result or that it will be controlled to an advantageous state. For example, the congratulatory performance includes displaying an image that suggests or informs the player that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, that the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 has become a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, or that the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 have become a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern), or that the game is controlled to a jackpot game state.

"The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes a group preview performance being executed within a variable display based on one reserved memory, and then a congratulatory performance being executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory. Also, "The congratulatory performance can be executed after the group performance" includes when a group preview performance is executed as a look-ahead performance that suggests or predicts that the display result of the variable display based on one reserved memory will be a specific display result before the display result of the variable display based on that one reserved memory is started, the group preview performance is executed, and then the variable display based on that one reserved memory is started and a congratulatory performance is executed within the variable display based on that one reserved memory.

The "first predetermined period" is the period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, and in this embodiment, it is exemplified by the period T1 + T2 shown in Figures 62 and 63. "It is suggested that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 1 variable display section 9021 of the special chart LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, the combination of lighting modes in the special chart 2 variable display section 9022 of the special chart LED board 9020 corresponding to a jackpot becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a loss, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becoming a specific predetermined pattern (losing pattern combination) and stopping. In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a losing display result by the movable body 32 not moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when a jackpot is hit by the player operating the operating means.

The "second predetermined period" is the period from the start of the variable display until the display result of the variable display is suggested to be a specific display result, and in this embodiment, is exemplified by the periods T3+T4, T5+T6, and T7+T8 shown in Figures 62 and 63. "Suggestion that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes the combination of lighting modes in the special pattern 1 variable display section 9021 of the special pattern LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, the combination of lighting modes in the special pattern 2 variable display section 9022 of the special pattern LED board 9020 becoming a combination of lighting modes corresponding to a jackpot, and the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 becoming and stopping as a specific special pattern (jackpot pattern combination). In addition, if the movable body 32 does not move at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a losing display result, but moves at a specific timing when the display result of the variable display is a winning display result, "suggesting that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result" includes suggesting or informing the player that the display result of the variable display is a specific display result by the movable body 32 moving at the specific timing. Note that the specific timing may be a timing when an effect is performed that prompts the player to operate the operating means, such as the above-mentioned PUSH effect, and the movable body 32 moves when the player operates the operating means to hit the jackpot.

(1-2) The second display period is longer than each of the first display period and the third display period, and the third display period is longer than the first display period (for example, each display period shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, by making the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance the longest period, the group preview performance can be made more powerful. Furthermore, by making the first display period from when the first character appears to when the first character leaves the shortest period, it is possible to prevent the group preview performance that is suddenly executed from becoming boring.

(1-3) The character that is displayed first during the first display period is a character with a high priority in the content of the gaming machine (for example, Yume Yume, the main character).

As a result, the first character to appear in the group preview performance is a high priority character such as the protagonist, and is a character that the player is familiar with, but then characters that appear less frequently than the protagonist in other performances appear in the group preview performance, giving the player a surprise about the group preview performance or making the player feel that it is a rare performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

"High priority characters" include the main character and characters other than the main character who appear in the content used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 that have the highest priority, and also include characters that appear more frequently (number of times) in the performances executed in the pachinko gaming machine 1 than other characters.

(1-4) When the display result of the variable display is suggested to be the specific display result (for example, in the case of the variation patterns of variation numbers 20, 23, and 26), the timing at which the display of the characters first starts in the group performance is close to the halfway point of the second specified period within the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 62 and 63).

As a result, in the case of a variable pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, even if the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time, the group preview performance can be executed near the latter half of that first half, so that the aftertaste of the group preview performance can be extended even a little later.

(1-5) A pattern suggesting that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 20, 23, and 26) includes a rescue pattern (for example, a variable pattern of variable numbers 23 and 26) in which the display result of the variable display is made to look like the failure display result, and then the variable display result becomes the specific display result,
Even in the rescue pattern, during the second specified period from when the variable display starts until it is suggested that the variable display is the specific display result, the first display period starts in the first half of the second specified period (for example, the examples shown in Figures 62 and 63).

As a result, even in the case of a rescue pattern in which the display result of the variable display appears to be a losing display result and then the display result of the variable display becomes a winning display result, a fanfare effect, which is a celebratory effect, is executed, so that a sense of elation is created by executing the group preview effect in the first half of the variable display time, and even if the sense of elation fades over time, the sense of elation can be maintained or rekindled by the celebratory effect.

(1-6) In a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned specific display result (for example, the fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 20, 23, 26), a common display is performed until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the above-mentioned losing display result or the above-mentioned specific display result (for example, the examples shown in Figures 89 to 138).

As a result, for example, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 9 and the variation pattern of variation number 20 until the display result is determined, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 12 and the variation pattern of variation number 23 until the display result is determined, and further, a common presentation is executed between the variation pattern of variation number 15 and the variation pattern of variation number 26 until the display result is determined, so that the player can be drawn to the fact that a group preview presentation is being executed while a common presentation is being executed.

In addition, a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 9, 12, 15) and a pattern that suggests that the display result of the variable display is the specific display result (for example, a fluctuation pattern of main variable numbers 20, 23, 26) may be displayed differently until it is suggested that the display result of the variable display is the losing display result or the specific display result.

This allows players to focus on the fact that a group preview effect is being performed while different effects are being performed.

(1-7) The execution period of the group performance may overlap with the execution period of a preview performance (for example, a preview performance of the first half of the special program title) that is a performance different from the group preview and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result.
The preview performance ends after the third display period ends,
The display in the group performance has a larger display area than the display in the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 153 to 159).

This allows the player to see the SP first half title preview performance even if a group preview performance is executed while a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed.

(1-8) While the preview performance is being performed, the group performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 153 to 159).

This allows players to focus on the fact that a group preview performance will be executed when a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance is being executed. Note that a preview performance such as the SP first half title preview performance and a group preview performance will not start execution at the same time.

(1-9) When the group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the preview performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 32, the group preview is more reliable than the SP first half title preview).

As a result, other preview effects that have a lower expectation of a jackpot than the group preview effect are not displayed in the foreground layer, which has a higher priority than the group preview effect, so that a jackpot can be appropriately hinted to the player. In this way, in this embodiment, effects with a low expectation of a jackpot are not overlaid on top of effects with a high expectation of a jackpot.

(1-12) While the group performance is being performed, the brightness of both the background display and the display in the preview performance is reduced, but the brightness of the display of information related to the game (for example, the fourth pattern 5J and small pattern 5M indicating the first and second reserved memory counts, and the first reserved memory display area 5D, second reserved memory display area 5U, and active display area 5A) is not reduced.

As a result, when a group preview performance is executed, the brightness of the background display and images related to other preview performances (for example, images related to the SP first half title preview performance, which has a lower expectation level than the group preview performance) is lowered, while the display of information related to games that are important to the player in terms of winning or losing the game or the degree of advantage is given a higher priority, and the brightness is not lowered even when a group preview performance is executed, so that important information can be shown to the player as much as possible.

(2-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
During the first display period, a first situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed changes to a second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed further than the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 59 and 96).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, since there is no situation in the group preview performance where only one person is displayed, it is possible to prevent doubts as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the misconception that only one person will appear.

The "first situation in which a part of the initially displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 59(a), or a situation in which the initially displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, but part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player, as shown in FIG. 96(a). In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the initially displayed character is not completely visible, but part of the initially displayed character is visible.

The "second situation in which a part of the first displayed character is displayed more than in the first situation and a part of the second displayed character is displayed" includes a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 59(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed on the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the screen of the image display device 5, or a situation in which, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the first displayed character is not yet entirely displayed in the display area visible to the player when the gaming machine frame 3 covers the screen of the image display device 5, while a part of the character is displayed more than in the first situation at the edge of the display area visible to the player, and the second displayed character is not yet entirely displayed, while a part of the character is displayed at the edge of the display area visible to the player. In other words, the second situation includes a situation in which the second character appears following the first character before the first character is completely visible.

(2-2) In the group performance, the first character displayed and the second character displayed have different position coordinates on the Y axis along the vertical direction on the screen.

This ensures that the first and second characters do not overlap on the Y axis, preventing the mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-3) Motion blur processing is applied to the display of characters in the group performance (for example, the example shown in Figure 57).

This has the effect of making each character appear as multiple characters, making it less likely that there will be a mistaken impression that only one character is appearing.

(2-4) The sound indicating the start of the group preview performance is output while the first character in the group performance is being displayed, but ends before the second character begins to be displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 96).

This allows the player to be notified that the group preview performance has been executed by outputting a sound indicating the start of the group preview performance and the appearance of the first character, while at the same time providing an optimal group preview performance by ending the starting sound before the second character appears.

The start sound may be output before the first character appears, or may be output at the same time as the first character appears, but will end before the second character appears.

(2-5) The multiple characters displayed in the group performance include characters whose entire bodies are displayed within the display area of the screen, and characters whose entire bodies are displayed such that some parts do not fit within the display area of the screen, but other parts do fit within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

This allows more characters to appear in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-6) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a first character (e.g., maid A) and a second character (e.g., maid B) of a different type from the first character,
In each of the first display period, the second display period, and the third display period, a mixture of the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen and the first character whose entire body is displayed to fit within the display area of the screen but whose other parts do not fit within the display area of the screen are displayed (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55).

This creates the illusion that a larger variety of characters are appearing in the group preview performance in a limited display area.

(2-7) A part of the screen is covered by an obstruction (for example, a gaming machine frame 3), and the display of the character to be displayed first in the group presentation starts at the position where the obstruction is covering, and then the display of the character to be displayed second starts,
Even when the screen is viewed with the obstruction covering it, the first situation changes to the second situation during the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

This means that there will be no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, even in the display area of the screen that the player actually sees, so it is possible to prevent questions as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the mistaken impression that only one person will appear.

(2-8) When the gaming machine is viewed from the side, facing between the screen and the obstruction, it is possible to see the edge of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 59).

As a result, even if a player views the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the side and sees the edge of the screen, there is no situation in which only one person is displayed in the group preview performance, so there is no doubt as to whether or not it is a group preview performance, or the mistaken idea that only one person will appear.

(2-9) In the design stage, a display relating to the group performance is created on a screen of a specified size with a mask covering the area corresponding to the position of the obstruction, and further, a display relating to the group performance is created up to the area corresponding to the larger size so that it can be applied to a size larger than the specified size of the screen (e.g., 19 inches) (e.g., 20 inches).

This allows the created group preview performance data to be applied even if the design of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is suddenly changed to use a size larger than the specified size.

(2-10) The plurality of characters displayed in the group presentation include low importance characters (e.g., maids C to F) that are low in importance in the content of the gaming machine, and high importance characters (e.g., maids A and B) that are more important in the content of the gaming machine than the low importance characters,
The high importance characters are less likely to be displayed with their faces not fitting within the display area of the screen, and with the rest of their bodies fitting within the display area of the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 55), than the low importance characters.

This makes it easier to recognize the faces of characters with high importance, such as the protagonist, in the group preview performance than characters with low importance, such as supporting characters, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(3-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A performance execution means for executing a performance (for example, a performance control CPU 120 for executing a group notice execution process shown in FIG. 49 ) is provided,
The performance executed by the performance execution means includes a group performance (for example, a group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) in which an image of a plurality of characters proceeding in a group is displayed,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
The group presentation is a presentation that has the largest number of characters displayed among the presentations that can be executed by the presentation execution means.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, making it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, since the group preview performance features the largest number of characters out of all the performances, it is possible to make the player aware that a variable display that is likely to lead to a jackpot is being performed.

"The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 being the group preview performance. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs, among all the performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1. Also, "The group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest number of characters displayed on one screen among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state being the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

Furthermore, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed among the performances executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among all performances executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1, which is the group preview performance among the performances executed during the period when variable display based on one reserved memory is being performed, such as the performance during variable display of decorative patterns, the performance during reach, the pseudo consecutive performance, and the performance when a jackpot occurs. Also, "the group performance is the performance with the largest number of characters displayed among the performances that can be executed by the performance execution means" includes the performance with the largest total number of characters displayed on all screens during the performance among the performances executed during the jackpot game state and the subsequent probability change state and time-saving state, which is the group preview performance. In the above example, the group preview effect does not have to be the effect with the greatest number of different characters displayed.

(3-2) A specific effect in which a number of characters are displayed is executed, in which a smaller number of characters are displayed than in the group effect (for example, the latter half of the SP reach or the final reach effect).

This allows for a wide variety of effects to be performed, with the largest number of characters appearing in the group preview effects.

Note that the specific effect may display a greater number of different characters than the group preview effect.

(3-3) The number of characters displayed during the second display period of the group performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the specific performance.

This allows players to see a powerful presentation during the second display period, which is the longest period of the group preview presentation.

The number of character types displayed during the second display period of the group preview performance may be greater than the number of character types displayed in the specific performance.

(4-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
In the group performance,
A help message will be displayed to show that the character is progressing.
When the display of a first character and the display of a second character overlap, the display of the first character is given priority over the display of the second character, whereas when the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character and the display of the second character overlap, the display of the second character is given priority over the auxiliary display corresponding to the first character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 56).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by displaying auxiliary characters for the characters, a more dynamic group preview performance can be shown to the player, but because the auxiliary display does not impede the visibility of other characters, more characters can be clearly seen by the player.

An "auxiliary display" may be any display that indicates that a character is progressing, such as an image display that emphasizes that a character is progressing as shown in FIG. 56 (for example, an image display of dust), an image display that shows traces of a character's passage (for example, an image display of a character's footprints), or an image display attached to the character itself (for example, an image display that shows the character's aura). An "auxiliary display" may be any image display that is displayed in the vicinity of a character in relation to the character's progression.

(4-2) The characters displayed in the group performance and the auxiliary display in the group performance are displayed on different layers on the screen (for example, as shown in FIG. 54, the image of the dust is placed on layer 1, and the character images are placed on layers 2 and onwards).

This allows the character images and auxiliary displays to be displayed optimally to the player during group preview performances.

(4-3) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a plurality of characters of the same type (for example, character C of layers 9 and 10),
The video data corresponding to the group performance includes first character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 9) and second character data (e.g., video data of character C on layer 10) corresponding to each of a plurality of characters of the same type,
The first character data and the second character data have different parameter values relating to the character's moving speed, but have the same animation parameter values relating to the character's actions.

This allows the animation parameter values related to character movements to be standardized even when changing the character's movement speed, reducing the amount of work required to design group preview effects.

(4-4) In the group performance, multiple characters are not placed at the same timing and speed at coordinates arranged on the screen (for example, the example shown in Figure 54).

This ensures that multiple characters do not move in the same way in the same position, allowing the group preview performance to be shown to players in an optimal way.

(5-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, a group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, a six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102) is provided;
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
In the first display period, the display of a newly displayed character (e.g., the second displayed character) ends before the display of the first displayed character ends (e.g., the examples shown in Figures 97 and 98).

The "newly displayed character" may be the second character to appear in the group preview performance as shown in Figures 96 to 98, or it may be the third or subsequent character to appear in the group preview performance. Considering that the group preview performance is a performance in which multiple characters progress as a group, it is preferable for the "newly displayed character" to be the second character to appear in the group preview performance, positioned immediately after the first displayed character, and for the second character to overtake the first displayed character, which creates a sense of dynamism and realism.

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the second character to appear overtakes the first character to appear and disappears at the top, the player can see a dynamic group preview performance.

(5-2) The plurality of characters displayed in the group performance include a character that overtakes another character,
The number of the overtaking characters is either greater than or less than the number of the other characters to be overtaken by the overtaking character.

This makes it possible to present the group preview performance to players in an optimal way, such as preventing the group preview performance from becoming too complicated and presenting a dynamic group preview performance to players.

(5-3) When the overtaking character overtakes the other character, and the display of the overtaking character overlaps with the display of the other character, the outline of the overtaking character is displayed thicker than the outline of the other character (for example, the example shown in FIG. 58).

This allows the player to easily see how one character overtakes another.

(6-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102),
and a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a process for executing a PUSH effect by the effect control CPU 120) for executing a suggestion effect (for example, a PUSH effect) that displays a suggestion image (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!") that suggests the execution of the group effect,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
The display of the suggestive image ends before the first display period in the group performance begins (for example, the example shown in Figure 95).

The "suggestion image" may be any image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance, and may be an image that prompts the player to operate the operating means as shown in FIG. 95, or an effect image such as a light or pattern that is executed before suggesting the execution of a group preview performance, or a clock image in a timer performance that measures the time until the group preview performance is executed, or a text image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance (for example, the text image of "group"). In addition, a timer performance may use a clock image to measure the time until the group preview performance is executed, and when the measured time reaches a predetermined time, a text image that suggests the execution of a group preview performance (the text image of "group") may be displayed.

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the character display first starts to when the character display first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. It is also possible to make it easier for players to notice the first character appearing.

(6-2) After the display of the effect related to the suggestive image (for example, an effect indicating that push button 31B has been pressed) has ended, the display of the character begins for the first time in the first display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 95).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-3) the suggestion image includes an image that prompts the player to operate the operation means (for example, an image showing the push button 31B, a meter image, and a text image of "PUSH!!");
The output of a sound (e.g., a push sound) when the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed ends before the character first starts to be displayed in the first display period (e.g., the example shown in Figure 95).

This makes it easier for players to notice the character appearing for the first time.

(6-4) When the operating means is operated while the suggestive image is being displayed, one of a number of effects including the group effect (for example, a six-person group preview, a background preview, a lamp preview) is executed (for example, the examples shown in Figures 95, 104, and 105).

This allows multiple effects to be executed based on the player's operation, making the game more entertaining.

(7-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102, and the dog group preview performance shown in FIG. 170 to FIG. 172) is provided,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
The group performance includes a first group performance (e.g., a six-person group preview performance) and a second group performance (e.g., a dog group preview performance),
The plurality of characters displayed in the first group performance each move at the same or substantially the same first speed (for example, speed V1);
The plurality of characters displayed in the second group performance each move at the same or substantially the same second speed (for example, speed V2);
The first speed is greater than the second speed,
The first group presentation is configured so that the straight-line distance from the first character to the last character displayed is longer than in the second group presentation (for example, the example shown in FIG. 172).

The "straight-line distance from the first displayed character to the last displayed character" is the straight-line distance (distance on the X-axis) from the edge of the first displayed character to the edge of the last displayed character in a group preview performance such as a six-person group preview performance or a dog group preview performance, as shown in FIG. 172. If the time from when the first character is displayed from the edge of the screen of the image display device 5 to when the last character is displayed is T and the speed of each character is V, then this straight-line distance can be calculated by multiplying the time T by the speed V (T x V).

As a result, by designing the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the character first starts to when the display of the character first ends, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance. Also, two types of group preview performances can be shown to the player in a suitable manner.

(7-2) The execution time of the first group performance (e.g., X1/V1) is the same as or approximately the same as the execution time of the second group performance (e.g., X2/V2) (e.g., the example shown in FIG. 172).

This allows two different types of group preview performances to be performed using the same or approximately the same amount of time.

(7-3) When the second group performance is executed, the probability that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result is higher than when the first group performance is executed;
The probability of executing the second group of effects is lower than the probability of executing the first group of effects.

In this way, by making the character speed slower for the dog pack preview performance, which has a lower probability of execution and higher expectations than the six-person preview, it is possible to, for example, increase the opportunities for the player to take a photo of the characters in the dog pack preview performance.

(7-4) The degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the second group performance (e.g., crowding degree D2) is greater than the degree of crowding of the multiple characters displayed in the first group performance (e.g., crowding degree D1).

This allows characters to be positioned at an appropriate density during the group preview performance, taking into account the speed and distance traveled of the characters, providing players with a group preview performance that is ideal.

(7-5) In the second group performance, a plurality of characters located at the rear end are arranged from the bottom to the top of the screen,
After the rearmost characters have passed, a display corresponding to the subsequent performance is displayed on the screen (for example, the example shown in FIG. 171).

This allows the image for the next performance to be shown to the player when the group preview performance is triggered, increasing the excitement of the game.

(8-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, the group notice execution process shown in FIG. 49, the Boingo group notice performance shown in FIG. 160 to FIG. 169) is provided for executing a group performance (for example, a group notice performance) that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, until a new display of a character is performed, until the display of any character ends first,
the second display period is a period longer than the first display period, and is a period during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues;
the third display period is a period during which a state in which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without a new display of the character;
during the first display period, display of the character is started from a specific position such that the character progresses from the back side to the front side on the screen;
At a timing related to the initial start of the display of the character at the specific position, a front-stage display (for example, display of a front-stage image using light effects) is performed to make the display of the character at the specific position difficult to see (for example, the example shown in Figure 160).

"Front display" may be any display that makes the display of a character difficult to see, and includes displays that hide the specific location where a character appears (for example, displaying an effect image such as light or a pattern). "Difficult to see" includes a state where the player cannot see the specific location at all, a state where the player can see the specific location but has difficulty seeing it, a state where the player can see the specific location but cannot see the character appearing from the specific location, and a state where the player can see the specific location and can see the character appearing from the specific location but has difficulty seeing it.

"Timing related to the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position" includes timing that is the same as the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position, or timing within a specified period before or after the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position (this specified period is a period that gives the player the illusion that it is the initial start of the display of a character at a specific position).

This allows the second display period, during which characters appear one after the other in the group preview performance, to be longer than the first display period, which is from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, because the first character is displayed from a specific position that was made difficult to see by the display of the previous image, the characters can be displayed at a certain size from the beginning, and the player does not experience the discomfort of suddenly seeing a large character.

(8-2) during the first display period, the character is enlarged and displayed so as to progress from a depth direction to a front direction on the screen;
The enlarged display of the character makes it difficult to see the character displayed at the specific position (an example is shown in FIG. 166).

This creates the visual effect of multiple characters appearing one after the other from a position of depth.

(8-3) The character that is displayed last in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over an area that extends from at least one end of the screen to the opposite end (example shown in FIG. 164).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-4) In conjunction with the action of the character that is displayed last in the group performance, the background display displayed in the third display period is switched to the background display that corresponds to the subsequent performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 164 and 165).

This allows you to conveniently switch to the performance after the group preview performance by using the image display of the last character.

(8-5) The character that is last displayed in the group performance is enlarged and displayed over a range extending from at least one end of the screen to the other end opposite the one end,
No other characters in the group performance are displayed behind the last character displayed (for example, the example shown in Figure 166).

As a result, even if a subsequent character image is placed in a position hidden by the first character, it will not be visible, so there is no need to place the subsequent character image, creating a visual effect as if multiple characters are appearing one after the other from a position with depth.

(9-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102),
A sound output means (e.g., speakers 8L, 8R) for outputting sound,
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
The sound output means starts outputting a performance sound corresponding to the group performance at a predetermined volume at a timing related to the start of the first display period, and thereafter outputs the performance sound so that the volume of the performance sound is a specific volume higher than the predetermined volume during the first display period, the volume of the performance sound is also the specific volume during the second display period, and the volume of the performance sound is lower than the specific volume during the third display period.

In this way, the second display period during which characters appear one after another in the group preview performance can be designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, by raising the volume to a specific volume during the first display period and maintaining the sound output at the specific volume during the second display period, the group preview performance can be livened up at the specific volume before the second display period, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The volume may be controlled by the sound output means to increase or decrease it, or the volume control of the sound output means may be constant but the volume may increase or decrease because the increase or decrease in the volume is specified in the sound data referenced by the sound output means.

(9-2) The fade-in time from when the performance sound is output to when the volume of the performance sound rises to a specific volume during the first display period is shorter than the fade-out time from when the volume of the performance sound starts to decrease to when the volume of the performance sound disappears during the third display period (for example, the example shown in FIG. 61).

As a result, the sounds produced during the group preview performance fade in over a short period of time and fade out over a longer period of time, allowing the sounds produced during the group preview performance to be output optimally.

(10-1) A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player when a display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result,
A group performance execution means (for example, a group preview performance) for executing a group performance that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress in a group (for example, the group preview execution process shown in FIG. 49, the six-person group preview performance shown in FIG. 96 to FIG. 102),
A plurality of lighting means (for example, game effect lamps 9 such as frame lamps),
The display period of the image in the group performance includes a first display period, a second display period, and a third display period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 61 ),
The first display period is a period from when the display of the first character in the group performance begins, when a new character is displayed, until the display of any character ends first (for example, the period shown in FIG. 96 (a23) to FIG. 98 (a30)),
The second display period is a period longer than the first display period, during which a state in which a new character is displayed and the display of a currently displayed character is terminated continues (for example, the period shown in FIG. 99 (a31) to FIG. 100 (a36)),
The third display period is a period during which the display of a currently displayed character is terminated without any new display of the character (for example, the period shown in FIG. 101 (a37) to FIG. 102 (a42)),
a luminance data table composed of a plurality of luminance data for lighting each of the plurality of lighting means includes a first luminance data table corresponding to the first display period (e.g., a grandchild table W1 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66( a)), a second luminance data table corresponding to the second display period (e.g., a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66( b)), and a third luminance data table corresponding to the third display period (e.g., a grandchild table W3 for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66( c));
Each of the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table is composed of first luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance, and second luminance data which is a combination of data for lighting the lighting means at a low luminance and data for lighting the lighting means at a high luminance different from the first luminance data (for example, an example of a grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in FIG. 66 ).
The second brightness data table is set to light more of the lighting means at high brightness than the first brightness data table (for example, the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp stores high brightness data ("0" to "F") for more lamps than the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

As a result, in the group preview performance, the second display period during which characters appear one after another is designed to be longer than the first display period from when the display of the characters first starts to when the display of the characters first ends, thereby providing a suitable group preview performance. Also, a brightness data table corresponding to each display period is provided, and the second brightness data table is designed to light the lamp at a higher brightness than the first brightness data table, so that during the first display period, weaker footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear, and during the second display period, stronger footsteps can be expressed when multiple characters appear one after another, providing the player with a more suitable group preview performance.

The "data for turning on the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for turning on the lighting means at high brightness" are lighting data (lighting elements) for each time period for multiple lighting sections (for example, RGB in the left frame lamp 9L1, and WWW in the upper panel lamp 9C) included in each lighting means. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 66(a), it is the data (100) for the left frame lamp 9L1 (RGB) at T1-1. Note that, for the RGB data, data corresponding to turning off the light is "000", data corresponding to turning on the light at low brightness is "100", and data corresponding to turning on the light at high brightness is "F00".

The "brightness data" is the lighting data for each lighting means (for example, the frame lamp, the panel lamp 9C) for each hour, and is a collection of "data for lighting the lighting means at low brightness" and "data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness" for each hour. For example, in the example shown in Figure 66(a), it is the data for the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R at T1-1.

The brightness data table is a collection of "brightness data" for a specific period (for example, the lighting time specified in the parent table or child table), and in the example shown in Figure 66 (a), for example, it is data for the frame left lamp 9L and frame right lamp 9R at T1-1 to T1-11.

(10-2) The first brightness data table has a longer interval for switching brightness data than the second brightness data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 100 msec, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at intervals of 50 to 80 msec).

This makes it possible to show that the characters are running faster during the second display period than during the first display period, providing a suitable group preview presentation.

(10-3) The first luminance data table has equal intervals for switching the luminance data, whereas the second luminance data table does not have equal intervals for switching the luminance data (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp switches at 100 msec intervals, and the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp switches at 50 to 80 msec intervals).

As a result, during the second display period, it is possible to express that multiple characters are running more out of step with each other than during the first display period. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(11-1) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that moves the lighting location in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the frame lamp grandchild table W1 lights up with high brightness in accordance with the direction of the group preview),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that does not move the lit areas in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance (for example, as shown in Figure 65, the frame lamp grandchild table W2 lights up at high brightness over multiple points).

This allows a character to appear during the first display period, and multiple characters to appear one after another during the second display period. This allows for an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-2) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means located near the character first displayed in the group performance at high brightness in accordance with the progression position of the character, and turning off or lighting the lighting means located near a location not reached by the character at low brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in Figure 66 (a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-3) The first brightness data table includes brightness data that causes the lighting means to light up at high brightness and then turns off the lighting means or lights it up at low brightness as the character first displayed in the group performance progresses (for example, the example of the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps shown in FIG. 66(a)).

As a result, the lamps light up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamps are turned off or light up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamps can be used to express the progress of the leading character. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-4) The first brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and then lighting the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 66(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data that lights up the lighting means at high brightness and then does not light up the lighting means located in the direction in which the characters move in the group performance at high brightness (for example, an example of a grandchild table W2 for a frame lamp shown in Figure 66 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(11-5) the first luminance data table includes luminance data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance and turning off the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of the frame lamp grandchild table W1 shown in FIG. 66(a)),
The second brightness data table includes brightness data for lighting the lighting means at high brightness and for lighting the lighting means adjacent to the lighting means (for example, an example of a frame lamp grandchild table W2 shown in Figure 66 (b)).

As a result, during the first display period, the lamp lights up at high brightness as the first-displayed leading character progresses, and the lamp is turned off or lights up at low brightness for areas that have not yet been reached or areas that have already been passed, so the lighting of the lamp can be used to express the progression of the leading character. Also, during the second display period, it is possible to express the progression of multiple characters one after another. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-1) The third brightness data table includes brightness data that increases the number of lighting means that are turned off in accordance with the progress of the characters in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the frame lamp grandchild table W3 is turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the direction of progress of the group preview).

As a result, during the third display period, the lamps are turned off or lit at a low brightness in accordance with the progress of the characters, so the progress of the characters can be expressed by turning the lamps off or on. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(12-3) In the third brightness data table, the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located in the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation is shorter than the switching interval of the brightness data in the lighting means arranged on the frame of the gaming machine located opposite the direction in which the character advances in the group presentation (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, the switching interval of the frame left lamp 9L is 10 msec, and the switching interval of the frame right lamp 9R is 80 msec).

As a result, during the third display period, it is possible to express the characters moving from the right side to the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and disappearing. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview presentation.

(13-1) In the first luminance data table, control of the lighting means starts at a timing related to a start of the first display period, and control of the lighting means ends during the first display period,
The second luminance data table indicates that control of the lighting means is started during the first display period and is continued during the second display period, and that control of the lighting means is ended during the third display period,
The third luminance data table starts control of the lighting means during the third display period (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 87).

As a result, halfway through the first display period, the lamps are lit with high brightness in the same way as in the second display period, so the progress of the characters from before the second display period can be expressed with excitement by the lighting of the lamps. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(13-2) The second luminance data table is set to have a control period of the lighting means longer than those of the first luminance data table and the third luminance data table,
The first luminance data table is set to have a longer control period for the lighting means than the third luminance data table (for example, the example of the group preview luminance data table shown in FIG. 87).

This allows multiple characters to appear one after the other during the first display period to be displayed for an appropriate length of time, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(14-1) The brightness data initially specified in the first brightness data table is the brightness data that turns off or lights at a low brightness the multiple lighting means used in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the grandchild table W1 for frame lamps, the initial brightness data for all lamps is turned off or lights at a low brightness).

This allows the lamps to light up when the group preview performance is executed after a break, without mixing with the lamps that were turned on before the group preview performance was executed, providing a more suitable group preview performance.

(14-2) The brightness data initially specified in each of the second brightness data table and the third brightness data table is brightness data that does not turn off the multiple lighting means used in the group performance or light them at low brightness (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the grandchild tables W2 and W3 for frame lamps, the lamps are lit at high brightness for the initial brightness data).

As a result, when characters are progressing one after another after a group preview performance has been executed, the flow of the performance is emphasized, and the group preview performance can be shown to the player without being interrupted by turning off all the lamps or turning them on at a low brightness. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(14-3) The last luminance data specified in the third luminance data table is luminance data that turns off or lights at a low luminance the multiple lighting means used in the group performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the grandchild table W3 for frame lamps, the last luminance data for all lamps is turned off or lights at a low luminance).

As a result, when the group preview performance ends, all lamps are turned off or turned on at a low brightness, allowing the player to recognize that the group preview performance is ending. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(15-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, luminance data is not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This allows the data volume to be reduced for the brightness data during the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. This makes it possible to provide a suitable group preview presentation.

(15-2) The third luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data with the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the grandchild table W3 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not specified so that the same luminance data is used repeatedly).

As a result, for the brightness data in the third display period, which is set to be no longer than the second display period, the brightness data can be specified as is, increasing the degree of freedom in design. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-1) The first luminance data table is designed not to repeat luminance data of the same control content, while the second luminance data table is designed to repeat luminance data of the same control content (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, luminance data is not defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used, and in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp, luminance data is defined so that the same luminance data is repeatedly used).
In the first brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is specified at the end, while in the second brightness data table, brightness data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified at the end (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp, and 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is not specified in the grandchild table W2 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to reduce the data volume for the brightness data in the second display period, which is set over a long period of time. On the other hand, for the brightness data in the first display period, the brightness data is specified as is, but instead, 10 minutes of data is specified for troubleshooting purposes, allowing troubleshooting to be done during those 10 minutes. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(16-2) The luminance data for malfunction countermeasures is the luminance data for which the longest time is specified among the luminance data constituting the first luminance data table, and is the luminance data for preventing the lighting means from being controlled from the beginning of the first luminance data table (for example, as shown in FIG. 65, 10-minute data for malfunction countermeasures is specified in the grandchild table W1 for the frame lamp).

This makes it possible to prevent lamp lighting control from being performed from the beginning of the first brightness data table by using the 10-minute data for troubleshooting purposes, thereby providing an optimal group preview performance.

(16-3) The luminance data for fault countermeasures is luminance data that turns on adjacent lighting means in a regular order (for example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), the luminance data for fault countermeasures for 10 minutes is luminance data that turns on adjacent frame lamps in a regular order so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state).

As a result, even if a malfunction occurs, adjacent frame lamps are lit in order and in a regular pattern so that the lighting locations are shifted from the previous state, preventing the appearance from becoming poor and providing an ideal group preview performance.

(17-1) The lighting means includes a single-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a single color and a multi-color lighting means (e.g., on-board lamps 9C1 to 9C5, 9C9 to 9C13) that lights up in a plurality of colors,
the luminance data for lighting the monochromatic lighting means at a specific high luminance includes a specific value (e.g., "6") corresponding to the lighting at the specific high luminance;
The brightness data for lighting the multi-color lighting means at the specific high brightness includes a value (for example, "8" to "F") larger than a specific value as a value corresponding to the lighting at the specific high brightness.

This allows the light variation between lamps that are lit at high brightness to be adjusted by selecting an appropriate value for high brightness depending on the type of light-emitting means, providing an optimal group preview performance.

(17-2) The single-color lighting means includes a first-color lighting means (e.g., the board-up lamps 9C6 to 9C8) that lights up in a first color, and a second-color lighting means (e.g., the board-left lamps 9B1 to 9B5) that lights up in a second color,
Regardless of the brightness data for lighting either the first color lighting means or the second color lighting means at the specific high brightness, the brightness data includes the specific value (e.g., "6") as a value corresponding to the specific high brightness lighting.

This allows the light variation to be adjusted even between lamps that are lit in the same single color, providing an ideal group preview presentation.

(18-1) The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table each include different luminance data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, a frame lamp table shown in FIG. 66 ),
The brightness data table used in a preview performance, which is a performance different from the group performance and which predicts that the display result of the variable display will become the specific display result, includes common brightness data for each of the lighting means provided on the left and right sides of the gaming machine (for example, the grandchild table for a frame lamp shown in Figure 73).

As a result, by individually controlling the lighting of the frame left lamp 9L and the frame right lamp 9R during the group preview performance, more detailed lighting patterns can be achieved, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-1) During the execution of a preview effect (for example, a reach line effect) that is a different effect from the group effect and that predicts that the display result of the variable display will be the specific display result, the group effect may be executed in an interrupt manner,
Even when the group performance is interrupted and executed, the lighting means continues to light up according to the brightness data table corresponding to the preview performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 173 and 174),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the advance notice performance, or includes the lighting means used in the advance notice performance and the lighting means not used in the advance notice performance (for example, as shown in Figure 72, in the reach line performance, there is a period during which the on-board lamps and attacca lamps which are always used in the group advance notice performance are not used).

As a result, even if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the common lamps are lit, so that a performance with lighting can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided. For example, if a group preview performance is executed by interrupting another preview performance, the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance will be mixed. If the lamps lit in both performances were different, the large number of lamps will be lit in a cumbersome manner, which may look unsightly and cause the player to feel uncomfortable. In this regard, if the lighting of the lamps in the group preview performance and the lighting of the lamps in the other preview performance are common, it is possible to prevent the lighting of many lamps in a cumbersome manner.

(19-2) The preview performance ends during the execution of the group performance, and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol forwarding performance) different from the preview performance is executed (for example, the examples shown in FIGS. 173 and 174),
The lighting means used in the group performance is the same as the lighting means used in the specified performance, or includes the lighting means used in the specified performance and the lighting means not used in the specified performance (for example, the examples shown in Figures 173 and 174).

As a result, even if the group preview performance switches to another performance, the common lamp remains lit, so the performance can be realized without any sense of incongruity, and a suitable group preview performance can be provided.

(19-3) The group performance is executed with a predetermined execution probability of less than 100% (for example, the group preview lottery shown in FIG. 32).

As a result, whether or not the group preview performance is executed is determined by lottery, regardless of other performances, which reduces the processing burden related to the execution of the group preview performance and allows for the provision of a suitable group preview performance.

(20-1) The lighting means includes a specific lighting means (for example, a V lamp 9G) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means can be lit when controlled to the advantageous state, and is not lit when not controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the V lamp 9G is lit to notify that a round of a jackpot game state in which a V win can occur is in progress or that a V win has occurred),
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 65).

This prevents the lamps located in positions related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from lighting up during the group preview performance, which could lead the player to mistakenly believe that they have been controlled to an advantageous state, such as a jackpot. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

(20-2) The lighting means includes specific lighting means (for example, a stick controller lamp 9J, a trigger button lamp 9K) located at a position related to a direction in which the characters move in the group performance,
The specific lighting means indicates to the player that the operation of the operating means is valid by lighting (for example, the stick controller lamp 9J lights up to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, and the trigger button lamp 9K lights up to encourage the player to press the push button 31B).
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table do not include luminance data for lighting the specific lighting means (for example, the example of the luminance data table shown in FIG. 65).

This prevents the player from mistaking that the lamp in the position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance for the lamp to light up during the group preview performance, leading the player to believe that the lamp is prompting the player to operate the operating means. This makes it possible to provide an ideal group preview performance.

[Modification]
A modified example of the above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 will now be described.

(About the display period of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, the third display period is longer than the first display period, but the first display period may be longer than the third display period.

This allows the first character to appear in the first display period to be displayed for a longer period, making it easier to draw attention to the fact that a group preview performance suggesting a jackpot has been performed.

(Regarding the timing of the group preview performance)
In the present embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance is executed in the latter half of the time of the variable display with a probability of 100%, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a failure display result, the group advance notice performance may be executed with a higher probability in the latter half of the time of the variable display than in the first half of the time of the variable display.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance is executed in the first half of the variable display time with a 100% probability, but this is not limited to this. For example, in the case of a variation pattern in which the result of the variable display is a winning display result, the group preview performance may be executed with a higher probability in the first half of the variable display time than in the second half of the variable display time.

(About the characters appearing in the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), appears as the first (initial) character in the first display period, but the main character, maid A (Yume Yume-chan), may be the character that appears most frequently in the second display period.

This allows the player to see the main character frequently during the second display period, which is the longest, and increases the player's interest in the game.

The character displayed first during the first display period may be a premium character.

This allows the premium character to be shown to the player first during the initial first display period, making the group preview presentation more impactful. Note that if the first character displayed during the first display period is a premium character, this may guarantee a jackpot. Furthermore, in this case, the lighting pattern of each lamp, such as the frame lamp, may be a pattern that includes rainbow (seven colors).

The premium character may be a character that appears least frequently in all states and effects, or a character that does not appear except in group preview effects. The premium character may also be a character whose appearance suggests a higher chance of a jackpot than other characters.

(About lighting control during group preview performances)
In this embodiment, the luminance data is defined as shown in the frame lamp grandchild table shown in Fig. 66, but the luminance data may be defined as follows: That is, there is first specific luminance data that combines data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance and data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and second specific luminance data that includes data for turning on the lighting means at low luminance but does not include data for turning on the lighting means at high luminance, and the first luminance data table may not use the first specific lighting data, and the second luminance data table may use the second specific lighting data.

In this way, during the first display period, data for lighting at high brightness is not specified, so the lamps are lit at low brightness, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters approaching, and during the second display period, data for lighting at high brightness is specified, making it possible to express the appearance of multiple characters advancing one after another.

The third brightness data table may also include brightness data that turns off all of the lighting means that were turned on in the second brightness data table.

In this way, the character's progression and disappearance during the third display period can be expressed by the lamp going off.

Further, the lighting means includes specific lighting means at a position related to a direction in which the characters advance in the group performance,
A specific member capable of transmitting light is disposed on the front side of the specific lighting means,
When the specific lighting means is turned on, the color visually recognized through the specific member becomes the specific color,
the first luminance data table and the second luminance data table include luminance data for lighting the lighting means in a color different from the specific color;
The first luminance data table and the second luminance data table may not include luminance data for lighting a specific lighting means.

In this way, it is possible to prevent a lamp located in a position related to the direction in which the characters move during the group preview performance from turning on during the group preview performance, causing the color seen through the specific transparent member located in front of the lamp to become a specific color not used in the group preview performance, which would interfere with the color of the group preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to provide a suitable group preview performance.

(About the video data for the group preview performance)
In this embodiment, as shown in Fig. 54, video data in which the character to be acted and the action content (action pattern) of the character are associated in advance is created in the design stage, and the video data is stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121. In the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 plays the video data stored in the RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group advance notice performance based on the variation pattern command received from the CPU 103. However, the video of the group advance notice performance may be played in a manner different from the above.

For example, data on the character to be acted on and data indicating the action content (action pattern) may be stored as separate data in RAM 122 or ROM 121. Then, in the pachinko game machine 1, the performance control CPU 120 may select the character data and the data indicating the action pattern stored in RAM 122 or ROM 121 when it is time to execute the group preview performance based on the variation pattern command received from CPU 103, combine the two to create video data, and play the created video data.

More specifically, in RAM 122 or ROM 121, multiple data of characters A, B, and C running and walking are stored in memory area 1, and video data of multiple arbitrary characters showing multiple movement patterns related to the group preview performance, although the characters are not fixed, is stored in memory area 2. When the time comes to execute the group preview performance, the performance control CPU 120 extracts the characters from memory area 1 and further extracts the video data related to the group preview performance from memory area 2, combines them to create one video data of the group preview performance, and plays the created video data.

(When the group preview performance overlaps with other preview performances)
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 158 and FIG. 171, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance is larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance is prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance is in front of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). However, this is not limited to this. For example, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance is in front of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Alternatively, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the group preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the other preview performance, and the display of the image in the other preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the group preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the other preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the group preview performance). Also, when the execution period of the group preview performance overlaps with the execution period of the other preview performance, the display area of the image in the other preview performance may be larger than the display area of the image in the group preview performance, and the display of the image in the group preview performance may be prioritized over the display of the image in the other preview performance (for example, the display layer of the image in the group preview performance may be on the front side of the display layer of the image in the other preview performance). Note that cases in which the display area of images in other preview performances is larger than the display area of images in the group preview performance include cases in which preview images that catch the player's attention, such as images suggesting a jackpot, are hidden by images in the group preview performance, but images located around the preview image (for example, images showing flames or an aura surrounding the preview image) are not hidden by images in the group preview performance and can be seen.

(Example of time-saving control without going through a hit)
Next, an example of executing time-saving control without going through a win (a big win, a small win, etc.) as a time-saving state will be described.
(Example of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)

(A1) In each of the above-mentioned characteristic parts and modified examples, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) is exemplified as always passing through a big win state or a small win state in which the special variable winning ball device 7A is activated, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed as a special pattern, the transition to the time-saving state (high base state) may be made without activating the special variable winning ball device 7A. In other words, the time-saving state may be controlled to not pass through a win (big win, small win, etc.).

(A2) In addition, the time-saving symbols described above may be part of the losing symbols or part of the small winning symbols.

(A3) In addition, when performing lottery processing for the derivation and display of time-saving symbols, the lottery may be performed using a random number dedicated to the lottery of time-saving symbols, or the lottery may be performed using a random number for other lotteries, such as a lottery random number for a losing symbol, a lottery random number for a jackpot symbol, a lottery random number for a small jackpot symbol, a random number for judging a jackpot, or a lottery random number for a fall lottery.

(A4) Furthermore, these time-saving symbols may be of multiple types, and may be used in combination with other symbols such as small win symbols and loss symbols. In this case, the small win symbol used in combination may determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state. However, when a time-saving symbol is selected, no further lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to transition to the time-saving state, and no lottery is conducted to determine the number of times the time-saving state will be used.

(A5) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving symbols and the setting value can be changed, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols does not change according to the setting value. In other words, the probability of drawing the time-saving symbols is the same for all setting values, but the probability of drawing these time-saving symbols may be different for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

(A6) In addition, the timing of obtaining the random number when drawing the time-saving pattern may be when the ball enters the start hole (first start hole, second start hole), regardless of whether a dedicated random number is used or another random number is used.

(A7) In addition, for winning when a lottery for a time-saving pattern is conducted, if a dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is used, the result of the lottery using the dedicated random number (time-saving lottery random number) is the winning value, if a small win pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific small win pattern random number value is the winning value, and if a random number for a fall lottery judgment value is used to draw the time-saving pattern, the random number for the fall lottery judgment value is the winning value. Also, a lottery using a structure, for example, a time-saving area may be provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7A, and the passage of the game ball through the time-saving area may be the winning of the time-saving pattern.

(A8) In addition, when the lottery for the time-saving symbol is performed using a structure and the small winning symbol is used in combination with the time-saving symbol, the variable display count of the time-saving state (time-saving count) is set so as not to change depending on whether or not the time-saving area is passed through.

(A9) In addition, when a lottery is held for the time-saving pattern, if a losing pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific losing pattern random number value can be the winning value, and if a winning pattern random number is used to draw the time-saving pattern, a specific winning pattern random number value can be the winning value. However, when these random numbers are used as the winning value, this is only possible for machines whose settings cannot be changed, since performance other than the probability of winning varies depending on the settings.

(A10) The timing of determining the result of the lottery for the time-saving symbol may be performed after the determination of a jackpot. The lottery for the time-saving symbol is not performed in the time-saving state (high base) or when there is a high probability, regardless of the random number value used in the lottery, but is performed only in the low probability low base state. However, when the time-saving symbol is derived and displayed when the time-saving state is already established, the number of times the time-saving symbol is reset or the lottery is not performed, as long as it is determined for each gaming machine.

(A11) In addition, the number of times the time-saving symbol is displayed when it is derived can have multiple predetermined times depending on the winning value (symbol) and the game state. In addition, the conditions for granting the time-saving symbol can be different for each time-saving symbol.

(A12) In addition, when the number of times the time-saving pattern is used varies depending on the time-saving pattern, the lottery for allocating the time-saving pattern can be changed between special pattern 1 and special pattern 2.

(A13) In addition, even when the same time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the number of time-saving times awarded may differ depending on the game state at that time. However, this must be determined in advance for the game state.

(A14) In addition, the lottery result for the time-saving pattern in a low-probability, low-base state can include the lottery result of "0 time-saving times."

(A15) In addition, a lottery for deriving a time-saving end pattern (time-saving end lottery) may be executed, and the number of time-saving times may be set to the number of times after the start of the time-saving period until the time-saving end pattern is derived and displayed, or until the jackpot pattern is derived and displayed. In other words, the number of time-saving times may not be set, and may be unlimited in principle.

(A16) In addition, the number of time-saving times and the conditions for granting the time-saving times may be different between the time-saving times controlled by the time-saving symbols and the time-saving times controlled by the occurrence of a jackpot.

(A17) In addition, when a time-saving symbol is derived and displayed, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the point at which the symbol determination time for the time-saving symbol has elapsed. However, when a small win symbol random number is used to select the time-saving symbol, if a small win is won and the time-saving state is entered, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled is the end of the small win operation.

(A18) In addition, the timing at which the time-saving state is controlled in the case of a lottery using a structure is the timing at which the operation of the structure ends in a game state in which the structure is operated (for example, a small win state).

(A19) In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that is controlled to a high-probability, low-base state for a predetermined number of variable displays after a jackpot (a so-called specified-number-of-times-variable-game machine (ST machine)), the gaming machine may be in the high-probability, low-base state when the gaming center opens, and after the high-probability, low-base state has ended after the specified number of variable displays have been executed, it may be controlled to a time-saving state.

(A20) In addition, if a time-saving limiter function is installed and a time-saving pattern is derived and displayed, the number of times the time-saving limiter is activated is updated.

(A21) The time required for the time-saving symbol to be determined may also be different from the time required for the other symbols to be determined.

(Other examples of time-saving control using time-saving symbols)
As another time-saving control using the time-saving symbol, the control described below may be executed.

(B1) In the normal state, game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern (special display result), and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern in the time-saving state (even if the time-saving pattern is displayed, game state switching control such as overwriting the time-saving state (such as the time-saving state occurring again) may not be performed). In addition, different effects may be performed when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the normal state and when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern with a special pattern is displayed in the time-saving state (for example, for decorative patterns, a special pattern is displayed as the time-saving pattern in the normal state and a general losing pattern is displayed in the time-saving state). This allows suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, the interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is changed or not).

(B2) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), when the display result of a special symbol is a time-saving symbol, the special symbol may be a time-saving symbol that is common in both the normal state and the time-saving state, and the decorative symbol may be a different symbol displayed as the display result in the normal state and the time-saving state (for example, the decorative symbol may be a special symbol that corresponds to the time-saving symbol in the normal state, but a symbol that simply corresponds to the time-saving symbol may be displayed in the time-saving state, such as a missing symbol). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative symbol in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decline in interest in the game.

(B3) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), in the normal state, a presentation is executed that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern), but in the time-saving state, the presentation that suggests whether the display result of the decorative pattern will be a special pattern (time-saving pattern) may not be executed. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the presentation in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B4) In a gaming machine controlled as in (B1), the fixed display time of the decorative symbols (the time for which the display state is maintained after the fixed surface result is displayed) may be controlled to be different between the normal state and the time-saving state. This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the presentation of the decorative symbols in the time-saving state, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B5) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when switching to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when switching to time-saving control is not switched to), and during the time-saving state, right-hit play is performed in response to a right-hit notification (an indication instructing right-hit), until all variable displays based on the reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hit notification (an indication instructing left-hit). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing an effect depending on whether the state is switched or not).

(B6) After the first variable display using the first special pattern has been performed, and after the second variable display using the second special pattern has been performed, the state can be controlled to be advantageous to the player, and game control may be performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern (special display result) in the normal state, and game control may not be performed to transition from the time-saving state to a similar time-saving state based on the display of a variable display result of a time-saving pattern using a special pattern in the time-saving state (game state switching control may not be performed to overwrite the time-saving state (such that the time-saving state occurs again) even if a time-saving pattern is displayed). The second variable display has a higher rate of displaying the variable display result of the time-saving pattern than the first variable display, and information about the variable display is stored as reserved memory information, and different effects can be executed depending on whether the reserved memory information is stored when the time-saving state ends (such as a display of continued time-saving when transitioning to time-saving control, and an effect that can identify that time-saving control is not being executed when not transitioning to time-saving control), and during the time-saving state, right-hitting play is performed in response to a right-hitting notification, until all variable displays based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends are completed. It is also possible to disable a left-hitting notification (a notification instructing left-hitting). This allows for suitable control depending on the state when the variable display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed (for example, interest is increased by executing effects depending on whether the state is transitioned or not).

(B7) A left hit notification may be executed in the variable display (first variable display) that is executed after the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is completed. This allows the game to proceed smoothly because instructions on how to hit are displayed appropriately, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

(B8) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and when a win (small win, big win) occurs in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This prevents the player from feeling like they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern through the presentation of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B9) In the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends, when there is reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern and when there is no reserved memory information, it may be possible to execute a different effect after executing a common effect (for example, when the fourth of four remaining reserved memories has reserved memory information that displays the display result of a time-saving pattern, a common effect that suggests whether or not to return to the time-saving state can be executed up to the variable display based on the third reserved memory information, and a time-saving state return effect different from the common effect can be executed with the variable display based on the fourth reserved memory information). This prevents the player from feeling that they have lost out due to the display result of the decorative pattern due to the effect of the notification mode of the right-hit notification, and suppresses a decrease in interest in the game.

(B10) The notification mode of the right-hit notification executed in response to a win may be different between the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends and the presentation at the time of transition to the time-saving state based on the display result of the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This allows the presentation to change depending on the game state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B11) The final display time (the time from when the finalized surface result is displayed to when the display state is maintained) of the display result in the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends may be the same as the final display time of the display result in the variable display (first variable display) in the normal state other than when the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information is executed. This can suppress an increase in control data.

(B12) During the period in which the variable display (second variable display) based on the remaining reserved memory information stored when the time-saving state ends is executed, the right-hit notification may not be executed, and when the time-saving pattern display result is displayed in the variable display based on the remaining reserved memory information, the right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the player to play smoothly because the instructions on how to play are given appropriately, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(B13) In the normal state, a game is controlled to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a common specific effect (reach effect, advance notice effect) can be executed when the variable display result is a winning pattern (specific display result) such as a small win pattern or a big win pattern, and when the variable display result is a time-saving pattern (special display result), and the rate at which the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed may differ depending on which of the multiple types of common specific effects is executed. And when the display result of the time-saving pattern is displayed in the variable display, a right-hit notification may be executed during the initial period at the start of the next variable display. This allows the effect to be controlled appropriately depending on the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B14) After executing the common specific effect, the display result may be a winning pattern (specific display result) or a time-saving pattern (special display result). This increases the variety of variable display results, making the game more interesting.

(B15) The game control CPU 103 can select a common variation pattern for when a winning symbol (specific display result) is obtained, when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is obtained, or when a losing symbol (predetermined display result) is obtained, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute different presentations in the variable display depending on the type of pattern designation command that designates the display result, even when it receives a command designating the same variation pattern from the game control CPU 103. This increases the variety of presentations in the variable display, making the game more interesting.

(B16) After the common specific effect is executed, a special effect can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is obtained. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by the special effect after the execution of the common specific effect.

(B17) Depending on the type of common specific effect, a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving pattern (special display result) is achieved may or may not be executed (for example, a special effect may not be executed when an effect with a higher expectation of a win among multiple types of super reach effects is executed). This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without excessively encouraging the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B18) The expectation (proportion) of the time-saving symbol (special display result) appearing when the special effect is executed may be different depending on the type of common specific effect. This allows the expectation of a win to be maintained without executing an effect that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state, thereby improving the interest of the game.

(B19) The expectation level (proportion) of a time-saving pattern (special display result) may be different depending on the presentation mode of a predetermined presentation different from the common specific presentation (for example, a presentation that displays an active display (a display that has moved from the display position of a pending display to another display position, and that performs a presentation that can suggest the expectation level of a hit corresponding to the currently active variable display) that can change the display mode depending on the expectation level of a hit)). This allows for an increase in interest in the game, as a presentation that excessively stimulates only the time-saving state is not executed and the expectation of a hit is maintained.

(B20) In a special effect that can be executed when a time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached, an effect that indicates a winning symbol (specific display result) (such as a special jackpot with a higher play value than the time-saving state) may be executed after an effect that suggests the time-saving symbol (special display result) is reached (such as a time-saving suggestion effect). This increases the interest in the game because the expectation of a win is maintained without excessively emphasizing only the time-saving state.

(B21) The game control CPU 103 can control a time-saving state (special state) with a different number of time-saving times (duration of time-saving times) depending on the type of the multiple types of time-saving patterns (special display results) provided (for example, first time-saving pattern: 50 time-saving times, second time-saving pattern: 100 time-saving times, etc.), and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute a presentation in which the number of time-saving times (duration) granted when the time-saving pattern stops varies depending on the type of presentation executed (for example, the type of reach presentation, etc.). This allows the player's attention to be focused on the number of time-saving times that will follow depending on the type of presentation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(B22) In the normal state, a game control is performed to transition from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state) based on the display of a variable display result (special display result) of a time-saving pattern with a special pattern, and a command is sent from the game control CPU 103 (game control means) that controls the progress of the game, and the performance control CPU 120 (performance control means) that receives the command can execute a performance based on the command. The command sent includes a special command that can specify the transition (control) from the normal state to the time-saving state (special state), and when the performance control CPU 120 receives multiple types of commands including a special command, it may limit the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information that is specified to execute a variable display that can transition to the time-saving state (special state) based on the pre-reading of the reserved memory information (such as not executing it at all or allowing it to be executed rarely). This allows the performance control to be executed appropriately according to the game state when the time-saving pattern (special display result) is displayed.

(B23) It is also possible to restrict the execution of a pre-reading preview performance for reserved memory information that occurs after reserved memory information that has been identified as a variable display that can transition (control) to a jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) based on a pre-reading of reserved memory information. In addition, it is also possible to make it possible to execute a performance of a common aspect as a pre-reading preview performance during the execution restriction of such a pre-reading preview performance. In this way, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual gaming state as the gaming state transitions.

(B24) In both cases where the variable display based on the reserved memory information for the pre-reading target is a variable display that displays a time-saving pattern (special display result) and a variable display that appears to display a time-saving pattern (special display result) but does not, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance for the reserved memory information that occurs after the reserved memory information may be restricted. This makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game by restricting the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes.

(B25) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a performance with a higher expectation level than a specific expectation level (for example, when the expectation level of the color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(B26) During the execution restriction of the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, the look-ahead preview performance does not execute a specific type of performance (for example, when the expected color of the reserved display is blue < green < red, the color of the reserved display is not changed to red). This restricts the execution of performance control that does not correspond to the actual game state as the game state changes, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(Example of time-saving control using the number of variable display times resulting in a predetermined display result, such as the number of variable display times of failure)
Next, an example of time-saving control using the number of variable displays (the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss) that have resulted in a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) in the normal state will be described. As described below, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small hit display result that does not result in a big hit, etc.) has continued has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times). Note that, as the predetermined result, the time-saving state (special state) may be executable on the condition that the number of times that a variable display that has become a miss display result has continued has reached a special number.

(C1) After the first variable display by the first special symbol is performed and after the second variable display by the second special symbol is performed, the game can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player based on the fact that the variable display result has become a specific display result, and the numerical information of the number of times the variable display has been executed that has become a predetermined display result (such as a miss display result, a small win display result that does not become a big win, etc.) in the normal state is updated, and when a special condition is established in which the number of times the variable display that has become the predetermined display result (the number of times it continues) has reached a special number (for example, 1000 times, etc.) based on the numerical information, the game can be controlled to transition from the normal state to a time-saving state (special state). The numerical information may be updated both when the predetermined display result is achieved in the first variable display and when the predetermined display result is achieved in the second variable display. As a result, the numerical information of the number of times the predetermined display result has been achieved continues to be updated regardless of whether the first variable display or the second variable display is executable, making it easier for the player to be rescued by the time-saving state and increasing the player's motivation to play. This makes it possible to optimally rescue players by reducing the time.

(C2) The special condition may be established when it is determined based on the numerical information that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result has been displayed a special number of times (e.g., 1000 times) in succession. This allows the player to be rescued by transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) when a series of display results unfavorable to the player are displayed, thereby preventing a decline in interest in the game.

(C3) The numerical information may be updated when a variable display is executed even in a state other than the normal state (a high probability state, a time-saving state). This allows the player to be appropriately rescued when a series of display results that are unfavorable to the player are displayed.

(C4) The numerical information may be initialized when a predetermined initialization condition is met. Such an initialization condition may be met by control to the advantageous state. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when an advantageous state is reached that is advantageous to the player, and to prevent the player's gambling tendency from increasing more than necessary.

(C5) When a special display result (time-saving pattern) different from the specific display result is displayed as a variable display result in the normal state, control for transitioning to a time-saving state (special state) can be executed, and the predetermined condition may be established when the special display result is displayed. This makes it possible to suppress rescue when there is no longer a need to rescue the player, such as when the time-saving state (special state) that is advantageous to the player is reached, and to prevent the tendency to gamble more than necessary.

(C6) The predetermined condition may be satisfied when the variable display is executed a special number of times. This effectively makes it possible to control the game to a time-saving state (special state) until the next advantageous state occurs, thereby increasing the degree of relief for the player.

(C7) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, the backed up and stored data can be initialized, and the numerical information can be initialized when the specific condition is met. This prevents the numerical information backed up in the event of a power outage from being initialized and remaining when the data is initialized, thereby preventing the amusement center from being disadvantaged.

(C8) The time-saving state (special state) for a period of more than the special number (for example, 1000 times or more) can be controlled based on the numerical information becoming the special number (for example, 1000 times or more), and during the time-saving state (special state), the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again based on the numerical information becoming the special number, and different effects can be executed in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state). As a result, in a game in an extremely unfavorable state such as being controlled in the second time-saving state (special state), it is possible to change the appearance of the effects, such as shortening the variable display time in the second time-saving state more than in the first time-saving state, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. It is also possible to execute similar effects in the first time-saving state (special state) and the second time-saving state (special state) without executing such effects. This makes it possible to prevent players from being overly aware that they are in an extremely unfavorable state, such as being controlled to the second time-saving state (special state), and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

(C9) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second value (4 or more) different from the first value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third value (3) different from the first and second values, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition is executed. Also. The game ball can be hit into the first path (left game area) and the second path (right game area), and in the normal state, the game ball is hit into the first path, and in the time-saving state (special state), the game ball is hit into the second path to play. And, during the execution of the third process, although it is not controlled to the time-saving state (special state), a notification that the ball should be shot into the second path (for example, a right-hit notification by a right-hit lamp, etc.) may be issued. In addition, during execution of the third process, a notification effect may be given to indicate that the game will transition to a time-saving state (special state). This allows for suitable control even if new functions are added to the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex. For example, by turning on the right-hit lamp using the gaming control CPU 103, it is possible to execute a notification effect regarding the launch direction early (before the actual time-saving fluctuation begins) when the game actually transitions to the time-saving state (special state).

(C10) When the specific display result is displayed in a variable display where the special condition is met, the second process may be executed after the first process is executed, and the third process may not be executed. This gives priority to control to an advantageous state over control to a time-saving state (special state) based on the fulfillment of a special condition, so that the result is not more advantageous to the player, and it is possible to prevent a decline in the player's interest in the game.

(C11) The numerical information is updated when the variable display starts, and based on the updated numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the time-saving state (special state) is controlled after the variable display in which the numerical information has become a specific value ends (next fluctuation starts, waiting for customers) and when the updated numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, the special information (special number of times reached flag) is changed from a first value to a second value (flag set), and when controlling to the time-saving state (special state), the special information is changed from the second value to the first value (flag reset). This makes it possible to preferably execute control to transition to the time-saving state (special state) by managing the special information.

(C12) The game control CPU 103 may select and determine a variation pattern of the variable display, and may select and determine a variation pattern of the symbol determination time that differs when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information. This makes it possible to preferably execute a performance when the variable display of the special number of times is executed.

(C13) When the value of the special chart process flag is a first numerical value (0 to 2), a first process related to variable display is executed, when the value of the special chart process flag is a second numerical value (4 or more) different from the first numerical value, a second process related to an advantageous state (jackpot game state) is executed, and when the value of the special chart process flag is a third numerical value (3) different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, a third process for controlling to a time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of a special condition is executed. Also. A command is transmitted from the CPU 103 (game control means) for game control that controls the progress of the game, and a performance based on the command can be executed by the CPU 120 (performance control means) for performance control that receives the command. And, it may be possible to transmit specific information (background designation, variable pattern) according to when the value of the special chart process flag is the second numerical value and when it is the third numerical value when in the special state. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if a new function is installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. For example, different game states can be suitably identified, making game control easier. Then, by varying the command depending on the game state identified at that time, the presentation control CPU 120 (presentation control means) can execute suitable presentation control depending on the game state.

(C14) When the special condition is established during the time-saving state (special state), the value of the special chart process flag may be set to a fourth value different from the first value, the second value, and the third value, so that the time-saving state (special state) can be controlled again. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become more complex.

(C15) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) or whether the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time is executed than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot game state). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C16) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute similar effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the specific display result (winning symbol) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, a time-saving state effect with a similar variable time may be executed when the time-saving state is entered because the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count and when the time-saving state is entered after a jackpot has ended). This does not require new performance data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C17) During the time-saving state (special state), different effects may be executed depending on whether the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) or whether the special condition (condition for the number of variable displays) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the number of variable displays is equal to or greater than the special number, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This makes it possible to execute effects for the time-saving state (special state) according to the game situation, thereby increasing interest in the game.

(C18) During the time-saving state (special state), it may be possible to execute the same effects when the time-saving state (special state) is entered based on the display of the special display result (time-saving pattern) and when the special condition (condition for the variable display count) is met and the time-saving state (special state) is entered (for example, when the time-saving state is entered under the condition that the variable display count is equal to or greater than the special count, a time-saving state effect with a shorter fluctuation time than when the time-saving state is entered after the end of a jackpot is executed). This does not require new effect data, so development costs do not increase, and interest in the game can be increased by not confusing the player.

(C19) In the event of a power outage or other power outage, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and when the power is turned on, the game control CPU 103 can send predetermined information (a RAM clear command at cold start, and a command notifying the number of variable displays until the end of the time-saving state at hot start) to the presentation control CPU 120 based on the backed up data, and the presentation control CPU 120 can execute suggestive presentations (such as a different early morning number roll, a different background image, or a presentation that suggests whether a 100-spin variation is far or close) regarding the number of times the variable display has been executed in a predetermined period after the power is turned on, based on receiving the predetermined information. This gives players a motivation to play early in the morning, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machine while preventing an increase in the processing burden.

(C20) The game control CPU 103 may transmit specific information (a command capable of identifying information related to the time-saving state) to the presentation control CPU 120 in relation to the execution of the variable display, and the presentation control CPU 120 may execute a special presentation (such as a presentation suggesting the end of the time-saving state count) in relation to the control to the special state based on the establishment of a special condition based on the specific information. The specific information may include first specific information (first background designation, dedicated countdown presentation information) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is less than a predetermined value (for example, 127), and second specific information (such as a command to count down every 100 spins) capable of identifying that the difference between the number of times the variable display has been executed and the special number is greater than a predetermined value (for example, 127). This can reduce the risk of the player unknowingly losing money by periodically suggesting a function to the player, and can also suitably realize command processing.

(C21) The presentation control CPU 120 can execute a suggestion presentation (for time-saving state suggestion presentation control) that suggests that the game will be controlled to a time-saving state (special state) when a special condition is met, based on the execution of a first predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 300 times) that are less than the special number of times, and can execute a suggestion presentation each time a second predetermined number of variable displays (e.g., 100 times) that are less than the first predetermined number are executed before the execution of the special number of variable displays. This reduces the risk of the player unknowingly incurring losses by periodically suggesting functions to the player.

(C22) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the presentation control CPU 120 executes different presentations (such as different presentations when transitioning to the time-saving state) when it is controlled to the time-saving state (special state) based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for variable display count) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result is displayed, and when it is controlled to the special state based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(C23) When the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like, various data including the numerical information can be backed up and stored, and the game control CPU 103 can initialize the backed up data when a specific condition such as an initialization operation at power-on is met, and the performance control CPU 120 executes different performances after being controlled to the time-saving state (special state) (e.g., different performances after transitioning to the time-saving state) when the time-saving state (special state) is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition (condition for the variable number of displays) before the specific display result is displayed after the backup-stored data is initialized and before the specific display result (winning pattern) is displayed and the special state is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition after the backup-stored data is initialized. This makes it possible to perform suitable control even if new functions are installed in the gaming machine and the specifications become complicated. In addition, because the difference in the presentation allows the player to know whether the backed-up data has been initialized, for example, in the case of a gaming machine in which the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed, the player can know that the setting may have been changed, which increases the number of factors for guessing the setting and improves the interest in the game.

(D1) The execution rate of the group preview effect may be different depending on whether the result of the variable display is a time-saving pattern, a jackpot, or a miss.

This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention. Each configuration related to the features of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features. Features combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined as appropriate with some or all of each configuration related to other features.

The above-mentioned pachinko gaming machine 1 is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a winning prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a winning prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (for example, slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of a performance (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a percentage of "0%". For example, this also includes one being a percentage of "0%" and the other being a percentage of "100%" or a percentage less than "100%".

The embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope of the claims.

1 Pachinko game machine, 2 Game board, 3 Game machine frame, 5 Image display device, 5C, 5L, 5R Decorative pattern display area, 6A Winning ball device, 6B Variable winning ball device, 8L, 8R Speaker, 9 Game effect lamp, 10 General winning port, 11 Main board, 12 Performance control board, 13 Sound control board, 14 Lamp control board, 15 Relay board, 9020 Special pattern LED board, 21 Gate switch, 22A First start port switch, 22B Second start port switch, 23 Count switch, 24 V winning switch, 30 Ball hitting operation handle, 31A Stick controller, 31B Push button, 32 Movable body, 35A Controller sensor unit, 35B Push sensor, 41 Passing gate, 9050 Fourth pattern unit, 81, 82, 83 Solenoid, 100 Game control microcomputer, 101, 121 ROM, 102, 122 RAM, 104, 124 Random number circuit, 106 RTC, 110 Switch circuit, 111 Output circuit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player based on a specific display result that is derived and displayed by executing a variable display,
A game control means;
A performance execution means,
the effect execution means is capable of executing a group effect that displays an image in which a plurality of characters progress as a group;
There are a first background effect and a second background effect , each of which has a different background effect,
The performance execution means includes:
When the group performance is executed in the first background performance , the group performance can be executed so that the group performance starts from a predetermined number of frames from the start of the variable display ,
When the group performance is executed in the second background performance , the group performance can be executed so that the group performance starts from a specific number of frames from the start of the variable display, unlike a predetermined number of frames;
The degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the first background performance is different from the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the second background performance ,
The degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the first background performance and the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when the group performance is executed in the second background performance are higher than the degree of expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state when a title in a special performance notifying whether or not to control to the advantageous state becomes a specific mode,
The game control means includes:
The first state and the second state can be controlled to have different degrees of advantage.
The numerical information is updated based on the execution of the variable display, and when a special condition is established by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times, the first state can be controlled to the second state ;
In a first case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the first state is a variable display in which the specific display result is not derived and displayed, a notification performance is executed to notify that the state is controlled to the second state;
In a second case where the variable display corresponding to the special number of times in the first state is a variable display in which the specific display result is derived and displayed, a performance that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state can be executed after a performance common to the notification performance is executed.
A gaming machine characterized by :

Images